Skip to main content

Full text of "HP LaserJet Classics II III"

See other formats


Back to Welcome 



O ) HP DOC 






^3 



HEWLETT 
PACKARD 




HP Part No. 33449 - 90906 
Printed in USA 

First Edition - February 1990 



X 



m 



Notice 

HEWLETT-PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS 
MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall 
not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental consequential damages in connection 
with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. 

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are 
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another 
language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. 

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. 



(c) Copyright 1990 Hewlett-Packard Company 



• 



X 



'II^Bn 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED PRINTER SERVICE MANUAL 
READER'S COMMENT SHEET 

Please give us your comments concerning this manual. Your constructive criticism will help us 
create better manuals in the future. Be as specific as possible, giving section and page references 
where appropriate. Comments on the writing, graphics, binding, size, and printing method are 
helpful in making our manuals more useful and friendly. 

If you would like a reply, be sure to include your name and address with your response. Thank you 
for your feedback. 





HEWLETT February 1990 

PACKARD 33449-90906 



■E?^"^- 




NO POSTAGE 

NECESSARY 

IF MAILED 

IN THE 

UNITED STATES 



BUSINESS REPLY MAIL 

FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 141 BOISE, IDAHO 



POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE 



Hewlett-Packard Company 

Boise Division 

Attn: Learning Products M.S. 517 

P.O. Box 15 

Boise, Idalio 83707-9934 



♦ 



llnl...ll.l...lli...l...li.l 



itliliiii 



llnl.illliiil 



TAPE HERE 



TAPE HERE 



« 



This manual was created using HP Tag/Vectra software on an HP Vectra Personal Computer. The 
body text is printed in Century Schoolbook fonts, and chapter and section heads are printed in 
Helvetica fonts. The camera-ready copy was printed on an HP LaserJet III printer and reproduced 
using standard offset printing. 

First Edition - February 1990 



PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Resolution Enhancement is 
a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe 
Systems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. HP Vectra Personal Computer is a product of 
Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines 
Corporation. 



m 



This manual uses the following conventions: 

Color indicates text or graphics that is specific to the LaserJet III (HP 33449) printer. Color may 
also be used for emphasis, titles, and other non-HP 33449-specific material. 

The names of major printer parts and assemblies are capitalized. 

Bold is used for emphasis, particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing. 

Italic type is used to indicate related documents or for emphasis. 

COMPUTER type indicates text visible on the printer's display or commands as seen on a PC 
terminal. 



(keyfaceJ indicates keys, such as (menu) , on the printer's Control Panel or on a computer 
keyboard. 



Note 



Notes contain important information set off from the text. 



Caution 



Caution messages appear before or after procedures which, if not observed, could 
result in loss of data or in damage to equipment. 



Warning warning messages signal a specific procedure or practice which, if not followed 

,. correctly, could cause personal injury. 



Ill 



m 



1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 


1-1. INTRODUCTION 


1-3 


1-2. IDENTIFICATION 


1-5 


1-3. SPECIFICATIONS 


1-6 


1-4. RELATED DOCUMENTATION 


1-7 


1-5. SAFETY AND RELATED INFORMATION 


1-8 


1-6. PRINTER PARTS OVERVIEW 


1-12 


1-7. CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW 


1-15 


1-8. SERVICE APPROACH 


1-17 


1-9. WARRANTY STATEMENT 


1-18 



2. 



SITE PLANNING AND REQUIREMENTS 

2-1. INTRODUCTION 2-3 

2-2. SITE REQUIREMENTS 2-3 

2-3. STORING AND HANDLING EP-S CARTRIDGES 2-4 

2-4. PAPER SPECIFICATIONS 2-6 

2-5. ENVELOPE SPECIFICATIONS 2-8 

2-6. ADHESIVE LABEL AND OV ERHEAD TRANSPARENCY SPECIFICATIONS 2-11 

INSTALLATION AND CONFIGI 
3-1. INTRODUCTION .... 
3-2. UNPACKING AND INSTALl 
3-3. USING THE CONTROL PAJ 
3-4. USING THE PRINTING AN] 
3-5. FONT PRINTOUTS . . . 

3-6. SELF TESTS 

3-7. SERVICE MODE .... 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 

4-1. INTRODUCTION 4-3 

4-2. LIFE EXPECTANCY OF CONSUMABLES AND RELATED PARTS .... 4-3 

4-3. MAINTENANCE CHECKPOINTS 4-4 

4-4. CLEANING THE PRINTER 4-5 

4-5. CLEARING PAPER JAMS 4-11 

4-6. OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT 4-13 

4-7. FUSER CLEANING PAD REPLACEMENT 4-14 

4-8. EP-S CARTRIDGE LIFE AND USE 4-15 

4-9. PRINT DENSITY ADJUSTMENT 4-16 



3. INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 


3-1. INTRODUCTION . 


. . . . 3-3 


3-2. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 


. . . . 3-3 


3-3. USING THE CONTROL PANEL 


. . . . 3-7 


3-4. USING THE PRINTING AND CONFIGURATION MENUS .... 


. . . . 3-14 


3-5. FONT PRINTOUTS 


. . . . 3-21 


3-6. SELF TESTS 


. . . . 3-25 


3-7. SERVICE MODE 


. . . . 3-30 





Contents- 1 



5. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 

5-1. INTRODUCTION 5-3 

5-2. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5-4 

5-3. PICKUP/FEED SYSTEM 5-13 

5-4. MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM 5-16 

5-5. INTERFACE SYSTEM 5-17 

5-6. POWER DISTRIBUTION 5-21 

6. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 

6-1. INTRODUCTION 6-5 

6-2. COVERS, PANELS. AND ASSOCIATED PARTS 6-11 

6-3. MAIN BODY COMPONENTS 6-19 

6-4. TOP COVER ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS . 6-43 

6-5. BOTTOM COVER COM PONENTS 6-53 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

7-1. INTRODUCTION . . 
7-2. PRE-TROUBLESHOO' 
7-3. MAIN FLOWCHART . 
7-4. PRINTER MESSAGE ' 
7-5. IMAGE FORMATION 
7-6. INTERFACE TROUBL 
7-7. TROUBLESHOOTING 

8, PARTS AND DIAGRAMS 

8-1. HOW TO USE THE PARTS LISTS 8-3 

8-2. PARTS LIST 8-4 

8-3. PARTS INDEX 8-51 



7. TROUBLESHOOTING 


7-1. INTRODUCTION 


7-5 


7-2. PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 


7-6 


7-3. MAIN FLOWCHART 


7-8 


7-4. PRINTER MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING 


7-13 


7-5. IMAGE FORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING 


7-57 


7-6. INTERFACE TROUBLESHOOTING 




7-7. TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 


7-87 



A. YOUR ROAD MAP TO SETTING UP YOUR LASERJET SERIES II PRINTER 



B. YOUR GUIDE TO SETHNG UP YOUR LASERJET III PRINTER 



C. HP 33449 MEMORY BOARD INSTALLATION 



D. CABLING DIAGRAMS 



E. HP 33440/HP 33449 PRINTER COMMANDS 



F. HP 33449 DISPLAY LANGUAGE MESSAGE TRANSLATIONS 



Glossary 



Index 



m 



Contents-2 




[ems 



1 



1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 

1-1. INTRODUCTION 1-3 

Features Common to Both Printers 1-3 

Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33440 1-3 

Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33449 1-4 

1-2. IDENTIFICATION 1-5 

1-3. SPECIFICATIONS 1-6 

Physical Dimensions 1-6 

Electrical Specifications 1-6 

Environmental Specifications 1-6 

1-4. RELATED DOCUMENTATION 1-7 

HP 33440 1-7 

HP 33449 1-7 

1-5. SAFETY AND RELATED INFORMATION 1-8 

General 1-8 

Laser Safety 1-8 

Finnish Laser Statement 1-9 

German ZZF Declaration 1-10 

FCC Regulations 1-10 

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) 

Statement 1-10 

Ozone Emission 1-11 

General 1-11 

Employer Responsibilities 1-11 

Recommendations for Minimizing Ozone Exposure 1-11 

Toner Safety and Care 1-11 

1-6. PRINTER PARTS OVERVIEW 1-12 

1-7. CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW 1-15 

General 1-15 

1-8. SERVICE APPROACH 1-17 

Overview 1-17 

Repair Parts 1-17 

Consumables and Accessories 1-18 



1-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

1-9. WARRANTY STATEMENT 1-18 ^^ 

General 1-18 

Warranty 1-18 

One-Year Limited Warranty 1-18 

Exclusions 1-18 

Warranty Limitations 1-19 

Service During the Warranty Period 1-19 

Service After the Warranty Period 1-20 

Repacking Guidelines for Returning Your Printer 1-20 



1-1. Printer Identification and Power Rating 1-5 

1-2. Printer Regulatory Labels 1-8 

1-3. Laser Safety Label Example 1-9 

1-4. Finnish Laser Statement 1-9 

1-5. West German ZZF Declaration 1-10 

1-6. HP 33449 Printer (Front and Right Side View) 1-12 

1-7. HP 33449 Printer (Rear View) 1-13 

1-8. HP 33449 Printer (Internal View) 1-14 

1-9. HP 33440 Control Panel 1-15 

1-10. HP 33449 Control Panel 1-15 



1-1. Physical Dimensions 1-6 

1-2. Electrical Specifications 1-6 

1-3. Environmental Specifications 1-6 

1-4. Key Functions HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 1-16 

1-5. Control Panel Indicators HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 1-17 



1-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Features Common to Both Printers 

Because the HP 33440 (LaserJet series II) and HP 33449 (LaserJet III) printers produce 
high-quality output quietly and reliably, they are ideally suited for today's business environment. 

Both laser printers: 

■ Employ reliable, efficient, and easily maintained designs based on electrophotographic, electronic, 
and laser technologies to produce high-quality print on a variety of media, including copier 
papers, cotton bond papers, envelopes, transparencies, and labels. Output selection can be for 
either correct (face down) or reverse (face up) order. 

■ Combine a charging corona, photosensitive drum, toner, developer, and drum cleaner in a single 
assembly, the Electrophotographic (EPS) Cartridge. Simply replacing the EP-S Cartridge allows 
maintenance and periodic replacement of consumables and parts by the customer, saving both 
time and maintenance costs. 

■ Employ a compact, safe semiconductor laser driven directly by control signals. It is certified as 
conforming to U.S. Bureau of Radiological Health (BRH) standards. 

■ Produce up to eight pages per minute, depending upon software and data constraints, with 
extended symbol set capability and Control Panel configurability. 

■ Provide serial (RS-232 and RS-422) and parallel (Centronics) I/O capabilities, with provision for 
other I/O capabilities through an optional I/O slot. 

■ Support macro cartridges for forms generation. 

Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33440 

■ Memory: Provides 512 Kbytes total internal read/write memory with the capability to increase 
memory by the addition of 1, 2, or 4 Mbytes, through a single expansion slot, up to 4.5 Mbytes 
total. 

■ Font Handling: Provides up to 7-inch character cell size, printable space character, downloadable 
fonts, font management, and up to 16 fonts per page. Ten bitmapped fixed-pitch internal fonts 
are standard. Two font cartridge slots are available. 

■ Printer Command Language: Employs the PCL4'^'*^ Printer Command Language. 

■ PostScript^ Printer Language: Supports the PostScript^ printer language through an optional 
HP interface package. 

■ Resolution: Provides up to 300 x 300 DPI (dots per inch) resolution. 



1-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Features Which Apply Only to the HP 33449 

■ Memory: Provides 1 Mbyte of total internal read/write memory with the capability to increase 
memory by the addition of 1, 2, 3, or 4 Mbytes, through two expansion slots, up to a total of 5 
Mbytes. 

■ Font Handling: Provides all the features of the HP 33440 as well as font scaling capability for 
generating fonts of any desired size from 4 to 999.75 points in quarter-point increments and 
autorotation for fonts and raster graphics. (Print images are rotated automatically as the page 
orientation is rotated, allowing available fonts to be used in all rotations.) Expanded symbol sets 
are also built in, as well as 14 bitmapped fonts and eight scalable typefaces. 

■ Printer Command Language: Employs the PCLS^'^ Printer Command Language, containing 
HP-GL/2 (HP's standard plotter language) and other enhanced printing features such as font 
scaling and font rotation. 

■ PostScript'^ Printer Language: Supports PostScript^ printer language through an optional HP 
personality cartridge. 

■ Resolution: Provides up to 300 x 300 DPI resolution as well as employing Resolution 
Enhancement,^^ an HP proprietary technology that improves the visual quality of printed 
images beyond the 300 DPI standard capability. 

■ Page Protection: Provides, with expanded memory, the ability to avoid partial printing of 
complex, graphics-intensive pages. 

■ Localized Display Messages: Allows localization of display messages for five languages. 



1-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



The regulatory labels, located behind the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray, are different for the HP 
33440 and HP 83449. For the HP 33440, the regulatory label contains both the model and serial 
number. On the HP 33449, the model and serial number are located on a separate label just 
below the power connector on the right side panel of the Main Body Covers (see Figure 1-1). Note 
that this portion of the right side panel is removable on the HP 33449. (Care must be taken to 
ensure the printer's cover, with its serial number, stays with the printer.) The model number is 
an alphanumeric such as HP 33440A or 33449AB. 

For both printers, the serial number consists of the following sequence: a four digit prefix, a letter, 
and a five digit suffix (for example: OOOOJOOOOO). The prefix is used to indicate year and week 
of manufacture. The letter designates the country in which the printer was manufactured ("J" 
indicates Japan, for example). The suffix is a sequential number incremented for each printer 
produced. 

For both printers, the power rating is located on a plate next to the Power Switch (see Figure 1-1). 



POWER RATING 




FACE-UP OUTPUT 
TRAY (REGULATORY 
LABEL BEHIND) 



VOLTAGE ~ 
Hz 50-60 
AMPS. 7.6 



HEWLETT RACKARO 



I PACKARD 



SEKIAL NO.: 
OOOOJOOOOO 



MODEL AND SERIAL No.PLATE 
(HP 33449 ONLY) 



HP 33440 REGULATORY LABEL 



HP33440A 



HEWLETT PACKARD 



BOISE. IDAHO «37ia I 



FCCI0:A2MMA HP33440A 
C3 g^A» 



SER: OOOOJOOOOO 



■CwWiedOfltyloC^CodBr /|j > 

Ln49439 \2L> 



LBTHD 

INI=0. PftOC. GOUIP. 

660F 



Ttfb pnxHicI conforTm wilh CDRH radiitlon 
perlonnance »l3nd«rd 21 CFR chapter 1 Wb- 
chsptei J. 



Certified lo comply with itt* rimlts lor a Clau B 
computing d*w)cc punuanT to subpart J ol part 
15 at FCC Rulm. Sm- ins t ructions IMnlorlace la 
radio rweplion is suspected. 



HP 33449 REGULATORY LABEL 










m^^^.^S^L LaserJet III 




11311 CMiMDEMBtvp, 






TSH 713r6aid'e9 


ZI 






m 


® 


This producl cOnterm* with CDRH 
TBdlntlon pflrfprmance Standard 
21 CFR ctwBter 1. sub-ctiopter J. 




This •quipm«nt has b»en iKted with ■ claas A (jofnpgtlng dtv^cvgnd 
lias t>»n found to comply with Part 1S ol FCC rules. Sw Inilruction 
manual. Operation In a reslOBntlai area natr cum unaccaptatX« 
Interterence to radio una TV reception r«ttJiring the oj»r«iif 
to tflk« hnaikVAf &!«ps ara n«c*<«ary te> CArr«et Ihe Interfarence. 



Figure 1-1= Printer identification and Power Rating 



1-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Physical Dimensions 



Table 1-1. Physical Dimensions 



Sjpecification 


HP 33440 


HP 33449 


Width 


45.4 cm (17.9 in.) 


46.0 cm (18.1 in.) 


Depth (body only) 


48.2 cm (19.0 in.) 


49.7 cm (19.6 in.) 


Depth (with letter tray) 


62.7 cm (24.7 in.) 


64.1 cm (25.2 in.) 


Height 


23.2 cm (9.13 in.) 


25.2 cm (9.9 in.) 


Weight* 


23.3 kg (51 lbs) 


24.8 kg (54.6 lbs) 


*Incliides power cord, empty letter-size paper tray, EP-S Cartridge, and printer. 



Electrical Specifications 



Table 1-2. Electrical Specifications* 



Specification : ; 


■;:,:■ HP. 3344QA :^, ;pi»::3344Mr:.:;: 


HP 33440AB/AU & HP 3344aAB 


Voltage 


100 V or 115 V ± 10% 


220 V or 240 V ± 10% 


Frequencies 


50 or 60 Hz ± 2 Hz 


50 Hz ± 2 Hz 


Current, 
Steady State 


8.7 A at 100 V 
7.6 A at 115 V 


3.4 A at 220 V 
3.1 A at 240 V 


Power, 

Printing Maximum 


870 Watts at 115 V 
3000 BTU/hr 


850 Watts at 220 V 
2900 BTU/hr 


Power, 
Standby 


170 Watts at 115 V 
580 BTU/hr 


170 Watts at 220 V 
580 BTU/hr 


* With no accessories i 


nstalled. 







Note The HP 33440A and HP 33449A (50/60 Hz) have a transformer that 

I automatically adjusts for 100 or 115 volts; the HP 33440AB/AU and HP 33449AB 

^^ (50 Hz) automatically adjust for 220 or 240 volts. 



Environmental Specifications 

Table 1-3. Environmental Specifications 



Environmentail Factor : 


: ^iiGdndition ■:;,". ';:;:;■■ 


::i iSP; 33440;;--aud:'"HP: mtMB ^ Ml,:. 


Temperature 


Operating: 
*Storage: 


10 to 32.5° C (50 to 91° F) 
to 35° C (32 to 95° F) 



1-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 1-3. Environmental Specifications (continued) 



Enyironmeutal Factor 


Gondition 


HP 33440 and HP 33449 


Humidity 


Operating: 
*Non-Operating: 


20 to 80% RH 
10 to 80% RH 


Altitude 


Operating: 
*Non-Operating; 


to 4,600ni (0 to 15,100 ft) 
to 15,300m (0 to 50,200 ft) 


Audible Noise 


Printing: 
Standby: 


5.8 B LwAd (1 B = 10 dB) 

42.9 dB LpAm (bystander at 4 positions) 

5.0 B LwAd (1 B = 10 dB) 

33.3 dB LpAm (bystander at 4 positions) 


* Printer only, not EP-S Cartridge. See Chapter 2, Section 2-3 for EP-S Cartridge. 



The following documents provide additional information about the HP 33440 and HP 33449 
printers: 

HP 33440 

Shipped with printer: 

■ LaserJet series II Printer Getting Started Manual (P/N 33440-90908). (Replaced by Your 
Road Map to setting up Your LaserJet series II Printer, P/N 33440-90004, in November 1989; 
included here as Appendix A.) 

■ LaserJet series II Printer User's Manual (P/N 33440-90901), (English language version.) 

■ LaserJet series II Software Application Notes (P/N 33440-90006). (U.S. only.) 

■ LaserJet series II Printer Technical Reference Manual (P/N 33440-90905). 

Additional information: 

■ LaserJet series II Printer Paper Specification Guide (P/N 5954-7339). 

■ Peripherals Handbook Insert (P/N 33440-90906). 

■ Self-Paced Training Guide and Final Review (P/N 33449 +49A-90101). 



HP 33449 

Shipped with printer: 

■ Your Guide to Setting up Your LaserJet III (P/N 33449-90905); included here as Appendix B. 

■ LaserJet III Printer User's Manual (P/N 33449-90901). (English language version.) 

■ LaserJet III Software Application Notes (P/N 33449-90917). (U.S. only.) 

■ LaserJet III User's Quick Reference Guide (P/N 33449-90902). 

Additional information: 

■ Peripherals Handbook Insert (P/N 33449-90908). 

■ Self-Paced Training Guide and Final Review (P/N 33449+ 49A-90101). 

■ LaserJet III Technical Quick Reference Guide (P/N 33449-90904). 

■ LaserJet III Technical Reference Manual (P/N 33449-90903). 



1-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



General 

The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are UL 478 listed, CSA 22.2 154 certified, and manufactured 
in accordance with DIN lEC 380/IEC 435. Where necessary, warning labels are affixed to the 
printer wherever special service attention is needed. 

Because the printers contain potentially hazardous voltages, accessories such 
as watches and rings should be removed before working on the printers. 




Laser Safety 

The both printers are certified as Class 1 laser products under the U.S. Department of Health 
and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation 
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that they do not produce hazardous laser 
radiation. Both printers also comply with the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) 
regulations. Since laser light emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective 
housings and external covers and further contained by an interlock system, the laser beam cannot 
escape during any phase of normal user operation. 

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug 
Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations 
apply to laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products 
marketed in the United States. The label below (see Figure 1-2) indicates comphance with CDRH 
regulations and must be attached to l^er products marketed in the United States. European 
models all comply with or meet lEC 825 for laser safety. 



HP33440A 



BOISE DIVISION 

HEWLETT PACKARD B0iSE^D*H0^ri4°u.s.A 



FCC4D:A2l>dMA HP33440A 



jjn^ -C«tif»dOfllytoCEC«Sa.- /u\ LSTEO 

SER: OOOOJOOOOO GP^-C«Wlr«>WwtudtjCCES«iilrr>«« [Xt) INFO PROC EQUIP 



Thb product «»ftlofms wrtlh CDHH ndia&on OrWied to comply with (he limits lor a Class S 

perfoniunce standard 21 CFR chapter i sub- computiiigdtvfcffpMrsiMntiosubpartJolpart 

chapter J. 15 <^ ^CC Rul«i. S«« inslfucti6n» if inttriKe To 

MANUFACTURfc- O" ^ac*^ reception is -suspected. 



C@l PACKARD LaserJet III 




eOSE. IMHO S57U us *, 






1 TSH 713/6019/89 


1 








Wd 


-^ Tnte prcKhici conforms whh CDRH 
f\ radiation performaroe standaed 
J 1 21 CFR chapter l.suB-chapwr J. 

_^ MANUFACTURED: 




This equipment has tM«n tesied wiih a class A corapming dfrv^uand 
has been lound lo compty with Par* 15 Ol FCC rule J. S4« inatrurttofi 
rnanuaL Operation in a lesibential •»«» may c»um unacc^ptpble 
interlerencc toridio and TV reception requiring the operitof 
to take whalever steps are rKcMSsry to correct the intMer«nee. 



Figure 1-2. Printer Regulatory Labels 



When servicing or adjusting the printer's optical system, do not place 
screwdrivers or other shiny objects in the path of the laser beam. Although 
invisible, the reflected beam can cause permanent eye damage. 




HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Where there is danger of exposure to laser radiation, the following label is attached inside printer 
covers: 



DANGER-INVISIBLE laser radiation when open. 

AVOID OtRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. 

ATTENTION -rayonnement laser invisible si ouvert. 
dangercux de regarder a l'imterteur. 
VORSICHT-unsicktbare laserstrahlen wenn geOffnet. 
nicht hineinsehen. 



^ 




CAUTION -invisible user radiation when open. 

AVOID exposure TO BEAM. 

ATTENTION -rayonnement laser en cas 

D'OUVERTURE EXPOSmON dangereuse 
AU FAISCEAU. 

VARO!-avattaessa olet alttiina nakymAttOmalle 

USERSATEILYLLE ALii KATSO SATEESEEN. 

RS1-842t 




®K-6 



Figure 1-3. Laser Safety Label Example 
Finnish Laser Statement 

The following notice is required to be printed in Finnish. 



TURVALLISUUSYHTEENVETO 

LASERTURVALLISUUS 

HP 33440AB ja HP 33449AB laserkirjoittimet ovat kayttajan kannalta turvallisia luokan 1 
laserlaitteita. Laitteet on tarkastanut Snomessa Tyoterveyslaitos ja tyyppihyvaksynyt 
Tyosuojeluhallitus, Tyosuojelnhallituksen hyvaksyntanumerot 

HP 33440AB: TSH 1563/6019/87 
HP 33449AB: TSH 713/6019/89 

Tarkastuksessa laitteiden turvallisnusluokka on maaratty valtioneuvoston paatoksen N;o 
472/1985 ja standardin SFS-IEC 825 mukaisesti. 

Normaalikaytossa laitteen suojakotelo estaa lasersateen paasyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. 

HUOLTO 

Kirjoittimien sisalla ei ole kayttajan huoUettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteet saa avata ja 
huoltaa ainoastaan laserlaitteiden huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilo. Tallaiseksi 
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota variainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai 
mnita kayttoohjeessa Ineteltuja, kayttajan tehtavaksi tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia. 

Kirjoittimien turvallisuuslnokitus mnuttuu mikali niiden suojakotelo avataan. Laitteiden 
sisalla olevassa laseryksikossa on laserdiodi, joka laitteen toimiessa lahettaa silmalle 
nakymatonta, luokan 3B lasersateilya. 



Figure 1-4. Finnish Laser Statement 



1-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

German ZZF Declaration 

The following notice, which is required to be printed in German, applies to printer operation and 
servicing in Germany: 



Funkentstorung Deutschland Herstellerbescheinigung 

Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daB das Gerat HP 33440 oder HP 33449 in Ubereinstimmung mit 
den Bestimmnngen von Postverfugung 1046/84 funkentstort ist. 

Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerates angezeigt und die 
Berechtigung zur Uberpriifung der Serie auf Einhaltung der Bestimmnngen eingeraumt. 

Wird das Gerat innerhalb einer Anlage betrieben: 

■ So mnB bei Inanspruchnahme der Allgemeinen Genehmigung FTZ 1046/84 die gesamte 
Anlage der oben genannten Genehmigung entsprechen. 

■ Die mit einer FTZ-Serienprufnummer gekennzeichnet ist, und fiir die eine 
Betriebsgenehmigung vorliegt oder beantragt wird, so sind in der Kegel keine weiteren 
Schritte notwendig. 



Figure 1-5. West Germaii ZZF Declaration 



FCC Regulations 



Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Statement 

This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy. If not installed, serviced, and 
used properly (that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions), it may cause 
interference to radio and television reception. The equipment has been type tested and found to 
comply within the limits set for a Class B computing device in accordance vwth the specifications 
in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against 
such interference in a residential installation. 

Use of a shielded interface cable is required for compliance to fall within the Class 
B hmits in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules. 



No guarantee can be given that interference with radio or television reception will not occur in a 
particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference - which can be determined by 
turning the equipment off and on - try to correct it by using the following measures: 

■ Reorient the radio or television antenna. 

■ Reorient the device with respect to the radio or television receiver. 

■ Move the device away from the receiver. 

■ Plug the device into a different outlet so it is on a different branch circuit than the receiver. 



1-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

If necessary, consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional 
suggestions. The Federal Communications Commission has prepared a booklet entitled 
Interference Handbook (1986) (stock number 004-000-004505-7) which may be purchased from the 
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. 

Ozone Emission 

General 

The corona assemblies found in laser printers and photocopiers generate ozone gas (O3) as a 
by-product of the electrophotographic process. Ozone is only generated while the printer is 
actually printing (i.e., while the corona assembly is energized). Underwriters Laboratory (UL) has 
established a standard for ozone emissions. All LaserJet printers meet this standard when shipped 
from the factory. 

Employer Responsibilities 

Because ozone can be an irritant, various regulatory agencies have established limits to the amount 
of ozone to which employees may be exposed. The employer should provide a work environment 
that meets the following standards: 

■ A person may not be exposed to an average concentration of greater than 0.1 part per million 
(PPM) of ozone for a period of eight hours. 

■ At this time, the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) has 
proposed a ceiling limit of 0.1 PPM for ozone. 

Recommendations for Minimizing Ozone Exposure 

Almost all ozone concerns arise from abnormal site or operating conditions. The following 
conditions may generate an ozone complaint: 

■ Multiple laser printers in a confined area. 

■ Extremely low relative humidity. 

■ Poor room ventilation. 

■ Printer exhaust port directed toward the faces of personnel. 

■ Existing Ozone Filter in need of replacement (see Chapter 4). 

■ Long, continuous printing combined with any of the above conditions. 

Inspect your work environment for the operating conditions listed above if you believe ozone 
emissions are a problem in your area. Some people may be extremely sensitive to ozone odor. If 
this situation is encountered, it is advisable to position the printer away from the sensitive user. 

Toner Safety and Care 

Toner is a nontoxic substance composed of plastic, iron, and a small amount of pigment. Care 
should be taken to avoid breathing toner particles. To clean toner from skin and clothing, remove 
as much toner as possible with a vacuum or dry tissue wipes, then wash the toner from skin or 
clothing with cold water. Hot water makes toner very difficult to remove. Because toner tends to 
be degraded by vinyl materials, contact with vinyl should be avoided. 



1-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



1-a PRINTER PARTS OVERVIEW 

Since the location of major components is similar for both printers, only the HP 33449 is shown 
here. For an HP 33440-specific parte overview, see Chapter 6. 




1. Top Cover Release Button. 

2. Test Print Button (under panel on HP 33449). 

3. Control Panel. 

4. Right Cartridge Slot. 

5. Left Cartridge Slot. 

6. Paper Tray Slot 



1-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




1. Rear (Face-Up) Output Tray Release. 

2. Top (Face-Down) Output Tray. 

3. Rear (Face-Up) Output Tray (closed). 

4. Expansion Memory Slot(s) (one in HP 33440, two in HP 33449). 

5. Parallel Port. 

6. Serial Port. 

7. Optional Interface Slot. 

8. Serial Number (HP 33449) (On Regulatory Label for HP 33440). 

9. Power Connector Socket. 

10. Power Switch. 



1-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 

^P 33449 
(Internal 



1. Ozone Filter. 

2. Feed Guide Assembly. 

3. Transfer Corona Assembly. 

4. Transfer Guide Lock Tray. 

5. Print Density Dial. 

6. Transfer Guide Strip. 

7. Cleaning Brush. 

8. Fusing Assembly. 

9. EP-S Cartridge. 



1-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



General 

Since key names and functions for both printers are essentially the same, the table of key 
assignments below applies to both printers. A complete overview of Control Panel functions with 
regard to service needs is given in Chapter 3. For a detailed overview designed for users, see the 
LaserJet series II Printer User's Manual or the LaserJet III User's Manual. 



Display 
window' 



Indicator 
light 



00 READY 



HEAOV 



C=3 
MANUAL 



CONTINUE 

nesET 



PRINT 
FONTS 



FORM 
FEED 



RESET 
MENU 



^White 
Yellow 



Indicator 
light — 



\ \ Ready 
I ^ Manual 



fv 



y^ 



00 READY 



L. 



OnUne 



Continue 
Reset 



Menu 



Form Feed 



Print Fonts 
Test 




_ Display 
window 



Figure 1-10= HP 33449 Control Panel 



1-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 1-4. 

Key Functions 

HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 



Keys 


Description 




Turns printer on line and off line. When on line, the indicator light is 
on and the printer can receive data. When offline, other Control Panel 
functions can be performed. 


(ON LINE) 






(CONTINUE/RESET 1 


[CONTINUE J Jirielly pressing this key clears most errors and returns 
printer to on-line status. Will also reprint lost pages due to correctable 
error conditions. 


LRESETJ Moldrng down key until 07 RESET is displayed ^z - o 
seconds) resets the printer, returning all printing settings to Control 
Panel settings and clearing temporary soft fonts, macros, and stored page 
data. 






IPRINT FONTS/TESTJ 


(PRINT FONTS] Unetly pressing tJiis key gives a printout of sample 
characters from currently available fonts. 

(TEST] Holding down key until 05 SELF TEST is displayed 

tests the controller and prints a test printout. If key is held down longer, 

04 SELF TEST is displayed and continuous test prints are made (press 


(ON LINE) again to stop test print process). 




Form feed light indicates that page data is stored in printer's memory. 


(FORM FEED) 


Pressing [form feed] prints all stored data. 




Accesses and steps through Printing and Configuration Menus. 


[MENU] 


Pressing [menu] enters the Printing Menu (COPIES= is dis- 
played). 


Holding down (menu) (about 5 seconds) until SYM SET= (J±f 

33440) or AUTO CONT= (HP 33449) is displayed enters the Configuration 

Menu. 






(ENTER/RESET MENU) 


[ENTER] Pressing key saves a Menu choice while m the Printing or 
Configuration Menus. 


[RESET MENU] Holding down key until 09 MENU RESET is 
displayed returns Printing Menu configuration to factory defaults. 


©o^G] 


Pressing (+) or [^ will increment or decrement menu item choices. 
Holding down a key will scroll through choices. 



1-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 1-5. 

Control Panel Indicators 

HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 



Indicator 


/^:\ ... PeiSMcripiioii^ '; 


On Line Indicator 




When the amber LED adjacent to the [on line) key shows a steady hght, 
the printer is on line, indicating that it is ready to receive data. The 
printer should be on line after it has been turned on and warmed up. 


Form Feed Indicator 




The amber iJ'UK.M i?'EEJJ indicator adjacent to the Iform feed J key will 
light whenever page data is stored in the printer's memory and flash 
when this data is being printed. 


Ready Indicator 


The green READY indicator is lit when the printer is on and ready 
to print. When the light is flashing, the printer is receiving data or 
processing data already received. 


Manual Indicator 


The amber MANUAL indicator is lit when manual feed has been 
selected from the Control Panel or through a software application. 





Overview 

The basis for repair for both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers centers on the modular-level 
replacement of electro-mechanical assemblies and some associated components as well as the 
assembly-level replacement of printed circuit assemblies (PCAs). For both printers, the diagnostics 
and this document together aid in isolating problem areas. After location, the problem assembly or 
component should be replaced v\athout further attempts to identify failures within the component 
or assembly. 

Repair Parts 

For both printers, an exchange program for Interface/Formatter PCAs, DC Controller PCAs, 
optional memory PCAs, and the Fusing Assembly will be available. All other failed PCAs vrill 
normally be discarded when discovered to be defective. Service parts may be ordered from 
Hewlett-Packard's Support Materials Organization (SMO) or Parts Center Europe (PCE). Part 
numbers can be found in Chapter 8 of this document. 



Support Materials Organization 
3625 Cincinnati Avenue 
Rocklin, California 95677-1297 
(800) 227-8164 



Parts Center Europe 

Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33 

D-7030 Boeblingen, West Germany 

0049-7031-140 



1-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Consumables and Accessories 

Consumables may be ordered from Hewlett-Packard's Direct Marketing Division (DMK) and are 
often available through an authorized Hewlett-Packard dealer. The telephone number for DMK is 
800-538-8787 (In California: 408-738-4133). 

Although they should not be used as a part of normal repair operations, more common consumable 
and accessory part numbers can be found in Chapter 8 of this manual. Current font cartridges, 
cables, and miscellaneous accessories and part numbers can be obtained by calling the DMK 
number above and requesting a current catalog. 



1-a WARRANTY STATEyEWT 
General 

The follovnng material is taken from the LaserJet III Printer User's Manual with only slight 
changes. Unless specifically noted, it applies to the LaserJet series II as well. 

Warranty 

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state 
to state or province to province. 

One-Year Limited Warranty 

Hewlett-Packard warrants its computer hardware products g^ainst defects in materials and 
workmanship for a period of one year from receipt by the end user. During the warranty period, 
HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. 

Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a reasonable amount of time, a 
refund of the purchase price may be given upon return of the product. 

Exclusions 

The warranty on your LaserJet HI printer shall not apply to defects resulting from: 

■ Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer. 

■ Customer-supplied software or interfacing. 

■ Unauthorized modification or misuse. 

a Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product. 

■ Operation of non-supported printing media. 

■ Duty cycle abuse (see note on next page). 

■ Operating the printer from a mechanical switchbox without a designated surge protector. 

■ Improper site preparation and maintenance. 

B Use of non-Hewlett-Packard EP-S Cartridges, memory boards, or interface boards. 



1-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Operation of, the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle (printing greater than 
I the equivalent of 12,000 (HP 33440) or 16,000 (HP 33449) single-sided pages per 

^P month) shall be deemed printer abuse and all repairs thereafter will be billed on a 

time and materials basis. 

If you are using a mechanical switchbox, ensure that it is equipped with a surge 
protector. Damage to your printer could occur from the use of unprotected 
mechanical switchboxes. 

The warranty period begins either on the date of delivery or, where the purchase price includes 
installation by Hewlett-Packard, on the date of installation. 

Your LaserJet III printer must be serviced by one of the authorized repair depots v^thin the 
country of original purchase. Customer shall prepay shipping charges (and shall pay all duty 
and taxes) for products returned for service. Except for products returned to the customer from 
another country, Hewlett-Packard shall pay for return of products to the customer. If the unit is 
repaired by an authorized dealer, you will need to negotiate the method and cost of returning the 
unit with the dealer. 

You may convert your one-year warranty to a 90-day on-site service agreement any time within 90 
days of purchase. Contact your dealer or HP Sales Representative for details regarding this option. 

Warranty Limitations 

The warranty set forth above is exclusive and no other warranty, whether written or oral, 
is expressed or implied. Hewlett-Packard specifically disclaims the implied warranties of 
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. 

Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so 
the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. However, any implied warranty of 
merchantability or fitness is limited to the one-year duration of this written warranty. 

Service During the Warranty Period 

If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, bring the equipment to an authorized HP 
Dealer Repair Center or send the equipment to one of the HP Field Repair Centers. 

When sending equipment to an HP Field Repair Center or Dealer Repair Center, follow the 
repacking guidelines listed below. Also, complete and enclose the Service Information Form 
beginning on page 8-9 (HP 33449 only) of the User's Manual Insuring the equipment for 
shipment is recommended. 

Weroing Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packaging is the customer's 

„ responsibility. Use the original packing materials whenever possible. 



1-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Service After the Warranty Period 

If your hardware fails after the warranty period, contact an Authorized HP Dealer Repair Center. 
If you have an HP Maintenance Agreement, request service under your agreement. 

When sending equipment to an HP Field Repair Center, follow the repacking guidelines Gisted 
in the User's Manual). Also, complete and enclose the Service Information Form (in the User's 
Manual) and enclose a copy of proof of purchase. Insuring the equipment for shipment is 
recommended. 

Repacking Guidelines for Returning Your Printer 

■ Remove any font cartridges installed in the printer, 

■ Remove the EP-S Cartridge and the Fuser Cleaning Pad. 

■ Remove any non-HP accessories (if installed). 

■ Remove paper trays, but include them in the box with the printer. 

■ Use the original shipping container and packing materials, if possible. 

■ Include the completed Service Information Form. Include print samples which illustrate the 
problems you are having, if applicable. 

■ Include 50-100 sheets of any problem paper or forms, if possible. 

Mote If you have already disposed of your printer's packaging material and are unable 

a to locate another package, the packaging can be ordered from HP's Support 

^M Materials Organization at the following phone numbers: 

United States: 800-227-8164 

Canada: 416-678-9430 

Europe: 41-22-83-81-11 

Ask for pari; number 33440-00908 for the HP 33440 or 33449-00908 for the HP 
33449. The proper packaging material (box and inserts) will be sent to you for a 
nominal charge. (For further packaging information on both printers, see Chapter 
3, Section 3-2 of this manual or Appendix A (HP 33440) or Appendix B (HP 
33449).) 



1-20 



ik 



met 



2 



2. SITE PLANNING ANB REQUIKEMENffi 

2-1. INTRODUCTION 2-3 

2-2. SITE REQUIREMENTS 2-3 

2-3. STORING AND HANDLING EP-S CARTRIDGES 2-4 

Storage with Packaging Intact 2-4 

Storage After Opening Packaging 2-4 

Storage Conditions , 2-4 

Handling Suggestions 2-5 

2-4. PAPER SPECIFICATIONS 2-6 

General 2-6 

Paper Types to Use 2-6 

Paper Types to Avoid 2-6 

2-5. ENVELOPE SPECIFICATIONS 2-8 

General 2-8 

Envelope Procurement Recommendations 2-8 

Envelope Types To Avoid 2-9 

Envelope Construction and Size 2-9 

2-6. ADHESIVE LABEL AND OVERHEAD TRANSPARENCY SPECIFICATIONS 2-11 

Adhesive Labels 2-11 

Overhead Transparencies 2-12 



2-1. Printer Space Requirements 2-3 

2-2, Toner Distribution and Storage 2-5 

2-3. Good and Poor Envelope Construction 2-8 



2-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



2-1. EP-S Cartridge Storage Conditions With Packaging Intact 2-4 

2-2. Paper Specifications 2-7 

2-3. Envelope Specifications 2-10 

2-4. Adhesive Label Specifications 2-12 

2-5. Transparency Specifications 2-12 



2-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are carefully adjusted and inspected before they are shipped. 
To maintain the performance level set at the factory, correct selection of a location is extremely 
important. The service representative should fully understand the functions of the printers to 
ensure selection of a suitable location. 



The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are designed to operate in a clean environment, preferably 
in an area not subject to excessive mechanical shock, vibration, or a wide range of temperatures. 
Although air conditioning and power conditioning are not required to ensure reliable operation, 
the environmental specifications listed in Chapter 1, Section 1-3, should not be exceeded. 

The following suggestions should be taken into consideration prior to installation: 

■ The printer should not be installed near water faucets, humidifiers, refrigerators, or similar 
devices that affect the environment. A location where the temperature changes abruptly, such as 
near an air conditioner, should also be avoided. 

■ The printer should not be exposed to open flames, dust, ammonia fumes, and direct sunlight or 
other excessively bright light source at anj^ime. 

■ The room should be well ventilated. 

■ The printer should be installed on a sturdy, level surface. 

■ Sufficient space should be provided to permit unimpeded printer operation and adequate 
ventilation (see Figure 2-1). 



57" (144 cm) 



8" (20 cm) 



E 
o 
in 

00 
CO 



c 



1] 



G 



22" (55 cm) 

M — . ^ 





16" (40 cm) 



8" (20 cm) 



Figure 2-1. Printer Space Requirements 



2-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



The EP-S Cartridge can be adversely affected by the environment and time. Careful attention 
should be given to the following information about storing and handling cartridges. 

Storage with Packaging Intact 

The following conditions should be observed: 

1. Keep the EP-S Cartridge out of direct sunhght or other bright light. 

2. Keep the EP-S Cartridge on a secure, level surface where it is not likely to be bumped. 

Under warehouse conditions, be sure the storage area meets the conditions in Table 2-1. 
Table 2-1. EP-S Cartridge Storage Conditions With Packaging Intact 



Category 


Temperature 


Humidity 


Air Pressure 


Normal Conditions 
(2.45 Years) 


0" to 35° C 


35 to 85% RH 


460 to 760 mm Hg 
(0.6 to 1 atm) 


Severe Conditions 
(18 Days) 


High: 350 to 40" C 
Low: -20° to 0° C 


High: 85 to 95% RH 
Low: 10 to 35% RH 


460 to 760 mm Hg 
(0.6 to 1 atm) 


Maximum Temperature 
Change (3-Minute Period) 


High: 40° to 15° C 
Low: -20° to 25° C 


n/a 


n/a 


Total Storage Time (Stor^e + Use): 2.5 years 



Storage After Opening Packaging 

The drum in the EP-S Cartridge uses a photosensitive organic coating that deteriorates when 
exposed to strong light. The toner in the EP-S Cartridge can also be affected by the environment. 
For these reasons, the customer must be fully informed about the correct method for storing and 
handling the cartridge. The EP-S Cartridge must be fully used within six months after it has 
been removed &om its packaging. 

Storage Conditions 

1. Do not place cartridges in direct sunlight or near a window. Also, do not leave them Inside an 
automobile for a long period of time in warm weather. (These conditions apply even if the 
cartridge is still in its package.) 

2. In addition to avoiding areas with constant high or low temperatures or relative humidity (as 
listed in Table 2-1), avoid locations subject to abrupt changes in either temperature or humidity, 
such as near an air conditioner. 

3. Do not store cartridges in dusty locations and avoid exposure to ammonia gas or other organic 
solvent vapors. 

4. Do not store the EP-S Cartridge above 35° C (95° F). 

5. Never expose the cartri^e to temperatiures above 40° C (104° F). 

Mote The expiration date speciHed on the cartridge box is 2.5 years (storage time plus 

I use time) after the date of manufacture, assuming an intact storage bag. K the 

te bag is broken, the maximum storage-plus-usage time is six months. 



2-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Handling Suggestions 

1. When installing a cartridge, slowly rock it 45 degrees about its long axis (see Figure 2-2) about 
five times to distribute the toner evenly. 

2. As shown in Figure 2-2, do not stand the cartridge upright, invert it, or handle it roughly. 




Figure 2-2. Toraeir Dastrlbatloii and Storage 

3. Do not touch the surface of the drum when opening its protective shield on the bottom of the 
EP-S Cartridge. If it becomes absolutely necessary to clean the drum, use only toner applied 
with a dry doth. Do not wipe with a dry cloth and do not use any solvents. 

4. Do not attempt to disassemble or refill the EP-S Cartridge. 

5. Do not expose a cartridge to unnecessary vibration or mechanical shock. 

6. Although an EP-S Cartridge has light-blocking shutters to protect the photosensitive drum, 
exposure to light for a long period of time may cause light or white areas to appear on prints. If 
this happens, stop the printer and wait a few minutes. This should eliminate the problem. In 
extreme cases, some life may be restored to the drum by placing the EP-S Cartridge in a dark 
place for an extended period of time. If drum exposure has been excessive, the EP-S Cartridge 
may require replacement. 

7. If it becomes necessary to rotate the drum, always turn it in the same direction it turns while 
making prints. If it is turned backward, the spring-loaded contact that applies the developing 
bias to the inside rim of the developing cylinder may be bent backward so that it no longer 
contacts the cylinder, thus preventing proper image development. 

HQte Normal room light, measured a few meters from a window on an average day, is 

I about 1,500 lux. Do not expose the photosensitive drum to light of this intensity 

wM foi* more than five minutes. If accidentally exposed under these conditions, the 

EP-S Cartridge can be stored in a dark place to recuperate, although an image 
may be retained on the drum for some time. Direct sunlight is 10,000-30,000 lux. 
A drum exposed to light of this intensity may be permanently damaged. 



2-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



2-4- PAPER SPECIFICATIONS 
General 

HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are designed to work well with most types of xerographic and 
bond paper. However, some paper variables may have a significant effect on print quality or 
handling reliability. Use of the following guidelines when choosing paper will ensure maximum 
printer performance. 

Paper Types to Use 

To obtain the clearest, sharpest images, paper manufactured for photocopying, such as Canon NP 
or Xerox 4024, should be used. Generally, these types of papers are manufactured to specifications 
that provide desirable characteristics for laser printer image quality and paper handling. The 
supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes are to be used in a laser printer. 
Always test samples of the paper before buying to ensure that it provides desirable performance. 
Preprinted papers should use inks that can withstand the temperature of the printer's fusing 
process. 

For some applications, cotton bond paper may be preferred. Several cotton papers are now 
being manufactured with properties optimized for laser printing. HP has tested cotton content 
papers such as Gilbert Neu-Tech and Neenah NP with satisfactory results. Many other types of 
cotton bonds will work well in these printers. However, always test paper to ensure desirable 
performance. Paper having a rougher surface, such as cockle or laid finished paper, or paper that 
is wrinkled or puckered may exhibit degraded performance. 

Hot® HP neither warrants nor recommends the use of any particular paper. Paper 

I properties are subject to change by paper manufacturers, and HP has no control 

^b over such changes. The operator is responsible for the quality and performance of 

paper used with the printer. 



Paper Types to Avoid 

Some specific types of paper may not perform well or may damage the printer. (See also 
"Envelopes Types to Avoid" in Section 2-5.) 

Paper types to avoid are: 

■ Those not meeting the specifications given in Table 2-2. 

■ Extremely smooth or shiny paper, or paper that is highly textured. 

■ Coated or chemically finished papers. 

■ Damaged or wrinkled paper, or paper with irregularities such as tabs and staples. 

■ Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography. These materials may transfer onto 
the fusing roller and cause damage. Any preprinted paper should use inks able to withstand 
200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. 

■ Multipart forms or carbonless paper. 

Caution Damage or other defects caused by the use of papers listed under "Paper Types 

-gg to Avoid" above and media with tabs, clasps, staples, or other objects attached to 

^m them will not be covered by HP warranty or standard HP service agreements. 



2-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 2-2. Paper Specifications 



.-:■. Item" . ■': 


Specincation 


Acid Content 


5.5 pH to 8.0 pH. 


Ash Content 


Not to exceed 10%. 


Basis Weight: 


60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb.). 


Brightness 


83% minimum. 


Caliper 


3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.076 to 0.18 mm). 


Furnish 


100% chemical wood pulp and/or cotton fiber. 


Curl 


Ream: Flat within 0.3" (8 mm). 
Printed: Flat within 0.8" (20 mm). 


Cut Edge Conditions 


Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray. 


Electrical Surfaces 
Resistivity 


2.0 to 15 X 10^° ohms/sq. (conditioned @ 23°C & 50% RH). 


Electrical Volume 
Resistivity 


1.2 to 15 X 10^1 ohms x cm (conditioned @ 23" C and 50% RH). 


Finishing 


Cut sheet to within ±0.031 in. (.79 mm) of nominal, corners 90° ±0.2° . 


Fusing Compatibility 


Must not scorch, melt, transfer material, or release hazardous emissions 
when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. Any pre-printed sheets 
must use inks compatible with the fusing process. 


Grain 


Long grain. 


Moisture Content 


4% to 6% by weight. 


Opacity 


85% minimum. 


Packaging 


Polylaminated moisture-proof ream wrap. 


Smoothness 


60 to 250 (Sheffield). (The rougher surfaces tend to degrade print 
quality.) 


Stiffness 


1.6 to 7.5 machine direction. 
0.6 to 3.5 cross direction (Taber). 


Wax Pick 


12 minimum (Dennison). 



2-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



2-5. ENVELOPE SPECIFICATIONS 



General 

A wide variety of envelopes have been tested and most have performed acceptably. However, some 
envelopes wHl not feed through the printer because of their construction. A suitable envelope 
should have not more than two thicknesses of paper along the leading edge (the edge that enters 
the printer first, see Figure 2-3) and the leading edge should be straight with a sharp, well-creased 
fold. Flimsy envelopes lacking stiffness or those having curved leading edges will not reliably feed 
into the printer. Also, envelopes having "b^gy" construction may wrinkle while going through the 
printer's fuser. Poor results also occur when envelopes are folded smaller than normal, causing a 
thick leading edge near a comer. The folding accuracy of some manufacturers' envelopes may vary 
enough to cause some envelopes to feed well and other, apparently similar, envelopes to jam. 



The Face Up (rear) Output Tray - the most direct path for envelopes and other 
media - should be used to reduce wrinkling and curl. 



Envelope Procurement Recommendations 

Purchase quality envelopes only from a supplier who understands that the envelopes will be used 
in a laser printer. Envelopes should lie flat, have folds that are consistent and sharp, and be 
packaged in a protective box. Envelope samples should be tested before purchasing. 

Consistent, long-term performance requires quality control from the envelope manufacturer and 
proper handling until use. Envelopes should be stored where they will lie flat and the edges will 
not be damaged. They should be kept away from extremes in temperature and humidity and 
should be allowed to reach room temperature before use. 



Good Construction 






Poor Construction 






31 



Figure 2-3. Good and Poor Envelope Construction 



2-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Envelope Types To Avoid 

■ Envelopes that do not meet the specifications listed in Table 2-3. 

■ Envelopes constructed of paper with weight greater than 24 pounds (90 g/m2). 

■ Poorly manufactured envelopes with leading edges having more than two thicknesses of paper 
and that are not consistently square and straight (see Figure 2-3). 

■ Envelopes with "baggy" construction or folds that are not sharply creased. 

■ Envelopes that have already been printed on with a LaserJet printer. 

■ Envelopes with clasps, snaps, or tie strings. 

■ Envelopes with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts. 

■ Envelopes using paper, rnks, adhesives, or other materials that discolor, melt, transfer material, 
or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. 

■ Envelopes made with extremely smooth, shiny, or recycled paper. 

■ Envelopes that are very rough, highly textured, or deeply embossed. 

■ Envelopes which do not lie flat or that are damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped. 

■ Envelopes having an open flap with adhesive exposed so that closing the flap seals the envelope. 

■ Envelopes that use encapsulated types of adhesive that do not require moistening but instead 
rely on pressure to seal them. 



Caution Under no circumstances should envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, or 

jll synthetic materials be used; severe damage may occur to the printer. Such damage 

^p is not covered by HP warranty or standard HP service agreements. 



Envelope Construction and Size 

Both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 use an adjustable envelope cassette. Standard envelope sizes 
that can be used are: 

Commercial 10: 4i"x9i" 

Monarch; 3I" x 7|" 

C5: 162 mm x 229 mm 

International DL: 110mm x 220mm 

Non-standard envelopes that fall within the following size ranges can also be used: 

Minimum size: 3.5" x 7.5" (89 mm x 190 mm). 
Maximum size: 7.2" x 10.1" (182 mm x 257 mm). 



2-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Note Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular 

I envelope because envelope properties are subject to change by envelope 

^b manufacturers. Hewlett-Packard has no control over such changes. The entire 

responsibility for the quality and performance of envelopes lies with the customer. 

Although testing helps to characterize an envelope's performance, long-term 
satisfaction requires process quality control by the envelope's manufacturer and 
proper handling until use. 



Envelopes should meet the specifications listed in the following table: 

Table 2-3. Envelope Specifications 



. • '.Item-;-. 


Specification 


Basis Weight 


16 to 24 pounds (17" x 22" per 500 sheets) (60 to 90 grams/sq. meter). 


Caliper 


3.3 to 5.5 mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer thickness. 


Curl 


Must lie flat with less than 0.25" (0.064 mm) curl across entire surface. 


Finishing 


Envelopes must be accurately (+0.04" (0.01 mm) of normal) folded so 
there are no more than two thicknesses of paper at the leading edge. All 
folds must be sharply creased and construction must be tight. 


Furnish 


100% chemical wood l)ulp and/or cotton. 


Fusing Compatibility 


Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when 
heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second. 


Moisture Content 


4% to 6% by weight. 


Paper 


Paper used for envelope construction must meet all the paper 
specifications listed in Table 2-2. 


Smoothness 


100 to 250 (Sheffield). (The rougher surfaces tend to degrade print 
quality.) 





Note Envelope performance in both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers may be 

I influenced by properties other than those specified here. True verification 

^^ of performance requires actually running the envelope through the printer. 

Consistent, acceptable, long-term performance of envelopes in this printer requires 
careful process quality control by the envelope manufacturer and proper handling 
until use by the customer. 



2-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



2-6. ADHESIVE LABEL AMD OVERHEAD TRANSPARENCY 
SPECIFICATIONS 

HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers will also print on certain adhesive label and overhead 
transparency media. (Label and transparency part numbers have been listed as of this printing; 
contact DMK for current information.) 

Caution Use of labels and transparencies not designed for the HP 33440 or HP 33449 

• printers may result in damage not covered by HP warranty or standard HP 

service agreements. Use only labels and overhead transparencies recommended for 
use in laser printers. 



Adhesive Labels 

An adhesive label is paper with a pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. The three components of 
label stock are the top or face sheet (the actual label), the adhesive, and the liner or carrier sheet, 
sometimes referred to as the backing. Use the rear output tray when printing labels to reduce curl 

The elements of label stock include: 

Top or Face Sheets: The top sheet, which is the printing surface, is usually composed of 

photocopy paper. 

Carrier Sheet: The carrier sheet should be bleached sulfate stock, silicone coated for easy 

release of the face sheet. 

Adhesive: The adhesive should be acrylic-based since such material is more stable 

than other adhesives at the high temperatures encountered in the 
printer's fusing process. 

Warning Air quality testing has been conducted on a similar Hewlett-Packard printing 

e product in accordance with National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

(NIOSH) test procedures and standards. As a result of this testing, only labels 
using an acrylic-based adhesive are recommended for use. 

Adhesives should not come in direct contact with any part of the printer because the label stock 
may stick to the photosensitive drum or the rollers, causing toner offset or paper jams. No 
adhesive should be exposed between the labels. To test label stock for adhesive exposure, a sheet 
of plain paper should not adhere when pressed against a sheet of label stock. 

M Label arrangement: Labels should be arranged on the carrier sheet so that they cover the 
entire page, with the only exposed spaces being lengthwise down the sheet. Using label stock 
with spaces between labels often results in labels peeling off during the printing cycle, causing 
serious jamming problems. Do not remove any excess top sheet material from the carrier sheet 
until after printing. These precautions will help prevent problems resulting from labels pulling 
loose from the carrier sheet. 

■ Label curl: Labels must lie flat with no more than | inch of curl in any direction. 

■ Poorly manufactured labels: Do not use labels having wrinkles, bubbles or other indications 
of delamination; they may result in damage to the printer due to labels peeling off. 



2-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 2-4. Adhesive Label Specifications 



Specification 


Description 


Face Sheet 


Must meet specifications in Table 2-2. 


Fusing 
Compatibility 


All adhesives, liners, facestocks and other materials used in the label 
construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing 
process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset material or release 
hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 seconds. 


Construction 


Total construction caliper must not exceed 0.0070 inches (0.18mm), 



HP has tested labels -such as Avery labels specified for laser printers and Hewlett-Packard 
LaserJet labels -and found their performance to be satisfactory. 

Hewlett-Packard Labels (8 i" x 11", 100 Sheets): 



■ P/N 92296A: 1" x 2|" 

■ P/N92296B: li"x4" 

■ P/N 92296C: 1" x 4" 

■ P/N 92296D: 2" x 4" 

■ P/N92296E: 3|"x4" 

Caution Remove each label immediately after printing. Because they may stick together 

• due to their heat retention properties, do not allow them to stack up in the paper 

tray. Always use the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray to prevent possible label jams 
and resultant damage to the printer. 



P/N 92296F: 


111 Y 1 3 m 


P/N 92296G: 


2.1 „ q 7 II 

3 ^^16 


P/N 92296H: 


2|" x2|" 

4 4 


P/N 92296J: 


li"x4" 


P/N 92296K: 


8i" x 11" 



Overhead Transparencies 

Hewlett-Packard has tested overhead transparency film such as HP overhead transparencies and 
found the performance acceptable. Use the rear output tray when printing transparencies to reduce 
curl. Overhead transparencies should meet the specifications provided in Table 2-5. 

Table 2-5. Transparency Specifications 



Thickness 


0.100 to 0.110 mm 


3.9 to 4.5 mils 


Cutting Dimension Tolerance 


± 0.7 mm 


0.031 inch 


Cutting Angle 


90° ± 0.2° 





Hewlett-Packard offers the following overhead transparencies through its Direct Marketing 
Division: 

■ P/N 92296T: S^" x 11", 50 Sheets 

■ P/N 92296U: A4 (210 mm x 297 mm), 50 Sheets 



2-12 



3 



3. INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 

3-1. INTRODUCTION 3-3 

3-2. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 3-3 

Unpacking Instructions 3-3 

Hardware Installation 3-4 

General 3-4 

Interface Cabling 3-4 

Serial Interface Setup 3-4 

RS-422 Configuration 3-5 

Software Installation 3-5 

MS-DOS System Configuration 3-6 

In Case of Difficulty 3-6 

3-3. USING THE CONTROL PANEL 3-7 

Overview 3-7 

Control Panel Functional Description 3-8 

General 3-8 

Indicator Descriptions 3-8 

Key Descriptions 3-8 

Default Settings and Restart Routines 3-11 

Default Settings 3-11 

Factory Default Settings 3-11 

Envelope Cassette Size Setting 3-12 

Resetting the Printer , 3-13 

Menu Reset Routine 3-13 

Cold Reset Routine 3-13 

3-4. USING THE PRINTING AND CONFIGURATION MENUS 3-14 

Overview 3-14 

Printing Menu Settings 3-14 

Configuration Menu Settings 3-16 

Symbol Sets 3-17 

Auto Continue 3-17 

Interface Type 3-17 

Resolution Enhancement (HP 33449 Only) 3-17 

Print Density and Resolution Enhancement 3-19 

Page Protection (HP 33449 Only) 3-20 

3-5. FONT PRINTOUTS 3-21 



3-1 



Understanding the Font Printout 3-21 

3-6. SELF TESTS 3-25 

General ^ 3-25 

05 SELF TEST 3-25 

Self-Test Printout Information 3-25 

HP 33440 Self Test Printout 3-26 

HP 33449 Self Test Printout 3-27 

04 SELF TEST 3-29 

Test Print (15 ENGINE TEST) 3-29 

3-7. SERVICE MODE 3-30 

General 3-30 

Using Service Mode 3-30 

Self Tests 3-31 

Setting the Page Count 3-32 



3-1. Setting HP 33440 Switches 3-5 

3-2. Control Panels 3-7 

3-3. Print Density at Line Transitions 3-19 

3-4. Vertical Stripes in the 33% Pie Slice 3-19 

3-5. HP 33440 Font Printout (In EngUsh only) 3-22 

3-6. HP 33449 Font Printout (LocaUzed for selected language) 3-24 

3-7. Portion of HP 33440 05 SELF TEST Printout 3-26 

3-8. HP 33449 05 SELF TEST Printout 3-28 

3-9. Selecting the Test Print Svatch (HP 33440 shown here) 3-29 

3-10. Portion of Test Print Pattern 3-29 

3-11, Portion of Service Mode Self Test 3-31 



Tables 



3-1. Factory Default Settings 3-11 

3-2. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing Menu Items 3-15 

3-3. HP 33449 Additional Printing Menu Items 3-15 

3-4. HP 33440 Configuration Menu Items 3-16 

3-5. HP 33449 Additional Configuration Menu Items 3-17 

3-6. HP 33440 Symbol Sets in Sequence 3-18 

3-7. HP 33449 Symbol Sets in Sequence 3-18 

3-8. Page Protection Memory Configurations (With 1 Mbyte of additional memory) , 3-20 



3-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Two basic topics are discussed in this chapter: 

■ Unpacking and Installation. 

■ Using the Control Panel to configure the printer and to check printer functions. 

Each printer is carefully inspected before it is shipped. Proper installation is extremely important 
to maintain printer performance at the level set at the factory. The service representative should 
fully understand the operating environment parameters of the printer to ensure that it is properly 
installed in a suitable location (see Chapters 1 and 2). A thorough knowledge of the Control Panel 
is necessary to understand default settings, restart routines, and the font and other printouts -as 
well as to use the Printing and Configuration Menus, run self tests, and use the service mode. 

Since their physical appearance is quite similar, the HP 33449 has generally been used to 
represent both printers. If there is a significant difference, appropriate instructions for both 
printers have been added. 



Unpacking Instructions 



Mote ALL packaging material should be retained in case the printer needs to be 

I repackaged for shipment at a later date. For both printers, packaging material 

^b to be saved includes all cardboard and foam materials. Replacement packaging 

^ material is available through SMO (800-227-8164) or PCE (0049-7031-140). Part 

numbers are 33440-00908 for the HP 33440 and 33449-00908 for the HP 33449. 

Although unpacking and installation instructions for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are 
quite similar, there are some differences. For the HP 33440, refer to Appendix A for the pamphlet, 
Your Road Map to setting up Your LaserJet series II Printer, which was packaged with printers 
after November 1989. (The Getting Started Manual was packaged with printers before November 
1989.) The pamphlet, Your Guide to Setting up Your LaserJet III, which is shipped with the 
printer, is included here as Appendix B. 

Prior to unpacking either printer, examine the shipping container for any signs of physical damage 
(holes in the container, large indentations, etc.). If damage to the shipping container is evident, 
request that the carrier's agent be present when the printer is unpacked. The recipient assumes 
all liability for shipping damages once the box has been opened. 



Warning Take care when unpacking and handling the printer. Because both the HP 

33440 and HP 33449 printers weigh approximately 50 pounds (22.4 Kg), two 
Km people may be required to lift a printer from its packaging or move it around the 

™^ workspace. 



3-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Hardware Installation 

General 

Ensure that the printer's site environment meets all the specifications in Chapter 1 and Chapter 
2. Refer to the appropriate appendix for actual hardware installation instructions - Appendix A 
for the HP 33440 and Appendix B for the HP 33449. The HP 33440 factory interface default is 
serial; the HP 33449 default interface is parallel. Decide at this time which interface connection 
will be used based upon the host system's capabilities and the proximity of the printer to its host. 
Configure the printer accordingly. 

Interface Cabling 

Typical cabling diagrams can be found in Appendix D for both serial and parallel (Centronics) 
configurations. HP part numbers for cables used in MS-DOS environments can be found in 
Appendix A (for the HP 33440) or Appendix B (for the HP 33449). 

Serial Interface Setup 

For both printers, to reconfigure from parallel interface to serial or to change the baud rate, etc., 
follow these instructions: 

1. Make sure both the computer and printer are switched off. 

2. Connect the serial cable between the printer and the computer. 

3. Switch the printer on. 

4. Take the printer off line. 



5. Hold the (menu J key down (about 5 seconds) until SYM SET= (HP 33440) or AUTO CONT= (HP 
33449) is displayed. 

6. Press the (menu) key once until 1/0= is displayed. (To change the display, press the Q or 
(^ key to display I/0=SERIAL and then press the (enter) key to save the selection.) 



7. HP 33440 only: Press the (menu) key to show BAUD RATE= . 

8. HP 33449 only: Press the (menu) key to show SERIAL= and select SERIAL=RS-232; then 
press the (menu) key again to show BAUD RATE= . 

9. Press the (+) or (^ keys if the baud rate needs to be changed to match the host computer's 
baud rate. 



10. Press the (ENTER) key to save the selection. 

11. Press the (menu) key to show ROBUST XON= . If ROBUST XON=OFF* (X0N=DC1) appears, 
press the ( + ) key to display ON and press the (enter) key to save the selection. (See the note 
below for additional information on ROBUST XON configuration.) 



12. Press the (menu) key to show DTR POLARITY= . Select the proper polarity (normally HI, 

determined by the host). (Note: DTR polarity is only configurable when the selected I/O type 
is Serial and Serial is set to RS-232.) 



13. Return the printer to on-line status by pressing (on line). 



3-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




The ROBUST XON configuration determines the method hy which the printer 
generates XONs (DCls). If ROBUST XON is ON, an XON is transmitted by the 
controller to the host system when (1) the controller's 1-Kl>yte I/O buffer has less 
than 128 data bjrtes remaining, (2) the printer is in an on-line state, and (3) the 
printer is not busy. If no data is received within approximately one second, then 
additional XONs are transmitted at one second intervals until data is received. 

If ROBUST XON is OFF, the printer sends a single XON whenever (1) the printer 
can accept more data following an XOFF (DC3), (2) the printer returns to an 
on-line state, and (3) the printer is not busy. The printer does not send XONs 
every second while the printer is on line and ready for more data. 



RS-422 Configuration 

HP 33440: To select RS-422 operation, remove the two screws securing the plate labeled 
"OPTIONAL I/O" on the lower rear section of the printer (see Figure 3-1). Move SWl on the 
Interface PGA from the DOWN to the UP position. When 1/0= SERIAL is selected from the 
printer's Configuration Menu, RS-422 protocol, rather than RS-232, will be in effect. 

HP 33449: RS-422 communication is selected through the Control Panel's Configuration Menu. 




Figure 3-1. Settag HP 33440 Switches 



Software Installation 



Once the printer has been properly installed and appropriately cabled to its host system, the host 
system will need to be configured to communicate with the printer. Following are guidelines for 
MS-DOS-based systems. Assuming a serial connection on systems based on an operating system 
other than MS-DOS, the host must be configurable using the following protocol: 

Word Size: 8-bit. 
Start Bits: 1. 

Stop Bits: 1. 

Parity: None. 

HandshaMng: Hardware (using DTR) or XON/XOFF. (Hardware handshaking is not 
available using the RS-422A configuration.) 



3-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

The polarity (HI or LO) of the DTR signal line can be configured at the printer to match the host 
system's requirements. The baud rate (bits per second) setting of both printer and host system 
must match. In the printer's Configuration Menu, ROBUST XON should be set to ON, unless 
the host system is unable to handle repeating XON's (DCl's) at the rate of approximately one per 
second whenever the printer is ready to receive data. Setting ROBUST XON to OFF will cause 
the printer to issue only a single XON when it comes on line or following an XOFF when its I/O 
buffer can once again accommodate additional data. 

Note The HP 33440 has the additional capability of responding to a "status request" 

I sequence ([ESC] ? [DCl]), providing compatibility with system drivers that issue 

^ such requests. This capability can be added to the HP 33449 using an Optional 

I/O Interface. Contact your HP sales representative for more information. 

MS-DOS System Configuration 

To communicate properly with the printer, the MS-DOS environment will require the 
addition/modification of MODE commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Add or modify the 
MODE command(s), depending on the interface configuration, as follows: 

Parallel MODE LPT n , , P where n is the parallel port designator to which the cable is 

attached (typically I or 2). (This command sequence retries sending output if timeout 
errors occur.) 

Serial MODE COM n : [baud rate -^ 100] , N , 8 , 1 , P where n is the serial port designator 

to "hich the cable is attached (typically 1, 2, 3, or 4). (This command sequence sets 
baud rate, parity, number of data bits and stop bits, and retries on time-out errors.) 

MODE LPTl:=COM n. (With this command sequence, any output sent to "LPTl" is 
redirected to the serial port.) 

Since the MODE command is an external MS-DOS command (i.e., a program named M0DE.COM 
is run when the command is invoked), the program file must be contained in the root directory or 
in a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 

Once modification to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file has been made, the computer must be rebooted for 
the changes to take effect. 

Note Some PC software applications override these MS-DOS configurations set using 

the MODE command. These applications must also be configured appropriately to 
communicate properly with the printer. 



In Case of Difficulty 

If the preceding steps have been followed and the printer and host have matching configuration 
parameters set but the printer is not operating as expected, refer to the "Interface 
Troubleshooting" section in Chapter 7, Section 7-6. 



3-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



3-a USING THE CONTROL PAfSIEL 



Overview 

Control Panel operation for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers is quite similar. Although the 
HP 33440 uses a membrane-type keypad and the HP 33449 uses a set of raised keys with a slightly 
different arrangement (see Figure 3-2), the keys and indicators as well as most of the functions 
displayed are the same. 

The HP 33449 adds the following features: 

■ Localization: Five languages (English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish) can be chosen for 
display, self test, and font printout messages. 

■ Scalable Typefaces: Pitch or point size can be selected from the Printing Menu if the chosen 
font is a scalable typeface. 

■ Expanded Symbol Sets: An expanded list of symbol sets is offered. Symbol set selection 
appears in the Printing Menu, not the Configuration Menu as in the HP 33440. 

■ Resolution Enhancement:^^ This HP proprietary technology improves the visual quality of 
printed images beyond the 300 dpi standard. 

■ Page Protection: This feature, with the addition of at least 1 Mbyte of expansion memory, 
reserves additional memory to ensure that an entire page will be printed, regardless of its 
complexity. 

Note that, for both printers, some keys have a lower function label which indicates a second or, for 
some keys, a third functional level. Pressing keys briefly accesses the top level of Control Panel 
functions. Holding down keys for a number of seconds accesses a second or third level of Control 
Panel functions. Remember that, with the exception of the [on line) key, the printer must be off 
line to use the Control Panel. 



(HP 33440) 



(HP 33449) 

















: 


READY 

MANUAL 














+ 






00 READY 










^ 














1 








(=3 












C=2 






ON LINE 




CONTINUE 
L RESET ^ 




PRINT 
FONTS 

TEST 




FOAM 
FEED 


ENTER 

RESET 
MENU 


MENU 































1 


rm Ready 
CZl Manual 


\ 




/ 




00 READY 




/ 




\ 




1 





On Una 




Continue 
Reset 










Form Feed 




Print Fonts 
Test 



Enter 

Reset Menu 



Figure 3-2. Control Panels 



3-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Control Panel Functional Description 

General 

The HP 33440 and HP 33449 operator control panels consist of eight keys, one green LED 
indicator (READY), three amber LED indicators (ON LINE, FORM FEED, MANUAL), and a 
one-line by 16-character LCD display. 

The functional descriptions which follow apply to both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers 
unless otherwise specified. Since timing for key press duration may differ slightly, the durations 
given should be taken as a general indication only. For the HP 33449, display messages are 
localized (i.e., they appear in the selected display language) unless otherwise noted. 



Indicator Descriptions 

On Line Indicator 



Form Feed Indicator 



Ready Indicator 



Manual Indicator 

Key Descriptions 
On Line Key: 

[on line I 



When the amber LED adjacent to the [on line] key shows a steady light, 
the printer is on line, indicating that it is ready to receive data. The 
printer should be on line after it has been turned on and warmed up. 
When on line and printing, use of the [on line) key does not result in an 
immediate off-line indication. The ON LINE LED flashes and the Control 
Panel does not respond to further operator requests until buffered pages 
have finished printing. 



The amber FORM FEED indicator adjacent to the [form feed) key will 
light whenever page data is stored in the printer's memory. Do not turn 
the printer off when the form feed indicator is on or the data stored in 
memory will be lost. Use the [form feed] key to print stored data if the 
READY indicator shows a steady light and the FORM FEED indicator is 
lit. While the page is being printed, the FORM FEED indicator will flash. 

The green READY indicator is lit when the printer is on and ready 
to print. When the light is flashing, the printer is receiving data or 
processing data already received. In order for the printer to receive data, 
it must be on line and ready. When the ready indicator light is off, an 
error, status, or attendance message will be displayed. 

The amber MANUAL indicator is lit when manual feed has been selected 
from the Control Panel or through a software application. 



The printer can be switched from on-line to off-line status by pressing 
the [on line) key. To receive data, the printer must be on line. To use 
the other keys on the Control Panel, the printer must be off line. Note 
that when on hne and printing, use of the [on line) key does not result 
in an immediate off-line state; response is delayed until paper motion is 
finished, although data transfer between the printer and host ceases at 
the time the key is pressed. 



3-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Continue/Reset Key: The (continue/reset) key has two modes: 
(continue) 



(reset) 



Print Fonts/Test 
Key: 

(print fonts) 



(test) 



Briefly pressing the (continue/reset) key clears most errors (except 
hardware errors) and returns the printer to on-Une status after an error 
condition or device attendance request. The continue aspect of the key 
overrides manual feed and media size requests and resumes printing 
following recoverable error conditions. 



Holding down the (continue/reset) key until 07 RESET is displayed 
(about two seconds) returns all current printing settings to Control Panel 
settings (see "Resetting the Printer"). A Control Panel reset also clears 
temporary soft fonts, temporary macros, and stored page data. 

The (print fonts/testI key creates a font printout, a self-test printout, 
and continuous self-test printouts. It has two basic modes: 

Briefly pressing the (print fonts/test") key causes several pages to 
be printed showing sample characters from all available fonts. The 
display will show 06 FONT PRINTOUT while the pages are printing. (See 
Figure 3-5 (HP 33440) or Figure 3-6 (HP 33449) for an example and 
explanation of the font printout.) 



Holding down the (print fonts/test) key until 05 SELF TEST is 
displayed (about two seconds for the HP 33440 and about three seconds 
for the HP 33449) causes the printer to test its built-in controller and to 
create a test printout. During the test, all the Control Panel indicators 
light up. When the printing portion of the test begins, 06 PRINTING TEST 
is displayed. When the test is completed, 00 READY is displayed. (If an 
error occurs during the test, an error message will be displayed instead.) 



If the [print fonts/testI key is held down for at least five seconds (until 
04 SELF TEST is displayed), test printouts v^dll be continuously printed 
until the (on line) key is pressed (the (continue) and [print fonts) keys 
can also be used). The 04 portion of the message will then flash and the 
printer will return to on-line status when the page buffer is cleared (up to 
six additional pages may print). 

A reset is performed before and after the font printout and the self test. This 
reset first prints any buffered data, then clears all temporary fonts and temporary 
macros. 



Form Feed Key: 

[form feed 1 



Pressing the [form feed) key while the printer is off line and in a ready 
state tells the printer to print the contents of the page buffer. If the last 
page sent to the printer from the host is a partial page and the software 
does not send a command to print this data, use the (form feed) key 
to print the partial page. If there is no data in the page buffer (i.e., the 
FORM FEED indicator is OFF), pressing this key will have no effect. 



3-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Menu Key: 



[menu] 



Enter/Reset Menu 
Key. 



[enter] 

HP 33440 only: 
HP 33449 only: 



; RESET MENU I 



Plus and Minus 
Keys: 

QandQ 



The (menu] key is used to access both the Printing Menu and the 
Configuration Menu (see Section 3-4). Printing Menu items can he 
overridden through software applications. 

Briefly pressing the [menu) key enters the Printing Menu. COPIES= 
is displayed. Once the menu is entered, pressing the (menu) key 
will step through the menu items. The Q and Q keys are used to 
display choices (see the (+) and Q keys below), and pressing the 
(enter/reset menu) key will save a selected menu item. 

Holding down the [menu] key until SYM SET= (HP 33440) or 
AUTO CONT= (HP 33449) is displayed (about 5 seconds) enters the 
Configuration Menu. Once the menu is entered, pressing the (menu) 
key will step through the menu items. The (+} and Q keys are used 
to display choices (se e the (+) and (^ keys below), and pressing the 
[enter/reset menu"! key will save a selected menu item. 

The [enter/reset menu) key has two modes: 



Pressing the [enter/reset menu) key saves a menu selection. An asterisk 
(*) will appear beside the item to indicate it is saved. When these new 
settings take effect is dependent on which printer is being used. 

New settings will not take effect until an 07 RESET is performed or an 
^cE is sent from the host. 

A new Printing Menu feature, Auto Reset, is performed if the printer 
determines that no buffered data and no temporary soft fonts or 
temporary macros are currently present. If buffered data, temporary 
fonts, or temporary macros are present and a new Printing Menu item 
is selected, the display will show 10 RESET TO SAVE when the printer 
is returned to on-line status. New settings will not take effect until an 
07 RESET is performed or an ^cE is sent from the host. Pressing and 
holding the [reset] key until 07 RESET appears will invoke the new 
Printing Menu settings but buffered data and temporary soft fonts and 
temporary macros will be lost. Pressing the [on line] or [continue] key 
will save the data but the Printing Menu items will not be in effect. (The 
display will show the selected change hut the current printer settings are 
not changed.) 



Holding down the [reset menu] key at least two seconds until 09 MENU 
RESET is displayed returns Printing Menu settings to factory default 
settings and puts these settings in effect. It also clears temporary soft 
fonts, temporary macros, and any stored page data. 



Once the desired menu item has been reached, these keys step through 
the available choices. For example, if the display window shows COPIES 
= 03 (HP 33449: COPIES = 3), pressing the Q key will change the 
message to COPIES = 04 (HP 33449: COPIES = 4). Pressing the (^ key 
will change the message to COPIES = 03 (HP 33449: COPIES = 3) again. 
Holding down either of these keys will scroll through the available choices 
for each menu item. 



3-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Default Settings and Restart Routines 

Default Settings 

Default printer settings are defined as those settings which will be used as a result of performing 
a Control Panel 07 RESET or issuing a software reset (^c^) from the host system. The printers 
originally ship with factory default settings as specified in Table 3-1. The factory default menu 
settings will remain in effect until altered using the Control Panel menu selection. 

Note that all default Printing Menu settings can be overridden using software commands and 
will remain in effect until a subsequent printer reset (an ^qE or Control Panel 07 RESET) is 
performed. These software commands do not alter the menu settings. Note also that software 
commands cannot override Configuration Menu settings. 

Factory Default Settings 

Factory defaults are permanently stored in the printer's ROM memory and can be used to set 
Printing and Configuration Menu settings in NVRAM. The printer will use these default settings 
until they are changed using the Control Panel or overridden by sending printer commands 
through software. Both Printing and Configuration Menu settings can be returned to factory 
default settings using the COLD RESET routine. Performing the RESET MENU routine will reset 
all Printing Menu settings to their factory defaults. Factory default settings for both printers are 
shown in Table 3-1. 



Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings 


Item (Display) 


HP 33440 


HP 33449 


Number of Copies (C0PIES=) 


01 


1 


Font Source (FONT S0URCE=) 


I (Internal) 


I (Internal) 


Font Number (FONT NUMBER=) 








Pitch (PITCH=) 

or 

Point Size (PT. SIZE=) 


n/a 


PITCH lO.OQi 

or 

POINT SIZE 12.002 


Paper Size (PAPER=) 


n/a 


LETTER/A43 


Orientation (ORIENT ATI 0N=) 


n/a 


PORTRAIT 


Form (lines/page) (F0RM=) 


60 


60/643 


Manual Feed (MANUAL FEED=) 


OFF 


OFF 


Symbol Set (SYM SET= ) 


ROMAN-8 


ROMAN-8 


Auto Continue (AUTO CONT=) 


OFF 


OFF 


I/O (1/0=) 


SERIAL 


PARALLEL 


Serial (SERIAL=)^ 


n/a 


RS-232 


Baud Rate (BAUD RATE=)^ 


9600 


9600 


Robust XON (ROBUST XON=)^ 


ON 


ON 



3-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 3-1. Factory Default Settings (continued) 



Item (Display) 


HP 33440 


HP 33449 


DTR Polarity (DTR P0LARITY=)5 


HI 


HI 


RET (RET=) 


n/a 


DARK 


Page Protect (PAGEPROTECT=)^ 


n/a 


OFF 


Display T.a.nguage (LANGUAGE=)^ 


n/a 


ENG (EngUsh) 


Envelope Tray ^ 


ENVELOP=COM10 


PE TRAY=COM10/DL3 


1- Only displayed when a scalable, fixed-spaced font is selected. 

2. Only displayed when a scalable, proportional-spaced font is selected. 

3. Factory-set with HP 33449AB (220 V). 

4. Only displayed if SERIAL is selected as the I/O interface. 

5. Only displayed if SERIAL and RS-232 are selected. 

6. Only available with added memory. 

7- Refer to Appendix B for configuration instructions. 

8- Only displayed when the Envelope Tray is inserted. 



Envelope Cassette Size Setting 

Whenever an envelope tray is inserted in the printer, the Control Panel will display ENVELOPE= 
(HP 33440) or PE TRAY= (HP 33449). The envelope tray was designed for a variety of envelope 
sizes and the Control Panel setting establishes the printable area for four common sizes. These 
are MONARCH, C5, DL, or COMIO. The first time an envelope tray is inserted in the printer, 
this message will read ENVELOPE=COM10* or PE TRAY=C0M10+ (the asterisk indicates the current 
default choice). If an envelope size different from COMIO is being used, the Q and (^ keys 
should be used to display the available choices. When the [enter] key is used to make the desired 
selection, this choice becomes the new default value. This means that, when an envelope tray is 
inserted in the printer, the display will read from that time forward: ENVELQPE/PE TRAY= [selected 
choice]*. 

For the HP 33449 only, note that if an alternate selection is not made within 10 seconds after 
inserting the envelope tray, the printer will return to an on-line condition using COMIO (or other 
previously selected envelope size setting) as its expected envelope size. To alter this setting, the 
envelope tray should be removed and reinstalled, and the selection procedure repeated within 10 
seconds of reinstallation. In contrast, the HP 33440 printer will remain in an off-line condition 
until explicitly placed on line by the user after insertion of an envelope tray. 

Keep in mind that this setting is completely independent of any Printing Menu item selection. 
This means that, for example, although the paper/envelope size in the Printing Menu of the HP 
33449 may have been changed to ENVEL0PE=C5, insertion of an envelope tray vwU yield the same 
PE TRAY= [envelope size] message, where the displayed envelope size may not necessarily be C5. If 
C5 envelopes are indeed loaded in the envelope tray, the user must notify the printer of this fact at 
the time the tray is installed. Once selected, however, each subsequent time the envelope tray is 
installed, PE TRAY=C5* (in our example) will be displayed as the new default value. 

For both printers, once set, the envelope tray size setting vnll not be altered by any other 
procedure than the one just discussed. Not even a COLD RESET routine will modify this setting. 



3-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Resetting the Printer 

The printer can be reset in three different ways: 

■ Pressing the (continue/reset | key until 07 RESET is displayed or sending an ^c E resets the 
printer to the values the user has selected through the Printing Menu. 



■ Pressing the [enter/reset menu] key until 09 MENU RESET is displayed resets the printer and all 
Printing Menu items to the factory default settings. 

■ Performing a COLD RESET (or "Cold Start") operation resets the printer and menu items to 
factory default Printing and Configuration Menu settings. (See "Cold Reset Routine.") 

Most software automatically sends the ^c E command (the RESET command) before and after 
each job. With some software packages, this command may need to be sent by the user from the 
computer or a Control Panel RESET routine may need to be performed before sending a new job 
to the printer. Resetting the printer ensures that the Printing Menu settings from the Control 
Panel are used. If these settings are changed often or if printer commands that affect page format 
are sent, the printer may need to be reset to make sure that the desired settings are in use. (Note: 
any temporary fonts and temporary macros are also cleared when resetting the printer.) 

Ordinarily, software will perform any necessary printer reset for the user. Note that a Control 
Panel reset will clear (rather than print) any buffered data in the printer's memory. 

Reset Menu Routine 



Holding down the (reset menu) key at least two seconds until 09 MENU RESET is displayed returns 
Printing Menu settings to factory default settings and puts these settings in effect. It also clears 
temporary soft fonts, temporary macros, and any stored page data. 

Cold Reset Routine 

A "COLD RESET" returns all Printing Menu and I/O Configuration Menu items to their factory 
default settings. "COLD RESET" does not reset the page count or envelope cassette size (or, for 
the HP 33449, display language) settings which are also stored in non-volatile RAM. A "COLD 
RESET" is performed by holding down the [on lime) key while powering on the printer. 08 COLD 
RESET (not localized for HP 33449) is displayed for one second, followed by the power-on SELF 
TEST message. The actual "COLD RESET" is performed immediately after the display shows 00 
READY, and, afterward, the printer must be put on line by the user. Since I/O configuration values 
have been reset to factory defaults, proper settings should be verified before placing the printer on 
line. 



3-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



3-4. USING THE PRIMTING AND CONFIGURATION MENUS 
Overview 

Since the HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing and Configuration Menus are quite similar, they have 
been combined, using the HP 33440 as the basis for discussion, with HP 33449 information added 
where there is a substantial difference. All HP 33449 messages for Printing and Configuration 
Menus are localized. (See Appendix F, "HP 33449 Display Language Message Translations.") 

The (menu) key accesses both the Printing and Configuration Menus. (The printer must be off hne 
to access both menus.) Briefly pressing the [menu) key enters the Printing Menu. Holding down 
the [menu] key for several seconds enters the Configuration Menu. 

■ The Printing Menu contains printing items which determine the final appearance of the printed 
page, such as the number of copies, lines-per-inch, or font selection. 

■ The Configuration Menu contains printer configuration settings such as communication 
parameters, Resolution Enhancement levels, and memory configuration. 

■ Pressing the (+) or (^ key allows the user to step through the menu item choices; holding 
down the key scrolls quickly through menu item choices. Once the desired selection appears, 
it can be saved by pressing the [enter] key. An asterisk (*) will appear next to the item to 
indicate it has been selected. 

■ Press [on lime) at any time to exit a menu and return the printer to the on-line state. 

Printing Menu Settings 

The Printing Menu for both the HP 33440 and HP 33449 includes the following items: 

■ Number of copies. 

■ Manual feed selection. 

■ Font source. 

■ Font number. 

■ Lines-per-page. 

The Printing Menu for the HP 33449 includes these additional items: 

■ Pitch (scalable, fixed-spaced fonts only). 

■ Point Size (scalable, proportionally spaced fonts only). 

■ Paper (or envelope) size. 

■ Print Orientation. 

■ Symbol Set (in Configuration Menu for HP 33440). 

To enter the Printing Menu, briefly press the (menu] key; COPIES= will be displayed. Table 3-2 
(combined HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing Menu items) and Table 3-3 (HP 33449 additional 
Printing Menu items) can be used as quick reference guides for using the Printing Menu. These 
tables describe printer Control Panel keys used to select Printing Menu items (the "Printer 
Displays" column shows the factory default settings). 

Mote For the HP 33440 only, if a Printing Menu selection is made and the software 

I does not perform a reset by sending an ^c E, then, the printer must be reset using 

^ the RESET key on the Control Panel in order for the selection to take effect. The 

^ HP 33449 accompUshes this with the AUTO RESET feature. 



3-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 3-2. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printing Menu Items 



Iteins 


Printer Displays 


Press 


Choices 


Press 


Copies 


HP 33440: C0PIES=01*^ 
HP 33449: C0PIES=1* 


or 

u 

to 

step 

or 

scroll 

through 

items 


01 . . . 99 
1 . . . 99 




[ENTER) 
to save 

selection 
or 


Manual 
Feed 


MANUAL FEED=OFF* 


ON or OFF 


Font 
Source 


FONT SOURCE=I* 


I -Internal Fonts 
L-Left Cartridge 
R- Right Cartridge 
S- Soft Fonts 


[ON LINEl 

to exit 

menu 

or 


Font 
Number 


HP 33440: FONT NUMBER=00* 
HP 33449: FONT NUMBEE=0* 


00 . . . 99 
. . . 999 


[MENU] 

to 
continue 


Form 
Length 


HP 33440: F0RM=060 LINES* 
HP 33449: F0RM=60 LINES*^ 


005 .. . 128 
5... 128 


1- An asterisk (*) following an item indicates that the selection is saved. 
2. F0RM=64 LINES with HP 33449AB printers as shipped (220 V). 



Table 3-3. HP 33449 Additional Printing Menu Items 



Items 


Priiiter Displays 


Press 


Choices 


Press 


Pitch^ 

or 

Pt. Size^ 


PITCH=10.00*^ 

or 

PT. SIZE=12.00* 


or 

Q 

to step 

or 
scroll 

through 
items 


0.44... 99.99 

or 

4.00 . . . 999.75 




( enter! 

to save 

selection, 


Media 
Size 


PAPER=LETTER*^ 


LETTER (or LEGAL, A4, EXEC) 
ENVELOPE=COM10 (or MONARC, 
C5, or DL) 


(ON LINE) 

to exit 
or 


Orientation 


ORIENTATION=P* 


LorP 


(menu) 

to 
continue 


Symbol 
Set^ 


SYM SET=R0MAN-8* 
(HP 33449 only) 


See Table 3-7 


1- An asterisk (*) following an item indicates that the selection is saved. 

2. Selectable for a scalable, fixed-pitch font only. 

3. Selectable for a scalable, proportional-pitch font only. 

4. PAPER=A4 with HP 33449AB printers as shipped (220 V). 

5. Symbol Set is in the Configuration Menu for the HP 33440. 



3-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Configuration Menu Settings 

The Configuration Menu for both printers includes the following items: 

■ Symbol Set (HP 33440 only). 

■ Auto Continue. 

■ Interface Parameters. 

The HP 33449 Configuration Menu includes the following additional items and omits Symbol Set, 
which is in the Printing Menu: 

■ Resolution Enhancement. 

■ Page Protection. 

The Configuration Menu is used to program the printer for communication with a specific 
computer. To enter the Configuration Menu, press the [menu] key until: 

HP 33440: SYMBOL SET= appears in the display (about 5 seconds). 

HP 33449: AUTO CONT= appears in the display (about 5 seconds). 

Table 3-4 (combined HP 33440 and HP 33449 Configuration Menu items) and Table 3-5 
(HP 33449 additional Configuration Menu items) can be used as quick reference guides to 
Configuration Menu items. They describe menu items used primarily during initial setup and 
configuration. (The "Printer Displays" column shows the factory default settings.) 

Table 3-4. HP 33440 and HP 33449 Configuration Menu Items 



Items 


Printer Displays 


Press 


Choices 


Press 


Symbol 
Seti 


SYM SET=R0MAN-8*2 
(HP 33440 only) 


or 

to 

step 
or 

scroll 
through 

items 


See Table 3-6 




(ENTER] 

to save 

selection 
or 


Auto 
Continue 


AUTO CONT=OFF* 


ON or OFF 


Interface 


HP 33440: I/0=SERIAL* 
HP 33449: I/0=PARALLEL* 


SEIUAL or PARALLEL 
(or OPTIONAL)^ 


fON LiNE) 
to exit 

or 


Interface 
Type 


SERIAL=RS-232* ^ 
(HP 33449 only) 


RS-232 or RS-422 


IMENUJ 

to 
continue 


Baud 
Rate 


BAUD RATE=9600*3 


300, 600, 1200, 2400, 
4800, 9600, 19200 


XON 
Disposition 


ROBUST X0ir=0N*3 


ON or OFF 


DTR 
Polarity 


DTR P0LARITY=HI*^ 


HI or LO 


1- Symbol Set is in Printing Menu for the HP 33449. 

2. An asterisk (*) following an item indicates that the selection is saved. 

3. Only if SERIAL is selected. 

4. Only if SERIAL and RS-232 are selected. 

5. Only if an optional I/O interface is installed. 



3-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 3-5. HP 33449 Additional Configuration Menu Items 



Items 


Printer jDififplays 


::. :Pr^: . : ,,.^ 


Choices 


Press 


Resolution 
Enhancement 


RET=DARK*i 


©orQ 
to step 

or scroll 
through items 


DARK, MEDIUM, 
LIGHT or OFF 




tENTERjto save 
selection, 


Page 
Protection 


PAGEPR0TECT=0FF*2 


OFF, LTR, LGL, or A4 


LON LINEJ to exit, or 
(MENU} to continue 


1- An asterisk (*) following an item indicates that the selection is saved. 

2. Page Protection is available only when optional additional memory is installed. 



Symbol Sets 

A symbol set is usually selected during initial printer configuration. If a new default symbol set is 
selected from the appropriate menu, it will cause the font selection menu item to revert to FONT 
NUMBER=0. This is done because the printer places all fonts in the selected symbol set at the top 
of its font list and reassigns font numbers. If, after specifying a new default symbol set, font is 
not the desired default font, a new Print Fonts routine should be performed and a new default font 
selected from the resulting printout (see Section 3-5 for more information regarding Print Fonts). 

With ROMAN-8 selected as the default symbol set, the symbol sets in Table 3-6 are arranged in 
sequence as they are displayed on the HP 33440. The symbol sets in Table 3-7 which follows are 
arranged in sequence as they are displayed on the HP 33449. 

Auto Continue 

When AUTO CONTINUE is set to ON, recoverable errors will take the printer off line and 
display the message for 10 seconds before the printer will resume printing. When it is set to 
OFF, the printer will wait for the [continue] key to be pressed before printing will resume. It is 
recommended that AUTO CONTINUE be set to OFF so that any recoverable error messages show 
until they are corrected. Note: If your printer is part of a network, remote, or spooling system, 
AUTO CQNT=ON is the recommended setting. 

Interface Type 

The type of serial interface (RS-422 or RS-232) is selected from the Control Panel on the HP 
33449. To configure the HP 33440 for RS-422 communications, refer to Section 3-2. 



Resolution Enhancement (HP 33449 Only) 

Resolution Enhancement (RET) refines the print quality of characters and graphics by 
"smoothing" the fine gradations along the edge of the printed image. The RET option has four 
choices: dark, medium, light, and off. The factory default setting is DARK. 

Some optional interface boards from vendors other than Hewlett-Packard are not 
compatible with Resolution Enhancement. Examples are the Intel^ Visual Edge 
and the OP-Tek LaserPort and LaserPort GrayScale. When using one of these 
products, set RET=OFF. 



3-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 3-6. HP 33440 Symbol Sets in Sequence 



Set # 


Display 


,■■:::■ Symbol- :Set. ..-' 


8U 


ROMANS 


Roman-S 


ON 


ECMA-94 


ECMA-94 Latin 1 


lOU 


IBM-US 


PC-8 


IIU 


IBM-DN 


PC-8 Denmark/Norway 


2U 


ISO 2 


Int'l Ref. Version 


IE 


ISO 4 


United Kingdom 


OU 


ISO 6 


Ascn 


3S 


ISO 10 


Swedish 


OS 


ISO 11 


Swedish 


OK 


ISO 14 


JIS ASCII 


01 


ISO 15 


Italian 


4S 


ISO 16 


Portuguese 



Set # 


■Display 


Symbol Set 


2S 


ISO 17 


Spanish 


IG 


ISO 21 


German 


OF 


ISO 25 


French 


2K 


ISO 57 


Chinese 


OD 


ISO 60 


Danish\Norwegian 


ID 


ISO 61 


Norwegian v2 


IF 


ISO 69 


French 


5S 


ISO 84 


Portuguese: IBM 


6S 


ISO 85 


Spanish: IBM 


OG 


German 


HP German 


IS 


Spanish 


HP Spanish 









Table 3-7. HP 33449 Symbol Sets in Sequence 



Set # 


Display 


Symbol Set 


8U 


ROMAN-8 


Roman-8 


ON 


EC94 LI 


ECMA-94 Latin 1 


lOU 


PC-8 


PC-8 


IIU 


PC-8 DN 


PC-8 D/N 


12U 


PC-850 


PC-850 


lU 


LEGAL 


Legal 


2U 


ISO 2 


Int'l Ref. Version 


IE 


ISO 4 


United Kingdom 


OU 


ISO 6 


ASCn 


3S 


ISO 10 


Swedish 


OS 


ISO 11 


Swedish 


OK 


ISO 14 


JISASCn 


01 


ISO 15 


Italian 


4S 


ISO 16 


Portuguese 


2S 


ISO 17 


Spanish 


IG 


ISO 21 


German 


OF 


ISO 25 


French 


2K 


ISO 57 


Chinese 



Set # 


Display 


Symbol Set 


OD 


ISO 60 


Danish/Norwegian 


ID 


ISO 61 


Norwegian v2 


IF 


ISO 69 


French 


5S 


ISO 84 


Portuguese 


6S 


ISO 85 


Spanish 


OG 


German 


HP German 


IS 


Spanish 


HP Spanish 


6M 


VNMATH 


Ventura Math 


13J 


VNINTL 


Ventura International 


14J 


VNUS 


Ventura US 


5M 


PS MATH 


PS Math 


lOJ 


PS TEXT 


PS Text 


8M 


MATH-8 


Math-8 


15U 


PI FONT 


Pi Font 


6J 


MS PUBL 


Microsoft Publishing 


9U 


WINDOWS 


Windows 


7J 


DESKTOP 


DeskTop 









fote 



Changing the Control Panel symbol set affects the order in which fonts are listed 
on the font printout. It also affects the Control Panel default font. 



3-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Print Density and Resolution Enhancement 

The print density adjustment (see Chapter 4, Section 4-9) setting interacts with Resolution 
Enhancement. For any resolution enhancement level, adjusting the print density may place too 
much or too little toner at the transition points along gradually sloping lines. A slight bulging or 
pinching effect may be seen if the lines are examined closely. The following drawings illustrate 
how the line transitions appear with different amounts of toner: 




Figure 3-3= Print Density at Line Transitions 

1. Normal line transition. 

2. Too much toner; set RET in the Control Panel Configuration Menu to a lighter setting. 

3. Too little toner; set RET in the Control Panel Configuration Menu to a darker setting. 

Check the adjustment by examining a self-test printout (see Figure 3-4 for an enlarged portion of 
the printout). Look at the 33% slice in the pie chart. If light vertical stripes appear (see left side), 
try setting RET to the next darker setting. If dark vertical stripes appear, try setting RET to the 
next lighter setting. If the output still has dark vertical stripes (see right side), adjust the print 
density dial to a slightly lighter setting (a higher number on the print density dial) and repeat the 
adjustment. 




Figure 3-4. Vertical Stripes in the 33% Pie Slice 



3-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Page Protection (HP 33449 Only) 

For Page Protection to appear as a Configuration Menu option, at least 1 Mbyte of optional 
memory must he installed. 

A page's complexity (rules, vector graphics, or dense text) may exceed the printer's ability to create 
an image and keep pace with the engine printing process. If a page is too complex, the page might 
print in parts or only part of the page might print. In such cases, a 21 PRINT OVERRUN message 
(signifying possible loss of print data) will appear in the display. 

Page Protection reserves additional memory for the page image process, allowing the printer to 
create the entire page image (in memory) before physically moving the paper through the printer. 
This ensures that the entire page will be printed. Page Protection can be set for LTR (letter), A4 , 
or LGL (legal) size pages. 

Page Protection reconfigures the printer's memory each time the page protection level is changed. 
For example, when Page Protection is enabled for letter-sized paper ("LTR"), 1040 Kbytes 
of memory is reserved for the "image memory," which is memory dedicated for page-image 
definition. When Page Protection is disabled (i.e., "OFF"), however, 848 Kbytes is released to user 
memory and 191 Kbytes is retained for the image memory. 

With a 1 Mbyte memory board installed, user memory consists of 720 Kb3^es of internal 
(the memory that comes with the printer) user-available memory and the 1024 Kbytes of 
added memory- a total of 1,744 Kbytes. Table 3-8 illustrates the available memory for various 
configurations: 

Table 3-8. 

Page Protection Memory Configurations 

(With 1 Mbyte Of additional memory) 



Status 


User Memoiy 


Image Memory 


OFF 


1,744 Kbytes 


191 Kbytes 


LTR/A4 


896 Kbytes 


1,040 Kbytes 


LGL 


702 Kbytes 


1,234 Kbytes 



When the [ enter 1 key is pressed, 17 MEMORY CONFIG will briefly appear in the display, indicating 
that the memory is being reconfigured for (or from) Page Protection. The printer then performs 
an internal self test and automatically returns on line. When all optional memory is removed from 
the printer, Page Protection is automatically set to OFF. 

Mote The printer erases all downloaded fonts (including permanent fonts) and all 

I macros (including permanent macros) and any page data when memory is 

^H reconfigured for Page Protection. 



3-20 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



3-5. FONT PRi 



^UT 



Understanding the Font Printout 

Font printouts for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 are different although the printout procedure is 
basically the same: 



1. Take the printer offline, then briefly press the (print FONTS/TEsfl key, 

2. The message, 06 FONT PRINTOUT, will appear and several pages will be printed. (HP 33449 
only: thirty seconds may elapse between pages to allow time for the generation of any scalable 
characters.) 

HP 33440: 

The HP 33440 printout displays six columns of information: numbered items below refer to 
Figure 3-5: 

1. Font ID is the number the printer uses to select internal fonts, cartridge fonts, or downloadable 
soft fronts from the Control Panel. (Note: this is not a soft font ID number used by software.) 
The letter preceding the font number indicates the location of the font. 

S = Permanent soft font, residing in printer memory. 

R = Fonts in the right font cartridge. 

L = Fonts in the left font cartridge. 

1 = Internal printer fonts. 

2. Name is the name of the typeface (e.g., COURIER). 

3. Pitch shows the characters-per-inch of a fixed pitch font or "PS" for proportionally spaced 
fonts. 

4. Point Size refers to the character's height (72 points per inch, 28.3 per centimeter). 

5. Symbol Set refers to the specific collection of characters and symbols associated with a font 
(see Table 3-6). 

6. Print Sample shows what the font characters look like. 



3-21 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FONT 
ID 



NAME 



PORTRAIT FONTS 



POINT SYMBOL 
PITCH SIZE SET 




"PERMANENT" SOFT FONTS 
SOI CG CentSchl 



LEFT FONT CARTRIDGE 

L45 Helv 

L4 6 Helv ITALIC 

L47 Helv BOLD 

L48 Helv 

L49 Helv 

RIGHT FONT CARTRIDGE 



INTERNAL FONTS 



j:oo coyRiER 

I01^,-'C6URIER 



PRINT SAMPLE 



PS 



10 



PS 


12 


PS 


10 


PS 


10 


PS 


10 


PS 


8 



7 J ABCDEfghij#$@t\]**{ i } ~ 123 



OU ABCDEfghij#$@[\]'"' { | } ~ 1 23 

OU ABCDEfghij#$@[\p-{ \}~123 

OU ABCDEfghij#$@[\]'-'{|}-123 

OU ABCDBghij#$@[\l'"'{i}~123 

OU ABCDEfghij#$@[\]'-<|}-123 




15.6 



OF ABCDEfghij£$a°<?§~" eue 123 

8U ABCDEfghij#$@[\.]'^M I }~123 

AA ° gN ] £. £ § eeaeeoASaaeAUBADO 

lOU ABCDEfghij#$@[\]*" { I }"123 

i6mhilii^-H-itHHhrMHila7r$ 

IIU ABCDEfghijSSeiX]"" { I }"12 3 

ON ABCDEfghij#$@[\]"" { I ri23 

'\<^^ 'f .^ »^AAEEiiD66x0u&aae 

,8U ABCDEfghij#$@[\]*M I >-123 

aA ° 9N ; 4^§eeaeedA0a£AU6AD6 

OF AB5Mrfghij£$a*5§*'eue"123 

iBCDEfghij#$@[\]"" {|}'12 3 

IIU ABCDEfghij#$@[\]*" { !}"12 3 

ON ABCDEfghij#S@[\]"" { i}'123 
i *^ '5I»^ »35AAEEiiD66x0ui'aae 

8U ABCDEfghij#ia[\]'H|)-123 

OF ABCDEfghij£$a°5;r"eue"123 
lOU ABCDEfghij**S)t\r'<:|>"123 

IIU ABCDEfghij#taC\r'<:|)'123 



Figure 3-5. 

HP 33440 Font Printout 

(In English only) 



3-22 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
HP 33449: 

The HP 33449 printout displays 11 columns of information in the localized language. Numbered 
items below refer to Figure 3-6: 

1, Font # is the number the printer uses to select internal fonts, cartridge fonts, or downloadable 
soft fronts from the Control Panel. (Note: this is not a soft font ID number used by software.) 
The letter preceding the font number indicates the location of the font. 

S = Permanent soft font, residing in printer memory. 

R = Fonts in the right font cartridge. 

L = Fonts in the left font cartridge. 

I = Internal printer fonts. 

For the HP 33440, Font ID is the equivalent of Font # for the HP 33449. 



2. Font ID is an ID number assigned only to permanent soft fonts downloaded from the host 
system and selected by software. 

3. Symbol Set refers to the specific collection of characters and symbols associated with a font. 
Internal and cartridge scalable fonts will only be shown in the symbol set selected on the 
Control Panel. (See Table 3-7). 

4. Fix/PS indicates whether the font has fixed or proportional spacing (F or P). 

5. Pitch (cpi) shows the characters-per-inch of a fixed pitch font. (If the font is a scalable, 
fixed-spaced font, "Scale" will appear in this column.) 

6. Point Size refers to the character's height (72 points per inch, 28.3 per centimeter). (If the 
font is a scalable, proportional-spaced font, "Scale" will appear in this column.) 

7. Style indicates whether the font is upright or italic. 

8. Stroke Weight is a font treatment such as medium, bold, light, or black. 

9. Name or Typeface is the name of the typeface. 

10. Default Orient indicates whether the font defaults to either portrait or landscape orientation. 
(Note that the HP 33449 printer, unlike the HP 33440, can rotate fonts to the orientation 
selected by the software, even if the font is not resident in the printer in that orientation.) 
Fonts produced from scalable typefaces are only listed in the portrait orientation. 

11. Print Sample and Escape Sequence. Print sample shows what the characters look like. 
Escape sequence is an actual printer command sequence used to select the designated font. 



3-23 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Font List 



Pitch Point style strofce Name or Default 

Ccpi) Size Weight Typeface Orient 




Print Sample S 
Escape Sequence 



Scale Upright Light Revue Lt Port eacDEfghijfO | -| fi®=j| =;] C-L-#S@[) " " { | }" 1 23 

tEsc>{12U<Esc><sIp_v0s-3b4193T 



Port ABCDEfghijM-gRi i£Se#$@ [ ] " M I }- 

<Esc>C8U<Esc>(s0pl0.00hl2.Ov0s0l33I 

Port ABCl)EfghijiA=;Bii£5eMaO"<|>-1234S^e5Mii!i0l!ODa 
<EEC><SU<Esc>(s0pl6.67ha.5v0s0b0T 

Port RBCDEfghijAfe''9Si6£Se#$9( ]- • { | )-123eae 
<Esc?(8U<;Esc>(sOpl2.00h10.0vOsOb3T 

Port ABCDEfghijM»5Sii£SS#S9[]-'{| )-123S4S 
<Esc>(8U<Esc:>CsOp12.00hlI).OvOs3b3T 

Port RBCOEfgh±jM.°gS t l£S^*$S [ }' • {\}~123sks 
<Esc>(SU<Esc><sOp12.00h10.0v1sOb3T 

Port ftBCDBf ghij&fi»gSi ££§e#$e [ ] ~ M I }- 

<Esc>CSU<E£c>(sOptO.OOhl2.0vOs3b3T 

Port ABCDE fghijAA'gSic £§€:#$§[ ]^ ^ { \ }~ 
<E5c>CSJ-:Esc>(sOplO,oahl2,OvlsClb3T 

Port AB0DEfghijAA°CNii£§e#S@[]'"{ I } " 123 

<Esc>(8J-!Esc>(slp_v0s0b41Cilr 

Bd Port .i(CDEfghijAA°CN:i£§ei?$@[]"'{|}-123 

<Esc>CSU<Esc>(slp vOs3b410U 

"" <Esc>C8lJ<Esc><s1p_v1s0b410lr 

Bdit Port ,BCDE/ghgAA''gNu£§eff$@0~'{\}~Jl23 

'<Esc>C6J<Esc>(slp_vls3b410lr 

,Bc:DEf9hijAA°CNii£5e#$@[]-"{|}~123 
E5c>csi)-=esc>(sip_v0s0b;i48T 

Bd Port «cDEfghijAA°CNji£§e#$@I]"'{|}~123 

<E5C>C8LKESC><slp_vOs3b«14ST 

LPnivers Hdlt Port »BCDefghijAA''QNl^£%e#$@[r'{\} ~ 1 23 

<Esc>CSLr-:E£C>(slp_v1sab4148T 

Univers BdIt Port iSCOEfgb;jAA°CNii£%^#$@[r'{\} ~ 123 

<Esc>(8U<Esc>(slp_v1s3b4148T 



Line Printer 



Port ABCOEfghiJit' ■1.'»Mraa[]-'<lri23iEeiI0i)6xMMae 
<Eso>(0«<Esc>(sOp16.47h8.5v030bOT 



Figure 3-6. 

HP 33449 Foot Printout 

(Localized for selected Sangisage) 



3-24 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



General 

Three types of self-test routines, other than Service Mode tests covered in the next section, can be 
performed on the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. These self-test routines are: 

M 05 SELF TEST. 

■ 04 SELF TEST. 

■ 15 ENGINE TEST (Test Print). 

05 SELF TEST 

Each time the printer is powered on or the Control Panel (print fonts/test) key is held down for 
2-to-5 seconds, 05 SELF TEST is displayed. (If the key is held down longer, 04 SELF TEST will be 
displayed.) The printer will then execute a self test that verifies operation in the foUovwng areas: 

■ Program ROM. 

■ Internal Font ROM. 

■ RAM on the Interface/Formatter PCA and any optional (accessory) RAM PCAs. 

■ DRAM Controller. 

■ Interface/Formatter logic. 

■ All LEDs. 

If the self test was explicitly invoked, valuable information about page count, date codes, and 
configuration selections can be obtained from the first portion of the resulting printout. The 
information is summarized in Figure 3-7 for the HP 33440 and in Figure 3-8 for the HP 33449. 
When the printer is first switched on, only the non-printing portion of the self test is performed. 
A self test must be requested from the Control Panel or through an ^cz command to get a 
self-test printout. When the printing portion of the self test begins, the message 06 PRINTING 
TEST is displayed. The self test may be aborted by pressing the foN line) , (continue/reset) , or 
(print fonts/test) keys. The numeric portion of the message will flash while the self test is being 
aborted. 

i^Ote The self test is printed in the default media size in the default orientation. The 

HP 33440 self-test printout is an example of 12% print coverage (see Figure 3-7). 

^ The HP 33449 self-test printout is an example of 10% print coverage (see 

Figure 3-8). This may be useful as a reference in determining toner use. A typical 
EP-S Cartridge should have adequate toner to print 4000 sheets of paper at an 
average 5% coverage. 

Self-Test Printout Information 

The Self-Test Printout contains valuable information such as page count, firmware date codes, 
Control Panel settings, and any installed options. 



3-25 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

HP 33440 Self Test Printout 

The numbered items below refer to Figure 3-7. 

1. Page Count: Shows approximately how many pages have been printed over the life of the 
printer. Page count can be used to determine when to change the ozone filter and to track 
printer usage. The page count is current as long as the printer is powered on. When the 
printer is powered off, the page count is rounded down to the nearest ten-page increment and 
recorded in non-volatile memory. 

2. Date Codes: Shows Program ROM and Internal Font ROM date codes (YYYYMMDD). 

3. Auto Continue: Shows Auto Continue setting. 

4. Installed Memory: Shows total amount of available memoiy, 

5. Symbol Set: Shows selected sjmibol set. 

6. Printing Menu: Shows selected Printing Menu items. 

7. Configuration Menu: Shows selected Configuration Menu items. 

8. Sample Print: Shows ripple print pattern. This area is useful for checking print density and 
quality. 




Page Count=970 

Program ROM Datecode=19861203, Internal Font ROM Datecode=19 

Auto Continue=OFF 

Installed Memory=4608 Kbytes 

Symbol Set=IBM-US 

plenu Items: 

Copies=l, Manual Feed=OFF, Font Source=I, Font Number=00, 

Form=60 Lines 
Parallel I/O 



!"#$%&' () *+,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [ 
•"#$%&' ()*+,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [\ 
"#$%&' ()*+,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [\] 
#$%&' ()*+,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXyZ [\] ^ 
:&' ()*+,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [ \] ^_ 

./f\*M _ /m ->T A RC-7QQ • • .'=-s.'?fl»Ur'nT?T?niITTVT'VTariT>m3CTTn7XJVV'7 r \ T A. \ 



*+,-./ 012 3 4 56789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [\] '^_^abcde 
+ ,-./0123456789: ;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [\] ^_''abcdef 



3-26 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
HP 33449 Self Test Printout 

The numbered items below refer to Figure 3-8. 

1. Printing Menu: Shows the current Printing Menu selections in the order that they appear in 
the Control Panel display. Use this information to verify that the selections are active in the 
Printing Menu. 

2. Configuration Menu: Shows the current Configuration Menu selections in the order that they 
appear in the Control Panel display. Use this information to verify how the printer is set up to 
communicate with the computer. 

3. RAM Size: Shows how much memory is installed in the printer. 1024 Kbytes of installed 
memory is standard with the printer. If optional memory boards have been installed, a self test 
can be used to verify that the boards are installed properly. 

4. Page Count: Shows approximately how many pages have been printed over the life of the 
printer. Page count can be used to determine when to change the ozone filter and to track 
printer usage. The page count is current as long as the printer is powered on. When the 
printer is powered off, the page count is rounded down to the nearest ten-page increment and 
recorded in non-volatile memory. 

5. Date Codes and Installed Devices: Shows firmware and internal font date codes 
(YYYYMMDD) as well as installation of cartridges and media tray size. 

6. Sample Print: Shows ripple print pattern. The ripple print pattern (always in Courier for the 
HP 33449) and the areas at the top and bottom of the page are useful for checking print density 
and quality. 

7. Scalable Typefaces: Demonstrates the printer's ability to print with scalable typefaces. 

8. Graph/Pie Chart: The bar graph and pie chart test the printer's HP-GL/2 vector graphics 
capability. (The 33% portion of the pie chart also serves as a check on the Resolution 
Enhancement quality and proper adjustment- see Figure 3-4.) 

9. Patterns: Use the shading and Crosshatch patterns in the blocks at the top and bottom of the 
page as well as in the charts to check print density and quality. 



3-27 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




v'' 



= 1 CTnterrwL) 

> 

= LETTER 

a P CPortrait) 

' M LINES 

» OFF 

= ROUN-S 



SELF TEST 



_PPItlT:NG MENU: 

COPIES 

FOUT SOURCE 

FOIIT HUKBER 

PAPER 

OeiEUTATlON 

FORK 

MADUItL FEED 
__STM SET 

CONFtGUmTIOK HEHU: 
*UTO OOHT = OFF 

I/O > SER[«L 

SERIRL ' RS-232 

BAUD RATE ' 19200 

ROBUST XOH = OFF 

OtR POUUITY = ill 

RET = DARK 

PA GEPROTECT = LTR 

.RAH siie: JDTZK brytes 
^Page Count; 240 

imnre Ostecodc: 19890925 

Internal Font DiteCDde: 19S90320 

Font Cartridges Installed: HOME 
_Paper Tray: LETTER 

'^CDEFGHIJKLMN0PQRSTUVWXYZ[\J*_'«ljca«fghijkl«J>opqr8tUVWXya{ I >-f l"#$%t' {)*+,-. /Ol 
BC0EFGHIJXLKNOPQR8TDVWZYZ(\] * ^a]9cd«£ghijklllUlopqrstuVVX3'3{ | }-|i"#$%C' () *-l-,-. /012 
CDEFOHIJHJOIOPQRSTnVWXyZ t\] '_~«l)ed«f ghijltlnaopqr«t«VWxy»{ | }-||l"^$%£ ' ( ) *+, -. /0X23 

S^MlJf' ' '"-OOe if'ggSnr£a£VSf<^&^&ti&&61iA^}iSSSUAl0Xii0x)ild(}£lB6AIiSB<itl6d63SS6Yypp 
iSSlI -me t-^''ggSn!ea£¥§fi&&6ii&&66A&daaeoaAl0£il0a:^oaSXB6AMBOii6dO6SS(Ji^yt>p 






-abcdefg abcdefg 



abcdefg abcdefg abcdefg abcdefg 




Figure 3-8. HP 33449 05 SELF TEST Printout 



3-28 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




04 SELF TEST 



Holding down the (print fonts/test 1 key until 04 SELF TEST is displayed (about 5 seconds) will 
cause a continuous self test to be run using the 05 SELF TEST printout page. The continuous 
self-test mode is a good way to test the paper path since it only tests the electronics once while 
continuing to print out the self-test page. Pressing the (print fonts/test) , (on line) , or 
(continue/reset] key terminates the continuous test mode. The numeric portion of the message 
will flash while the self test is being aborted. 



Because of the complex graphics on the Self-Test page, printing speed for the HP 
33449 will be less than the full eight-page-per-minute rated level. 



Test Print (15 ENGINE TEST) 

Activating the TEST PRINT switch -accessed by inserting a pen or pencil into the hole on the 
lower right side of the printer (Figure 3-9) (behind a cover panel on the HP 33449) -causes a 
page of vertical lines (shown in Figure 3-10) to be printed. While printing, the display will read 
IS ENGINE TEST. This is an engine test only since the Interface PCA is completely bypassed to 
produce this print. It is useful to verify proper operation of the DC Controller circuitry and all 
other print engine components (I.e., everything but the Interface/Formatter PCA). Holding down 
this button will produce continuous pages until the button is released. 




Figure 3-9. Selecting the Test Print Switch (HP 33440 shown here) 



' > 

. ' > 



Figure 3-10. Portion of Test Print Pattern 



3-29 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



3-7. SERVICE MODE 

General 

Service Mode should only be used by service representatives. It exists to allow the page count 
(which measures the life of the print engine) to be reset in the event the Interface PCA is replaced 
and to print a test pattern which is useful for print quality analysis. 

Mote For the HP 33449, Service Mode messages are not localized (except for certain 

I messages, such as 05 SELF TEST, which are used in both user and Service Mode). 



Using Service Mode 

To access Service Mode: 



1. Hold down the (on line] , the (continue/reset 1 , and the (enter/reset menu] keys 
simultaneously for at least one second while powering on the printer. This interrupts the 
normal initial non-printing self test. If Service Mode has been properly selected, the display will 
be blank and all four LEDs will be illuminated. 



2. Press the (continue/reset] key once only. Then press the (enter/reset menu) key. 

3. The display will read SERVICE MODE (not localized) and all four LEDs on the Control Panel will 
still be illuminated. 

Note Any attendance message, such as 16 TONER LOW, will override the SERVICE MODE 

I display. However, the printer is in service mode at this time if the proceeding 

^^ steps were performed. 



4. Although the procedures are essentially the same, timing for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 differ 
at this point: 

HP 33440: After from 5 to 30 seconds, depending upon installed memory, 05 SELF TEST 

vidll be displayed and all four lights on the Control Panel will turn off. After 
about five seconds, 02 WARMING UP wall be briefly displayed, after which the 
printer v^dll again display SERVICE MODE and the ready indicator (only) will 
illuminate. 

HP 33449: After less than one second, 05 SELF TEST (not localized) will be displayed 

and all four lights on the Control Panel will remain lit for up to 60 seconds, 
depending upon installed memory, then turn off for about 10 seconds, after 
which the printer will again display SERVICE MODE and the ready indicator 
(only) will illuminate. 

If the self test fails, the printer will display the same error message that it normally would. 

5. To exit Service Mode for either printer, press either the [on lineJ or the [continue] key. To 
return the HP 33440 on Une, the [on line] key must be pressed again. 



3-30 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Self Tests 

Several self tests can be performed in Service Mode: 



1. HP 33449 only: Press the [primt fonts/test) key to perform the printing portion of the self 
test. 05 SELF TEST is displayed (localized for HP 33449) and a self-test printout is produced. 



2. For both printers, holding down the (print fonts/test 1 key until 05 SELF TEST is displayed 
(about two seconds) causes the formatter to first perform a self test. During the printing 
portion, 06 PRINTING TEST (localized for HP 33449) is displayed and a Service Mode self-test 
printout is produced. The printer will then a^n display SERVICE MODE. Figure 3-11 shows a 
sample of the Service Mode self-test print. 



3. The (print fonts/test] key can also be used to run continuous Service Mode self tests by 
holding down the key until 04 SELF TEST (localized for HP 33449) is displayed. After several 
seconds, the printer will begin continuously printing the Service Mode printout. 



4. To abort the self test, press the (on line] key once; this will return the printer to Service Mode. 
Several additional pages may be printed to clear the buffer, during which time the 04-portion of 
the message will flash. 



I III -^ 



I ill -^ 



2:63:5 2:4 1:34:4 3:3 2:2 1 



2:63:5 2:4 1:34:4 3:3 2:2 1 



2:63:5 2:4 1:34:43:32:2 1: 



I III -; 



2:63:5 2:4 1:3 4:4 3:3 2:2 1; 



I I -: 



2:63:5 2:4 1:34:43:32:2 1; 



^ nil i I — '^2:63:5 2:4 1:34:43:32:2 1: 



I III — 



I III -i 



- Ill I III -: 



2:6 3:5 2 



2:6 3:5 2 



2:6 3:5 2 



^ nil I 111 -: 



2:63:5 2 



= III I ill -i 



2:63:5 2 



= nil 1 1 -: 



2:63:5 2 



Figure 3-11. Portion of Service Mode Self Test 



Mote The Service Mode Self Test is printed in either the portrait or landscape 

I orientation, depending on the orientation setting established prior to entering 

^b Service Mode. It is also formatted to the default page size. 



3-31 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Setting the Page Count 

The page count, which is stored in non-volatile RAM and displayed on the self-test printout, 
represents the number of pages which have been formatted by the printer. If it becomes necessary 
to install a new Interface PCA, the page count should be set to reflect the page count (age) of the 
print engine. To set the page count, enter Service Mode and perform the following procedure: 

1. Before removing the old Interface PCA, verify the current page count of the printer. This can 
be done by e xecuting a 05 SELF TEST (before entering Service Mode) or, for the HP 33449, by 
pressing the (print FONTS/TEsfl key while in Service Mode, The page count can be found on 
the first line of the printout for the HP 33440 and following the Configuration Menu setting for 
the HP 33449. 

Note If a 05 SELF TEST will not execute, the page count can be verified by entering 

I Service Mode as described above. After entering Service Mode, perform the 

^b following steps: 



Press the (menu) key. 

PAGES=XXXXXX is displayed. XXXXXX is the page count currently stored in 
NVRAM. The underlined character denotes the cursor position. 

Record this number for future reference in setting the page count after 
installing the new PCA. 



2. After verifying the page count of the old Interface PCA, install the new PCA as described in 
Chapter 6. 

3. To store the page count in the Non- Volatile RAM (NVRAM) on the new Interface PCA, perform 
the following steps: 



■ After entering Service Mode, press the [menu) key. 

■ PAGES =XXXXXX is displayed. XXXXXX represents the digits for the page count currently 
stored in NVRAM. The underlined character denotes the cursor position. 

■ Using the (+) or (^ keys, select the desired value for the underlined digit and press (enter) . 
The cursor will automatically move one digit to the right. 

■ Set each digit in the same manner. When the final value has been entered, the printer will 
automatically return to Service Mode. 

Note The page count is accurate (current) as long as the printer is powered on. When 

I the printer 4s switched off, the page count is rounded down to the nearest 10 

^ increment and retained in NVRAM. This means that the page count number may 

be off by up to nine pages each time the printer is switched off. 



3-3^ 



4 



4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 

4-1. INTRODUCTION 4-3 

4-2. LIFE EXPECTANCY OF CONSUMABLES AND RELATED PARTS .... 4-3 

4-3. MAINTENANCE CHECKPOINTS 4-4 

4-4. CLEANING THE PRINTER 4-5 

General 4-5 

Transfer Guide 4-5 

Transfer Corona Assembly 4-6 

Registration Assembly 4-7 

Feed Guide Assembly . 4-7 

Fusing Assembly 4-8 

Fuser Separation Pawls 4-8 

Beam-To-Drum Mirror 4-9 

Primary Corona 4-10 

4-5. CLEARING PAPER JAMS 4-11 

Paper Pickup Area I 4-11 

Transfer Guide Area 4-12 

Fusing Assembly Area 4-12 

4-6. OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT 4-13 

4-7. FUSER CLEANING PAD REPLACEMENT 4-14 

4-8. EP-S CARTRIDGE HFE AND USE 4-15 

Cartridge Life 4-15 

"16 TONER LOW" Message 4-15 

4-9. PRINT DENSITY ADJUSTMENT 4-16 



4-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



igyres 



4-1. Maintenance Checkpoints 4-4 

4-2. Cleaning the Transfer Guide 4-5 

4-3. Cleaning the Transfer Corona Wire 4-6 

4-4. Cleaning the Registration Assembly 4-7 

4-5. Cleaning the Feed Guide Assembly 4-7 

4-6. Cleaning the Fusing Assembly 4-8 

4-7. Cleaning the Beam-to-Drum Mirror 4-9 

4-8. Cleaning Brush Location 4-10 

4-9. Cleaning the Primary Corona Wire in the EP-S Cartridge 4-10 

4-10. Paper Path and Jam Areas 4-11 

4-11. Clearing Jams in the Paper Pickup Area 4-11 

4-12. Clearing the Transfer Guide Area 4-12 

4-13. Clearing the Fusing Assembly Area 4-12 

4-14. Ozone Filter Replacement 4-13 

4-15. Replacing the Cleaning Pad 4-14 

4-16. Distributing Toner in the EP-S Cartridge 4-15 

4-17. Adjusting Print Density 4-16 



4-1. Service Life of Consumables 4-3 



4-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Very little routine operator maintenance is required for HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. Most 
maintenance and adjustment procedures are carried out only when the EP-S Cartridge is changed 
or there is a print quality or paper feed problem. Since the maintainable parts of both printers are 
similar, the HP 33440 has generally been used for illustration. 



All routine maintenance and adjustments are the customer's responsibility. Most 
of the following procedures are included for reference only. 



4-2. LIFE EXPECTANCY OF CONSUMABLES AND RELATED PARTS 

The expected service live of consumables and related parts is given in Table 4-1. Always inspect 
these components for wear when servicing the printer. The expected-service-life estimates are 
based on A4 or letter size prints with an average of 5 percent toner coverage at a density dial 
setting of "7". The control panel self test printout produces approximately a 12 percent coverage 
for the HP 33440, 10 percent for the HP 33449. 



Table 4-1. Service Life of Consumables 



Description : 


':m^;^ 


'"■■■ : iServifee ; Life ■ i# '. of :prints)- ; ■ ' ■ : 


.■■■■.■■::■::■:■■ "Remarjks " "' 


EP-S Cartridge* 


1 


Approximately 4000 pages 
(application dependent). 
Open: 6-mo. shelf life. 
Unopened: 2-yr. shelf life. 


Rocking the cartridge when 
TONER LOW appears may 
prolong cartridge life. 


Cleaner Pad* 


1 


Life of EP-S Cartridge. 


Included with EP-S 
Cartridge. 


Fusing Assembly 


1 


100,000** 




Feed Roller 
Assembly 


1 


100,000** or anytime the 
Separation Pad is replaced. 




Separation Pad 


1 


100,000** or anytime Feed 
Roller Assembly is replaced. 




Ozone Filter*** 


1 


50,000** 




Transfer Corona 


1 


100,000** 




*Customer responsibility. **Estimated, see note below. 
***HP responsibility on early HP 33440s. 



Mote 



The 100,000-page component service life is ONLY AN ESTIMATE. The service 
life of consumables is directly related to the type of media used and the type of 
printing being done. The Fusing Assembly, Feed Roller Assembly, Separation 
Pad, and Transfer Corona Assembly should be inspected for excessive wear and 
replaced if necessary whenever a printer is being serviced. 



4-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Principal maintenance checkpoints for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are illustrated in 
Figure 4-1 below. Since the printers are quite similar, the HP 33440 has been used for illustration 
here. 



Feed Guide Assembly 



B&tyiM J&^ j::^T«ol/Solveitt ' 



Peed Guide Damp cloth 



Remove debris. 



Ozone Filter' s^ if. 



Service Aaiea 


Tw'l/Solvent 


Reiitarks' 


Primary 
C&rona Wire 


Brush /Wire 
Cleaner 


Clean with "pad" end of tool. 


Photosensitive 
Drum 


Toner on a 

dry cloth 


Unless absolutely required, 
drum should not be touched 
or cleaned. Use only a clean, 
lint-free wipe and toner. Do 
not eKpose to light. 


Protective 
shield for 
drum 


Damp cloth 


Since image may be stained 
by falling toner, always clean 
this part 


Mirror Assembly 




-S^i^^ 


iP?KlWt 


ipii&^:.4 




Mirror 


None 


Gently blow 
debris from 
mirror surface. 





Feed Roller Assembly & Separation Pad + 




Transfer Area 



fusing Assembly ^k 



SteiTiliMJfAre* 


l3ifSo\y^ni\: ■■ Remarks | 


Puser Roller 
Cleaning Pad 


Dry cloth or 
wipe 


If dirty, pnnts will be dirty 
and paper jams \sill occur. 
Replace if necessary. 


Separation 
Pawls (Clav.'s) 


Isopropyl 
alcohol 


Be careful. Tops of pawls are 
easily danaaged. 


Paper Guides 


bopropyl 
alcohol 


Remove accumulated debris. 


Lower 
Deliveiy 

Guide 


Isopropyl 
alcohol 


Remove accumulated debris. 



Service Are^i 


Tool/Splveat 


Registration 

Rollers 


Damp 
lint-free wipe 


Transfer 
Guide 


Damp cloth 



Transrer Corona Assembly % 



Service Area 


TcioJ/SoI vent- 


: Remarks..- . 


Surface Areas 


Swab/ Isopropyl 


Carefully 




alcohol 


clean all toner 
around corona 
wire and 
filament. 


Wire 


New Swab 


When cleaning 




& Isopropyl 


wire, take care 




alcohol 


not to damage 
filament. 



♦Replace every 100,000 pages. 
**Replace every 50,000 pages. 



Figure 4-1. I\flainlenance Checkpoints 



Do not clean with -or expose rubber rollers or other rubberized parts to- isopropyl 
alcohol. Do not use ammonia-based cleaning products or the EP-S Cartridge drum 
may be permanently damaged. 



4-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



General 

If reduced print quality occurs, clean the inside of the printer by wiping any visible toner away 
with a damp cloth. Items that are colored green are user-accessible for cleaning. 

Toner is a nontoxic substance composed of plastic, iron, and a small amount 
of pigment. Care should be taken to avoid breathing toner particles. To clean 
toner from skin and clothing, remove as much toner as possible with a vacuum 
or dry tissue wipes, then wash the toner from skin or clothing with cold water. 
Hot water may make toner very difficult to remove. Because toner tends to be 
degraded by vinyl materials, contact with vinyl should be avoided. 



There are seven primary areas of the printer which should be kept clean: 

1. Transfer Guide. 

2. Transfer Corona Assembly. 

3. Registration Assembly. 

4. Feed Guide Assembly. 



5. Fusing Assembly. 

6. Beam-to-Drum Mirror. 

7. Primary Corona. 




The printer must be turned off prior to cleaning. 



Transfer Guide 

Wipe the Transfer Guide (silver strip, see Figure 4-2) clean with a damp cloth (use water only). 




Figure 4-2. Cleaning the Transfer Guide 



4-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Transfer Corona Assembly 

To clean the Transfer Corona Assembly: 

1. Switch the printer OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Dip a cotton swab in isopropyl alcohol. Water can be used if isopropyl alcohol is not available. 
Make sure the swab is not dripping. 

3. Carefully clean the Transfer Corona housing, removing as much toner buildup as possible, 

4. With a dean swab and isopropyl alcohol (or water), gently wipe the Transfer Corona wire (see 
Figure 4-3) with the cotton swab until no residue remains. 

5. With the brush-end of the green cleaning brush, remove any debris accumulations around the 
sharp row of static teeth on the output side of the Transfer Corona (see Figure 4-3). 



Caution Be careful not to break the monofilament lines that cross diagonally above the 

flfflg Transfer Corona wire. Also, be careful not to get alcohol on any rollers or plastic 

^M parts. 



Monofilament 
Lines 



Static Teeth 



Corona Wire' 




Figure 4-3. Cleaning the Transfer Corona Wire 



4-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Registration Assembly 



Remove any debris from the Registration Assembly's cover. Lift the cover of the Registration 
Assembly (see Figure 4-4) and wipe off any paper dust underneath the assembly cover with a 
damp cloth (use water only). 




Fsgure 4-4. Cleaning the Registration Assembly 
Feed Guide Assembly 

Wipe the Feed Guide Assembly (see Figure 4-5) with a dampened cloth (use water only). 




Figure 4-5. Cleaning the Feed Guide Assembly 



4-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Fusing Assembly 

Periodically cleaning the Fuser Separation Pawls (claws) (see Figure 4-6) will help prolong the life 
of the printer's Fusing Assemhly. 



Img The fusing area gets HOT. Also, be careful not to get toner on clothing; it may 

stain. 



Separation, 
Pawls 




Figure 4-6. Cleaning the Fusing Assembly 
Fuser Separation Pawls 
To clean the pawls: 

1. Turn the printer OFF. 

2. Fully open the Top Cover Assembly. 

3. Push the rear section of the Fusing Assembly (the section toward the rear of the printer) fully 
open. You will be able to see the four black plastic Fuser Separation Pawls (claws) along the 
lower edge of the section just pushed back (see Figure 4-6). 

4. Clean the tip of each pawl with a cloth dampened with water. Avoid contact with the main 
portion of the Fusing Assembly. 



4-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Beam-To-Drum Mirror 



The Beam-to-Dnim Mirror can be easily damaged. Normally, it can be cleaned by carefully 
blowing any debris off its surface. 



Newer assemblies contain a first surface mirror (i.e., a mirror with its reflective 
coating on the top, or first, surface) which can be easily damaged. Do not clean 
the mirror unless absolutely necessary (e.g., fingerprints, water condensation, etc.). 



If additional cleaning is required, proceed as follows: 

1. Access the Beam-to-Drum Mirror, located under the Top Cover Assembly, by moving the Mirror 
Shutter Assembly to the right (freeing the lever) and swinging it up and out of the way (see 
Figure 4-7, also "Mirror Shutter Assembly" in Chapter 6). 

2. Carefully clean the mirror vs^th a clean, lint-free wipe, dampened only with a cleaning fluid 
approved for a camera lens. 




Fjgure 4-7. Cleaning the Beam-to-Drum Mirror 



4-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Primary Corona 

Because the Primary Corona is delicate, it should only be cleaned when print quality begins to 
degrade (typically, dark vertical streaks on the page). 

Caution Clean the Primary Corona wire using only the pad-end of the cleaning brush 

a|a provided. Using a cotton swab or other cleaning tool may break the wire, 

^^ requiring replacement of the EP-S Cartridge, 



1. Turn the printer OFF. 

2. Open the printer's Top Cover Assembly. 

3. Remove the EP-S Cartridge from the printer. 

4. Lift out the cleaning brush, as shown in Figure 4-8. 

5. Carefully insert the felt-tipped end of the brush in one end of the EP-S cartridge slot, as shown 
in Figure 4-9. (The brush will fit only one way. Look carefully at Figure 4-9 for the correct way 
to position the cleaning brush.) 

6. Slide the brush back and forth a few times to dean the Primary Corona wire. 



7. Return the brush and the EP-S Cartridge to the printer. 




Figure 4-8. Cleaning Brush Location 




Figure 4-9. Cleaning the Primary Corona Wire in the EP-S Cartridge 



4-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



If 13 PAPER JAM appears in the display window, open the printer's Top Cover Assembly and look 
for jammed paper. Paper jams occur mainly in the following three areas: 

■ Paper Pickup area. 

■ Transfer Guide area. 

■ Fusing Assembly area. 

The three areas in the printer paper path mentioned above are illustrated in Figure 4-10 below: 




Paper Pickup Area 

Open the Registration Assembly cover and, if necessary, take out the paper tray to remove jammed 
paper (see Figure 4-11). 



ion Do not attempt to pull paper that has jammed back through to the front of the 

printer. This will result in damage to the Registration Assembly. 




in the Pa 



4-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Transfer Guide Area 

Open the Registration Assembly cover (Transfer Guide Lock) and remove jammed paper as shown 
in Figure 4-12. 




Figure 4-12. Clearing the Transfer Guide Area. 
Fusing Assembly Area 

Open the rear door of the Fusing Assembly and remove the jammed paper (see Figure 4-13). Pull 
the sheet back out of the fuser (as shown) to prevent contamination from unfused toner. 




Figure 4-13. Clearing the Fusing Assembly Area. 



4-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Ozone is a colorless gas generated by all laser printers and photocopiers. It may be perceived as 
pungent to those sensitive to its odor. The Ozone Filter, a customer-replaceable item, removes 
this odor. The filter should be replaced every 50,000 pages. If the printer is being operated in a 
confined environment, it may need to be replaced more often. Visual inspection will not show that 
a filter is dirty; page count is the only reliable indicator on which to base a decision to change a 
filter. 

On older HP 33440 printers, it may be necessary to remove the Ozone Filter Mount to change 
the filter. Until the printer is updated, it is HP's responsibility to change the Ozone Filter. On 
these models, the Ozone Filter Mount can be upgraded to allow the filter to be changed without 
removing the mount. Refer to Service Note 33440A-7 and to Chapter 6, Section 6-3. 

Conditions that may generate ozone complaints are: 

■ Multiple laser printers and/or copiers in a confined area. 

■ Extremely low relative humidity. 

■ Poor room ventilation. 

■ Printer exhaust port directed toward the face of personnel. 

■ Ozone Filter in poor condition (i.e., over 50,000 page count). 

■ Long, continuous printing combined with any of the above. 

Examine the printer's environment to determine if any of the preceding conditions 
exist. It may be necessary for the customer to take corrective action to ensure the 
printer's environment is fi:ee of conditions that may generate an ozone complaint. 



To replace a user-replaceable filter: 

1. The Ozone Filter is located in the housing on the inner right side of the printer (see 



Figure 4-14). 

2. Switch printer OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 

3. Slide the filter out and replace it with a new filter. 




Figyre 4-14. Ozone Filter Replacement 



4-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



4-7. FUSER CLEANING PAD REPLACEMENT 

To replace the Fuser Cleaning Pad: 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Open the Fusing Assembly top cover (green felt cover). 

3. Remove existing cleaning pad (see WARNING below). 

4. Use the felt end of the new cleaning pad to wipe the Fusing Assembly roller. 

5. Discard the felt end of the cleaning pad and insert the new cleaning pad. 

6. Lower the Fusing Assembly cover (it does not close tightly). 

7. Close the printer's top cover and turn the printer ON. 

Warning The Fusing Roller gets HOT. Be sure to hold the Cleaning Pad by the green 

g^ tabs as shown in Figure 4-15. 




Figure 4-15, Replacing the Cleaning Pad 



4-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Cartridge Life 

The electrophotographic (EP-S) cartridge is a clean and convenient means of supplying the 
consumable items needed in the printing process. When using either the HP 33440 or HP 33449 
printer for typical word processing applications, an EP-S Cartridge will print approximately 4000 
pages. If average pg^e coverage is light (a typical page of text has a great deal of *Svhite space"), 
the EP-S Cartridge should last longer. If the application requires a denser page coverage (graphics 
and forms, for example), then the EP-S Cartridge will not last as long. 

The life of an EP-S Cartridge can be extended by operating the printer with the print density 
adjustment dial set on a higher number (for lighter prints). See Adjusting Print Density on the 
following page. Also, see Chapter 2, Section 2-3, for EP-S Cartridge storage data. 



Do NOT attempt to refill a used cartridge. Damage to the printer can result. 



"16 TONER LOW" Message 

The 16 TONER LOW message indicates that the amount of toner in the EP-S Cartridge is getting 
low. White streaks will soon appear on printouts. For maximum usable life, remove the EP-S 
Cartridge and rotate around its long axis (see Figure 4-16) to distribute the remaining toner . 
Although the 16 TONER LOW warning may still be displayed, the fadeout should clear up allovdng 
up to 100 more pages to be printed. If the fadeout condition persists, the EP-S Cartridge must be 
replaced. 




Figure 4-16. Distrsbyting Toner in the EP-S Cartridge 



4-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Print density refers to the relative darkness of the print on the paper. Dense print appears very 
black with a slightly heavier look. Less dense print looks lighter, and solid-filled areas may not be 
completely black. 

When print density is set at a low number, toner is used at a faster rate, reducing the life of the 
EP-S Cartridge. Printing with the print density set to a higher number is a good way to conserve 
toner when darker print is not necessary. 

To adjust print density: 

1. Open the printer's Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Use the numbered green dial located at the left side toward the front of the printer (see 
Figure 4-17) to adjust density: "1" is the darkest setting, "9" is the lightest. An initial setting 
of "5" is recommended. 

3. Firmly close the printer's Top Cover Assembly. 

When using heavier paper and envelopes, the print density dial may need to be set 
to a lower (darker) setting to minimize background. 




Figure 4-17. Adjusting Print Density 



The Resolution Enhancement feature of the HP 33449 and the density adjustment 
affect each other. See Chapter 3, Section 3-4, for proper adjustment procedures. 



4-16 



5 



5. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 

5-1. INTRODUCTION 5-3 

5-2. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5-4 

Overview 5-4 

Photosensitive Drum 5-5 

Drum Sensitivity 5-5 

CLEANING: Stage One 5-6 

CONDITIONING: Stage Two 5-7 

WRITING: Stage Three 5-8 

DEVELOPING: Stage Four 5-10 

TRANSFER: Stage Five 5-11 

FUSING: Stage Six 5-12 

5-3. PAPER PICKUP/FEED SYSTEM 5-13 

Paper Path 5-13 

Manual Feed 5-14 

Paper Jam Sensing 5-14 

Main Drive 5-15 

5-4. MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM 5-16 

5-5. INTERFACE SYSTEM 5-17 

General . 5-17 

Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33440 Interface PCA Diagram 5-17 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 5-17 

ROM (Read-Only Memory) 5-17 

NVRAM (Non- Volatile Random Access Memory) 5-17 

SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 5-17 

Address Controller 5-18 

DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 5-18 

Bit Shifter 5-18 

Timing Controller 5-18 

I/O Controller 5-19 

Video Interface 5-19 

Font Cartridge Interface 5-19 



5-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33449 Formatter PC A Diagram ....... 5-19 

General 5-19 

ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Chip) 5-20 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 5-20 

EPROM/ROM (Erasable Programable Read Only Memoiy/Read Only Memory) 5-20 

NVRAM (Non-Volatile RAM) 5-20 

DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 5-20 

Font Cartridge Interface 5-20 

5-6. POWER DISTRIBUTION 5-21 



5-1. Diagram ofFunctional Blocks for HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 5-3 

5-2. Diagram of EP-S Cartridge Ulustrating Image Formation System 5-4 

5-3. Photosensitive Drum 5-5 

5-4. Drum Cleaning Station 5-6 

5-5. Erase Lamp Effect 5-6 

5-6. Primary Corona Assembly 5-7 

5-7, Rotating Scanner Mirror (Top view) 5-9 

5-8. Drum Signals 5-9 

5-9. Developing an Image 5-10 

5-10. Transfer of Toner Image 5-11 

5-11. Paper Separation 5-11 

5-12. Fusing Process 5-12 

5-13. Paper Pickup/Feed System 5-13 

5-14. Paper Reaching the Registration Rollers 5-14 

5-15. Main Drive System 5-15 

5-16. DC Controller Block Diagram 5-16 

5-17. HP 33440 Interface PCA Block Diagram 5-18 

5-18. HP 33449 Formatter Block Diagram 5-19 

5-19. DC Power Distribution 5-21 



Tables 



5-1. Drum Sensitivity Tab Settings 5-5 



• 



5-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



This functional overview of the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers is designed to provide the service 
representative with a general understanding of the processes which occur during printing. The 
diagram below (Figure 5-1) groups the four basic functional blocks discussed in this chapter: 

■ Section 5-2: Image Formation System. 

■ Section 5-3: Paper Pickup/Feed System. 

■ Section 5-4: Machine Control System (DC Controller PCA). 

■ Section 5-5: Interface System. 

■ Section 5-6: Power Distribution. 

For additional details about how the printers function in various operational situations, refer also 
to Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting." 



Face up tray 

r — / 



To external device (host computer, etc) 



SYSTEM INTERFACE 



Interface PCB 

r~t 



Control panel 



Video controller PCB 



I 



I 



t_L 



PICK-UP/FEED 
Delivery SYSTEM 

rollers 




Figure 5-1. Diagram of Functional Blocks for HP 33440 and HP 33449 Printers 



5-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Overview 

Laser printing requires the interaction of several different areas of technology (mechanical, 
electronics, optics, electrophotographies, etc.) which must be coordinated to produce a printed 
page. The first in the sequence of processes, image formation, centers around the photosensitive 
drum contained in the Electrophotographic (EP-S) Cartridge and consists of four progressive 
stages: 

■ Cleaning. 

■ Conditioning. 

■ Writing. 

■ Developing. 

Two additional stages, performed outside the EP-S Cartridge, are: 

■ Transferring. 

■ Fusing. 

Most image formation system components which undergo wear or degradation (consumable 
components) are conveniently assembled in the replaceable EP-S Cartridge. Because this makes 
maintenance essentially an operator's task, it eliminates the need for a service call when these 
parts must be replaced. The EP-S Cartridge contains the photosensitive drum, Primary Corona, 
developing station, toner cavity, and cleaning station. A cross-section of the EP-S Cartridge 
detailing the image formation system and its relationship to other printer components is illustrated 
in Figure 5-2. 



IDITIONliSlG Mirror 
Primary Corona Wire ]/£~ 



Laser Beam 



1^ Cleaning 
1 Blade 



Primary Corona Grid 



• Blade DEVE 

Developing Cylinder 



Fusing Bolter Cleaner 

FUSING 

Upper Fusing Roller 





J 



^ Cartridge 

(~\ Pick-Up Roller 



Registration Rollers 

TRAMSFERRING 



static-Charge Transfer Corona 
Eliminator 



Lower Fusing Roller 



Feed Guide Assembly 



Figure 5-2. Diagram of EP-S Cartridge HSustratirag Smage Formation System 



5-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Photosensitive Drum 



The photosensitive drum- the core of the image formation system- has special properties which 
allow an image to be formed on its surface and then transferred to paper. The drum is an 
extruded aluminum cylinder which is coated with a non-toxic layer of organic photoconductive 
material (OPC). The aluminum base of the drum is electrically connected to ground. 

The OPC material has properties similar to a photodiode. It becomes electrically conductive (in 
one direction only) when exposed to light. Negative chaises deposited on the surface of the drum 
conduct to the aluminum (zero potential) base of the drum when exposed to light. Areas of the 
drum not exposed to hght remain nonconductive and retain the initial charge. 

Cautiosi Do not expose the drum to direct sunlight or any other bright light source; 

pa» permanent damage to the drum could occur. 



Drum Sensitivity 

Because all drums cannot be manufactured to the exact same sensitivity levels, they are tested at 
the factory and given a rating of high, medium, or low sensitivity (see Table 5-1). Depending on 
this rating, tabs are placed on the cartridge which enable printer microswitches which, in turn, 
control laser power output to adjust for the drum's sensitivity level. These microswitches also 
indicate whether or not the EP-S Cartridge is installed. 

Table 5-1. Drum Sensitivity Tab Settings 



Drum Sensitivity 


CSENS:-^C 


?CSENS 2 


High 


L 


L 


Medium 


L 


H 


Low 


H 


L 


Cartridge not Installed 


H 


H 


L = Switch Activated 



High-Voltage 
Power Supply 



^ 




Photosensitive 
Layer 



■Aluminum Base 



Figure 5-3. Photosensitive Drum 



5-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

CLEANING: Stage One 

During the first stage of the image formation process, the drum's surface is prepared to hold an 
image through a physical and electrical cleaning process. During printing, the drum is constantly 
rotating, making several complete rotations per printed page. Before forming the image for a given 
section of print, leftover toner from the previous rotation of the drum must be removed. This is 
accomplished hy a rubber cleaning blade which scrapes toner off the drum and into a debris cavity. 
A sweeper blade in the debris cavity rotates, sweeping toner away from the area near the drum 
(see Figure 5-4). 

The drum is electrostatically cleaned by the Erase Lamps (see Figure 5-5). These five small lamps, 
located in the hinged Top Cover Assembly, illuminate the drum's photosensitive material to 
neutralize any electrical charges which may have previously been on the drum. The illumination 
of these lamps is controlled by the Machine Control System (DC Controller PCA). 









' 






1 » 


Cleaning blade 

/ 








\ \\ 


Sweeping b 


ac 


3. 




1^ 


Sweeper strip 

















Figure 5-4. Drum Cleaning Station 













Photosensitive 






DC 
Controller PCA 




Red __ 
Filter 






Erase 
Lamps 




Layer 

^_ Aluminum 








Base 



Figure 5-5. Erase Lamp Effect 



5-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



CONDITIONING: Stage Two 

After the drum has been physically and electrically cleaned, it must be conditioned. The 
conditioning process consists of the application of a uniform negative charge on the surface of the 
drum by the Primary Corona Assembly (see Figure 5-6) located inside the EP-S Cartridge. This 
—6 KV charge, applied to the corona wire by the High Voltage Power Supply Assembly, creates a 
corona effect. This means that the air surrounding the wire is ionized and no longer acts as an 
insulator. Negative charges from the wire migrate to the surface of the drum. 

The Primary Corona grid (see Figure 5-6), positioned between the corona wire and the drum, 
regulates the voltage applied to the drum's surface, so that a uniform —600 V charge is deposited. 
The corona grid is connected to a varistor in the High Voltage Power Supply Assembly which 
bleeds off any extra current which would raise the surface voltage above the desired level. 



Primary 
Corona 



Primary 
Grid 



-600V 




-6KV 



/^^ 



Regulates 
to - 690V 



High-Voltage 

Power Supply 

Assembly 



■w- 



I 



DC Controller 
PCA 



Figure 5-6. Primary Corona Assembly 



5-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

WRITING: Stage Three 

After rotating past the conditioning station, the drum has a uniform —600 V potential on its 
surface. At the writing station, a laser beam is used to discharge this potential in selected areas by 
focusing laser hght on selected portions of the photoconductive drum. This creates what is known 
as an electrostatic image. This image is later developed into a visible image. 

The following is an explanation of how laser light is controlled to achieve the electrostatic im^e 
described above. Laser light is produced by a small laser diode which is turned on and off by 
suppling or denying power. The fixed focus beam of the laser diode is directed onto a six-faced 
rotating polygon mirror (see Figure 5-7). As the mirror rotates, the beam reflected off the mirror 
sweeps in an arcing fashion. Through a set of mirrors and lenses, the swept beam is brought 
into focus to describe a horizontal line on the photosensitive drum. The beam reaches the drum 
through an opening in the top of the EP-S Cartridge. 

Because the beam is sweeping, the entire length of the drum can be covered by the beam; 
similarly, because the drum is rotating, the entire circumference can be covered. This sweeping 
of the drum and modulation of the beam allows exposure of all desired surfaces on the drum (see 
Figure 5-8). This is similar to how the electron beam in a television set scans to form a video 
image on the screen. 

The speed of the Scanner Motor (which rotates the polygonal mirror) and the speed of the main 
motor (which rotates the drum) are synchronized so that each successive sweep of the beam is 
offset on the surface of the drum by 1/300 of an inch. The beam can also be turned on and off 
at such a rate as to place an intermittent series of dots of light every 1/300 of an inch in the 
horizontal direction. This is how the printer achieves its 300 x 300-dots-per-square-inch resolution. 
(Note that one aspect of the HP 33449's Resolution Enhancement"^^ feature allows for more 
defined dot placement in the horizontal direction.) The Scanner Motor is controlled by the 
SCNCONT line from the DC Controller. This voltage level varies depending on the Scanner Motor 
speed feedback signals FG+ and FG- (see Figure 5-15 also). 

Before the beam reaches the drum at the beginning of each sweep, it is reflected off a small mirror 
into an optical fiber cable. This momentary pulse of light is sent down the optical fiber to the DC 
Controller PCA where it is converted to an electrical signal which, in turn, is used to synchronize 
the output of data for one sweep (scan line). This pulse- called the Beam Detect pulse -is also 
used to diagnose problems with the laser or scanner motor. (See Figure 5-8.) 

After passing the writing station, the drum's surface has an invisible electrostatic latent image. 
The portions of the drum not exposed to the laser are still at the -600 V potential (placed 
there by the Primary Corona) while those portions exposed to light have been discharged to 
approximately —100 V. 

Mote Because the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are class I laser products, they are 

I safe for office or data processing use. The laser used in the printer is a solid state, 

^M infrared, class in laser. 



Although the infrared laser beam is invisible, eye damage may result if direct 
or indirect (reflected) eye contact with the laser beam should occur. Heed ail 
CAUTIONS and WARNINGS when working on the printer with covers removed or 
with the laser unit itself. 



5-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Direction of scan 




Laser beam 



Scanning mirror 



To external device 



t 



Interface PCA 
BD VDO VSTNC 



BD 



DC controller 



PD LDRV 



SCNCONT 



Collimator 

ens \ Cylindrical 
lens 



Optical 
fiber 




Focusing 
lenses 
Beam detect mirror 

Mirror 



Photosensitive drum 



Figyre 5-S. Drum Signals 



-100V CHARGE 
WHERE LASER 
STRIKES 

-600V CHARGE 
WHERE LASER 
DOES NOT STRIKE 



5-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

DEVELOPING: Stage Four 

At the developing station, the invisible electrostatic image is developed into a visible image on 
the drum when toner from a developer cylinder is transferred to discharged areas on the drum. 
The developer consists of a rotating metallic cylinder, a fixed magnet that runs the length of the 
cylinder, a toner cavity, and a toner-brush-height-control blade. The toner in the toner cavity 
is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles. The iron in the 
toner causes it to be attracted to the magnet inside the cylinder. As the cylinder rotates, the 
brush-height-control blade limits the amount of toner on the cylinder. 

The plastic toner particles acquire a negative surface charge by rubbing against the cylinder 
which is connected to a negative DC supply (see Figure 5-9). This electrostatic charge causes the 
toner particles to be attracted to the areas of the drum which have been exposed to laser light 
and repelled from the areas not exposed (see Figure 5-9). An AC potential is also applied to the 
developer cylinder to further assist toner particles to overcome the attraction of the magnet and to 
pull toner back to the cylinder from unexposed areas, thus improving density and contrast. 

The DC bias of the developer cylinder can be user-adjusted with the Print Density control. This 
changes the attractive force between toner and drum, pulling more or less toner to the drum. 



.Blade 



Developing cylinder surface potential 



-100 

-600 



Drunn surface potential 
ex posed area) 



■/" 



— DC bias 






Time (t) 



rum surface 
potential 
(unexposed area) 



Developing cylinder 




Figure 5-9. Developing an Image 



Note The charges making up the latent image shown in Figure 5-9 are negative but 

I they are shown as positive in the illustration because they are less negative than 

^^ the charges on the toner. 



5-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



TRANSFER: Stage Five 

At the transfer station, the toner image on the drum is transferred to the paper. A corona 
assembly is positioned behind the paper so that the paper, which is travehng at the same speed the 
drum's surface is rotating, contacts the drum. This corona produces positive charges which collect 
on the back of the paper. Because the positive charges on the paper are stronger, they pull the 
negatively charged toner particles off the drum (see Figure 5-10). 

As the paper and drum continue to advance, the small radius of the drum and the stiffness of the 
paper cause the paper to naturally peel away from the drum (see Figure 5-11). Separation is also 
assisted by a high negative voltage being applied to a row of sharp metal teeth -the Static Charge 
Eliminator. This Static Charge Eliminator weakens the attractive forces between the negatively 
charged drum surface and positively charged paper. Without this assistance, thin papers could 
conceivably wrap around the drum. From the transfer station, the paper moves to the fusing 
station and the drum rotates back to the cleaning station to prepare it to receive the next section 
of print. 




Figure 5-10. Transfer of Toner image 





' 


A 


'^^2^^^^^^^ 


>! 




• 




t 


Sta 


tic-charge eliminator 


TTT 



Figure 5-11. Paper Separation 



5-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

FUSING: Stage Six 

Until the paper reaches the fusing station, the toner is held on the paper only by gravity and 
weak electrostatic forces. At the fusing station, toner is melted and forced into the paper by heat 
and pressure to produce a permanent image. The fusing station (see Figure 5-12) consists of an 
upper non-stick roller that is heated from the inside by a high intensity quartz lamp and a lower 
soft roller that allows pressure to be applied over a large contact area between the paper and the 
upper fusing roller. At this point, the toner is melted and squeezed into the paper fibers. To 
keep the toner or paper from sticking to the Fusing Roller, the roller is covered with a non-stick, 
Teflon-type resin. A cleaning pad, which is in contact with the Fusing Roller, applies a thin coat of 
silicone oil to the surface of the roller to also help prevent sticking. The cleaner pad also serves to 
wipe off any toner or debris that is transferred to the roller. 

The Fusing Roller temperature is monitored by the Machine Control System via a thermistor. The 
Machine Control System maintains a temperature of 165° C (330° F) during standby mode and 
180° C (355° F) during printing. 

A thermoprotector switch is also located in the Fusing Assembly, adjacent to the thermistor. The 
thermoprotector shuts down (opens the power circuit to the fuser bulb) when the temperature is 
in excess of 210° C (410° F). If the fusing system is shut down by overheating, an ERROR 50 is 
displayed. If this occurs, the printer must be powered off and the thermoprotector replaced. The 
printer must remain powered off for at least seven to ten minutes or the ERROR 50 condition will 
remain. 



Fused Toner 




Fusing roller cleaning pad 
High intensity lamp 
— Upper fusing roller 



Thermistor and 
Thermoprotector area 



r 
Pressure roller 



Figure 5-12. Fusing Process 



5-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



5-3. PAPER PICKOP/FEEO 



Paper Path 

The paper pickup and feed system is responsible for picking paper from the input paper tray, 
delivering it to the im^e formation system at precisely the right time, feeding it to the fusing 
station, and delivering it to the output tray. Figure 5-13 illustrates the HP 33440/HP 33449 paper 
path. The cassette-feed paper path begins when the Machine Control System (DC Controller 
PCA), after receiving a print command, starts the Main Drive Motor. Approximately two seconds 
later, the Paper Pickup Solenoid is enabled and the Paper Pickup Roller makes one rotation and 
feeds paper to the Registration Rollers. Since the Registration Rollers are not turning at this time, 
the front edge of the paper bows (see Figure 5-14). 



PAPER DELIVERY SENSOR 
signal (PDF) 



DC controller 



LEGEND 



Indicates mechanical 
linkage 



Motor driver 




[CO 
-<iu S 

oo s 

ttSoE 
0.1 "_ 







3E 



ili 

O " 

ox 

<Q 

Eo 

ItV) 



3' 
< £ 



Paper control PCA 



Photosensitive 
drum 



Fuser rollers 



r 





Paper Tray 



Feed Guide Assembly 



sensor) 



Pick up roller 

PS301 : Paper sensor 

PS302: Manual paper feed sertsor 



Fsgyre 5-13,, Peper Pickup/Feed System 



5-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

The registration rollers align the leading edge of the paper with the leading edge of the image 
on the photosensitive drum. When the alignment is correct, the Registration Clutch Solenoid is 
activated and the rollers turn and advance the paper toward the photosensitive drum. After the 
print image has been transferred to the paper at the transfer station, the paper is fed into the 
Fusing Assembly by the Registration and Feed Rollers. 



Registration Rollers 



Paper {Bowed) Pick-up Roller 



Transfer 
Corona 



& 




Separation Pad 



PAPER TRAY 



Figure 5-14. Paper Reaching the Registration Rollers 



Manual Feed 



The timing of manual paper feed is identical to the timing for cassette paper feed, except for the 
following points: 

1. A different input paper sensor is used. 

■ Cassette paper out sensor: PS301. 

■ Manual feed paper sensor: PS302. 

2. The initial warmup time for manual feed is longer. It is assumed that manual feed will be 
used for heavier media such as envelopes and heavier paper. Because these heavier papers will 
absorb more heat, the extra warmup time allows all components of the fusing system to reach 
the 180° C (355° F) temperature before paper movement begins, which is required for proper 
fusing of toner to these papers. 

Paper Jam Sensing 

The Paper Delivery Sensor (PS331) indicates when paper reaches and clears the fusing station. 
PS331 detects a paper jam in any of the following conditions: 

■ Paper does not reach the delivery sensor within the required time (delivery delay jam). 

■ Paper does not clear the delivery sensor within the required time (delivery jam). 

■ Paper is present at the delivery sensor when power is switched ON (paper was left inside the 
printer and the fuser cooled-off; if the fuser is hot it will eject the paper). 



5-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Main Drive 

The Main Motor (Ml) and Scanner Motor (M3) provide the mechanical drives necessary for 
printing. The Main Motor is controlled via a driver by commands output from the DC Controller. 
The Main Motor, via gear trains, drives the following: 

■ Pickup Roller. 

■ Registration Assembly. 

■ Drum (within EP-S Cartridge). 

■ Feed Rollers. 

■ Fusing Assembly. 

■ Delivery Rollers. 



NOTE 



indicates mechanical linkage 



indicates enable lines 







Motor driver 

On 

DC power supply 



MAIN M0T08 
DRIVE command 



Controller 
PCA 



REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH 
SOLENOID DRIVE command (REGD) 





1 SL302 1 








Registration 
roller clutch 




Registration 
rollers 







Photosensitive 
drum 



Developing 
assembly 



Cleaning 
assembly 



* ■ — 



I ■ ■ ■ 



fusing 
assembly 



>H 



Pick-up roller 
clutch 



d Pick-up roller 



SCAMNER DRIVE command (SCNCOMT) 



n 



H 



Scanning mirror 



-FG+ L 



FG- 



Scanner motor 



Figure 5-15. Main Drive System 



5-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



5-4. MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM 

The DC Controller PCA-the machine control system-is responsible for coordinating all activities 
involved in the printing process. It drives the laser beam, coordinating dot pattern (video) 
data from the Interface/Formatter PCA with paper size, drum sensitivity, and laser beam 
motion information. The machine control system also controls and monitors paper motion, the 
high-voltage system, ftiser temperature, erase lamps, and all motors. It also shares machine status 
information with the Interface/Formatter PCA so that proper diagnostic messages are displayed 
on the Control Panel (see Figure 5-16). A list of the signals monitored or controUed by the DC 
Controller PCA is in Chapter 7, Section 7-7. 

In summary, the following items are controlled by the machine control system: 



Paper motion. 
Laser drive. 
Erase Lamps. 
Timing. 
Machine status. 



Paper size and availability. 
High-voltage system. 
Fuser temperature. 
Scanner and Main Motor drive. 
+24 V operation. 

















Optical fiber 


































-HX- 
oc 

Controlter 
PCA 












Control 
panel 






Scanner 

motor 












La&er diode 




























T 






1 


External 
device ^ 


Foimatter/ 

Interface 

PCA 












Primary corona/g 


rid bias | 










High 






P 












unit 


■ 






Developing bias | 


1 










j 






"{ eliminator 1 








-H 






Tonersensor 




n^iver/sensor 
PCA 
















Sensors/solenoids] 






















} 








1 










Fuser PCA 








Pick-up roller 












1 






Low -volt g& 
power supply/ . 
motor driver 
PCA 




.. 1 .. 




Mainmotor 






1 exposure lampj | 






AC power 
module 




Power sw 


tch 
















r^ ■n--t3 


_ 




Fuser roller neater^ 




]_J o-~0 i ■ 































Figure 5-16. DC Controller Block Diagram 



5-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



'ERFACE SYSTEM 



General 



For both the HP 33440 ("Interface PCA") and HP 33449 ("Formatter PCA"), the 
Interface/Formatter PCA is responsible for the following: 

■ Communicating with the host system, either through the standard serial or parallel ports or 
through the optional I/O interface, if installed. 

■ Monitoring operator interface via the printer's Control Panel and displaying printer status 
information to the operator. 

■ Communicating with the print engine (DC Controller PCA). 

■ Storing font information. 

■ Storing configuration information. 

■ Manipulating incoming data, such as conversion of ASCII character data into a binary page 
image that the print engine may use for creating a laser image on the photoconductive drum. 

In addition, for the HP 33449 only, the Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution 
Enhancement^^ capable of modulating the DC Controller PCA's laser drive circuitry to produce 
"smoothed" black-to-white boundaries. 

Optional cartridges may also be installed in connectors on the Interface/Formatter PCA to 
provide additional fonts for text printing or to overlay portions of machine code (ROM) for printer 
emulation. Proper communication between the Interface/Formatter PCA and the host system 
is established by configuration settings selected at the Control Panel. ASCII code and graphics 
data from the external device is then processed according to the Control Panel settings or printer 
commands and is converted to dot data. The dot data is used for modulating the laser. 

Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33440 Interface PCA Diagram 

The HP 33440 Interface PCA Block Diagram is shown in Figure 5-17. 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 

The CPU block contains a 16-bit microprocessor that executes programs stored in ROM to control 
the operation of the Interface PCA. 

ROM (Read-Only Memory) 

Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the ROM stores the dot patterns of internal 
character sets. Maximum ROM capacity is 1 Mbyte. 

NVRAM (Non-Volatile Random Access Memory) 

The NVRAM is a non-volatile random-access memory with a capacity of 32 bytes. Since its 
contents are not lost when power is switched off, it is used to store printing setup configuration 
information entered via the Control Panel and page count information. 

SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 

The 4 Kbyte SRAM is used as a stack area in the 16 Mbyte address space accessed by the 
microprocessor (CPU). 



5-17 



HP 33440yHP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



OC control lar 



I 



ExMrnal <l«vlc* 



I 



T 



JF 



3; 



Para 1 1*1 int«rfac« 



Vidao 
lnt*rfac« 



<Z 



Interface PC A 



I/O controller 

' 7% 



52. 



<= 



0) S«rlal intarfaca 
?? 



Timing controllar 



ROM 

<1M byte max) 



7>: 



Addrau 
controllar 



75: 



^ 






it 



I 



CPU 



SRAM 
WK bytes 
max) 



.Jl 



j^ Font cartridga 
■" intarfac* 



■^ i^ 



Font 
cartridga 1 



NVRAM 

(32 

bytat) 



Panal 
intarfaca 



tji cJ=J; 



DRAM 
I512K 
bytes 



Rawt/clock 
ganarator 



Font 
cartridga 2 



:sz. 



[_ Jntvr^a^ j j_byt«_nfwx£ J 



Control 
panvt 



Figure 5-17. HP 33440 Interface PCA Block Diagram 



Address Controller 



The address controller is implemented as a single gate array circuit (GAl). Jumpers attached to 
the gate array enable the ROM address region to be changed. The ROM has a madmum capacity 
of 1 Mbjrte and is used in four separate sections. The address controller also outputs address 
information enabling access to data in the Interface PCA's DRAM (maximum capacity of 512 
Kbytes) and expansion DRAM (maximum capacity of 4 Mbytes). 

DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 

The DRAM is a dynamic random access memory with a maximum capacity of 512 Kbytes. It 
stores printing and font information input from the external device. It also stores page formatting 
information and other parameters required by the internal microprocessor. The microprocessor 
subdivides the DRAM memory space as required. An expansion memory board can be added to 
increase the DRAM by 1, 2, or 4 Mbytes, depending upon the board purchased. 

Bit Shifter 

The bit shifter is used to offset or overlay printed characters, and to shift data by 1 to 15 bits. 

Timing Controller 

The timing controller generates timing signals needed when data is written to or read from 
DRAM. It also generates DRAM refresh signals. 



5-18 



# 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



I/O Controller 



The I/O controller controls the timing of data input from on optional I/O PCA to the 
microprocessor via the parallel interface connector. It also controls the timing of communication 
with the DC Controller. 



Video Interface 

The video interface has two 4-Kbyte scan buffer memories (SRAMs) through which printing 
information converted to dot data is output continuously to the DC Controller. 

Font Cartridge Interface 

"Font cartridges" are ROM cartridges which hold additional dot pattern data for different fonts. 
The font cartridge interface buffers the main bus from the font cartridge connectors. 

Descriptions of Blocks in the HP 33449 Formatter PCA Diagram 

General 

The Block Diagram of the HP 33449 Formatter PCA is shown in Figure 5-18. An explanation of 
the blocks within the diagram follows: 



Centronics 
I/g J3 



Serial I/D 



680OO 
lOMHz 
CPU 



Standard 
EPRDM 
DR RDM 



Dptional 

Cartridge 

D 

J6 

(Right) 

n 



Dptional 
Cartridge 

1 

J7 
(Left) 



System Bus 



Dptional V I/D 

Expanded 

I/D J9 



Operator 

Panel 

J8 



NVRAM 



1024 
Byte 
DRAM 



Dptional 
1-4M Byte 
DRAM J4/J5 



SIMPLE ASIC 



Hardware 
Assist 
Memory 
Access 

Controller 



Video 

Direct 

Memory 

Access 

Controller 



Engine Interface 

Jl 
(to DC Controller) 



Figure 5-18. HP 33449 Formatter Block Diagram 



5-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Chip) 

The Application Specific Integrated Chip (ASIC) is a custom-built integrated chip designed to assist 
the main microprocessor in formatting print image information. The ASIC has two subsystems: 
the dynamic memory controller and hardware assist logic, and the video direct memory access 
control. As the dynamic memory controller, the ASIC controls most DRAM access. The video 
direct memory portion of the ASIC prepares and provides serialized video data that is to be used 
for the print engine's laser subsystem. 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 

This block contains a 16-bit microprocessor (Motorola 68000) that executes instructions stored in 
ROM to control operation of the Interface/Formatter PCA. The processor operates from a 9.83 
MHz clock. 

EPROM/ROM (Erasable Programable Read Only Memory/Read Only Memory) 

Besides storing the microprocessor control programs, the ROM (2 Mbyte Read Only Memory) 
stores internal character set patterns. Early units will be shipped with six 1-Mbit EPROMs and 
three 4-Mbit ROMs. Most units will have four 4-Mbit ROMs installed. 

NVRAM (Non-Volatile RAM) 

The NVRAM is a non-volatile random-access memory with a capacity of 1024 bits. Since its 
contents are not lost when power is switched off, it is used to store printing setup configuration 
information entered via the Control Panel and page count information. 

DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 

The DRAM consists of 1024 Kbytes of memory. The memory can be expanded by increments of 1 
or 2 Mbytes up to a total of 4 Mbytes by installing accessory memory PCAs. This memory stores 
printing and font information input from the host system. The DRAM also serves as a temporary 
storage area for print image (dot) data prior to the data being sent to the print engine to create an 
image on the photoconductive drum. 

Font Cartridge Interface 

"Font cartridges" are ROM cartridges which hold additional dot pattern data for different fonts or 
contain ROM code to overlay internal ROM. The font cartridge interface buffers the main bus from 
the font cartridge connectors. 

Mote For the HP 33449, functions described for the HP 33440 following the DRAM 

I description are included under various headings above. 



# 



5-20 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Power distribution is illustrated in Figure 5-19, When the ON/OFF switch is set to ON, AC 
voltage is supplied to the DC Power Supply Assembly via the AC Power Module. Fuse Fl protects 
the DC Power Supply Assembly from current surges. The DC Power Supply provides the following 
voltages: 

+5 Vdc and -5 Vdc 

+24AVdcand +24B Vdc 

The RESET signal generated by the DC Power Supply Assembly results from any of the following 
conditions: 

■ When the power is initially switched ON. 

■ When the +5 Vdc power falls below the required level. 

■ When AC power is momentarily interrupted. 

The + 5 Vdc power supply is the first supply enabled and is the only voltage level required to 
"wake up" the main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. After the processor initializes 
itself, the processor generates the REMOTE signal which enables the +24 Vdc regulators. 



vy^ 




OC POWER SUPPLY/MAIN MOTOR DRIVER MODULE 
104 fJ502 






■~l 



riLTERINS, I«ECTIF1CATI0N a RESUUATiON 



r\ 



'ic;. 






'H 1^' LASER I 

J a ■ 1 I ORIVE I 




Figure 5-1 S. DC Power Distribution 



5-21 



• 



6 

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 



Contents 



6. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 

6-1. INTRODUCTION 6-5 

General 6-5 

Tools Required . 6-5 

Hardware Review 6-6 

Component Location and Identification 6-7 

6-2. COVERS, PANELS, AND ASSOCIATED PARTS 6-11 

General 6-11 

Main Body Covers ; 6-11 

HP 33440 Printer 6-11 

HP 33449 Printer 6-12 

HP 33449 Fan Guide (Serial Number Plate) 6-14 

Control Panel 6-15 

Front Support Plate 6-16 

Miscellaneous Covers 6-17 

Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray Doors 6-18 

Cover Release Button 6-18 

6-3. MAIN BODY COMPONENTS 6-19 

OZONE FILTER MOUNT 6-19 

UPPER COOLING FAN 6-20 

AC POWER MODULE 6-20 

MAIN MOTOR AND DRIVE ASSEMBLIES 6-21 

Main Motor and Drive Assembly 6-21 

57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft 6-22 

Feed Drive Assembly 6-23 

DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 6-24 

DC Power Supply Fuse 6-24 

DC Power Supply Assembly 6-24 

PAPER CONTROL PCA 6-25 

HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 6-26 

LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY 6-27 

FIBER OPTIC CABLE 6-27 

COVER LATCH ASSEMBLY 6-28 

General 6-28 

Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks 6-28 

Right and Left Hook Guides 6-28 



6-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



PAPER PICKUP/INPUT TRAY AREA 6-29 

General 6-29 

Paper Sensing Arm . 6-29 

Laser Shutter Arm 6-30 

Feed Roller Assembly 6-31 

Manual Feed Guide 6-32 

Pressure Assembly 6-33 

REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 6-34 

General 6-34 

Registration Assembly 6-34 

Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block 6-35 

Separation Pad 6-36 

TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 6-37 

TRANSFER AREA RESISTOR REPLACEMENT 6-37 

FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 6-38 

Feed Guide Grounding Spring Plate 6-39 

FUSING ASSEMBLY 6-40 

Fusing Assembly 6-40 

Exit Sensor PCA and Thermistor 6-40 

Thermoprotector 6-40 

Exit Sensor Arm 6-42 

6-4. TOP COVER ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS 6-43 

General 6-43 

TOP COVER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL 6-44 

Method One: 6-44 

Method Two: 6-45 

MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 6-46 

MIRROR ASSEMBLY 6-47 

ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 6-48 

ERASE LAMP CONNECTOR ARM 6-49 

DELIVERY AREA 6-49 

Fuser Insulating Cover 6-49 

Delivery Assembly 6-50 

Delivery Coupler Assembly 6-50 

Static Eliminator 6-51 

Deflector Pawls (Claws) 6-51 

TOP COVER HINGE BRACKET PLATES 6-52 

6-5. BOTTOM COVER COMPONENTS 6-53 

BOTTOM COVER REMOVAL 6-53 

LOWER COOLING FAN 6-53 

INTERFACE/FORMATTER PCA 6-54 

DC CONTROLLER PCA 6-55 



6-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



• 



^loyr^ 



6-1. Front View 6-7 

6-2. Rear View 6-8 

6-3. Interior View with Covers Removed 6-9 

6-4. Bottom View 6-9 

6-5. Internal Printer Components (HP 33440 shown, hut all internal parts are 

essentially identical) 6-10 

6-6. HP 33440 Main Body Covers Assembly 6-11 

6-7. HP 33449 Main Body Covers 6-13 

6-8. HP 33449 Front and Top Cover Panel Replacement 6-13 

6-9. Fan Guide Removal 6-14 

6-10. Control Panel Removal 6-15 

6-11. Front Support Plate 6-16 

6-12. Miscellaneous Covers 6-17 

6-13. Face-Up Output Tray Doors 6-18 

6-14. Ozone Filter Mount 6-19 

6-15. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan 6-20 

6-16. Main Motor and Drive Assembly 6-21 

6-17. 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft 6-22 

6-18. Feed Drive Assembly 6-23 

6-19. DC Power Supply Assembly 6-24 

6-20. Paper Control PCA Removal 6-25 

6-21, High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly 6-26 

6-22. Laser/Scanning Assembly 6-27 

6-23. Cover Latch Assembly 6-28 

6-24. Paper Sensing Arm 6-29 

6-25. Laser Shutter Arm . 6-30 

6-26. Feed Roller Assembly 6-31 

6-27, Manual Feed Guide and Pressure Assembly 6-32 

6-28, Main Body Block (Inverted) 6-33 

6-29. Registration Assembly 6-34 

6-30. Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block 6-35 

6-31. Separation Pad 6-36 

6-32. Transfer Corona Assembly and Resistor Locations 6-37 

6-33. Feed Guide Assembly 6-38 

6-34. Grounding Spring Plate 6-39 

6-35. Fusing Assembly ; 6-41 

6-36. Fusing Assembly Components 6-41 

6-37. Exit Sensor Arm 6-42 

6-38. Top Cover Section (HP 33440 shown) 6-43 

6-39. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method One 6-44 

6-40. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method Two 6-45 

6-41. Shutter, Mirror, and Erase Lamp Assemblies 6-46 



6-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



6-42. Mirror Holder 6-47 

6-43. Erase Lamp Assembly 6-48 

6-44, Fuser Insulating Cover Removal 6-49 

6-45. Delivery Assembly Removal . 6-50 

6-46. Static Eliminator 6-51 

6-47. Deflector Pawls (Claws) 6-51 

6-48. Hinge Plate Removal 6-52 

6-49. Bottom Cover Components 6-53 

6-50. Interface/Formatter PCA 6-54 

6-51. DC Controller PCA 6-55 



Tables 



6-1. Types of Fasteners 6-6 



6-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



6-1. INTRODUCTION 
General 

The service philosophy for the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers centers on the modular-level 
replacement of electro-mechanical assemblies and some associated components as well as the 
assembly-level replacement of printed circuit assemblies (PCAs). No attempt should be made to 
identify component failures within these assemblies. The components and the procedures for their 
removal and replacement are essentially the same for both printers. Unless specifically noted, 
replacement is the reverse of removal. 

The procedures in this chapter attempt to be as thorough as possible regarding the removal and 
replacement of specific assemblies vdth minimal removal of other components. Figures in Chapter 
8, although not generally referenced, will also be found to be useful. The service representative 
should use these procedures as a guide to build familiarity vwth the replaceable components of 
both printers. In referring to the orientation of the various assemblies, the front of the printer is 
the Control Panel/Paper Tray end. 

Caution Power-off the printer by disconnecting the power cord from the power source and 

.«. remove the EP-S Cartridge before attempting to disassemble the printer. Also 

1^ allow time for the Fusing Assembly components to cool before handling. 



Tools Required 

■ Magnetic Phillips No. 2 screwdriver with minimum 4-inch shaft. 

■ Needle-nose pliers. 

■ Small flat-blade screwdriver. 

■ Antistatic safeguards. 



Caution Most PCAs (Printed Circuit Assemblies) contain components that are sensitive 

fto damage by electrostatic discharge. When you remove, install, or handle any 
of these assemblies, be sure to use protective measures including static-free 
workstations and personal grounding devices such as the antistatic wrist strap and 
grounding mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding 
Kit (HP 9300-0933). Follow all recommended antistatic procedures. 



6-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Hardware Review 

In the removal procedures which follow in this chapter, numbers inside parentheses - (2) for 
example - refer to the number of fasteners to he removed. Pay careful attention to the type 
of screw removed; always replace it in the same location. The following table presents usage 
guidelines for the principal screw types used in the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers. 



Table 6-1. Types of Fasteners 



Use 



Coated (black) pan-head 
Phillips machine screw. 



Fastening metal or plastic to metal 
or metal inserts. 




Plated (silver-colored) 
pan-head Phillips machine 
screw. 



Fastening metal to metal. 



Coated (black) washer-head 
Phillips machine screw. 



Fastening plastic or metal to metal 
or a metal insert when a washer 
is required. 




Plated (silver-colored) 
washer-head Phillips 
machine screw. 



Fastening metal to metal when 
a washer is required. Also used 
as cover screws. 



(^}jm 



Coated (black) self-tapping 
Phillips screw for plastic. 



Attaching plastic parts to a plastic 
casting when self-tapping is 
required. 




Plated (brass-colored) Phillips 
shoulder screw. 



Attaching Fusing Assembly cover 
and Fuser Insulating Covers. 




Plated (silver-colored) 
Phillips screw with 
captive star washer. 



Fastening metal to metal where 
ideal ground or voltage contact 
is required. 



msmmmjim 



Long, brass-colored screw 
with lock washer and 
flat washer. 



Laser/Scanning Assembly. 



Caution Use of a pozidrive screwdriver may strip the screw head. The HP 33440 and HP 

« 33449 printers use only No. 2 Phillips screws. Use the proper screwdriver when 

working with these fasteners. To retain RFI certification, all screws must be 
replaced in their original locations and tightening snugly. 



6-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Component Location and Identification 

Since the location of major external components is similar for both printers, only the HP 33440 is 
shown here. For component location and identification information using HP 33449 illustrations, 
see Chapter 1, Section 1-6. 




Figure 6-1. Front View 



1. Control Panel 

2. Cartridge Slots 

3. Paper Tray (Letter) 

4. Manual Feed Guides 

5. Face-Down Output Tray 



6. Top Cover Assembly (Hinged) 

7. Top Cover Release Button 

8. Paper Tray Slot 

9. Expansion Memory Slot(s) (Under cover: 
1 on HP 33440, 2 on HP 33449) 



6-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 6-2. Rear View 



1. Serial and Parallel I/O Ports 

2. Optional I/O Slot 

3. Power Connector 

4. Power Switch 

5. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray (Closed) 



6. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray (Open) 

7. Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray Latch 
(Pressure-release latch on HP 33449) 

8. Test Print Button (Under cover 
on HP 33449) 



6-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Beam to Drum 
Mirror (Behind- 
Shutter) 



Erase Lamps 



AC Power 
Module 



Fusing 
Assembly 



Exit Sensor 
PCA (Behind 
Cover) 



Upper Cooling ^^^^^^^ 

^" Ozone Supply Assembly 

Filter Mount 



Registration 
Assembly 



Laser/Scanning 
Assembly 




Front Support 
Plate 



Feed Guide 

Assembly j^^^^^^^ 

Corona 
Assembly 



^ Print Density 
Dial 



High-Voltage 
Power Supply 
Assembly 



Figure 6-3. Interior View with Covers Removed 



DC Controller . 
PCA 



Lower Cooling^ 
Fan 



Thermistor . 

Bypass 

Switch 



Interface/Formatter 
PCA 




Upper Cooling 

f"®" Main 

Motor 



Figure 6-4. Bottom View 



Cartridge Slots 



DC Power 

Supply 

Assembly 



6-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 6-5. 

Internal Printer Components 

(HP 33440 shown, but all interna 

parts are essentially identical) 



1. Delivery Assembly 

2. Face-Down Tray 

3. Erase Lamp Assembly 

4. Primary Corona 

5. Beam-to-Dram Mirror 

6. Laser/Scanning Assembly 

7. Main Body Covers 

8. Paper Tray 

9. Separation Pad 

10. Feed Roller Assembly 



11. Registration Rollers 

12. Transfer Corona Roller 

13. Transfer Corona Assembly 

14. Photosensitive EP Drum 

15. EP Drum Protective Shield 

16. Feed Guide Assembly 

17. Lower Main Body 

18. Upper Fusing Roller 

19. Lower Pressure Roller 

20. Face-Up Output Tray (Closed) 



6-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



6-2„ COVERS, PANELS, AND ASSOCIATED PARTS 
General 

This section describes removal of the Main Body Covers and related parts which allow access to 
the Main Body components described in Section 6-3. Access to components within the hinged Top 
Cover Assembly or encased within the bottom cover(s) are described later in this section. 



Main Body Covers 



Remove the EP-S Cartridge and Paper Tray and unplug the printer from Its 
power source before proceeding with any removal procedures. 



HP 33440 Printer 

1. Remove the power cord from the printer's receptacle, the paper tray, and any font cartridges. 

2. Remove screws (8) securing the Main Body Covers Assembly (see Figure 6-6). 

3. Remove the cover by lifting the entire assembly slightly and rotating the rear of the cover up 
and toward the Control Panel. Use caution to avoid damage to the Control Panel and cables. 

4. Disconnect the Control Panel connector by pushing the plastic latches outward, then unseating 
the connector. 

5. The Main Body Covers Assembly may be further disassembled if required. 




Figure 6-6. HP 33440 Main Body Covers Assembly 



6-11 



HP 3344Q/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

HP 33449 Printer 

It is recommended that the four interlocking cover panels that form the HP 33449 Main Body 
Covers be removed one at a time as described below (see Figure 6-7). Structural damage can occur 
if the assembly is removed as a unit. 

Caution Since the printer's model and serial number are permanently attached to the Fan 

• Guide portion of the right side cover panel, be sure to put the panel back on the 

printer from which it was removed. If the right side cover panel must be replaced, 
the Fan Guide panel containing the model and serial number must be transferred 
to the new right side cover panel. 

1. Remove the power cord from the printer's receptacle. 

2. To remove the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers, open the hinged Top Cover Assembly 
and remove the screws (3) securing the top cover panel, then push in on the right side cover 
panel at the points shown in Figure 6-7. Rotate the rear of the top cover panel to vertical before 
lifting it off. 

3. Remove the right side cover panel by removing the screws (2) - one at the rear next to the 
Power Switch and one attaching it to the front cover panel - and lifting it vertically out of the 
printer. Note that the Fan Guide panel (Power Switch area) which contains the model and 
serial number plate can be detached from the right side cover panel (see following). 

4. Remove the left side cover panel by removing the screws (3) - two attaching it to the base plate 
and one attaching it to the front cover panel - and lifting it vertically out of the printer. Be 
careful to keep the front cover panel from falling. (Hint: Leave the paper tray installed to hold 
the ft-ont cover panel in place.) 

5. Detach the Control Panel Cable connector by pushing the plastic latches outward, then 
unseating the connector. 

6. Remove the front cover panel. Use caution to avoid damage to the Control Panel 

When replacing the front cover panel, its lower lip must slip under the plastic rim of the base 
cover panel. The three tabs on the front edge of the top cover panel must fit into the slots on the 
front cover panel before rotating the top cover panel into place (see Figure 6-8). 



6-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Screw- 



2 Screws- 



Left Side Panel 



Screw Top Panel 



Screw 




Front Panel 



Screw 



Right Side Panel 



■Screw 




Figure 6-7. HP 33449 Main Body Covers 




Top Panel 



Front Panel 



Figure 6-8. HP 33449 Front and Top Cover Panel Replacement 



6-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

HP 33449 Fan Guide (Serial Number Plate) 

Since the HP 33449's model and serial number label is affixed to the right cover panel assembly, it 
will need to be moved to the new cover panel assembly in the event the original panel is damaged. 
To perform this, refer to Figure 6-9 and proceed as follows: 

1. Remove the top cover panel (3), then the right cover panel (2) of the Main Body Covers. 

2. Remove the black self-tapping screws (2) securing the Fan Guide to the right cover panel. 

3. Lift the Fan Guide slightly and slide it out of it positioning pin retainers on the right cover 
panel. 

Since the Fan Guide is held in position with self-tapping screws, be careful not to create a new set 
of threads in the plastic when reinserting the screws. 



Fan Guide- 




Right Cover 
Panel 



Figure 6-9. Fan Guide Removal 



6-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERViCE MANUAL 

Control Panel 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, 

2. Remove the screws (4) securing the Control Panel to the front cover panel (see Figure 6-10). 

HP 33449 only: When replacing the Control Panel, he sure the keys do not bind on the front 
cover panel surfaces. 



Screws 



Screws 




• Connector Latches 



Figure 6-10. Control Panel Removal 



6-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Front Support Plate 

The Front Support Plate (shown in Figure 6-11) must be removed before most of the components 
at the front end of the printer can be accessed. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 

2. Disconnect the ground wire screw (1) and cable restraint connected to the plate. 

3. Remove the screws (6) securing the plate to the printer. 

4. Carefully lift the plate slightly and to the right to avoid snagging the Laser/Scanning Assembly 
cables. Be particularly careful of the fiber optic cable. 

Be sure to replace the cable restraint as shown in Figure 6-11 to ensure cables are properly routed. 



Front 
Support ■ 
Plate 



Screw 



Screw 
{On Side) 




Screw 



Cable 
Restraint 



Ground Wire 
Screw 



Screw 



Figure 6-11. Front Support Plate 



6-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Miscellaneous Covers 



Two protective covers, the Exit Sensor PCA Cover (1) and the Main Motor Drive Gears Cover 
(1), located inside the printers (see Figure 6-12) can be removed to facilitate access to other 
components. Note the position of each of these covers and replace them when servicing is 
complete. 



Exit Sensor 
PCA Ckjver 




Drive Gear 
Cover 



Figure 6-12. Miscellaneous Covers 



6-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray Doors 

The upper and lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray doors can be removed by depressing their sides 
and lifting the hinge pins out of their slots (see Figure 6-13). It may be necessary to use a small 
flat-blade screwdriver to aid in releasing the doors. Use caution: too much pressure may cause 
damage. 




Screwdriver 




Figure 6-13. Face-Up Output Tray Doors 
Cover Release Button 

The Top Cover Assembly Release Button, attached to the Main Body Covers' top cover panel, 
can be replaced on the HP 33440 by detaching the spring and lifting the button out. For the HP 
33449, the latch button can be removed by squeezing the mounting arms together and lifting it 
out. 



6-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



OZONE FILTER MOUNT 

The Ozone Filter is contained in the Ozone Filter Mount shown in Figure 6-14. The entire AC 
Power Module does not need to be removed to remove the Ozone Filter, but the fan duct may 
need to be removed in the HP 33440 (see note below). On the HP 33449 and later or modified 
models of the HP 33440, follow the directions on the Ozone Filter Access Door for filter removal. 
To remove the Ozone Filter Mount in both printers: 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 

2. Remove the screws (2) securing the filter mount and lift straight out. 

3. Slide the filter out of its mount 

Mote A user-replaceable Ozone Filter is standard in the HP 33449 and can be installed 

I as an option in the HP 33440. See Service Note 33440-7. 



When replacing the Ozone Filter Mount, ensure that the circuit breaker reset 
button is positioned in the center of the cover access hole. Failure to position 
the Ozone Filter Mount properly may cause a safety issue. 



Upper Cooling Fan 



■ Screws 



Circuit Breaker 
Reset Button 




Figure S-14. Ozone Filter Mount 



6-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

UPPER COOLING FAN 

1. Remove the Ozone Filter Mount as described above. 

2. To remove the Upper Coohng Fan, which rests on the AC Power Module (see Figure 6-15), 
remove the connector and the screws (3) that secure it to the module. 

Ensure the Upper Cooling Fan wires are routed properly before securing the Ozone Filter Mount. 

AC POWER MODULE 

Warning Disconnect the Power Cord from the printer prior to servicing the AC Power 

. Module. Also allow time for the Fusing Assembly to cool before attempting to 

O service this portion of the printer. 



The AC Power Module, located below the Upper Cooling Fan, is shown in Figure 6-15. The Circuit 
Breaker is located at the frontmost end of the AC Power Module beneath the Ozone Filter Mount. 

1. Disconnect the Power Cord from the Printer. 

2. Remove the Main Body Covers. 

3. Remove the Fusing Assembly (4) and the Ozone Filter Mount (2). 

4. Remove the silver-colored screws (4) that secure the AC Power Module to the printer base 
plate, and remove the module from the printer, being careful not to damage the large pin 
connectors attaching the module to the base connectors. 



Caution 



« 



To prevent damage to the unit, ensure that the large pin connectors are properly 
aligned when reinstalling the AC Power Module. Also ensure the screw with the 
captive star washer is properly reinstalled at the rear of the printer. 



AC Power 
Module Screw 



Fan Screw 



AC Power 
Module Screw 




Fan Screw 



AC Power 
Module Screw 



Fan Screw 



AC Power 
Module Screw 
(With Star 
Washer) 



Figure 6-15. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan 



6-20 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

MAIN MOTOR AND DRIVE ASSEMBLIES 

The location of the Main Motor and Drive Assemblies is shown in Figure 6-16. The disassembly 
procedures described below (Main Motor, 57- and 19-Tooth Gears, and Feed Drive Assembly) need 
to be performed in sequential order. 

Main Motor and Drive Assembly 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 

2. Remove the plastic Gear Cover (1) (optional: unit can be removed with Gear Cover attached). 

3. Remove the Ozone Filter Mount, Fusing Assembly, and AC Power Module. 

4. Disconnect the Main Motor connector from the DC Power Supply Assembly and unfasten the 
Fiber Optic Cable from its retaining clip. Then remove the DC Power Supply Assembly (3). 

5. Remove the screws (5) that secure the Main Motor and Drive Assembly to the printer frame 
and remove the assembly. 

6. Remove the screws (4) that connect the motor to the Drive Assembly and separate the units. 
Do not attempt to replace individual gears; the entire Drive Assembly should be replaced if any 
part becomes damaged. 




■19-Tooth Gear 



■Drive Assembly 



-Screws 
-Main Motor 



Main Motor Connector 



Figure 6-1S» Mmn Motor and Drive Assembly 



6-21 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft 

Before the 57- and 19-Tooth Gears Gocated at the ends of the Drum Drive Shaft) can be removed 
(see Figure 6-17), several adjacent assemblies must be removed. 

1. After removing the Main Motor Assembly (above), remove the High-Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly, Registration Assembly, and Transfer Corona Assembly. 

2. Use needle-nose pliers or a small flat-blade screwdriver to remove the C-clip from the left 
(inside) end of the (drum drive) gear shaft. 

3. Pull the bearing off the left end of the shaft. 

4. Pull the shaft out the right side opening, letting the gears drop off the shaft. Since the gears 
and shaft are keyed, they may have to be rotated to remove the shaft. 

When replacing the gears, note that the 19-Tooth Gear can only be installed in one direction. The 
57-Tooth Gear can be installed on the shaft either way. 




•C-Ciip (On End 
of Shaft) 



.19iTooth 
(Inner) Gear 



.57-Tooth 
(Outer) Gear 



Access Hole 

Drum Drive 
Shaft 



Figure 6-17. 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drum Drive Shaft 



6-22 




HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Feed Drive Assembly 

The Feed Drive Assembly is shown in Figure 6-18. 

1. Remove the Main Motor and Drive Assembly and the 57- and 19-Tooth Gears and Drive Shaft 
as described above. 

2. Remove the right side Feed Roller Assembly mounting screw (1) and carefully push the right 
end of the assembly out of the way to access the front-most Feed Drive Assembly mounting 
screw. 

3. Remove the screws (3) securing the Feed Drive Assembly and lift out. 




{(□DaQaanQi: a a aa a j | 



L 



' — Paper Control PCA Connector 
I- DC Power Supply Connector 



Figure 6-18. Feed Drive Assembly 



6-23 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 

The DC Power Supply Assembly contains the Main Motor driver circuitry as well as the DC Power 
Supply fuse. The Paper Control PCA attaches to it. 



DC Power Supply Fuse 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 

2. Remove the DC Power Supply Fuse (located in the lower left front corner of the DC Power 
Supply Assembly (see Figure 6-19). Be sure to replace this fuse with one of the proper value. 

DC Power Supply Assembly 



Since the Paper Sensing Arm can be easily damaged, take care when removing the 
DC Power Supply. Also remove the Fiber Optic Cable from its retaining clip to 
prevent damage to the cable. Remove the Main Motor connector as well. 




1. Remove the Main Body Covers and Front Support Plate. 

2. Remove the screws (3) securing the DC Power Supply Assembly, disconnect the Main Motor 
connector, and remove the Fiber Optic Cable from its retaining clip. 

3. Lift the assembly straight up and out, taking care not to damage the Paper Sensing Arm. This 
may require a firm lifting action combined with a front-to-back rocking action because of the 
three large pin connectors which secure the assembly to the base plate. 

4. Remove screws (6) to separate the DC Power Supply Assembly from the Paper Control PCA. 

Use caution when replacing the assembly to ensure the connectors are properly aligned before 
securing it to the base plate. Be sure to install the mounting screw with star washer at its proper 
location at the rear of the assembly (see Figure 6-19). 




Main Motor Connector 



Paper Control PCA 



-Paper Sensing Arm 
- Fuse 



Screw With Star ■ 
Washer 



Screws 




Figure 6-19. DC Power Supply Assembly 



6-24 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

PAPER CONTROL PCA 

Figure 6-20 shows the location of the Paper Control PCA. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly. 

2. Remove the Paper Control PCA cover (1). 

3. Remove the screws (6) that secure the Paper Control PGA to the DC Power Supply Assembly 
(see Figure 6-20). 



Paper Control 
PCA Cover 



Paper Control 
PCA 



Screw 




Sc^ew Screw 



Paper 

Control 

PCA 




Screw 



Screw Screw 



6-25 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 

The High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and the HVPS Connector must be removed and replaced 
as a unit. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers and the Front Support Plate. 

2. Remove the screws (2) that secure the High- Voltage Power Supply and the screws (2) that 
secure the High-Voltage Power Supply Connector, and remove the assembly from the printer 
(see Figure 6-21). 

When reinstalling, ensure that the High- Voltage Contact coil springs, located on the underside of 
the HVPS Connector,^ are not damaged or contaminated and that the connector pins on the HVPS 
are properly aligned before seating the assembly. If contacts are dirty, clean them with a cotton 
swab and isopropyl alcohol. 




■ Screw 



Screw 



Chrome ■ 
Screw 



Screw 



HVPS Connector 



Hiigh-Voltage 
Power Supply 



Figure 6-21. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly 



6-26 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY 



The Laser/Scanning Assembly (Figure 6-22) is extremely fragile and should be handled carefully. 
Be particularly careful when handling the Fiber Optic Cable. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers. (Only the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers needs to be 
removed on the HP 33449). 

2. Remove the screw (1) on the Fiber Optic Cable connection cover, open the cover, and remove 
the cable. (Be sure to observe the routing of this cable for exact replacement.) 

3. Disconnect cables J401 and J451 on the Laser/Scanning PCA and Laser Driver PCA. 

4. Remove the screws (4) that secure the Laser/Scanning Assembly to the printer. 

5. Carefully lift the assembly off the frame. 



Some printers have metal shims (plates) located under one or both ends (left or 
right) of the laser unit. These shims must not he removed or altered or the printer 
may require factory realignment (See Figure 8-12, Item 41, for shim location.) 



FIBER OPTIC CABLE 

To replace the Fiber Optic Cable, it must be disconnected from both the Laser/Scanning Assembly 
and the DC Controller PCA. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers. (Only the top cover panel of the Main Body Covers needs to be 
removed on the HP 33449). 

2. To disconnect the Fiber Optic Cable from the Laser/Scanning Assembly, remove screw (1) 
securing the small door (see Figure 6-22), open the door, and slip the cable out of the retainer. 

3. To remove it from the DC Controller PCA, remove the Bottom Cover (see Section 6-5) and 
disconnect the cable. 

To prevent damage when reinstalling the cable, be sure it is routed properly with no sharp bends. 



Fiber Optic 
Cable 



Screw 



Fiber Optic- 
Cable 



rt Screw 

|\ Laser Driver 
"PCA 




-J401 
(Under Door)^ 

■J451 



-Screws 




Door Screw 



Figure 6-22. Laser/Scanning Assembly 



6-27 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
COVER LATCH ASSEMBLY 

General 

The DC Power Supply Assembly and High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly must be removed to 
access the Hooks and Guides (see Figure 6-23). Note that the Right and Left Cover Latch Hook 
assemblies are not interchangeable. The Cover Release Button is discussed in Section 6-2. 

Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, DC Power Supply Assembly, and 
High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 

2. Remove the screw (1) and plate that secures the Right Hook and the screw (1) that secures the 
Left Hook. 

3. Pull the hooks and springs off the shaft, being careful not to lose the springs. 

To replace the hooks and springs, slide the spring onto the shaft, slide the hook onto the shaft, 
secure one end of the spring in its retaining position, and push the hook securely into position. 
Then move the other end of the spring into its retaining position, as if closing a safety pin. Note 
that thr right and left hook springs are different. 

Right and Left Hook Guides 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers. 

2. Remove the Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks according to the above procedure as needed. 

3. Remove the screw (1) that secures each Hook Guide. 

4. Lift and slide the Hook Guides off the shaft. 

Note that the smaller diameter coil spring is installed on the Left Hook Guide. 



Right Latch 
Hook 

I 



Screw. 



Right Hook 

Guide 



Left Latch 
"Hook 




Figure 6-23. Cover Latch Assembly 



6-28 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



PAPER PICKUP/INPUT TRAY AREA 



General 

To access assemblies in the paper pickup/input tray area, the Main Body Covers, Front Support 
Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly must first be removed. Other assemblies, as noted, must 
also be removed for particular items. 

Paper Sensing Arm 

Care must be taken not to damage the Paper Sensing Arm (see Figure 6-24) and Fiber Optic Cable 
when removing the DC Power Supply Assembly. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply Assembly. 

2. Remove the screw (1) securing the Paper Sensing Arm bracket to the Main Body Assembly (see 
Figure 6-24 for location). 

3. Slide the entire Paper Sensing Arm out the right side of the printer. 




Figure 6-24. Paper Sensing Arm 



6-29 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Laser Shutter Arm 

The Laser Shutter Arm (Figure 6-25) engages a plastic tab on the underside of the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly when an EP-S Cartridge is installed and allows the laser beam to exit the 
Laser/Scanning Assembly. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 

2. Remove the High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly and the Laser/Scanning Assembly. 

3. Remove the Right and Left Cover Latch Hooks. 

4. Remove either the Right or Left Hook Guide, 

5. Remove the metal plate from under the Laser Shutter Arm (1). 

6. Slide the shaft with the Laser Shutter Arm out the side of the printer. 



Laser/Scanning 

Assembly 

(Removed) 



Laser Shutter 
Assembly 



Shutter 
Plate Screw 




Figure 6-25. Laser Shutter Arm 



6-30 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Feed Roller Assembly 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 

2. Remove the High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 

3. Remove the screws (2) that secure each end of the Feed Roller Assembly (see Figure 6-26). 

4. Lift slightly and slide the assembly through the right side opening, being careful not to damage 
the Paper Sensing Arm. 

When reinstalling the assembly, be careful not to deform the left side grounding spring. 



Do not attempt to replace any parts on the shaft. The entire assembly must be 
replaced as a unit. 



lote Due to wear characteristics, the Separation Pad (see Registration Assembly 

I section below) and the Feed Roller Assembly should be replaced at the same time. 



Screws 
(One on Each 
End of Shaft) 




Feed Roller 
Assembly 



Paper Sensing Arm 



Figure 6-26. Feed Roller Assembly 



6-31 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Manual Feed Guide 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, and DC Power Supply. 

2. Remove the Paper Sensing Arm Assembly (1) and Laser/Scanning Assembly (4). 

3. Remove the Feed Roller Assembly (see above). 

4. Remove the screw (1) securing the Manual Feed Guide (see Figure 6-27) and slip the guide out 
of the printer. 



Screw ■ 



Manual 
Feed Guide 




Cassette 
Guide (On 
Each Side) 



Pressure 
Assembly 



Figure 6-27. Manual Feed Guide and Pressure Assembly 



6-32 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Pressure Assembly 

The Pressure Assembly (see Figure 6-27) is attached to the bottom of the Main Body Assembly. 
To access it, everything in the top printer cavity except the hinges, Feed Guide Assembly, and any 
components connected to the Main Body Block (plastic casting) must first be removed. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Fusing Assembly, DC Power Supply 
Assembly, the High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly, AC Power Module, Registration Assembly, 
and Main Motor and Drive Assembly. 

2. Remove the screws (8) securing the Main Body Block and the 57- and 19-Tooth Gear Support 
Bracket (2) to the Base Plate. 

3. On the bottom of the Main Body Block (see Figure 6-28), remove the screws (2) that secure the 
Pressure Assembly shaft and cassette guides, and remove the assembly. 



When reinstalling the Main Body Assembly, ensure that the Feed Guide 
grounding spring plate fits under the grounding tab on the Feed Guide Assembly 
(see Figure 6-34). Also be sure the Main Body Block fits in its guide pins before 
screws are tightened. 



Screw - 




H\b— g 



_a 



St 




-Feed Roller 
Assembly 



■ Screw 



-Pressure 
Assembly 



•Main Body Block 



Figure S-28. Main Body Block (Inverted) 



6-33 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 

General 

The Registration Assembly can be removed without removing the DC Power Supply. When 
replacing, the escape (drive) gear at the right end of the assembly must slide under the solenoid on 
the Paper Control PCA. The DC Power Supply may need to be removed to do this. 

Registration Assembly 



Prior to removing the Registration Assembly, take care to note the position of the 
brass grounding block located at the left front end of the assembly in order to 
replace it properly (see "Caution" below). 



1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and also remove the paper tray. 

2. Remove the screws (2) securing the rear of the assembly and the screws (2) securing the 
Transfer Guide Plate and the front of the assembly. 

3. Lift the Registration Assembly (see Figure 6-29) up and out. 

When reinstalhng the Registration Assembly, ensure that the Transfer Corona Roller Grounding 
Block is properly positioned (see following page). 



Screw 
Transfer 
Corona Roller iscrew 



Brass 

Grounding 

Block 



Screw — ' 




■ Registration 
Assembly 



-Transfer Guide 
Plate 



Screw 



Figure 6-29. Registration Assembly 



6-34 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block 

When replacing the Registration Assembly, be sure to rotate the brass grounding block on the end 
of the Transfer Corona Roller to its full counterclockwise position (the "3:00 O'Clock" position 
as viewed from the assembly's left end) and position it properly on top of the grounding plate as 
shown in Figure 6-30. 



Failure to position this block properly may result in intermittent hardware failure 
indications. 



Transfer 
Corona Roller 




Grounding- 
Block 



w 



Registration 
Rollers 




O 




(LEFT SIDE VIEW) 



Grounding 
Spring Plate 



Figure 6-30. Transfer Corona Roller Grounding Block 



6-35 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Separation Pad 



Mote Because of wear characteristics, the Separation Pad should be replaced at the 

I same time that the Feed Roller Assembly is replaced. The pad is located at the 

^b Paper Tray end of the Registration Assembly (see Figure 6-31). The cork on a 

worn pad will have a shiny or glazed appearance; the plastic edges will also show 
signs of wear. 



1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove paper tray. 

2. Remove the Registration Assembly (4) as described above. 

3. Remove the screws (2) on the underside of the Registration Assembly securing the Separation 
Pad. 



Pick-up 
Roller 



Paper 



REAR 



U 




FRONT 



Registration 
Assembly 



Transfer 

Corona 

Assembly 



Separation Pad 



Screws 



PAPER TRAY 



Figure 6-31. Separation Pad 



6-36 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 



The Registration Assembly and High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly must be removed before the 
Transfer Corona Assembly can be removed. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Registration Assembly, and High- Voltage 
Power Supply Assembly. 

2. Remove the screws (2) at the ends of the Transfer Corona Assembly (see Figure 6-32), and 
remove it from the printer. 



Caution 



A 



Do not remove the screws securing the nylon filament. Coronas cannot be 
restrung, and the entire corona will have to be replaced if the wires are disturbed. 



TRANSFER AREA RESISTOR REPLACEMENT 

The two 15-Mohm and one 1-Kohm resistors (see Figure 6-32), located toward the front of the 
printer just beyond the Transfer Corona Assembly, can be accessed by removing the Registration 
Assembly, High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly, and Transfer Corona Assembly. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers, Front Support Plate, Registration Assembly, High- Voltage 
Power Supply Assembly, and Transfer Corona Assembly. 

2. Remove the screws (2) securing the resistors to be replaced, and remove them from the printer. 



■ Corona 

Assembly Screw 
(Removed) 




Resistor (1-Kohm) 



Resistor {i5-Mohm) 
-Resistor {i5-Mohm} 



Figure 6-32. Transfer Corona Assembly and Resistor Locations 



6-37 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Remove the Gear Cover on the right side of the Feed Guide Assembly. 

3. Remove the Main Motor Drive Assembly gear cover. 

4. Remove the screws (4) securing the Feed Guide Assembly (see Figure 6-33) and lift it out of the 
printer. 

For replacement, the Fusing Assembly must be removed in order to position the Feed Guide 
Assembly ground tab on top of the ground spring plate as shown in Figure 6-34, The Feed Guide 
Assembly must also fit over the two guide pins adjacent to the two screws nearest the front of the 
printer. 



Gear Cover 
Screw 




Feed Guide 
Assembly 



Screw 



Screw 



Figure 6-33. Feed Guide Assembly 



6-38 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Feed Guide Grounding Spring Plate 



The Feed Guide Assembly has a grounding tab that must sit on a grounding spring plate located 
beneath the Transfer Corona Assembly (see Figure 6-34). Care must be taken to ensure that the 
grounding spring plate fits under the grounding tab on the Feed Guide Assembly whenever it is 
reinstalled. 



Feed Guide 
Assembly 




Grounding Tab 



Roller 




O 



vT 



Feed Guide 
Assembly 



Feed Guide 
Grounding Spring 

Plate 



Figure 6-34. Grounding Spring Plate 



6-39 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
FUSING ASSEMBLY 

Fusing Assembly 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the silver-colored screws (4) that secure the Fusing 
Assembly (see Figure 6-35). Be sure to note the location of the screw with the star washer. 

2. Lift the assembly straight up and out, using care to unseat the connectors on both ends 
simultaneously. 

Be sure to replace the screw with the star washer in its correct location. 

Exit Sensor PCA and Thermistor 

The Thermistor is attached to the Exit Sensor PCA. Follow the instructions below to remove these 
assemblies. 

1. Remove the Fusing Assembly (see above). 

2. Remove the Exit Sensor PCA cover (1) (see Figure 6-35). 

3. Remove the screw (1) securing the right side Fusing Assembly cover (see Figure 6-35), and slide 
the cover up and out (the plastic cover will flex around the lever arm on the assembly). 

4. Remove the electrical lug connector screws at the left and right ends of the assembly. 

5. Remove the screws (2) securing the Fusing Assembly front cover to the assembly and, to avoid 
damage to the Thermistor spring mount, carefully move the cover slightly away from the 
Fusing Assembly. Be careful not to lose the wavy washers. 

6. Remove the screw (1) securing the Thermistor and lift it off its mount (see Figure 6-36). 

7. Remove the screws (2) securing the Exit Sensor PCA, carefully remove it from its two 
positioning tabs (see Figure 6-36), and remove it and the Thermistor from the Fusing Assembly. 

Upon reinstallation, refer to Figure 6-36 for proper routing of the Thermistor cable. 

Caution When replacing the brass-colored screws, be careful not to strip them; they should 

be snug but not overly torqued. 



• 



Thermoprotector 

1. Complete steps 1 - 6 of the removal procedure for the Exit Sensor PCA and Thermistor 
described above. 

2. Remove the screws (2) that secure the Thermoprotector (see Figure 6-36) and lift it out. 



6-40 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Screw 

{Star Washer) 



Exit Sensor PCA 
Cover Screw 




Screw 



Screw 



Fusing Assembly 



Screw 



Right Side 
Fusing Assembly 
Cover 



Figure 6-35. Fusing Assembly 



Top Cover of 
Assembly (Open) 



Right Side 
Fusing Assembly- 
Cover 



Cleaning Pad- 



Fusing Roller 




Screw (Lug Connector) 



-Thermistor Cable 
Thermistor 



Thermoprotector 
— Front Cover 



»- Screw (Lug Connector) 



Exit Sensor PCA Cover 



Exit Sensor PCA 



Figure 6-36. Fusing Assembly Components 



6-41 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Exit Sensor Arm 

1. Remove the Fusing Assenably (4). 

2. Remove the Exit Sensor PCA cover (1) and the screws (2) securing the Exit Sensor PCA to the 
Fusing Assembly. 

3. Remove the brass-colored screws (2) securing the Exit Shutter Arm Assembly (located on the 
lower back side of the Fusing Assembly), remove the assembly from the retaining pins, and 
carefully pop the Exit Sensor Arm off the assembly. 

4. PuU the Exit Sensor Ann (Flag) out the side of the unit. 

When replacing the brass-colored screws, be careful not to strip them; they should 
be snug but not highly torqued. 



Exit Shutter 
Arm Assembly 



Exit Sensor 
PCA (Cover 
Removed) 




Screw 



Exit Sensor Arm 



Figure 6-37. Exit Sensor Arm 



6-42 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



General 

The Top Cover Assembly (see Figure 6-38), which is essentially the same for both printers, is the 
hinged lid that opens when the Top Cover Release Button is pressed. It houses the EP-S Cartridge 
and contains the Mirror, Shutter, Erase Lamp, and Delivery Assemblies. 

fsiote All Top Cover Assemblies can be replaced without separating the Top Cover 

I Assembly from the rest of the printer, except for the Delivery Assembly, Static 

^ Eliminator, the Hinge Bracket Plates, and the Hinge Assemblies. 



Static 
Eliminator 



Delivery 
Assetnbty 



■ Erase Lamp 
Assembly 




Fuser Insulating 
Cover 



Mirror 
Assembly 



Deflector 
Paw! Assembly 



Stiutter 
Assembly 



EP-S Cartridge 



Figure 6-3B. Top Cover Section (HP 33440 shown) 



6-43 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

TOP COVER ASSEMBLY REMOVAL 

Two methods are possible for removing the Top Cover Assembly: Method One should be used if 
the Hinge Assemblies or Hinge Bracket Plates (see Figure 6-39 and Figure 6-40) must be replaced; 
Method Two should be used in all other cases. 

Method One: 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the Hinge Security Plates (one screw on each hinge plate) and separate the two coil 
springs on the left side (see Figure 6-39). Swing the Hinge Springs out of the way. 

3. Remove the Hinge Bracket Plate screws (4 - two through each Hinge Bracket Plate) where 
they attach to the Top Cover Assembly, supporting the Top Cover Assembly as you do so. 

4. Separate the Top Cover Assembly from the Hinge Bracket Plates. 



Screws (2) 
Inside Hinge 
Bracket Plate 




Hinge 

Bracket 

Plate 



Hinge 
Security Plate 



Figure 6-39. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method One 



6-44 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Method Two: 

Additional required tool: short (stubby) No. 2 Phillips magnetic screwdriver. 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the Fusing Assembly. 

2. While supporting the Top Cover Assembly (opened 45°) from the rear, remove the hinge 
mounting screws (2 each) from the Hinge Assemblies where they attach to the Main Body Base 
Plate. 

3. Lift the Top Cover Assembly from the Printer. 



Hint 

A 



One of the two screws in each of the Hinge Assemblies can be removed and 
replaced with the Top Cover Assembly fully opened. 



Hinge Mounting 
Screws (2) 




Figure 6-40. Top Cover Assembly Removal, Method Two 



6-45 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 

The Mirror Shutter Assembly (Figure 6-41) is located above the Erase Lamp Assembly near the 
top of the opened Top Cover Assembly. 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the Mirror Shutter Assembly mounting screws (3) shown in Figure 6-41. 

3. Take care not to touch or otherwise damage the mirror when removing the Mirror Shutter 
Assembly. 

Caution When handling the Mirror Assembly, be careful not to touch the mirror's surface 

«or allow it to be scratched (it is a "first-surface" mirror). If the mirror must be 
cleaned, use a soft, dean, damp, lint-free wipe with a cleaning fluid approved for 
camera lenses. See Chapter 4, Section 4-4, "Cleaning the Printer." 




Figure 6-41. Shutter, Mirror, and Erase Lamp Assemblies 



6-46 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



MIRROR ASSEMBLY 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the Mirror Shutter Assembly (3) or slide the shutter to the right past the lever and 
swing it up and out of the way. 

3. Note the orientation of the Mirror Assembly so it may be returned to the same position 
(possibly mark the top of the mirror frame or note the location of the formed part number). 

4. Loosen the plastic frame (the EP-S Cartridge Guide) holding the Mirror and Erase Lamp 
assemblies by removing the large upper screws (4 of 5) that secure the EP-S Cartridge Guide 
Frame (see Figure 6-41) to the Top Cover Assembly. 

5. Slide the Mirror Assembly slightly to the right and lift it out the left side of the frame. 

6. Ensure that the Mirror Assembly is returned to the printer in the correct orientation. The 
assembly has a 6 mm slot on the left and an 8 mm slot on the right as shown in Figure 6-42. 

If the mirror must be cleaned, use a soft, clean, damp, lint-free wipe with a lens cleaning fluid 
approved for camera lenses. See Chapter 4, Section 4-4, "Cleaning the Printer." 



Note: 

When returning the mirror to the cartridge 

guide, be sure to orient it as shown below. 



6mm [ 






D 






Left 



Mirror Holder 



D 



8mm 



Right 



Figure S-42. Mirror Holder 



6-47 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 

The Erase Lamp Assembly (see Figure 6-41) contains the Erase Lamp PGA and surrounding sheet 
metal. 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the connector cover (1) on the Erase Lamp Assembly (see Figure 6-41). 

3. Remove the screws (2) securing the PCA to the Erase Lamp Connector Arm (see Figure 6-43). 

4. Remove the screws (2) on the top face of the Erase Lamp Assembly. 

5. Lift out the Erase Lamp Assembly. 



Erase Lamp Assembly 
Mounting Screws 



Erase Lamp 
Connector Arm 




Figure 6-43. Erase Lamp Assembly 



6-48 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



ERASE LAMP CONNECTOR ARM 



The Erase Lamp Connector Arm (see Figure 6-41) supplies power to the lamps from the Exit 
Sensor PCA located on the Fusing Assembly. 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. HP 33440 only: Remove the Fusing Assembly and the black plastic Fuser Insulating Cover in 
the Top Cover Assembly (see "Fuser Insulating Cover" below). 

3. Remove the connector cover (1) on the Erase Lamp Assembly (see Figure 6-41). 

4. Remove the screws (2) securing the Erase Lamp Connector Arm to the Erase Lamp Assembly 
(see Figure 6-43). 

5. Remove the screws (2 for HP 33440, 1 for HP 33449) securing the connector arm to the Top 
Cover Assembly. 

6. Drop the connector out. 

DELIVERY AREA 

The Delivery Assembly (Figure 6-45) guides printed paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 
Note that removal of the Delivery Assembly itself or the Output Static Eliminator will require 
separating the Top Cover Assembly from the printer. 

Fuser Insulating Cover 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the Fusing Assembly. (Alternatively, the Top Cover Assembly can be removed instead.) 

3. Remove the black-plastic Fuser insulating Cover screws (the 2 smaller brass-colored pan-head 
screws with washers) (see Figure 6-44). 

4. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver between the cover and the EP-S Cartridge Guide frame as 
shown in Figure 6-44, prying the plastic clips away from the cover to release it. 




Figure 6-44. Fuser Insulating Cover Removal 



6-49 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Delivery Assembly 

1. Remove the hinged Top Cover Assembly from the printer. 

2. Remove the black plastic Fuser InsTilating Cover covering the Delivery Assembly (see above), 

3. Remove the Erase Lamp Assembly cover (1) and connector screws (2). 

4. Remove the Erase Lamp Connector Ann. 

5. With the Top Cover Assembly resting upside down on the work area, remove the screws (5) 
securing the EP-S Cartridge Guide and remove the Guide from the Top Cover Assembly. 
(Minimize disturbance to the Top Cover Assembly to prevent damage to the Mirror Assembly.) 

6. Remove the Lower Delivery Cover screws (2, black) and Delivery Assembly mounting screws (4) 
(see Figure 6-45). 

7. Lift the Delivery Assembly, with the Lower Delivery Cover, free of the Top Cover Assembly. 

8. Detach the Lower Delivery Cover from the Delivery Assembly by removing the brass-colored 
screws (2). 

9. Separate the Delivery Coupler Assembly from Delivery Assembly. 

When reinstalling the Delivery Assembly, position the Delivery Coupler Assembly as shown in 
Figure 6-44. When reinstalling the Cartridge Guide, be sure to position the Mirror Assembly 
mounting slots properly (see Figure 6-42). 

Delivery Coupler Assembly 

1. Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the EP-S Cartridge. 

2. Remove the Fusing Assembly and Fuser Insulating Cover as described above. 

3. Remove the Delivery Coupler wAssembly mounting screw (1) and lift it out (see Figure 6-45). 



EP-S Cartridge - 
Guide Screws 



Lower Delivery 

Cover Screw (Blk) 



Delivery— 

Assembly 

Screws 




-© 



© 



^ ®r ^ 



<!> 




a 



O 



n 



TWT 



CD a.o □ o 



oj i t a t ^ % rT~^ ^ ^ ^ *i^ 




EP-S Cartridge 
"Guide Screws 



Lower Delivery 
'Cover Screw (Blk) 



- Delivery 
Coupler Screw 
(Removed) 



"Delivery 
Assembly 
[ Screws 



Lower Delivery Cover 



Delivery Assembly 



Figure 6-45. Delivery Assembly Remova! 



6-50 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Static Eliminator 

The Static Eliminator (see Figure 6-46) is the fine fiber brush located where the paper exits to the 
Top (Face-Down) Output Tray. 

1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly and the Delivery Assembly (see above). 

2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Static EUminator. 




-Top Cover 
Assembly 



-Static 
Eliminator 



■ Screws 



Figure 6-46. Static Eliminator 



Deflector Pawls (Claws) 



1. With the Top Cover Assembly fully open, pry the right end of the Deflector Pawls (Claws) shaft 
out of its retaining chp (see Figure 6-47). 

2. Slide the assembly to the right out of its retainer. 

When reinstalling the Deflector Pawls, ensure that the spring is positioned properly and that it is 
not damaged (see Figure 6-47). 



LEi=T 



Deflector 

Pawls Assembly 



Spring- 




RIGHT 



Figure S-47. Deflector Pawls (Claws) 



6-51 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

TOP COVER HINGE BRACKET PLATES 

1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly from the printer. 

2. If the Hinge AssembUes are still attached to the Top Cover Assembly (see Figure 6-39), remove 
them (4 screws, 2 on each Hinge Assembly). 

3. Remove the Delivery Assembly. 

4. Remove the remaining screws (2 each) securing the Hinge Bracket Plates to the Top Cover 
Assembly and lift them out of the printer. 

When reinstalling, note that the Hinge Plate with the coil spring must mount on the left side of 
the Top Cover Assembly as viewed from the front of the printer. 



LEFT 



Screw 



Screw ■ 




® 



031 



© 



iHjF 



HI I- T 




U ©L 



m 



G=^=S 



ata^s^ ata^w\y_. 




Top Cover 
Assembly 



RIGHT 



Screw 



Screw 



Figure 6-48. Hinge Plate Removal 



6-52 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



BOTTOM COVER REMOVAL 

The Bottom Cover (see Figure 6-49) encases the components located on the underside 
of the printer. The Bottom Cover must be removed to replace the Lower Cooling Fan, 
Interface/Formatter PCA, DC Controller PCA, and some cable assemblies. 



Before turning the printer over, the EP-S Cartridge must be removed as well 
as any other brackets or fasteners that are not secured. When turning the 
printer over, use extreme care not to bend or otherwise damage the upper body 
frame and components. Also remove any accessory memory I/O PCAs and font 
cartridges at this time, using proper ESD procedures. 




For HP 33449 only: With the printer turned over, remove the screws (4) securing the outer 
Bottom Cover. Lift the rear of the cover until the cover is vertical and remove it from the printer. 

For both printers: Remove the screws (9) securing the inner cover and lift it off. Note that on 
the HP 33440, one screw is accessed through a slot in the Font Cartridge Cover. 



LOWER COOLING FAN 

1. Remove the Bottom Cover(s). 

2. Detach the connector from the DC Controller PCA (see Figure 6-50), remove the screws (4) 
securing the fan, and lift the fan out of the printer. 



DC Controller - 
PCA 



Lower- 
Cooling Fan 



Thermistor — 
Bypass Switch 



Interface/Formatter 
PCA 



Upper Cooling- 
Fan 




Main Motor 



■ DC Power 
Supply 
Assembly 



Figure 6-49. Bottom Cover Components 



6-53 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBiNED SERVICE MANUAL 



INTERFACE/FORMATTER PCA 

The Interface (HP 33440)/Formatter (HP 33449) PCA is located on the underside of the printer, as 
shown in Figure 6-49. 



Caution Since most PCAs contain components that are sensitive to damage by electrostatic 

• discharge, be sure to use protective measures when removing, installing, or 

handling any of these assemblies. These measures include static-free workstations 
and personal grounding devices such as the antistatic wrist strap and grounding 
mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 
9300-0933). 

1. Remove any accessory PCAs (expansion memory boards and optional I/O), font cartridges, and 
the Bottom Cover(s). 

2. Disconnect connector J8 (connects to the Control Panel). 

3. Remove the Voltage Connector star washer screws (2) (see Figure 6-50) and the screws (4) 
securing the PCA (2 at the front, 1 at the long edge, and 1 in the center of the board). 

4. Remove the screws (2) connecting the I/O Connector Plate to the printer's base plate. 

5. Remove the PCA and the attached metal plate by lifting the rear of the board (by the I/O 
Connector plate) 4 to 6 inches (10 to 15 centimeters) and then pulling it out of the printer. This 
will allow the two cartridge connectors to slide out of their plastic frame and will disconnect the 
DC Controller connector. 

When reinstalling the Interface/Formatter PCA, ensure that the PCA is aligned with the plastic 
positioning pins and that the I/O Connector plate does not pinch the cable assembly running 
between the DC Controller and the Fusing Assembly. Only when the board assembly is positioned 
properly should the DC Controller connector be seated and the screws (8) be replaced. 



If the Interface PCA is replaced, the page count should be set to its previous value. 
Refer to "Setting the Page Count" in Chapter 3, Section 3-7, for instructions. 



Voltage Connector — 
Screws {Star Washer) 

Screws — 



Lower Cooling - 
Fan Screws (4) 



Lower Cooling - 
Fan Connector 



Screws 




— Interface/ 
Formatter PCA 

Connector J8 



Figure 6-50. Interface/Formatter PCA 



6-54 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



DC CONTROLLER PCA 

The DC Controller PCA is located on the underside of the printer as shown in Figure 6-49. See 
notes and cautions for this section. 



Most PCAs (Printed Circuit Assemblies) contain components that are sensitive 
to dam^e by electrostatic discharge. When you remove, install, or handle any 
of these assemblies, be sure to use protective measures including static-free 
workstations and personal grounding devices such as the antistatic wrist strap and 
grounding mat included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding 
Kit (HP 9300-0933). Follow all recommended antistatic procedures. 




1. Remove any accessory PCAs (expansion memory boards and optional I/O), font cartridges, and 
the Bottom Cover(s). 

2. Remove the Interface/Formatter PCA (see above). 

3. Disconnect connectors J202, J203, J206, J207, J208, J211, and the Fiber Optic Cable from the 
DC Controller PCA. 

4. Loosen the screw (1) and remove the Thermistor Bypass Switch Actuator Plate from its plastic 
stanchion (located next to the Lower Cooling Fan). 

5. Remove the screws (4) that secure the four corners of the DC Controller PCA. 

6. Remove the long black screws (2) from each of the two large connectors on the DC Controller 
PCA. 

7. Lift out the PCA, taking care not to damage it when disconnecting the two large connectors. 
The PCA should be carefully rocked back and forth to loosen the connectors. 

When reinstalling the DC Controller PCA, be sure the connector pins are properly aligned and 
that no cables (particularly the Fiber Optic Cable) will be pinched before pressing the board into 
place. (Hint: Pushing down on the top of the connectors is the best way to reseat the board.) Also 
ensure jumper J209 is in place or intermittent hardware failure indications may result. 



Screws (2) ■ 



Interface/Formatter 
PCA Connector 




DC Controller PCA- 



_ Connector 
Screw 

-Screw 



Fiber Optic 
Cable 



Screw 



-Connector 
Screw 



Figure 6-51. DC Controller PCA 



6-55 



-<• 



m 



7 



7. TROUBLESHOOTING 

7-1. INTRODUCTION 7-5 

7-2. PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 7-6 

Preliminary Operating Checks 7-6 

Pre-Troubleshooting Check List 7-6 

7-3. MAIN FLOWCHART 7-8 

Flowchart 7-1. Main Troubleshooting Sequence 7-9 

Flowchart 7-2. Power-Up Sequence 7-10 

Flowchart 7-3. Paper Movement Sequence 7-11^ 

Possible Paper Movement Sequence Problems Table 7-12 

7-4. PRINTER MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING 7-13 

Message Summary Table 7-13 

Blank Display 7-20 

DC Voltage Functional Check 7-21 

AC Power Functional Check 7-22 

"02 WARMING UP" (continuous) Message 7-23 

"11 PAPER OUT" Message "PC/EC LOAD" Message 7-23 

Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check 7-25 

Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check 7-25 

Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check 7-26 

"12 PRINTER OPEN" Message 7-27 

-h24B Vdc Functional Check 7-28 

"13 PAPER JAM" Message 7-29 

Paper Jam Detection 7-31 

Paper Feed Area Checks 7-32 

Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check 7-33 

Paper Tray Checks 7-34 

Paper Feed Mechanical Checks 7-35 

SL301 Functional Check 7-36 

Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check 7-37 

Registration/Transfer Area Checks 7-38 

SL302 Functional Check 7-39 

Exit Area Checks 7-40 

Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check 7-42 



7-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



"14 NO EP CART" Message 7-44 

Drum Sensitivily Switches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check 7-45 

"16 TONER LOW" Message 7-46 

Toner Low Functional Check 7-46 

"41 ERROR" Message 7-48 

"50 SERVICE" Fuser Malfunction 7-48 

Thermistor Functional Check 7-50 

Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check 7-51 

"51 ERROR" Message . . . 7-52 

Laser Power Verification 7-54 

"52 ERROR" Scanner Malfunction . 7-56 

Scanner Motor Functional Check . 7-56 

7-5. IMAGE FORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING 7-57 

Introduction 7-57 

Image Development (Half Self Test) Functional Check 7-70 

Drum Rotation Functional Check 7-70 

Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional Check 7-71 

EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check 7-71 

High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly . 7-72 

Primary Corona Functional Check 7-75 

Developer AC Bias Functional Check 7-75 

Developer DC Bias Functional Check . 7-76 

Transfer Corona 7-77 

Transfer Corona Functional Check 7-77 

Erase Lamp Functional Check 7-78 

Image Quality Check 7-78 

Paper Overview 7-79 

Paper Curl 7-80 

Density Check 7-81 

Registration Check 7-82 

Skew Tolerance 7-83 

Procedure 7-83 

Fusing Check 7-83 

7-6. INTERFACE TROUBLESHOOTING 7-84 

Communications Check 7-84 

Test Message 7-84 

AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configuration Test 7-84 

7-7. TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS 7-87 

Repetitive Defect Ruler, HP 33440 and HP 33449 7-87 

Connector Location Diagrams 7-88 

Printer Wiring Diagram, HP 33440 and HP 33449 7-92 

DC Controller Signal Listing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449 7-94 

Signal Timing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449 7-100 

iures 



7-1. Pre-Troubleshooting Check List 7-7 

7-2. J210 Location 7-21 

7-3. Fuse Fl Location 7-22 

7-2 



• 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

7-4. Paper Sensing Arm 7-24 

7-5. Tray Size Sensing Microswitches Locations 7-26 

7-6. Defeating the Top Cover Assembly Microswitch 7-28 

7-7. J210 Test Connector Test Point 7-28 

7-8. Paper Path vs Paper Sensors 7-29 

7-9. Paper Tray 7-34 

7-10. Feed Roller Assembly Operation 7-35 

7-11. Paper Positioned in the Registration Rollers 7-35 

7-12. Paper Pickup Solenoid (SL301) Location 7-36 

7-13. Feed Roller Wear 7-37 

7-14. Registration Assembly 7-38 

7-15. Paper Exit Area 7-40 

7-16. Paper Exit Sensor Check 7-42 

7-17. EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity Switches 7-44 

7-18. High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly Connector 7-47 

7-19. EP-S Cartridge (Bottom view) 7-47 

7-20. Fuser Circuit Breaker Reset 7-49 

7-21. Thermistor Resistance at J332 7-50 

7-22. Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Check , . 7-51 

7-23. Installing Laser Power Checker Tool 7-55 

7-24. Image Defect Summary 7-58 

7-25. Image Defect Summary (Continued) 7-59 

7-26. Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly 7-71 

7-27. EP-S Cartridge (Bottom view) 7-73 

7-28. High- Voltage Power Supply Connector 7-73 

7-29. EP-S Cartridge (End view) 7-75 

7-30. J210 Test Points 7-76 

7-31. Registration Specifications 7-82 

7-32. Repetitive Defect Ruler 7-87 

7-33. Printer Base Connectors (Top view) 7-88 

7-34. Printer Base Connectors (Bottom view) 7-88 

7-35. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly (Top view) 7-89 

7-36. Exit Sensor PCA (Component side) 7-89 

7-37. Paper Control PCA (Component side) 7-90 

7-38. DC Controller PCA 7-91 

7-39. Interface/Formatter PCA 7-91 

7-40. HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wiring Diagram (1 of 2) 7-92 

7-41. HP 33440/HP 33449 Signal Timing Chart 7-100 



7-1. Major Printer Functions 7-8 

7-2. Printer Messages 7-13 

7-3. Blank Display 7-20 

7-4. 02 WARMING UP (continuous) Checks 7-23 

7-5. "11 PAPER OUT" or "PC/EC LOAD" Message Checks 7-24 

7-6. Configuration of Tray Size Sensing Svntches 7-26 

7-7. "12 PRINTER OPEN" Checks 7-27 

7-8. "13 PAPER JAM" Checks 7-31 

7-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



7-9. Paper Feed Area Checks 7-32 

7-10. Main Motor Checks 7-33 

7-11. Paper Tray Checks 7-34 

7-12. SL301 Checks 7-36 

7-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Checks 7-37 

7-14. Registration/Transfer Area Checks 7-39 

7-15. Exit Area Checks 7-41 

7-16. Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check 7-42 

7-17. "14 NO EP CART" Checks 7-45 

7-18. "16 TONER LOW" Checks 7-46 

7-19. "50 SERVICE" Fuser Malfunction Checks 7-49 

7-20. "41 ERROR" Checks 7-53 

7-21. "51 ERROR" Beam Detect Checks 7-54 

7-22. Scanner Malfunction Checks 7-56 

7-23. Black Pages 7-60 

7-24. Very Faint Print 7-60 

7-25. Speckled Print 7-61 

7-26. Vertical White Streaks 7-61 

7-27. Right-Hand Text Missing/Distorted 7-62 

7-28. Faulty Registration 7-62 

7-29. Random Horizontal Black Lines 7-63 

7-30. Slightly Faint Print 7-63 

7-31. Suede Print 7-64 

7-32. Smeared Print/Improper Fusing 7-64 

7-33. Distorted Print 7-65 

7-34. Repetitive Defects 7-65 

7-35. Black Pages with Horizontal White Stripes 7-66 

7-36. Image Skew 7-66 

7-37. Improperly Sized Image 7-67 

7-38. Vertical Dark Streaks 7-67 

7-39. Character Voids 7-67 

7-40. Background 7-68 

7-41. Smudged Band with Overprint 7-68 

7-42. Black Stripe on Right Side of Page 7-68 

7-43. White or Blank Pages 7-69 

7-44. High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly Summary 7-72 

7-45. High-Voltage System Checks 7-74 

7-46. Transfer Corona Checks 7-77 

7-47. Paper Checks 7-79 

7-48. Paper Curl 7-80 

7-49. Density Check Factors 7-81 

7-50. Registration Specifications 7-82 

7-51. Communications Checks 7-85 

7-52. LED 201 and SW201, 202, 203, and 205 7-94 

7-53. Signal Listing 7-94 



1^^ 



7-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



m 



This chapter was designed to provide the information necessary to quickly identify the cause of an 
HP 33440 or HP 33449 printer failure. Chapter organization is based upon three predominant 
sources of symptoms: 

■ Control Panel display messages. 

■ Print quality problems. 

■ Host/printer communication problems. 

A series of flowcharts have been included to provide support personnel with a logical sequence of 
steps to verify proper printer operation. If a failure should be discovered through the verification 
procedure, the engineer can quickly find the appropriate section of Chapter 7 to identify the faulty 
component or assembly. 

Once a defective printer component is identified as the cause of the failure, service personnel 
should reference Chapter 6 ("Removal and Replacement") to effect the repair. If the cause is not 
an internal printer component, this chapter should provide the information necessary to resolve 
the problem or, at a minimum, reference another appropriate section of the manual. 

Section 7-2, "Pre-Troubleshooting Procedures," provides a preliminary checklist designed to 
assist the service representative in determining- over the telephone if possible -if a service call is 
necessary. 

Section 7-3, "Main Flowchart," provides several flowcharts which give a step-by-step sequence of 
actions to take to verify proper printer operation. 

Section 7-4, "Printer Message Troubleshooting," lists Control Panel messages, their causes, and 
the appropriate actions to take to respond to them. 

Section 7-5, "Image Formation Troubleshooting," describes typical image formation and print 
quality problems and the steps to take to correct them. 

Section 7-6, "Interface Troubleshooting," describes interface problems between the printer and its 
host system and the actions to take to correct these problems. 

Section 7-7, "Troubleshooting Aids," provides additional troubleshooting material, including a 
print image repetitive defect ruler, connection diagrams, the main wiring diagram, followed by a 
listing and brief description of the signals illustrated in the diagram, and a signal timing chart. 



7-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



1-2, PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 
Preliminary Operating Checks 

Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, the service representative should ensure that: 

1. The printer is installed on a solid, level surface (refer to Chapter 3, Section 3-2, of this manual). 

2. The line voltage providing power to the printer does not vary more than 10% from the nominal 
rated value as specified on the Power Rating label. 

3. The operating environment for the printer is within the temperature and humidity 
specifications listed in Chapter 1, Section 1-3, of this manual, 

4. The printer is operated in a well-ventilated area. 

5. The printer is not located in a hot or humid area (near water taps, boilers, or humidifiers), a 
cold area, near open flames, or in a dusty situation. 

6. The printer is never exposed to ammonia gas such as that produced by diazo copiers or office 
cleaning materials. 

7. The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight at any time during the day. 

8. The customer is using media as specified in Chapter 2, Sections 2-4 through 2-6, of this manual. 

9. The customer is not using a refilled EP-S Cartridge and has removed the EP-S Cartridge 
shipping seal. 

IMote The printer's scanner motor and main motor start when the printer is switched 

I on and every time the printer receives a print job. This explains the motor noise 

®^ heard at these times. Also, about every 30 minutes the Main Motor rotates the 

Fusing Roller to make it last longer. This is a normal part of printer operation. 

Pre-Troubleshooting Check List 

The "Pre-Troubleshooting Check List" on the following page is designed to help resolve 
user-responsible problems before they become service calls. 

Mjnt Photocopy the "Pre-Troubleshooting Check List" and place it near your telephone 

I for quick reference. 



7-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



PRE-TROUBLESHOOTING CHECK LIST 



Blank Display 

• Verify that power cord is firmly connected to both the printer and 
its power source. Remove any Optional I/O or memory PCAs. 

Slow Printer 

• The optimal eight-page-per-minute specification does not take 
into account data transfer time between the host and printer or 
the time required by the printer to format more complex data 
such as HP-GL/2 commands and scalable fonts. A complex page 
may take up to several minutes to format before printing. The 
READY indicator should flash while formatting. 

• A Print Fonts routine involving scalable fonts (HP 33449 only) 
will typically cause delays of up to 30 seconds between pages. 

• Because the HP 33449 self test involves font scaling and HP-GL/2 
graphics, it will not run continuously at eight ppm. 

Short EP-S Cartridge Life 

• A new Hewlett-Packard EP-S Cartridge is rated for 4,000 letter- 
sized pages with average coverage (i.e., a double-spaced page) of 
five percent toner per page. Forms, graphics, and/or a density 
dial setting less than "5" will yield fewer pages. 

• Paper with high surface abrasion (typical of a good writing or 
general purpose bond paper) can prematurely wear the surface of 
the EP drum. Recommend a good quality xerographic bond paper. 

Font Cartridge Not Recognized 

• Reinstall cartridge - push until it "clicks." 

Print Quality Problems 

• Thoroughly clean the printer (see User's Manual). 

• Avoid poor quality or non xerographic paper and improper paper 
storage practices. Recommend use of high quality xerographic 
bond paper and proper storage per the User's Manual. 

Black Pages (Undefined Border) 

• Broken Primary Corona wire - replace the EP-S Cartridge. 

Dark Streaks (or Lines) Down the Page 

• Clean the Primary Corona wire with felt end of cleaning tool. 

• Check the Fuser Cleaning Pad. If marks correspond to streaks, it 
may need replacement. Check any pre-printed forms for cor- 
responding images. 

Light Areas of Print (Blotches or Lines/Streaks 
Down the Page) 

• Toner running low. Gently rock the EP-S Cartridge around its 
long axis to resolve temporarily. May require a new EP-S 
Cartridge immediately. 

• Clean the Transfer Corona housing and wire. 

• Improper paper storage and some types of paper will exhibit this 
problem. Recommend usage of high quality xerographic bond 
paper and proper storage techniques. 

Smeared Print 

• Paper with a surface texture that is too smooth will exhibit this 
problem. 

Gray Background 

• With envelopes and thick media, set the Print Density dial to a 
lower (darker) setting. 

• Clean the Primary Corona wire with felt end of cleaning tool. 



Partial Pages 

• Set AUTO CONT = OFF in Configuration Menu and 
troubleshoot error message. If no message, probable cause is an 
application and/or printer setup problem. 

Communication Problems 

• If tied to an MS-DOS system, ensure the AUTOEXECBAT file 
properly reflects I/O configuration, via the MODE and COM 
commands, and reboot. 

• Verify that a cable known to be good is securely installed between 
the host and printer -10' max. for parallel, 50' max. for RS-232. 

• Verify that both the host system and printer Control Panel 
configurations match. 

• Check that the application's printer configuration file has not 
been improperly modified or inadvertently purged. 

02 WARMUP (Continuous) 

• Can be caused by host interface or cabling problems, or improper 
use of the printer's interface ports. Remove I/O cables and 
power cycle the printer. 

13 PAPER JAM Indications 

• If media visibly jams, it may be unsuitable for the LaserJet 
printer. Try a reputable xerographic bond paper or other suitable 
media per Chapter 2 herein or Appendix D of the User's Manual. 

• If using envelopes, ensure they meet specifications in Section 2-5 
of this manual or Appendix D of User's Manual. Do not shuffle 
envelopes prior to loading in the input tray. 

• Printer may require operator cleaning. (See User's Manual.) 

• If all looks well but jam indication occurs just prior to deliveiy, 
host application and/or printer setup is probably at fault. Can 
occur if unexpected media size is placed in Manual Feed tray. 

ERROR 20 (Memory Overflow) 

• Insufficient printer user memory is available to format the cur- 
rent page. Additional user memory may be freed up by removing 
any soft fonts or macros. User may need to purchase additional 
memoiy. 

ERROR 21 (Print Overrun) 

• The current page is too complex to be printed in its entirety. On 
the HP 33440, the only solution is to simplify the page. With the 
HP 33449, accessory memory can be purchased and PAGE 
PROTECT (in the Configuration Menu) enabled. 

ERROR 22 (I/O Configuration Error) 

• Because printer and host are not handshaking properly, the 
printer's I/O buffer has overrun. Verify cabling per Appendix D, 
and the host's interface/configuration and the printer's Control 
Panel configuration. 

ERROR 40 (Data Transfer Error) 

• Printer is receiving data in an unrecognizable format, a common 
result of having powered down the host with the printer online. 
Also caused by nonmatching baud rates or host configuration 
other than an 8-bit -1 start/stop bit - no parity ASCII character. 

Unexpected Results - No Failure Indication 

• Most unexpected problems can be attributed to the host applica- 
tion or its use. The Personal Peripherals Assist Line is available 
free of charge to help the user through these problems at 
(208) 323-2551. Note that this is a toll call. 



Figure 7-1. Pre-Troubleshootmg Check List 



7-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



All troubleshooting should begin with Flowchart 7-1 which can be used to verify the major printer 
functions described in the table below: 



• 



Table 7-1. Major Printer Functions 



FUNCTION 


DESCRIPTION 


Power Up. 


The powering up of the printer to the ready state following Self Test, 
and the distribution of DC voltages. 


Paper Movement. 


The printer's ability to successfully move media from the input tray to 
either the Face-Up or Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 


Image Formation. 


The printer's ability to successfully generate a print image and transfer 
this image to various print media. 


Communications. 


The printer's ability to successfully communicate with its host system. 



The service representative should work through the main flowchart sequentially, function by 
function, until all of the printer's major functions have been verified. Flowchart 7-2 (Power-Up 
Sequence) and Flowchart 7-3 (Paper Movement Sequence) should be used in conjunction with 
Flowchart 7-1. If a malfunction is encountered, the service person should branch to the specified 
section. 



7-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



f S-tart \ 




See Section 7-2. 



Powei — on 
printer 



05 SELFTEST -\ Uo 

withtn I second? 




See Flowchart 7-2. 



Press the 
TEST PRINT button 



Paper, noverneht : . : i 

conptetc ...:.' 



No 




See Flowchart 7-3. 



I IhageFornatJbn I 
I . . : complete : I 



Perforn Service 

node SELF TEST 

(Section 3-6) 




Yes 



Can 
Printer 
Connunlcate "\ No/Don't know 
with host systen^ 
properly? 



Yes 



^ See Section 7-5. 



See Section 7-6. 



Printer OKI 




Flowchart 7-1. Main Troubleshooting Sequence 



7-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



See 'Blank Display' 
Table 7-3. 



Yes 



<- 



Start 



±. 



Power Off and 
On Printer 



Yes 



\L 



Power-up 
sequence 
conplete 




No 



^ 



See Table 7-2. 



Flowchart 7-2. Power-Up Sequence 




7-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



r start \ 



No/Don't know 



Rc-testing using 
neotlCL per 
Chapter 2 



Yes 




See Table 7-2. 




See Table 7-lS 
Exit Area Checks 



Yes 



Begfn with Table 7-% Paper Feed Area Checks 



No 



Perforn Main 
Troubleshooting 

sequence 
Rowchart 7-1. 




See Table 7-9, Paper Feed Area Checks 



See Table 7-14, Registration/Transfer 
Area Checks 



Flowchart 7-3. Paper ft^ovement Sequence 



7-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Fusing Assenbly?/ ^ ^^^ '^''^^^ ^"^^' ^'^'"^ ^'^^'^ ^^^^^^ 



See -table below. 



Flowchart 7-3. Paper Movement Sequence (Continuec 
Possible Paper Movement Sequence Problems 



PROBLEM 


ACTION 


1. Wrong size (length) media being used. 


Replace with correct size media. 


2. Tray size sensing switches/tabs defective. 


See "Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, 
SW203) Functional Check" in the following 
section. 


3. Mechanical problem with Exit Sensor Flag. 


See Table 7-15, "Exit Area Checks," in the 
following section. 


4. Electrical problem with PS331. 


See Table 7-16, "Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) 
Functional Check," in the following section. 


5. Delivery jam. 


See Table 7-15, "Exit Area Checks," in the 
following section. 



1^ 



7-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



7-4„ PRIi\lTER MESSAGE TROUBLESHO' 



'i '!\l ii 



\J'C3 



Message Summary Table 

Table 7-2, "Printer Messages," is a list of all status, attendance, error, and service messages 
affecting the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers, HP 33449-specific messages are overprinted in 
color. When two items appear in the "MESSAGE" column, the first is the HP 33440 display 
message and the second is the HP 33449 display message. This list identifies the action required 
to correct the situation identified by the message. 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages 



MESSAGE . 


SrrUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


Blank Display 


Refer to "Blank Display" section. (Table 7-3) 


GO READY 


Proceed; printer is ready to use. 


02 WARMING UP 


Wait until printer signals ready. 


02 WARMING UP 
(Continuously) 


Refer to "02 WARMING UP (continuous) Message" section. (Table 7-4) 


04 SELF TEST 


Continuous Self Test printing. 


05 SELF TEST 


Self Test in progress. 


06 PRINTING TEST 


Self Test printing. 


06 FONT PRINTOUT 


Printing sample characters from available fonts. 


07 RESET 


Returns all printer settings to Printing Menu settings and clears 
buffered pages, temporary soft fonts, and macros. 


08 COLD RESET 


Returns both Configuration and Printing Menu selections to the 
factory settings. See Chapter 3, Section 3-3. 


09 MENU RESET 


Returns all Printing Menu items to factory settings and clears 
buffered pages, temporary soft fonts, and macros. See Chapter 3, 
Section 3-3. 


10 RESET TO SAVE 
(HP 33449 Only) : 




Press and hold [reset J (until 07 RESET appears) to contirm the 
acceptance of Printing Menu selections (temporary fonts, macros 


and buffered data v\ill be deleted), or press (continue] or (on line J 
(no changes to any selections will be made at this time). See 
Chapter 3, Sections 3^3 and 3-4. 


11 PAPER OUT 
(HP 33440 Only) 


Add media to the input tray. If problem continues, refer to the "11 
PAPER OUT Message" section. (Table 7-5) 


12 PRINTER OPEN 


Close the Top Cover Assembly. If problem continues, refer to the 
"12 PRIHTER OPEN Message" section. (Table 7-7) 


13 PAPER JAM 


Open printer, clear any paper within the printer, and press 
(continue) or (ON line) to reprint the page. If problem persists. 


refer to "13 PAPER JAM Message" section. (Table 7-8) 


14 NO EP CART 


Install an EP-S Cartridge. If problem continues, refer to the "14 NO 
EP CART Message" section. (Table 7-17) 



7-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



.--■■■ ME^^iGE ''■':"■ Vl;:" 


SITUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


15 ENGINE TEST 


Engine test with printout produced by pressing the Test Print 
button. 


16 TONER LOW 


Replace EP-S Cartridge. If problem continues, refer to "16 TONER 
LOW Message" section. (Table 7-18) 


17 MEMORY CONFIG 
(HP 33449 Only) : 


Indicates memory reconfiguratibh;: in operation as a result of setting 
Page Protection ON. .;■ ■^:■■ 


18 SKIP SEI^TESt ■ : ■ 
(HP 33449 Only) ii : 


Sleps the ROM and Rj?tM portions of the power on self te 
activated by holding down; the (r-J key arid powering on the printer. 
This should not be used as it ebmpromises printer integrity. (Note: 
This is for liianu&ctiirihg 1^ only.) 


20 ERROR 

20 MEM OVERFLOW ; 


Indicates a memory overflow; too much data is being sent to the 
printer and the printer has ran out of memory. Pressing the 
(continue] key causes the printer to print only the information it 
has received. 

If the error persists, it may be necessary to simplify the print 
job (i.e., fewer fonts and less graphics information) or have the 
customer purchase additional memory. 


21 ERROR 

21 PRINT OVERRUN 


Indicates that the information being sent to the printer is too 
complex for the printer (i.e., the formatting capabilities of the 
printer can not keep up with the formatting instructions being sent 
to it by the computer). 

If the error persists, it may be necessary to simplify the job (i.e., 
reduce the number of characters or different fonts used, reduce 
the number of pixels addressed or cursor repositions, or reduce 
addressing the same pixel location multiple times). With the HP 
33449, this problem can also be resolved by adding at least one 
additional memory PCA and setting PAGEPROTECT=[LTR, LGL or 
A4]. 


22 ERROR 

22 I/O CNFIG ERR 


Indicates that the host computer and the printer are not 
communicating properly (i.e., the printer and computer baud rates 
may not match or the handshake protocol may be incompatible). 

Refer to Section 7-6, "Interface Troubleshooting." 

Note: The printer supports the XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) 
and DTR (Data Terminal Ready) handshake protocols. Both 
signals are sent from the printer during data transmission. The 
Enquire/Acknowledge (Enq/Ack) protocol is not supported by this 
printer. 


40 ERROR 


Indicates that an error occurred during the transfer of data from 
the computer to the printer. Refer to Section 7-6, "Interface 
Troubleshooting," for help. 

Note: This error occurs if the computer is powered down while the 
printer is on line or when attempting to use baud rates which do 
not match. 



7-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



* 



# 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



:::-A:-?:--MEssAOE-.-- ." 


SITUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


41 ERROR 


Indicates that a temporary error occurred in the printed page (see 
Table 7-20). If this error occurs, press the (continue) key and 
the printer will repeat the page. Refer to Table 7-20 ("41 ERROR 
Checks") in the *'51 ERROR Message" section if the error persists. 

Note: This error most frequently occurs when a Beam Detect 
Error occurs. If the printer cannot correct the error condition after 
two seconds, a Beam Detect Malfunction (51 ERROR) will occur. 


42 ERROR 

42 OPT INTERFACE 


Indicates a communications problem has occurred between the 
Interface/Formatter PCA and the optional interface. Press the 
[continue) key to resume printing. Reseat the Optional I/O PCA. 
If the error persists, refer to the documentation for the optional 
interface. 


43 ERROR 

43 OPT INTERFACE 


Indicates a communications problem has occurred between the 
Interface/Formatter PCA and the optional interface. If the error 
persists, refer to the documentation for the Optional I/O PCA. 


50 SERVICE 


Power off the printer for a minimum of 10 minutes. If the problem 
continues, refer to the "50 SERVICE Fuser Malfunction" section. 
(Table 7-19) 


51 ERROR 


Indicates loss of laser beam for over 2 seconds. Refer to the "51 
ERROR Message" section. (Table 7-21) 


52 ERROR 


Indicates scanner motor unable to maintain proper speed. Refer to 
the "52 ERROR Scanner Malfunction" section. (Table 7-22) 


53 ERROR 
(HP 33440 only) 


The 53 ERROR indicates that the optional memory installed in 
the printer is NOT compatible with the Interface PCA. Use HP 
memory only. 


53-1 ERRORUNIT 
(HP 33449 only) 


An error was detected on the optional memory card in the front 
(right) slot. Verify that the correct revision level ("B" or greater) of 
memory is installed in the printer. 


53-2 ERRORUNIT ■: 
(HP 33449 only) ; 


An error was detected -on the optional memory card in the rear 
(left) slot. Verify that the correct revision level ("B" or greater) of 
memory is installed in the printer. Use HP memory only. 



• 



7-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



■ ::^^:•:^:-]^&iSAGE#,;:" 


SITUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


55 ERROR 


Indicates a communications problem between the DC Controller 
PCA and the Interface/Formatter PCA. Undefined status has been 
exchanged between the two PCA's or a status request has gone 
unanswered. 

Perform the Test Print operation to verify DC Controller 
functionality. If the message persists, check for any cable damage. 
If the message still persists, perform the following: 

1- Ensure J209 jumper is in place on the DC Controller. 

2. Verify proper DC voltages per Figure 7-2, "J210 Location." 

3. Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA.* 

4. Replace the DC Controller PCA.* 

*HP 33440AB/AU only: In some cases, both the DC Controller and 
Interface PCA will need to be replaced together. (See also Service 
Note 33440AB/AU-09.) 


57-1 ERRORUNIT 
(HP 33449 Only) 


The memory card in the front (right) slot cannot be configured 
because it exceeds memory capacity.: 


57-2 ERRORUNIT 
(HP 33449 Only) 


The memory card in the rear (left) slot cannot be configured 
because it exceeds memory capacity. 


61 SERVICE 


Indicates a checksum error was detected during Self Test in the 
Interface/Formatter PCA 's program ROM. If the message persists, 
replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


62 SERVICE 


Indicates a checksum error was detected in the Interface/Formatter 
PCA's internal font ROM. If the message persists, replace the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. 


63 SERVICE 


Indicates an error was detected in either the Interface/Formatter 
PCA's Dynamic RAM or an Optional Memory PCA (if installed). 
Remove any Optional Memory PCAs (if installed) and retest for the 
error. 

If the error message persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


64 SERVICE 


Indicates a laser scan buffer error. 

Attempt to clear the error by power cycling the printer. If the error 
persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


65 SERVICE 


Indicates a dynamic RAM controller error. 

Attempt to clear the error by power cycling the printer. If the error 
persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


67 SERVICE 


Indicates a miscellaneous hardware or address error on the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. Verify that all cables, font cartridges, 
and accessories are seated. If the error persists, replace the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. 



m 



m 



7-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



MESSAGE 


SITUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


68 ERROR 
(HP 33449 Only) 


Indicates a. recoverable error has been detected in NVRAM 
(Non-Vblatile RAM). Press (gontiimueJ to clear, then verify the 
Control Panel menu settings: one or more menu items have been 
reset to their factory default settings during error recovery. 

If this condition persists, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


68 SERVICE 

(HP 33440 and HP 33449) 

68 REABY/SERVICE 
(HP 33449 Only) 


Indicates a NVRAM (Non- Volatile RAM) failure has occurred 
requiring replacement of the Interface/Formatter PCA, The printer 
can be operated without NVRAM until that time. Press (coimtinue) 
to clear the display. All Control Panel values are set to their factory 
default settings. The oo READY message becomes 68 READY/SERVICE 
to remind the user of the problem. 


69 SERVICE 


Indicates a timeout error has occurred between the 
Interface/Formatter PCA and the Optional I/O PCA. Refer to the 
I/O Interface documentation. 

Remove the Optional I/O PCA and retest. If the message persists, 
replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


70 ERROR 
(HP 33449 Only) 


The firmware cartridge was not designed for this printer. Turn the 
printer OFF, then back ON. If the error persists, verify with the 
cartridge vendor whether the cartridge was specifically designed for 
this printer. 


71 ERROR 
(HP 33449 Only) 


The firmware cartridge was not designed for this printer. Turn 
the printer OFF, then back ON. If error persists, verify with the 
cartridge vendor whether the cartridge was specifically designed for 
this printer. 


72 SERVICE i 
(HP 33449 Only) 


The font cartridge was removed too quickly after it was inserted. 
Turn the printer OFF, then back ON. This message can also result 
from a bad font cartridge or bad connectors on the Formatter PCA. 


79 SERVICE 
(HP 33449 OnlJ^> 


An unexpected error has been encountered. Document error 
message. Turn the printer OFF, then back ON. If the message 
persists, proceed as follows: 

Solid: Remove memory PCAs and font, macro, and personality 
cartridges one at a time. If the problem persists and the printer has 
an Optional I/O PCA installed, try a different interface (parallel or 
serial) if possible. 

If the problem continues, replace the Formatter PCA. 

Intermittent: Have the customer remove, for a period of time, any 
non-HP hardware/firmware products attached to the printer; If the 
problem continues during this test period, replace the Formatter 

PCA.; ; ;^.■ V ■.";•■ 

Error message documentation should be returned with the 
defective component. 



7-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



:■. MESSAGE ■ ;. 


SITUATION DESCRIBED AND/OR ACTION REQUIRED 


CONFIG LANGUAGE ■". : : 
(HP 33449 Only) : 


■ ■ . ■ ■ ■■ . ■ . ■ ■■ . . ■■ ■ ■ .. . ■ . . .... ■ -.■ . .; ■ 


This- message is the result of holding down the {enter ) key while : 
pov?ering oh the printer. Following SELF JEST,: : the user Will 
need to seleiet; the desired :display jaiigtiage; ttsing: the @: ^, and , 
{ENTER) keys. ..■;::.:-■;■ 


EC LOAD [envelope size] 


A user request has been made for an envelope size not currently 
installed in the printer or the tray is out of envelopes. Load the 
correct envelope in the envelope tray. Insert a loaded tray and 
select the loaded envelope size from the Control Panel or press 
(CONTINUE) to override. If the problem continues, see the "ll PAPER 


OUT Message" section, (Table 7-5) 

([Envelope size] maybe one of the following: COMIO, MONARC, C5 or 
DL.) 


PC LOAD [paper size] 


This message is displayed whenever there is a user request for a 
paper size that is not currently installed in the printer (per the 
Tray Size switches) or the input tray is out of media. Insert the 
proper loaded tray into the printer or press (continue) to override. 
If the problem persists, see the *'li PAPER OUT Message" section. 
(Table 7-5) 

([Paper size] may be one of the following: A4 , EXEC , letter, or 
LEGAL.) 


PE FEED [envelope size] 

or 

PE FEED ENVELOPE 


A user request has been made to manually feed an envelope of 
the indicated size. Feed the envelope through the manual feed 
slot or press [continueJ to feed from the tray. If the manual feed 
operation is not working as expected, perform the "Manual Feed 
Sensor (PS302) Functional Check" described in this section. 


PF FEED [paper size] 


A user request has been made to manually feed paper of the 
indicated size. Feed paper through the manual feed slot or press 
[continue) to feed from the tray. If the manual feed operation 
is not working as expected, perform the "Manual Feed Sensor 
(PS302) Functional Check" described in this section. 


ENVELOPE =[env. size] 
(HP 33440) 

PE 'rRAY= [envelope: size] : ; :, 
(HP33449) ; 


This message is displayed whenever an envelope tray is inserted in . 
the printer. 

The user must tell the printer what size envelopes are being used 
by scrolling through the choices (using the (+) and C-) keys) 
and pressing the (enter) key to make the new selection. Press 
[on line] or (CONTINUEJ to proceed. If an envelope tray is not being 
used when this message occurs, reseat the tray. If the problem 
continues, see "Tray Size Switches Functional Check" in this 
section, ([Envelope size] may be one of the following: com 10, 

MONARC, C5 or DL.) 



• 



7-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-2. Printer Messages (continued) 



.,^::^^/-C--^d:^.MESSA(JE;,\:i:r,^ 


r Sh^^ DESCRIBEP A^^ REQUIRED 


FC [T-PIFT/RIGHT/BOTH] 


Font cartridge(s) were removed or replaced while the printer was 
off line and contained buffered data. Reinsert cartridge(s) and 


press the [continue] or (online) key. if the problem continues, try 
another font rartridge before replacing the Interface/Formatter 
PGA. 


FC [LEFT/RIGHT/BOTH] 

NO FONT 

(HP 33449 Only) 


Font cartridge(s) could not be read by the printer. Reinsert 
cartridge(s) and press the [contin jeJ or (onlineJ key. If the 
problem eontinues, try another font cartridge before replacing the 
Interface/Formatter PGA. ■ ; 


FE CARTRIDGE 


A cartridge has been removed while the printer was on line. Turn 
printer OFF, reinsert the cartridge, and turn printer ON. If the 
problem continues, try another cartridge before replacing the 
Interface/Formatter PGA. 



7-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Blank Display 

All information displayed on the printer's Control Panel is generated by the Interface/Formatter 
(I/F) PCA. The I/F PCA provides all voltages and display information to the Control Panel, and 
the Control Panel cable connects the Interface/Formatter PCA to the Control Panel. 

A blank display panel is the result of one of the following malfunctions: 

■ Service Mode was initiated with no follow through. 

■ The printer cannot generate sufficient voltages to illuminate (enable) the display panel. 

■ The display panel, its related cabling, or its drive circuitry is defective. 

iMote The test pattern produced by pressing the Test Print Button is exclusively created 

?, by the DC Controller PCA. The printer's Control Panel and Interface/Formatter 

PCA may be removed from the printer and the test would still be functional. If a 
print engine Test Print pattern can be created once the fuser reaches its operating 
temperature and all voltages are correct, the problem is more likely a defective 
Control Panel, Control Panel cable, or Interface/Formatter PCA. 






Table 7-3. Blank Display 



CHECKS 


.\\^ :■ ■::.■ ..- ■■ .. .'action .- 


1. Is the printer's ON/OFF switch set to ON? 


Power ON printer. 


2. Is AC power available at the input power 
receptacle? 


Verify input power. 


3. Is the power cord fully inserted in the rear of 
the printer? 


Verify. 


4. Is the Lower Cooling Fan operational? 
(Indicates + 5 and + 24A voltages are present.) 


If no airflow can be detected at the lower right 
rear of the printer (below the Power Switch), 
proceed with the DC Voltage Functional Check 
which follows this table. 


5. Are the +5V and GND screws on the 
Interface/Formatter PCA loose or missing? 


Verify that screws are fully tightened and that 
voltage is available to the I/F PCA. 


6. Are the display electronics malfunctioning? 


Perform the following steps while power-cycling 
the printer: 

1- Remove any I/O cables to the host system. 

2- Reseat the Control Panel Cable. 
3. Replace the Control Panel. 

4- Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 

5. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 

6. Replace the Control Panel Cable. 



7-20 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



DC Voltage Functional Check 

The DC Power Supply Assemtily receives AC voltage from the AC Power Module and converts 
this power into three DC voltage levels. The presence of these DC voltages may be checked at 
connector J210 on the DC Controller PCA (see Figure 7-2). 



J210-9 = +5 Vdc 
J210-5 = -5 Vdc 
J210-I = +24 Vdc 



DDDDDDD 





+24V 



t-lC 



ion 



The J210 connector is located on the right side lower base of the printer next to the Test Print 
Button. Using a DVM, verify the +24, -5, and +5 voltages (±5%) are present at the specified pins 
using chassis ground as a reference. 

If ALL of these voltages are missing: 

1. Check Fuse Fl on the DC Power Supply Assembly. (See Figure 7-3.) 

2. Ensure the proper AC Power Module and DC Power Supply Assembly are installed per the 
available AC line voltage. 

3. Perform the "AC Power Functional Check" on the following page. 

If ANY of these voltages are missing: 

1. Ensure the proper AC Power Module and DC Power Supply Assembly are installed per the 
available AC line voltage. 

2. Remove any accessory memory, font/firmware cartridges, or optional I/O. 

3. Replace the DC Power Supply Assembly. 

4. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 

i^Ot© The absence of any voltage may be the result of a defective component elsewhere 

in the printer. If this is suspected, disconnect one cable at a time from the DC 
Controller PCA and power cycle the printer until the voltage comes up. Use the 
printer wiring diagram (see Section 7-7) to then identify the defective assembly. 



^t»^"] 



7-21 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

AC Power Functional Check 

The AC Power Module distributes AC power to the DC Power Supply Assembly and to the 
Fusing Assembly. If any DC voltages are present in the printer, AC power is also present and the 
following procedures can be omitted. 



Fuse F1 
Location- 




DC Power Supply 
Assembly 



Jumpers 



Voltrreter 



Figure 7-3, Fuse F1 Location 

Verify that AC power is being input to the DC Power Supply Assembly as follows: 

1. Power the printer OFF and remove the Main Body Covers. 

2. Remove the printer's Front Support Plate. Connect a voltmeter to J502-1 and to J502-3 of the 
DC Power Supply Assembly (see Figure 7-3). 

3. Power on the printer. If the expected AC line voltage is not present at this point, replace the 
AC Power Module or the cable between the two assemblies. 

If line voltage is present, verify that Fuse Fl is not open. If Fuse Fl is good, the entire AC voltage 
path has been verified. Resume the DC Voltage Functional Check (see the previous page). 



7-22 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

"02 WARMING UP" (continuous) Message 

During normal operation, the printer displays a 00 READY message within 90 seconds of power-on. 
If the 02 WARMING UP message persists for longer than 90 seconds, check the following: 

Table 7-4. 02 WARMING UP (continuous) Checks 



CAUSES. .- 


/ACTION- . 


1. Are there host system interface problems? 


Disconnect -the interface cable from the printer, 
power printer OFF, then ON. May be caused 
by a parallel cable connected to a serial port 
or vice-versa, both serial and parallel cables 
attached, or a bad host interface. 


2. Is J209 (jumper) installed on the DC 
Controller? 


Install jumper. 


3. Is the Control Panel cable fully connected? 


Reseat/replace the Control Panel cable. 


4. Is the Control Panel Assembly inoperative? 


Replace the Control Panel Assembly. 


5. Is the Interface/Formatter PCA inoperative? 


Replace the Interface/Formatter PCA. 



• 



"11 PAPER OUT" Message 
"PC/EC LOAD" Message 

Two conditions result in the 11 PAPER OUT (HP 33440) or PC LOAD [paper size]/EC LOAD 
[envelope size] (HP 33449) messages; first, the absence of the input tray and, second, the absence 
of media in the tray. The tray is sensed as the tray identifier tabs contact one or more of the three 
tray identifier microswitches in the tray input cavity of the printer. Under normal conditions, the 
PC/EC LOAD message is also generated when a paper or envelope size other than what is loaded in 
the printer is called for by the user or software. 

The Paper Sensing Arm is located in the paper input area of the printer. During normal operation, 
the Paper Sensing Arm flag rests on the media installed in the paper tray. The Sensing Arm flag 
is attached to a shaft. The opposite end of the shaft is a photointerrupter that rotates through the 
PS301 (paper out) and PS302 (manual feed) sensors on the Paper Control PCA. 

When the tray is empty, the Paper Sensing Arm flag swings through an opening in the base plate 
of the tray, allowing the photointerrupter to rotate and block sensor PS301. 

The same Paper Sensing Arm is also used for manual feed operation. When media is inserted in 
the manual feed slot atop the input tray cover, the photointerrupter rotates toward the rear of the 
printer and blocks sensor PS302 on the Paper Control PCA. This indicates to the DC Controller 
PCA that media is in position for manual feed. 

The following checks are applicable to both "false paper out" or "undetected paper 
out" conditions. The undetected paper out condition will normally result in a 13 
PAPER JAM error with no paper in the input tray. 



7-23 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 7-5. "11 PAPER OUT" or "PC/EC LOAD" Message Checks 



CHECKS 


.:,j.,r;,\-:J\::j\A!aJJm^;:^^ 


1. Is there any media in the paper tray? 


Install media. 


2. Is the proper paper tray fully inserted in the 
printer? 


Push the tray into the printer until it contacts 
the tray identifier microswitches. 


3. Are any of the tray identifier protrusions 
broken on the paper tray? 


Inspect the tray for damage. If damaged, 
replace the tray. (See Figure 7-5.) 


4. Is the Paper Sensing Arm broken? (See 
Figure 7-4.) 


Inspect the arm for damage; if broken, replace 
the arm. 


5. Is anything hindering the Paper Sensing 
Arm movement? 


Verify that the Sensing Arm swings through 
its full range of motion. Ensure the routing of 
various cables does not hinder Paper Sensing 
Arm movement. It may be necessary to remove 
the DC Power Supply Assembly to closely 
inspect the arm's motion. 


6. Is sensor PS301 on the Paper Control PCA 
functional? 


See the PS301 Functional Check which follows. 


7. Are all paper tray size sensing microswitches 
functional? 


See "Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, 
SW203) Functional Check" which follows. 


8. Does the Control Panel's Paper/Envelope 
setting match the tray being used? 


Correct setting to match tray type. 


9. Is the expected tray size being called for? 


Check the software application. 


10. Is the READY indicator flashing? 


Wait for a change in the display message after 
it stops flashing. 



Paper Sensing Arm 



Rber Optic Cable 




Paper Control 
PCA 



Manual Feed 
Sensor 



Figure 7-4. Paper Sensing Arm 



• 



7-24 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check 

To check the functional operation of the Paper Out Sensor (via the Control Panel display), proceed 
as follows: 

1. While the printer is ON and not in Manual Feed mode (i.e., Manual Feed indicator off), remove 
the input tray from the printer. 

2. With one hand, PUSH on the left-most paper tray identifier switch (SW203), being careful not 
to push the Sensing Arm flag at this time. (See Figure 7-5.) 

If the printer returns to the READY state at this point: 

a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS301). 

b. Replace the DC Controller. 

3. With the other hand, PULL the Paper Sensing Arm flag toward the front of the printer while 
observing the printer's display. 

If PS301 is functioning correctly, the display will alternate from PC/EC LOAD [size] or 11 
PAPER OUT to 00 READY as the Sensing Arm is moved. 

If the display does not alternate, the fault is either a bad Paper Control PCA (PS 301) or a bad 
DC Controller PCA. 

Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional Check 

To check the operation of PS302 (the Manual Feed sensor) via the Control Panel display, proceed 
as follows: 

1. After powering up the printer with 00 READY in the display, change menu item MANUAL FEED= 
to ON and PAPER= to LETTER (HP 33449 only), (On the HP 33440, remember to toggle through 
the remaining menu items, then hold down the [continue/reset) key until 07 RESET appears 
in the display in order for the menu change to take effect.) The MANUAL indicator should now 
be ON. 

2. Take the printer off line and remove the input tray. Note that the printer should remain in a 
READY state at this point. 



3. Press the (print fonts] key. The FORM FEED indicator should be ON and the 06 FONT 
PRINTOUT message should be followed by a PF FEED LETTER message. 

4. With one hand, PUSH on the left-most tray identifier switch (SW203), being careful not to push 
the Sensing Arm Flag at this time (see Figure 7-5). If the pickup roller begins to move at this 
point: 

a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS302). 

b. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 

5. With the other hand, PUSH the Paper Sensing Arm flag toward the rear of the printer. If the 
Pickup Rollers do not move at this point: 

a. Replace the Paper Control PCA (PS302). 

b. Replace the DC Controller PCA. 



7-25 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) Functional Check 

The paper tray size microswitch levers are located on the lower right side of the paper tray cavity. 
The microswitches indicate the presence and size of the installed paper tray to the DC Controller. 
The switches are activated by protrusions located on the rear of the paper tray. When the tray is 
inserted, the protrusions activate (engage) the microswitches (refer to Figure 7-5 below.) 

Table 7-6. Configuration of Tray Size Sensing Switches 



Paper Tray Size 


SW203 


:^'.::"- SW^2V.;::-^^ 


^VJ'^/SW201 ;■■".;.■■::.; 


Executive 


ON 


ON 


ON 


A4 


ON 


ON 


OFF 


Legal 


OFF 


OFF 


ON 


Envelope (Size set via Control Panel) 


OFF 


ON 


ON 


Letter 


ON 


OFF 


OFF 


No Tray Installed 


OFF 


OFF 


OFF 


Note: ON = Engaged 





Locking 
Mechanism 



Metal Plate 




SW203 
SW202 

SW201 



Paper Tray 
Identifier Tabs 



Microswitch Levers 
(Slanted) in Paper 
Tray cavity 



Figure 7-5. Tray Size Sensing Microswitches Locations 

Operational Check 

To check the operation of these switches (via the printer's Control Panel display), perform the 
following: 

1. Power on the printer and allow it to warm up (to 00 READY). Remove the paper tray and ensure 
printer is not in the Manual Feed mode. 

2. With one hand, PULL forward on the Paper Sensing Arm. 



7-26 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

3. With the other hand, PUSH switch SW203 (the left-most microswitch) while observing the 
Control Panel display. (See Figure 7-5). 

4. When the switch is functioning properly, the display will change to 00 READY. 

5. Repeat above procedure, but push switch SW201 (the right-most microswitch). The display 
should change to 00 READY. 

6. Repeat above procedure, but push switches SW202 and SW201 (the right two switches) 
simultaneously. The display should change to ENVEL0PE=Csize3 (HP 33440) or PE 
TRAY=[size] (HP 33449). 

If the display does not change as specified, replace the DC Controller PCA or the switch lever arms 
as appropriate. 

Electrical Check 

A continuity check can be performed on these switches on the DC Controller PCA. 

"12 PRINTER OPEN" Message 

The 12 PRINTER OPEN error indication tells the operator to close the printer's Top Cover 
Assembly. The DC Controller PCA detects this condition due to the absence of the -I-24B Vdc 
supply. When the printer's Top Cover Assembly is closed, a protrusion on the cover extends into 
the DC Power Supply Assembly and closes the switch within this module. The closing of this 
switch provides +24B Vdc to the DC Controller PCA. On the DC Controller PCA, the +24B Vdc 
power is distributed to the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly and to a + 3.2 Vdc regulator 
on the PCA. The output from the +3.2 Vdc regulator is the power source for digital-to-analog 
circuitry on the DC Controller PCA. 

Table 7-7. "12 PRINTER OPEN" Checks 



■■■■/■■.CHECKS ■■.■■.■■;■;■;■■■.. 


ACTION 


1. Is the Top Cover Assembly open? 


Ensure the Top Cover Assembly is firmly 
closed. 


2. Is the protrusion on the Top Cover Assembly 
which activates the DC Power Supply 
microswitch missing or broken? 


Visually inspect. Correct if missing or broken. 


3. Is the printer plugged into the correct power 
source? 


Verify printer power rating. Refer to Chapter 1, 
Section 1-2, of this manual. 

Note: Plugging a 220 V model printer into a 
120 V voltage source will result in a 12 PRINTER 
OPEN error. 


4. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly correctly 
seated into its connectors on the DC Controller 
PCA? 


Visually inspect. Reseat module if necessary. 


5. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly defective? 


See the "+24B Vdc Electrical Check" following. 


6. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? 


See the "+24B Vdc Electrical Check" following. 



7-27 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

+24B Vdc Functional Check 

For an explanation of the source of the +24B Vdc power, read the overview for the "12 PRINTER 
OPEN" message on the previous page. 

To verify if the +24B Vdc power supply is functional, proceed as follows: 

1. Remove the access cover(s) to the test connector (J210, next to the Test Print Button). 

2. Using a voltmeter with frame ground as a reference, monitor the voltage at J210-11 while 
manually activating the printer Top Cover Assembly closed microswitch (see Figure 7-6 and 
Figure 7-7). The measured voltage should toggle from zero to +3.2 Vdc (±5%) as the switch is 
activated. If the voltage is present, yet the message persists, replace the DC Controller PCA. 

If the voltage is not present, +24B Vdc (±5%) can be measured at J212-13 (bottom cover must 
be removed) while activating the Top Cover Assembly closed microswitch (see Figure 7-6). 

If +24B is not present, replace the DC Power Supply Assembly. If +24B is present but +3.2 V 
is not, the DC Controller PCA is defective. 















\ 












■ Insert Non-Metallic 








/^f R 


^: 




Object into Opening 








^Im 


=^T^ 


^^ 


to Activate Microswitch 






yfczjjy 


U |«J 


. 4V/= 


y 








-^^^o 


^ 


II 


l/ 








— ^ — — — =^t^^^ 


'— — 


, ''"^ 


""— =:^^=^^— ---'^ 








_^r= 


=— = 


===- 


^"^ 







!y Mscroswr 



















• 
1 


• 

• 
3 


• 
5 


• • 

* *n 
7 9 


• 

•— 
11 


• • 

• • 


• 
• 


• 
• 


J210 










-5V 














+24V 


+51 


+3.2V 


'■'. Note: / ...See: Figure .7-2 
For Gpiinector Location 


















J 



sure 7-7. J210 Test Connector Test Point 



7-28 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



"13 PAPER JAM" Message 

To better understand the components involved with paper movement through the printer, refer 
to Figure 7-8 and the accompanying descriptions. To verify proper paper movement, refer to 
Flowchart 7-3 (Paper Movement Troubleshooting Flowchart). 




Figure 7-8. Paper Path vs Paper Sensors 



Paper Path Components and 
Item 

1. Paper Tray. 

2. Manual Feed Input Tray. 

3. Auxiliary Paper Guide. 

4. Paper Sensing Arm. 

5. Paper Pickup Roller. 

6. Separation Pad. 

7. Paper Guide. 

8. Registration Rollers. 



Functions (refer to Figure 7-8): 
Description 

Contains paper to be printed. 

Located on the lid of the Paper Tray; adjustable for various widths 
of paper. 

Guides paper to the Paper Pickup Roller. 

Used for detecting paper during manual feed and for detecting out 
of paper conditions. 

Makes one rotation during paper feed process to advance paper to 
the Registration Rollers. 

Works in conjunction with the Paper Pickup Roller to ensure that 
only one sheet of paper is fed to the Registration Rollers. 

Guides paper toward the Registration Rollers. 

Temporarily holds paper until the leading edge is aligned with the 
image on the EP-S Cartridge's photosensitive drum. 



7-29 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



9. Transfer Guide. 

10. Transfer Roller. 

11. Transfer Corona and 
Static Teeth Assembly. 

12. Feed Roller. 

13. Photosensitive Drum. 

14. Feed Guide Assembly. 

15. Fuser Feed Guide. 

16. Upper Fusing Roller. 

17. Lower Pressure Roller. 

18. Fuser Exit Paper Guide. 

19. Paper Exit Sensor. 

20. Fuser Delivery Rollers. 

21. Deflectors. 

22. Face-Up Output Tray. 

23. Exit Area Paper Guide 
(Upper). 

24. Exit Area Paper Guide 
(Lower). 

25. Exit Delivery Rollers 
(Lower). 



Guides paper onto the Transfer Corona. 

Assists in moving paper onto the Transfer Corona. 

Provides a positive charge to transfer the electrostatic toner image 
to the paper and help separate the paper from the drum. 

Advances paper onto the Feed Guide Assembly. 

Creates and holds the electrostatic toner image. 

Guides paper toward the Fusing Assembly. 

Guides the paper toward the Fusing Roller. 

Provides heat to fuse the toner image to paper. 

Provides pressure to ensure the toner image is permanently fused 
to paper. 

Guides paper between the fuser pick-off pawls (claws) and the 
fuser delivery rollers. 

Detects the presence of paper in the Fuser Assembly, 

Assists paper in exiting the Fuser Assembly. 

Deflects paper exiting the fuser to either the Face-Up (Rear) 
Output Tray or the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 

Allows paper to stack face-up in reverse order, minimizing 
curvature produced by the paper path. 

Guides paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 
Guides paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 
Delivers paper the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 
Delivers paper the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 



26. Exit Delivery Rollers 
(Upper). 

27. Static Charge Eliminator. Removes residual static charges from the paper 

28. Face-Down Output Tray. Stacks output in correct order, but face down. 



7-30 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Paper Jam Detection 

Any paper movement problem normally results in a paper jam indication. All paper jam detection 
centers around the Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) on the Thermistor/Exit Sensor PCA being 
interrupted by the Exit Sensing Arm photointernipter on the Fusing Assembly. This sensor 
detects the presence or absence of paper and inputs this information to the main DC Controller 
microprocessor where it is stored in memory. From this information, the microprocessor 
determines when a paper jam has occurred. The following conditions result in a paper jam: 

1. When paper does not reach the Fusing Assembly within a specified time. 

2. When paper does not clear the Fusing Assembly within a specified time (dependent upon 
current paper size as determined by SW201, SW202, and SW203 on the DC Controller PCA). 

3. When paper is present in the Fusing Assembly at printer power ON and the fuser temperature 
is lower than 150° C. 

To effectively troubleshoot a paper jam problem, the position of the leading and lagging edges of 
the media must be noted. The rest of this section is subdivided according to the position of any 
jammed paper (or other media) in the printer. 



Table 7-8. *'13 PAPER JAM" Checks 



CHECKS 


ACTION 


1. Is there media in the input tray? 


If not, refer to 'Taper Out Sensor (PS301) 
Functional Check" earlier in this section. 


2. Does the error occur at initial power-on or 
whenever the Top Cover Assembly is closed? 


If so, clear any media from the Fusing 
Assembly. If the problem persists, see Table 
7-16, "Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check." 


3. Can the printer support the media being 
used? 


Retest using supportable media. (See Chapter 2 
for media information.) 


4. Does the leading edge of the media reach the 
Registration Rollers? 


If not, begin with Table 7-9, "Paper Feed Area 
Checks." 


5. Does the media enter the Fusing Assembly? 


If not, see Table 7-14, "Registration/Transfer 
Area Checks." 


6. Does the media actually (visibly) jam after 
reaching the Fusing Assembly? 


Yes: See Table 7-15, "Exit Area Checks." 
No: 

1. If using the Manual Feed slot, ensure the 
proper size paper is being used. 

2. Perform "Tray Size Switches (SW201, 
SW202, SW203) Functional Check" earlier 
in this section. 

3. See Table 7-16, "Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) 
Check." 



7-31 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Hint 



Paper movement through the printer can be visually observed by initiating a 
TEST PRINT operation with the Top Cover Assembly open. To do this, open the 
Top Cover Assembly and defeat the Top Cover Interlock Switch. With one hand, 
hold down one of the Drum Sensitivity Microswitches (see Figure 7-17) and, with 
the other, press the TEST PRINT button on the lower right side of the printer. 
This should feed paper up to the point it enters the Fusing Assembly. By holding 
down the fusing system drive lever (see Figure 7-15), the paper will continue 
through the Fusing Assembly as well. Note that there will be a momentary 
pause in paper movement, followed by an ERROR 51 indication. This is normal 
operation since the Laser Shutter Arm, normally engaged by the EP-S Cartridge, 
does not allow laser light to reach the beam detect cable. 



Paper Feed Area Checks 

The following procedures are designed to help identify any component(s)-from the Input Tray to 
the Registration Rollers -that are failing or marginal, causing paper feed problems that result in a 
"13 PAPER JAM" indication. 

Table 7-9. Paper Feed Area Checks 



-. 'CHECKS ^ ■■■.•• • 


ACTION 


1. Is the Main Motor Functional? 


See Table 7-10, "Main Motor Checks." 


2. Is the Paper Tray defective? 


See Table 7-11, "Paper Tray Checks." 


3. Is the Paper Pickup Solenoid (SL301) 
operational? 


See Table 7-12, "SL301 Checks." 


4. Are the Feed Roller and Separation Pad 
Assemblies operational? 


See Table 7-13, "Paper Feed Mechanical 
Checks." 



7-32 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Main Motor (M1) Functional Check 



The Main Motor drives all moving components in the paper path (see Chapter 5, Section 5-3, 
Figures 5-13 and 5-15). The printer's Main Motor is a four-phase stepping motor controlled by the 
submicroprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. Motor operation begins when the Print (PRNT) 
signal is generated by the main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. Four output control 
signals from the DC Controller PCA (A, A, B, and B) are input to the DC Power Supply Assembly 
and are used to control the Main Motor. During normal operation, the Main Motor is enabled 
three seconds prior to paper being delivered to the Registration Rollers. The Main Motor remains 
enabled until all printing is completed and all paper has been moved to the output tray. 

The Main Motor, under normal conditions, is driven for one second at printer powerup. 



Table 7-10. Main Motor Checks 



::.■;:■: :CHEC?ics .-;■:: 


;::.■■; :| ACTION".;., J' ■■■■ ; 


1. Is the Main Motor connector firmly seated 
into J3 on the DC Power Supply Assembly? 


Visually inspect. Reseat connector if necessary. 


2. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly correctly 
seated into its connector. 


Visually inspect. Verify that all pins are making 
contact with their connectors and that no pins 
are bent or damaged. 


3. Is the DC Power Supply Assembly defective? 


See the following Functional Check. 


4. Is the Main Motor defective? 


See the following Functional Check. 


5. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? 


See the following Functional Check. 



To verify that the Main Motor is operational, perform the following: 

1. With the printer powered ON, open the printer Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Defeat the Top Cover Assembly Interlock and EP-S Cartridge Installed/Drum Sensitivity 
Microswitches. 

3. Press the TEST PRINT button and observe the Main Motor and the gear train. 

If the fuser temperature is greater than 150° C (00 READY on Control Panel), motor operation 
begins as soon at the Test Print button is pressed. If the Main Motor is not operating, change the 
following assemblies in the order listed: 

1. DC Power Supply Assembly. 

2. Main Motor. 

3. DC Controller PCA. 

Mote If the Test Print button does not appear to be operational, ensure that Manual 

I Feed has not been selected (i.e., set to ON) and that the fuser is warmed up (00 

^ READY on the Control Panel display). 



7-33 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Paper Tray Checks 

The following table describes checks for potential paper tray problems. 



Table 7-11. Paper Tray Checks 



CHECKS 


'':^A€TmN-[;i-^-^ :■:-';:■ :::':. 


1. Is there too much paper in the 
paper tray? 


If there is too much paper in the tray, unnecessary 
pressure may be placed on the Paper Pickup Roller 
resulting in a paper jam. Remove the excess paper. 
(Note: This condition may have permanently damaged 
the Pickup Roller clutch.) 


2, Is the paper tray fully inserted in 
the printer? 


Push the paper tray fully into the printer. If the tray is 
not square with the printer, remove the tray, locate the 
problem, and correct it. 


3. Is the paper tray lid fully seated on 
the main body of the paper tray? 


Seat the paper tray lid. 


4. Does the metal plate (bottom of 
tray) move up and down freely? 


With the tray removed from the printer, verify that 
nothing is hindering the tray plate's movement. If the 
plate does not move freely, replace the tray. 


5. Does the printer's lift mechanism 
lift the tray's metal plate up when the 
tray is installed in the printer? 


While installing the tray in the printer, observe if the 
plate moves up, positioning the paper against the Paper 
Pickup Roller. If the lift mechanism does not lift the 
paper, correct or replace the mechanism. 


6. Are any of the tray identifier 
protrusions broken? 


Examine the tray for damage (refer to Figure 7-9). If any 
protrusion is broken, replace the tray. 


7. Are any of the tray identifier 
microswitch levers damaged? 


Examine the paper tray cavity in the printer for 
microswitch lever damage (refer to Figure 7-9). If the 
levers are damaged, replace them. 



Metal Plate 



Locking 
Mechanism 

Paper Out Access Hole 




Microswitch Levers 
(Slanted) 



Paper Tray 
Identifier Tabs 



Figure 7-9. Paper Tray 



7-34 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Paper Feed Mechanical Checks 

The purpose of solenoid SL301 is to allow the Paper Pickup Roller to pick one sheet of paper from 
either the paper tray or the manual feed tray and advance the paper to the Registration Rollers. 
Since the Registration Rollers are not turning at this time, the paper will be bowed slightly as it 
enters the Registration Rollers (see Figure 7-11). 

Paper pickup operation is initiated by the DC Controller's main microprocessor. The Cassette 
Pickup Drive (CPUD) signal from the microprocessor energizes the pickup solenoid (SL301) (see 
Figure 7-10). The energizing of the solenoid engages the paper pickup clutch. The engaging of the 
clutch allows the Paper Pickup Roller to make one rotation, picking up one sheet of paper and 
advancing the paper to the Registration Rollers. The Separation Pad acts to prevent more than 
one page being advanced to the Registration Rollers should more than one piece of paper leave the 
input tray. 

Hli^T If an overfilled paper tray results in subsequent paper jams, the Feed Roller 

I Assembly has probably suffered permanent damage and will require replacement. 







^ 




Pick-Up 
Roller 


Gear A 


\ \S^ Pick-Up 

V^^--«=~!ll_ Solenoid 

>, ,. {SL301) 
Pick-Up 

Clutch 




6<i>^ 






J 



Figure 7-10. Feed Roller Assembly Operation 



Registration Rollers 



u 



@= 



Paper (Bowed) 



Pickup Roller 




Separation Pad 



-Paper Stack 



Figure 7-11. Paper Positioned in the Registration Rollers 



7-35 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 7-12. SL301 Checks 



^:-;; ■^^^.■■:■"CH£CES^■^■ 


,-. ;■" :7AeiIQN^:\ ;::: 


l. Is anything hindering SLSOl's 
motion? 


Visually inspect the solenoid. 


2. Does the Paper Pickup Roller 
rotate? 


Remove the paper tray cover. Observe the Paper Pickup 
Roller from the front of the Paper Tray while performing 
a Test Print. 

Note whether the Pickup Roller rotates. If the roller does 
not rotate, refer to the procedures following this table. 


3. Are all the pins of the Paper 
Control PCA seated properly into the 
DC Controller PCA connector in the 
printer's base plate? 


Visually inspect and correct as necessary. 


4. Is SL301 operational? 


Perform the following checks. 



Paper Control 
PCA 



SL301 




SL301 



Paper Control ■ 
PCA 




SL302 



Figure 7-12. Paper Pickup Solenoid {SL301) Location 

SL301 Functional Check 

With the Main Body Cover Assembly (top cover panel only for the HP 33449) removed, observe 
the Pickup Roller while the printer is performing its Test Print function. Observe whether 
solenoid SL301 is being energized. If solenoid SL301 is energized, the Main Motor (Ml) is 
operating, and the Pickup Roller does not turn one full revolution, replace the Feed Roller 
Assembly. If solenoid SL301 is not being energized, perform the following electrical check. 



7-36 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



SL301 Electrical Check 

Remove the Bottom Covers. Solenoid SL301 may be electrically checked, using frame ground as a 
reference, by monitoring J213-04 (CPUD) while performing a TEST PRINT. The voltage should 
switch from Vdc to +5 Vdc (enabled). If the voltage changes but SL301 is NOT being energized, 
replace the Paper Control PC A (on which SL301 is mounted). If the voltage does not change, 
replace the DC Controller PCA. Note: Since this is a momentary signal, an oscilloscope may be 
required to view it. 



Table 7-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Checks 



:-GHEGKS; -, ■,:; 


:;:■ ACTION ■. . ■ . 


1. Does the paper have a slight 
bow (buckle) when it contacts the 
Registration Rollers? (See Figure 
7-11.) 


If the roller is picking paper, yet the paper is not entering 
the Registration Rollers, the Feed Roller Assembly 
is either worn or installed incorrectly. Replace the 
Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad. See the 
following "Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check" for 
verification. 


2. Is the flat surface of the Paper 
Pickup Roller facing the Separation 
Pad? 


If the flat portion of the roller does not face the pad when 
in the idle state, the roller is installed incorrectly or is 
defective. Replace the Feed Roller Assembly as described 
in Chapter 6. 


3. Is more than one page being fed to 
the Registration Rollers? 


Multiple pages being fed from the input tray is a result of 
the media having a poor cutting edge, a worn Separation 
Pad, or a damaged paper tray. Resolve as appropriate. 



Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check 

If the Feed Roller Assembly is excessively worn, paper will not be pulled completely to the 
Registration Rollers. To verify, measure the distance from where the trailing edge of the paper 
momentarily stops to the front of the paper tray (see Figure 7-13). The traihng edge of the paper 
should stop about 3.5 inches (95mm) from the front fence of the paper tray. If the paper has not 
advanced the specified distance, replace the Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad. 









^ 




1 1 
1 




Printer 




r 




o 












1 


A^* 


3.5 inches 
(95mm) 

r* ►i 






T 


V 






, 














-L^l-i: 








1 




1 


^ 


[ 




„ 


\ 




\ 1 


lllllllllllllltll 


/ 


, \ 1 




/ 

Paper Tray 


Front 
Of Tins 
Tray 


Fence 
3 Paper 



Figure 7-13. Feed Roller Wear 



7-37 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Registration/Transfer Area Checks 

The Registration Assembly aligns the leading edge of the paper with the print image on the 
photoconductive drum. Drive to the Registration Rollers is provided by the Main Motor via the 
Registration Roller clutch (SL302). During normal operation, the Main Motor is continuously 
operational after receiving the print (PRNT) command. The Registration Rollers are not rotating 
since they are held in position by solenoid SL302's locking lever. 

Following Main Motor startup, the Feed Roller Assembly first feeds paper to the Registration 
Rollers. When the image on the photosensitive drum and the leading edge of the paper (which 
is being held in the Registration Rollers) are aligned, the DC Controller enables the REGD 
(Registration Roller Clutch Drive) signal that energizes solenoid SL302. The energizing of this 
solenoid engages the Registration Roller clutch, thereby allowing the rollers to advance the paper 
so that the image may be properly transferred to the paper at the transfer station. 



Registration 
Clutch 



Transfer 
Corona 



Static Teeth 



Ground Defeat Tab 




Torsion Springs 



Upper Transfer Registration 
Guide RoHer 



Figure 7-14. Registration Assembly 



7-38 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-14. Registration/Transfer Area Checks 



CHECKS 


ACTION 


1. Are there any obstructions in the transfer 
area paper path? 


Open the Top Cover Assembly of the printer 
and visually inspect the transfer area. 


2. Are the Registration Roller torsion springs 
in place? 


Visually inspect the springs. Correct if they are 
not in position. (See Figure 7-14). 


3. Is the Upper Transfer Guide deformed? 


Inspect the guide. 

Hint: a quick check would be to lift up on the 
registration locking lever and verify if several 
sheets of paper (i.e., 2 or 3) can easily be slid 
under the Transfer Guide. 


4. Is the Transfer Corona monofilament line 
hindering the paper path? 


Visually inspect the Transfer Corona Assembly 
and replace if necessary. 


5. Are any of the drive gears excessively worn, 
dirty, or damaged? 


Inspect the gears. Replace if necessary. 


6. Is the Main Motor operational? 


Perform the printer Self Test and visually 
observe if the motor is rotating. See the "Main 
Motor (Ml) Functional Check" (Table 7-10). 


7. Is anything preventing the energizing of 
solenoid SL302 on the Paper Control PCA? 


See "SL302 Functional Check" following this 
table. 


8. Are the Registration Assembly and clutch 
operational? 


See the "Registration Assembly Functional 
Check" which follows. 



SL302 Functional Check 

With the printer ON, open the printer's Top Cover Assembly. Defeat the printer's Top Cover 
Assembly and EP-S Cartridge installed interlock switches (see Figure 7-17). While performing 
a TEST PRINT, observe solenoid SL302. If the solenoid is not being energized, perform the 
following electrical check. 

SL302 Electrical Check 

Remove the Bottom Cover(s). Using FRAME GND as a reference, measure J213-03 (REGD) on 
the DC Controller PCA while performing a TEST PRINT. The voltage level should switch from 
Vdc (disabled state) to +5 Vdc (enabled). If the voltage does not switch, replace the DC Controller 
PCA. If the voltage switches, but the solenoid is not energizing, replace the Paper Control PCA. 

Registration Assembly Functional Check 

If (1) SL302 is operating properly, (2) the Main Motor is fiinctional, and (3) paper (or other 
media) is not moving smoothly through the Registration Assembly, the clutch or rollers may be 
excessively worn. If this is suspected, replace the Registration Assembly. 

I^Ote A worn Feed Roller Assembly may also "catch" paper as the Registration 

I Assembly is trying to move the paper through the printer. This normally results 

Ig in an intermittent (i.e., once every 50 to 100 pages) overprint "band" on the page. 



7-39 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Exit Area Checks 



The exit area of the printer consists of the Fusing Assembly, Delivery Assembly, and Face-Up 
(Rear) and Face-Down (Top) Output Trays. Paper first enters the exit area of the printer at the 
Fusing Assembly. In the Fusing Assembly, the paper is guided between the fusing and pressure 
rollers where the toner image is permanently fused to the paper. As paper exits the Fusing Roller, 
the Paper Pickoff Pawls pick the paper off the Fusing Roller. A Paper Exit Arm Flag and an 
associated sensor (PS331) detect paper as it enters and exits the Fusing Assembly. The main 
microprocessor on the DC Controller uses this signal (PDP) for monitoring paper jams. 

The paper then encounters the Deflector Pawls (claws) which route the paper to the desired 
output tray. In the downward position, paper is guided to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 
In the upward position, paper is guided to the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray. Their position is 
controlled by the position of the Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray. The delivery rollers in the Top 
Cover Assembly feed the paper to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 

Drive for the Fusing Assembly is achieved when the printer Top Cover Assembly is closed. Closing 
the cover forces a molded protrusion in the rear portion of the Top Cover Assembly to push 
against a lever on the right end of the Fusing Assembly (see Figure 7-15). Pushing down this lever 
causes the main drive gears of the Fusing Assembly to engage with the drive gear train from the 
Main Motor. Drive to the Top Cover Assembly is provided by the Fusing Assembly when the Top 
Cover Assembly is closed via the Delivery Coupler Assembly (see Figure 7-15), 



Door Tensioning Spring 



Exit Sensor - 
Arm Flag 




Drive Lever 



Delivery Coupler Assembly 



Separation Pawls 



Door Tensioning Spring 



Figure 7-15. Paper Exit Area 



7-40 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-15. Exit Area Checks 



■.■■.■■■ ■■■■^CHECKS/ ■^■■■■^.■. ■: 


ACTIGN 


1. Are there any obstructions in the paper 
path? 


Visually inspect. Open the top of the Fusing 
Assembly. Remove the cleaning pad and 
inspect the Fusing Roller. Open the rear 
door of the Fusing Assembly and inspect for 
obstructions. 


2. Open the rear door of the Fusing Assembly. 
Are the Fuser Separation Pawls correctly 
attached to the rear fuser door with the tension 
springs? 


Visually inspect and clean if necessary (refer to 
Figure 7-15). 


3. Are the right and left fuser rear door 
tensioning springs in position? 


Visually inspect, (refer to Figure 7-15). Replace 
if damaged or missing. 


4. Are the Paper Exit Sensor Arm and 
photointerrupter damaged or broken? Is 
anything hindering the Paper Exit Sensor 
Arm's motion? 


Visually inspect, (refer to Figure 7-15). Replace 
if damaged. 


5. Does the Paper Exit Sensor indicate the 
presence of paper to the DC Controller PCA? 


See the "Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional 
Check" following this table. 


6. Is the Deflector Pawl Assembly correctly 
positioned? (Refer to Figure 7-15). 


Visually inspect. When paper is to be directed 
to the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray, the 
front of the deflectors point downward and 
rest against the moulded protrusions on the 
rear exit panel. When paper is directed to the 
Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray, the front of the 
pawls face forward. Verify that the pawls are 
correctly positioned under these conditions. 


7. Is the Delivery Coupler Assembly correctly 
positioned? (Refer to Figure 7-15). 


The gears should be pointing downward as 
shown in Figure 7-15. Is the gear tensioning 
spring riding on the metal frame of the hinge 
bracket? If the gears are out of position or 
the spring tab is bent or damaged, correct or 
replace. 

Note: Earlier Delivery Coupler Assemblies 
were manufactured with the spring riding on 
the top bracket surface. Newer assemblies are 
designed so that the spring rides on the rear 
bracket surface. 


8. Is the Delivery Assembly damaged or 
excessively worn? 


Replace as necessary. 



7-41 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check 

The Paper Exit Sensor PS331 is located on the Exit Sensor PCA (see Figure 7-16). This sensor 
and an associated Exit Sensor Arm detect paper motion as the paper enters and exits the Fusing 
Assembly. The main microprocessor on the DC Controller uses this exit flag signal (PDP) for 
monitoring paper movement through the printer. 

Table 7-16. Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Check 



CHECKS 


./:■■■.-' v.- AcitoiSf ■■■■■; ■■"■■;■;■■■: 


1. Is the Exit Sensor Arm or photointerrupter 
damaged or broken? 


Visually inspect and replace as necessary. 


2. Does the Exit Sensor indicate the presence 
of paper to the DC Controller PCA? 


Perform the following Operational and 
Electrical checks. 



Exit Sensor 



Photointerrupter 







'Sf 



®) oo 



o o 





Exit Sensor 
Arm Counter 
Weight 



IWeasure tfie Voltage at this pin 
wtiile moving the Photointerrupter. 



Figure 7-16. Paper Exit Serssor Check 



7-42 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Operational Check 

This will simulate a paper jam: 

1. Power off the printer. 

2. Remove the printer's Main Body Covers (left cover only on the HP 33449). 

3. Push and hold the bottom of the Exit Sensor Arm counterweight fully forward (toward the 
front of the printer) and power ON the printer. 

4. If PS331 is functioning properly, the printer will display a 13 PAPER JAM error after completing 
its warmup cycle. Power the printer OFF and allow the sensor arm to rotate to its normal 
position. 

The printer should now power up to the 00 READY state. If the sensor is not functioning in this 
manner, perform the electrical check. 

Electrical Check 

Use the following procedure to perform the electrical check: 

1. Remove the Bottom Cover(s). 

2. Using FRAME GND as a reference, measure the voltage at J206-6 (PDP) on the DC Controller 
PCA while moving the Exit Sensor Arm counterweight back and forth. The voltage should 
toggle from Vdc to + 5 Vdc. 

3. If the voltage does not change states when the Exit Sensor Arm is moved, replace the Exit 
Sensor PCA. If the voltage changes but the printer continues to report "false" paper jams, 
replace the DC Controller PCA. 

You may also measure the voltage on the Paper Exit Sensor PCA as shown in Figure 7-16 while 
moving the Exit Sensor Arm. The voltage should toggle from Vdc to +5 Vdc as referenced to 
frame ground. If the voltage does not change states while the photointerrupter is moved, replace 
the Exit Sensor PCA. If the voltage does change but the problem persists, the cable between the 
Fusing Assembly and the DC Controller- or the DC Controller itself- may be at fault. 



7-43 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

"14 NO EP CART" Message 

The 14 NO EP CART installed message occurs when neither of the drum sensitivity switches 
(SW301 and SW302) on the Paper Control PCA is activated. When the EP-S Cartridge is 
installed and the Top Cover Assembly is closed, the EP-S Cartridge drum sensitivity tabs contact 
microswitches SW301 and SW302 on the Paper Control PCA (see Figure 7-17). The input 
from these switches is fed directly to the submicroprocessor on the DC Controller PCA. This 
microprocessor uses these signals to regulate laser power output. 




Figure 7-17. EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity Switches 



7-44 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 7-17. "14 NO EP CART" Checks 



-■■.■. CHECKS" ■■' 


. ACTION.^-.;- 


1. Is an EP-S Cartridge installed in the printer? 


Install cartridge if necessary. 


2. Is there at least one sensitivity tab on the 
EP-S Cartridge? 


Visually inspect. The EP-S Cartridge must 
have at least one sensitivity tab. If the cartridge 
has no tab, replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


3. Is the Paper Control PCA firmly seated into 
its connector? 


Visually inspect. Ensure that none of the pins 
are bent or damaged. 


4. Is the Paper Control PCA defective? 


See the "Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 
and SW302) Functional Check" following this 
table. 


5. Is DC Controller PCA defective? 


See the "Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 
and SW302) Functional Check" following this 
table. 



Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 and SW302) Functional Check 

The EP-S Cartridge Drum Sensitivity microswitches (SW301 and SW302) are located on the Paper 
Control PCA. If either microswitch is bad, the Paper Control PCA must be replaced. 

Operational Check 

1. Open the printer's Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Defeat the Top Cover Assembly closed interlock switch in the DC Power Supply Assembly. 

3. Press switch SW301 (refer to Figure 7-17). The display should change from 14 NO EP CART to 
00 READY. 

4. Release SW301 and the Top Cover Assembly interlock switch and repeat steps 2 and 3, testing 
SW302. Again, the display should change from 14 NO EP CART to 00 READY. 

If this test fails, either the Paper Control PCA or DC Controller PCA is defective. Proceed with the 
following Electrical Check to determine the failing component. 

Electrical Check 

Verify that the EP-S Cartridge In-Place/Drum Sensitivity microswitches are functional as follows: 
1. Remove the printer's bottom covers. 



2; Using FRAME GND as a reference, measure J213 pin 1 (CSENSl) and J213 pin 2 (CSENS2), 
respectively, on the DC Controller PCA. The measured voltage level should change from + 5 Vdc 
(switch open) to Vdc (switch closed) as referenced to frame ground. 

3. If the voltages DO NOT change while the switches are pressed, replace the Paper Control PCA. 
If the voltage levels change but the error message persists, replace the DC Controller PCA. 



7-45 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



"16 TONER LOW" Message 

A toner sensing mechanism is located in the toner cavity of the EP-S Cartridge. The function 
of this mechanism is similar to an antenna, sensing the AC developer bias voltages applied to 
the developer mixture by the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. The output sensed by this 
antenna is input back to the High- Voltage Power Supply (TSENS), where it is amplified and input 
to the DC Controller to be compared against a preset threshold value. If the toner level in the 
cartridge falls below the minimum level and, consequently, the monitored voltage level falls below 
the threshold level, the 16 TONER LOW message is displayed. 



Table 7-18. "16 TONER LOW" Checks 



^, :■:-:■,"■ checks;,; J 


; ^^'-:MmoN::j-'\^rr'-''\ 


1. Is the EP-S Cartridge out of toner? 


Shake the EP-S Cartridge. If the message 
persists, replace the cartridge. 


2. Are the toner level sensor connectors 
damaged? 


Inspect connectors for damage (see Figures 7-18 
and 7-19). If damaged, correct or replace. 


3. Is the EP-S Cartridge defective? (See Figure 
7-19.) 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge if visibly damaged. 


4. Is the high-voltage connector cable, from the 
base of the printer (J601) to the DC Controller 
PCA, fully seated or damaged? 


Visually inspect. Reseat or replace if necessary. 


5. Is the High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly 
defective? 


See the "Toner Low Functional Check" 
following this table. 


6. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? 


See the "Toner Low Functional Check" 
follovring this table. 



Toner Low Functional Check 

Since there is no good way to measure whether the toner low sensing system is malfunctioning 
(i.e., the warning message is constantly being displayed or is never displayed), replace the following 
components in the order listed: 

1. EP-S Cartridge. 

2. High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 

3. High-Voltage Power Supply Cable (from the DC Controller). 

4. DC Controller PCA. 



7-46 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Primary 
Corona 



Grid of 

Primary 

Corona 




Developing 

Bias 



Toner 
Sensor 






static Teeth 
Connector 



Transfer 

Corona 

Spring 



Figure 7-18. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Connector 



Toner Low Sensor • 

Developing Bias 
Connector 

Drum Ground ■ 



Primary Grid 
Connector 

Primary Corona 
Connector 




Laser Shutter Tab 



Ground Defeat Tab 



7^ 




® a 



I I 



Push on lever to 
view drum 



Figure 7-19. EP-S Cartridge (Bottom view) 



7-47 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

"41 ERROR" Message 

Two displays, 41 ERROR and 51 ERROR, indicate a laser beam detect problem. The 41 ERROR is 
displayed when the beam is "lost" for less than 2 seconds. An error condition of greater than 2 
seconds will result in a 51 ERROR message. See the "51 ERROR Message" section for a discussion of 
the 41 ERROR message condition. 

"50 SERVICE" Fuser Malfunction 

The purpose of the fusing system is to maintain a constant temperature on the Fusing Roller so 
that the toner image is permanently fused to the paper. A high intensity fusing lamp, located in 
the center of the Fusing Roller, provides the high temperature required for the fusing process. 
While the printer is in standby mode, a temperature of 165° C is maintained on the Fusing Roller. 
While the printer is in printing mode, a temperature of 180° C is maintained. 

The main components of the fusing system are the fusing lamp and its associated fusing and 
pressure rollers, a Thermistor, Thermoprotector, and the AC controller/safety circuitry in the AC 
Power Module. AC voltage is applied to the fuser bulb via the AC Power Module circuitry which 
is regulated by the FUSER DRIVE (FSRD) signal from the DC Controller PCA. Feedback to 
the DC Controller is provided by the Thermistor signal (FSRTH ). The thermoprotection switch 
is designed for over temperature protection and opens when the temperature reaches 210"^ C. 
Overcurrent protection for the fusing system is provided by circuit breaker CBlOl on the AC 
Power Module (see Figure 7-20). 

For troubleshooting the printer when resting on its side, microswitch SW205 on the DC Controller 
PCA provides additional fusing system protection When the bottom cover of the printer is 
removed, the microswitch closes and a resistor is placed in parallel to the Thermistor circuitry. 
This resistance simulates the Fusing Roller at temperature and this prevents the fusing lamp from 
operating under this condition. 

The following conditions result in a fusing error: 

1. A temperature below 140° C. 

2. A temperature above 230° C. 

3. A condition wherein a temperature of 165° C is NOT reached within 90 seconds after power-up. 

If any of the fusing error conditions occur, the DC Controller posts a 50 SERVICE error. The error 
cannot be cleared until the printer has been powered down for a ten-minute interval. 

Note If the printer displays 50 SERVICE error, allow a ten-minute power down interval 

I to elapse for the error to clear. 



7-48 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 7-19. "50 SERVICE" Fuser Malfunction Checks 



;;/;■■■.■;■■■'■■■;■:■. CHECKS :.■. 


■ ■■:." -ACTIGN;.'. 


1. Is the Fusing Assembly correctly seated into 
its connectors on the AC Power Module and 
base plate (right and left ends)? 


Visually inspect. Ensure the connectors are 
properly seated (no bent pins or pins outside 
their receptacles). 


2. Is the +24A voltage present? 


Verify per Figure 7-2. 


3. Is the circuit breaker on the AC Power 
Module tripped? 


Reset breaker.* (See Figure 7-20.) If the 
breaker trips again, replace the Fusing 
Assembly or the AC Power Module. 


4. Is the Thermistor defective? 


Perform the Thermistor Functional Check 
which follows. 


5. Is the Fuser Bulb open? 


Perform the Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb 
Functional Check which follows. 


6. Is the Thermoprotector open? 


Perform the Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb 
Functional Check which follows. 


7. Are the cable assemblies defective? 


If the fault is intermittent, replace the Fusing 
Assembly Cable to the DC Controller.* If the 
fault persists, replace the AC Power Module 
cable to the DC Controller. 


8. Is the AC Power Module defective? 


Replace the AC Power Module.* 


9. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? 


Replace the DC Controller PCA.* 


*Be sure to wait at least::;ten minuteS: after the last, occurrence of 50 ERROR toverify ia fix. : 




Figure 7-20. Fuser Circuit Breaker Reset 



7-49 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Thermistor Functional Check 

Under normal operating conditions, Thermistor resistance decreases as its operating temperature 
increases. Because of this characteristic, it is difficult to measure an accurate resistance value for 
the Thermistor. However, some conclusions may be made concerning the condition of the printer 
Thermistor with a resistance check. Measure the Thermistor value using the following Electrical 
Check. 

1. Power off the printer, 

2. Remove the protective cover from the left side of the Fusing Assembly to access the Exit Sensor 
PCA. 

3. Measure the Thermistor's resistance at J332, pins 1 and 2 (see Figure 7-21). At ambient room 
temperature {12° F, 23° C), the resistance should be approximately 1,130 kohms. If the printer 
has been operating for some time, the resistance value will be much lower. If the Thermistor 
appears to be either open or shorted, replace the Thermistor/Exit Sensor PCA. 





o o 

Exit Sensor PCA 



mnnnnr 



Figure 7-21. Thermistor Resistance at J332 



7-50 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check 

Electrical Check 

The Fuser Bulb and the Thermoprotector are wired in series. To quickly check these components, 
perform the following electrical check procedure: 

1. Remove the Fusing Assembly. 

2. Using an ohm meter, check for continuity at the two pin connector (J103) at the right side of 
the Fusing Assembly (see Figure 7-22). 

3. If an open condition is detected, either the Fuser Bulb or the Thermoprotector is open. To 
differentiate between an open Fuser Bulb and an open Thermoprotector, proceed as follows: 

a. Remove the screw securing the left side of the Fuser Bulb connector to the Thermoprotector 
connector. 

b. Verify the continuity of the bulb from its connector wire to the rear connector of the two pin 
connector. 

If the bulb is open, replace the complete Fusing Assembly. If the bulb appears good, but the serial 
continuity measurement indicates an open condition, replace the Thermoprotector. 



Fusing 
Roller 



i 





Thermoprotector 



Fuser 
Bulb 



S 



D 




J103 



Thermistor 



Figure 7-22. Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Check 



7-51 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

"51 ERROR" Message 



Two displays, 41 ERROR and 51 ERROR, indicate a laser beam detect problem. The 41 ERROR is 
displayed when the beam is "lost" for less than 2 seconds. An error condition of greater than 2 
seconds will result in a 51 ERROR message. 

A 41 ERROR (temporary Beam Detect Error) may occur during laser scanning operation. This 
error results when the beam detect signal falls outside the timing window established by the DC 
Controller PCA. If this situation occurs longer than an interval of two seconds, a 51 ERROR beam 
detect malfunction will occur. 

The BEAM DETECT (BD) signal is the horizontal synchronization signal indicating the beginning 
of a scan line. Once beam detect synchronization is achieved, video data may be transferred from 
the Interface/Formatter PCA to the DC Controller PCA to turn the laser diode on and off, thereby 
writing print data (in the form of dots) on the photosensitive drum. 

At the beginning of printer operation, the DC Controller enables the Laser/Scanning Assembly 
and sets up a timing window. The DC Controller expects to receive a beam detect signal during 
this window. Once received, all data transfer is synchronized from the last beam detect signsd. 

A "Beam Detect Malfunction" indicates that the laser beam is not being detected. Beam detection 
occurs during the scanning process as the laser light strikes the beam detect mirror. The mirror 
reflects this light to a fiber optic cable that carries it to a sensing diode on the DC Controller PCA. 

To prevent possible exposure to laser light, a safety interlock shutter has been incorporated into 
the design of the Laser/Scanning Assembly. The Laser Shutter Arm is located on a pivoting shaft 
below the Laser/Scanning Assembly. When the Top Cover Assembly of the printer is open or the 
EP-S Cartridge is missing, a blocking shutter within the Laser/Scanning Assembly blocks the path 
of laser light. A small tab on the edge of the EP-S Cartridge must contact the pivoting shutter 
lever before laser light is allowed to exit the laser cavity. 

Although the infrared laser beam is invisible, eye damage can occur if direct 
or indirect (reflected) eye contact with the laser beam should occur. Heed all 
CAUTIONS and WARNINGS when working with the laser unit. Be careful when 
the fiber optic beam detect cable is detached since the laser light transmitted 
through the cable can also cause eye damage. 




7-52 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-20. "41 ERROR" Checks 



.;...-. CHECKS:;- 


ACTION 


1. Is the printer's Feed Guide Assembly clean? 


Thoroughly clean the Feed Guide Assembly. 


2. Is the EP-S Cartridge defective? 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge and retest the 
printer. 


3. Is the Transfer Corona clean? 


Physically remove the Transfer Corona 
Assembly and clean thoroughly or replace if 
necessary. Clean the base of the printer below 
the Transfer Corona. 


4. Is the Transfer Corona Roller grounding 
block positioned properly so as to provide a 
ground path to the roller? 


Verify proper installation as in Figure 6-30 in 
Chapter 6. 


5. Does the Registration Assembly float 
vnth respect to ground when the Top Cover 
Assembly is closed? 


Verify that the ground defeat tab on the EP-S 
Cartridge (Figure 7-19) is not damaged. With 
the ground defeat lever on the right side of the 
Registration Assembly (Figure 7-14) pushed 
down, resistance between the Registration 
Assembly and ground should be 15 Mohm (± 
5%). If the resistance is less than 15 Mohm, 
ensure the Registration Assembly is properly 
installed and clean as necessary to resolve the 
problem. 


6. Are the two 15 Mohm resistors and/ or the 1 
kohm resistor under the Registration Assembly 
open? 


Perform a resistance check. Note that in order 
to measure the 15 Mohm resistors with a 
standard 4i digit DVM on the "kohm" scale, 
the two resistors may have to be measured in 
parallel at 7,500 kohm ±5%. 


7. Is jumper J209 installed on the DC 
Controller PCA? 


Verify and install if necessary. 


8. Is static electricity a problem? 


Verify humidity to be at least 20% RH. 


9. Does the error persist? 


Refer to the "51 ERROR Beam Detect Checks" 
table which follows (Table 7-21). 



7-53 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-21. "51 ERROR" Beam Detect Checks 



;:■■.:■■ CHECKS .:: 


;::■ ^ ACTIGN-:;: ;■;■ 


1. If intermittent, have checks 1-8 in Table 7-20 
("41 ERROR Checks") been performed? 


Perform verification procedures. 


2. Is -5 Vdc present? 


Verify per Figure 7-2. If missing, replace the 
DC Power Supply. If -5 V is still absent, 
replace the DC Controller PCA. 


3. Is the laser shutter protrusion tab on the 
EP-S Cartridge broken or damaged? 


Visually inspect (see Figure 7-19). Replace the 
EP-S Cartridge if necessary. 


4. Is the laser shutter interlock mechanism 
damaged? 


Carefully inspect the Laser Shutter Arm 
mechanism. If necessary, remove the 
Laser/Scanning Assembly and inspect the pivot 
lever. Replace the mechanism if damaged. 


5. Is the Fiber Optic Cable between the 
Laser/Scanning assembly and J201 of the DC 
Controller PCA correctly seated into each 
respective assembly? 


Visually inspect the cable for damage and 
ensure that it is seated properly. Is the cable 
damaged? If necessary, remove the Fiber Optic 
Cable and shine a light through the cable to 
verify hght continuity. Replace the cable if 
damaged. 

Warning: Do not use the laser light to 
perform this test. 


6. Are connectors J202 on the DC Controller 
and J451 on the Laser Drive PCA properly 
seated? 


Inspect connectors and wiring. Reseat or 
replace cables if necessary. 


7. Is +5 Vdc present at J451-1 of the Laser 
Drive PCA? 


Verify voltage with voltmeter. If voltage is not 
present, replace cable to DC Controller. 


8. Is the Laser Unit defective? 


Verify the laser power level per the following 
instructions. If the laser power is acceptable, 
replace the DC controller PCA. 


9. Is the Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly 
damaged? 


Closely inspect cable assembly. Examine for 
damaged wire crimps at the connector ends 
of the assembly. Replace harness assembly if 
damage is suspected. 



Laser Power Verification 
Required Tools 

The following special tools are required for this verification procedure: 

■ Laser Power Checker # TKN-O19S-O00CN 

■ Digital Voltmeter (+/- 200mV DC Range) 

Laser Power Output Check 

The laser power circuitry is not adjustable. However, if it becomes necessary to verify the laser 
output, use the following procedures. 



7-54 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



DO NOT place anything in the Laser/Scanning Assembly access hole other than 
the Laser Checker Tool. Although the laser beam is invisible, the reflected 
beam could possibly damage the eye. 




1. Switch the printer power to OFF and open the Top Cover Assembly. 

2. Remove the printer's Main Body Cover Assembly (on HP 33449, the top cover panel), 

3. Heed the Laser Safety Label attached to the top of the Laser/Scanning Assembly to avoid 
possible injury. 

4. Keep the Control Panel connector attached to the printer so the display can be read. 

5. Open the plate covering the access hole for the laser power checker tool on the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. Install the laser power checker tool into the opening (see Figure 7-23). 

6. Connect the laser power tool leads to a digital multimeter and set the range to 200 mV DC. 

7. Defeat the top-cover-in-place microswitch. Press down both EP-S Cartridge Drum Sensitivity 
Microswitches (SW301 and SW302). 

8. Switch the printer's power ON. 

Mote When the laser tool is installed in the printer, only one page of the Self Test will 

I run before a 51 ERROR (Beam Detect Malfunction) appears on the printer's display 

^g panel. The laser power checker tool must have been calibrated within the last 

year to be effective. 

9. With the laser tool installed (see Figure 7-23), the interlock switches defeated, and the voltmeter 
connected, perform a self test and verify the laser output. 

The measured output should be 17.6 (± 1.6) millivolts. If this laser power cannot be measured, 
replace the following assemblies in the order listed: 

1. Laser/Scanning Assembly. 

2. Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly to the DC Controller. 

3. DC Controller PCA. 



Laser Power 
Checker Tool 



Laser/Scanner 




Figure 7-23. Installing Laser Power Checker Tool 



7-55 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

"52 ERROR" Scanner Malfunction 

The scanner motor is a fiat, brushless, +24 Vdc motor. Motor operation is completely controlled 
by the DC Controller main microprocessor and motor speed is controlled by the SCANNER 
CONTROL (SCNCONT) signal. Motor speed is monitored via the FG- and FG+ feedback signals. 
LED 201 on the DC Controller PCA is illuminated when the scanner motor is at its operational 
speed. 

The scanner motor is enabled briefly when the printer is powered-up (during the printer's power- 
on Self Test) or whenever the PRINT (PRNT) command is received by the Interface/Formatter 
PCA. The motor makes a distinctive sound, identified as a "variable pitch whirring noise," when 
starting up. (The Main Motor noise is much more subtle and does not perceptibly vary in pitch.) 

Table 7-22. Scanner Malfunction Checks 



CHECKS 


ACTION 


1. Are the scanner motor connectors- J401 
on the Scanner Motor PCA and J203 on the 
DC Controller PCA -firmly seated in their 
connectors? 


Visually inspect. Ensure that connectors are 
properly seated. If the cable is damaged, replace 
the cable. 


2. Is the J209 jumper in place on the DC 
Controller PCA? 


Verify. 


3. Is the problem intermittent? 


Replace the cable assembly to the DC 
Controller. 


4. Does the scanner motor run at all times 
after power-on, but before printing? 


Replace the cable assembly to the DC 
Controller. 


5. Is +24 Vdc present on J401-5 of the scanner 
motor PCA? 


Measure the voltage. If voltage is not present, 
replace the cable to the DC Controller PCA. 


6. Is the scanner motor defective? 


See the "Scanner Motor Functional Check" 
following this table. 


7. Is the DC Controller defective? 


See the "Scanner Motor Functional Check" 
following this table. 



Scanner Motor Functional Check 

While performing Test Print, listen for the distinct noise of the scanner motor starting up. If this 
noise can not be detected, replace the following assemblies in the order listed: 

1. Laser/Scanning Assembly. 

2. Laser/Scanning Cable Assembly to the DC Controller, 

3. DC Controller PCA. 



7-56 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



7-5. IMAGE FORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING 
introduction 

The quality of the printer's output is always subject to the judgment of the particular user. This 
section of the manual is intended to assist the service representative in defining print quality and 
understanding what factors may affect print quality. 

The print samples depicted in Figure 7-24 illustrate some print quality defects and their possible 
causes. It is impossible to illustrate all possible print quality defects since there are too many 
variables in the printing process. It is recommended that the service representative keep copies of 
print quality defects with an explanation of their causes for future reference. 

Image defects in the list below are covered in the tables which follow: 

■ Black Pages. 

■ Very Faint Print. 

■ Speckled Print. 

■ Vertical White Streaks. 

■ Right-Hand Text Missing or Distorted 

■ Faulty Registration. 

■ Random Horizontal Black Lines. 

■ Slightly Faint Print. 

■ Suede Print. 

■ Smeared Print/Improper Fusing. 

■ Distorted Print. 

« Repetitive Defects. 

■ Black Pages v^th Horizontal White Strips. 

■ Image Skew. 

■ Improperly Sized Image. 

■ Vertical Dark Streaks. 

■ Character Voids. 

■ Background. 

■ Smudged Horizontal Band with Overprint. 

■ Black Stripe on Right Side of Page. 

■ White or Blank Pages. 

Mote "Horizontal" and "vertical" refer to paper movement and not to the orientation of 

I print on the page. 



7-57 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Black Pages 



Vertical Wliite Streaks 




Random Horizontal 
Black Lines 




mil" " rill' ,- 

di il. ' 'i i' 1 



,l'i I 



Smeared Print/ 
Improper Fusing 




Very Faint Print 



Right-Hand Text 
Missing/Distorted 



Slightly Faint Print 



Distorted Print 




Speckled Print 



Faulty Registration 



: "y^>^'ifiii%^', 




Suede Print 




Repetitive Defects 



Figure 7-24. Image Defect Summary 



7-58 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Black Pages with 
Horizontal White Strips 



Vertical Dark Streaks 



Smudged Horizontal Band 
with Overprint 




Image Skew 




Character Voids 




Black Stripe on 
Right Side of Page 



r.rj:^jssa :— .i-ii!. !.- /i 




Improperly Sized Image 





If 




4 


^ 


L 


m 


Pi 


|. 


ji 


' «;!■ 


K. 






^h 



Background 



White or 
Blank Pages 



Figure 7-25. image Defect Summary (Continued) 



7-59 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-23. Black Pages 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


■:i^-.''^A^^■:^■.::::.. ■"::.::■■■ 


^;.'-^'^'^:V^,,-:AI3tlON;; :■ 


1. No Primary 
Corona. (Blotchy 
with undefined 
border.) 


The Primary Corona applies a negative 
charge to the drum's surface which repels 
the less-negatively-charged toner, except 
in those areas exposed to the laser light. 
Without the Primary Corona's charge, 
because of the erase lamps the drum's 
surface would be neutral, attracting the 
less-negatively-charged toner and, therefore, 
creating a totally black image. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 
If the problem persists, refer 
to Table 7-45, "High-Voltage 
Systems Checks." 


2. Laser/Scanning 
Cable Assembly. 
(Defined border) 


Low-level signals exchanged between the 
Laser/Scanning Assembly and the DC 
Controller may be affecting laser output. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Cable Assembly. 


3. Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 
(Defined border) 


Circuitry in the assembly is causing the 
laser to run out of control. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 


4. DC Controller 

PCA. 

(Defined border) 


If the laser drive circuitry is damaged so 
that the laser is always on, the surface of 
the drum would be constantly discharged 
by the laser. 


Replace the DC Controller 
PCA followed by the I/F 
PCA as required. Hint: 
Disconnect the I/F PCA 
from the DC Controller and 
perform a Test Print to 
determine the source. 



Table 7-24. Very Faint Print 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


'^^\''\'y''^:\'^.:\'-'M- 


■;^^:;:;^-:ACllOH:::-V/V^^ 


1. Empty EP-S 
Cartridge. 


No toner is available for print. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


2. Weak or no 
Transfer Corona 
current. 


The Transfer Corona's purpose is to apply a 
positive charge to the back of the paper to 
attract the negatively charged toner image 
from the drum to the paper. 


Perform the "Image 
Development (Half Self Test) 
Functional Check" following 
these tables and proceed as 
directed. 


3. Weak or no 
developer bias. 


If no developer bias is available, toner is not 
attracted to the drum's discharged areas. 


Refer to Table 7-45, "High- 
Voltage System Checks." 


4. Paper. 


The paper moisture content, conductivity, 
finish, etc., may not be acceptable for use in 
the electrophotographic process. 


Try a known type and source 
of paper. Refer to the Paper 
Specifications Guide or 
Chapter 2, Section 2-4. 


5. Drum ground 
path interrupted. 


A dirty or damaged drum ground contact 
will not allow electrical discharge or 
laser-exposed areas. 


Clean or repair the drum 
ground contacts. 



7-60 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-25. Speckled Print 



POSSIBtiB CLAUSE 


■■,:..■■"■■". .. WHY. ■■.■"".■ ...- 


ACTION 


1. No Primary 


The purpose of the Primary Corona 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


Corona Grid. 


Grid is to ensure that the Primary 


If the problem persists, refer 




Corona deposits a uniform negative 


to Table 7-45, "High- Voltage 




charge to the surface of the drum. If 


System Checks." 




the grid is not functioning properly, 






uneven charges are deposited on the 






drum's surface. The random areas of 






uneven charges appear as dark blotches 






in the print. 





Table 7-26. Vertical White Streaks 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


';■■-■■ :-C..'-^i-f:-^^^^^^ 


;...-V-.AXjnoN ■.: 


1. Dirty 

Beam-to-Drum 

Mirror. 


The Beam-to-Drum Mirror reflects 
the laser light from the scanner to the 
surface of the photoconductive drum. 
If the mirror is dirty, the laser light is 
blocked and the image is not written 
properly on the drum. 


Carefully clean the Beam-to- 
Drum Mirror. A quality camera 
lens cleaning fluid and tissue 
can be used if necessary. The 
mirror may be easily accessed 
by moving the mirror shutter to 
the right and folding it up out 
of the way. 


2. Dirty Transfer 
Corona. 


The purpose of the Transfer Corona is 
to apply a positive charge to the back 
of the paper to attract the negatively 
charged toner image from the drum to 
the paper. If portions of the Transfer 
Corona are extremely contaminated or 
blocked, vertical streaks would occur in 
the printed output. 


Clean the Transfer Corona 
housing and wire per 
instructions in Chapter 4, 
Section 4-4. 


3. EP-S Cartridge. 


No toner is available for print. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


4. Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 


The focusing lenses within the 
Laser/Scanning Assembly may be 
contaminated, blocking (or diffusing) 
the laser light. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 



7-61 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-27. Right-Hand Text Missing/Distorted 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


J:";::;. ::y;-;;:j:;;;:,WHY;^^^:-":/.:-v 


;:.:.;: ACTION: :;;;■/;■■ 


1. EP-S Cartridge. 


No toner available for print. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


2. Beam-to-Drum 
Mirror incorrectly 
installed. 


The Beam-to-Drum Mirror reflects 
the laser light from the scanner's 
polygonal mirror to the surface of the 
photoconductive drum. If the mirror is 
installed incorrectly (end-for-end) or is 
not fully resting on the mirror supports, 
the scan plane of the laser will not be 
parallel. The resulting image written on 
the drum will be distorted, missing, or 
out of parallel alignment. 


Verify that the mirror is resting 
firmly on the moulded plastic 
supports. Note that the mirror 
is spring loaded and should rest 
squarely on the supports. If 
the mirror had been removed 
during maintenance, ensure 
that the mirror has been 
correctly reinstalled. Refer to 
Chapter 6 for proper mirror 
installation. 


3. Bent Top Cover 
Assembly Hinge 
Brackets. 


If the Top Cover Assembly Hinge 
Brackets are bent, the Beam-to-Drum 
Mirror will not reflect the laser beam to 
the drum properly. 


Replace the Top Cover 
Assembly Hinge Brackets. 



Table 7-28. Faulty Registration 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


.\"::WHY- :■■... ■■■■;: 


■■■: ■ ACTION ■::"::.;;;; 


1. Worn Feed Roller 
Assembly. 


If the Paper Pickup Roller or associated 
clutch is sufficiently worn, the leading 
edge of the paper may not reach the 
Registration Rollers in time. 


Replace the Feed Roller 
Assembly. 


2. Registration 
Assembly. 


The Paper Pickup Roller positions 
the leading edge of the paper at the 
Registration Rollers. If these rollers 
do not grab the paper at the proper 
time and move it smoothly through the 
printer (due to worn rollers, springs, or 
clutch), misregistration will occur. 


Replace the Registration 
Assembly. 


3. Drive Gears. 


If any gear within the gear drive 
train becomes excessively worn or 
is excessively dirty, erratic paper 
movement would result, leading to 
image misregistration. 


Closely examine the gears 
along the paper path for wear 
and contamination. Clean and 
inspect the gears. Replace any 
defective gear. 


4. Paper Tray. 


The paper tray may be preventing the 
paper from freely moving through the 
printer. 


Replace the paper tray. 


5. Paper. 


The surface of the paper may be too 
smooth for the pickup roller to move 
the paper through the paper path. 


Change paper. Refer to the 
Paper Specifications Guide or 
Chapter 2, Section 2-4 ("Paper 
Specifications"). 



7-62 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-29. Random Horizontal Black Lines 



POSSIBLE CAOSE^ 


i::0^^^^^^^^^^^ . 


ACTION 


1, Defective or 
improperly seated 
Fiber Optic Cable. 


Horizontal black lines could occur in the event 
of a beam detect error (41 ERUOR). In this 
condition (i.e., the microprocessor is expecting 
beam detect, laut never receives it), the processor 
turns on the laser continuously, searching for 
beam detect If beam detect has not occurred 
after two seconds, a 51 ERROR message is 
displayed on the Control Panel. If the Fiber 
Optic Cable is damaged or disconnected, the 
beam would be blocked from the microprocessor 
and an error would result. 


Replace the Fiber 
Optic Cable. 


2. Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 


If the beam detect mirror within the assembly 
becomes misaligned or damaged, beam detect 
would not consistently be provided to the DC 
Controller PCA. 


Replace the 

Laser/Scanning 

Assembly. 


3. DC Controller 
PCA. 


See previous explanations. 


Replace the DC 
Controller PCA. 



Table 7-30. Slightly Faint Print 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


..,,WHY ■ 


ACTION 


1. EP-S Cartridge. 


No toner available for print. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


2. Print Density set 
improperly. 


The higher the Print Density Dial 
setting, the smaller the amount of toner 
that will be transferred to the EP drum. 


Turn the Print Density Dial 
to a lower setting (i.e., toward 
"1"). Replace the HVPS if no 
effect 


3. Drum Sensitivity 
Switches. 


The drum sensitivity switches sense the 
drum's sensitivity to three levels of laser 
light. Malfunctioning microswitches may 
cause the microprocessor to adjusting 
the laser power level incorrectly with 
respect to EP-S Cartridge requirements. 


Perform the "Drum Sensitivity 
Switches (SW301 and SW302) 
Functional Check" in Section 
7-4. 


4. Erase Lamp 
Assembly. 


Slightly faint print may result over time 
if the erase lamps are malfunctioning. 


Perform the "Erase Lamp 
Functional Check" following. 


5. Low laser power. 


Low laser power would result in an 
inadequately discharged surface on the 
photoconductive drum. 


Verify the laser power output. 
Refer to "Laser Power 
Verification" in Section 7-4. 


6. Paper. 


The paper may not be acceptable to the 
electrophotographic processes. 


Try a known source and type 
of paper. Refer to the Paper 
Specifications Guide or to 
Chapter 2, Section 2-4. 


7. Transfer Corona. 


Corona functionality may not be at peak. 


Clean the Corona Assembly. 



7-63 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 7-31. Suede Print 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


WHY 


ACTION 


1. DC Controller 
PCA. 


If the laser drive circuitry is 
malfunctioning and turning the laser 
on and off at incorrect intervals, suede 
print may be observed. 


Perform a Test Print to isolate 
the DC Controller from the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. If the 
defective print occurs during 
the Test Print function, assume 
a defective DC Controller PCA 
and replace it. 


2. 
Interface/Formatter 

PCA. 


If the Interface/Formatter PCA is 
defective, the PCA may be instructing 
the DC Controller PCA to turn the 
laser on and off at incorrect times. 


Perform a Test Print to isolate 
the DC Controller PCA from 
the Interface/Formatter PCA. If 
the test print is acceptable but 
the Control Panel test operation 
is unacceptable, replace the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. 



Table 7-32. Smeared Print/Improper Fusing 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


WHY 


ACTION 


1. Fusing Assembly. 


The print will be smeared if the Fusing 
Assembly is not heated sufficiently to 
bond the toner image to the paper. 


Perform the "Fusing Check" at 
the end of this section. 


2. Bent Static Teeth. 


The purpose of the static teeth is to 
assist in separating the paper from the 
photoconductive drum by discharging 
the positive charges placed on the paper 
by the Transfer Corona. If the static 
teeth are defective, the print could 
possibly become smeared prior to the 
paper entering the Fusing Assembly. 


Closely examine the static teeth 
for defects. If the teeth are 
bent or defective, replace the 
Transfer Corona Assembly. 


3. Media. 


The media may not be acceptable for 
the EP process and for laser printing. 


Verify that the media meets 
specifications. (See the Paper 
Specifications Guide or Chapter 
2, Sections 2-4-2-6. 


4, Dirty Fuser 
Cleaning Pads. 


Fjxcessively dirty fuser cleaning pads 
may result in contamination of the 
Fusing Roller, thereby causing smeared 
print. 


Replace the Fuser Cleaning 
Pad. 


5. Worn Gears. 


When the EP-S Drum and paper are 
not moving at the same speed, smudged 
characters (often appearing to be bold 
characters) Avill result. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge, 
Feed Drive Assembly, 19- and 
57-Tooth Gears, Main Motor, or 
Fusing Assembly as necessary. 


6. Foreign object in 
paper path. 


Something is smearing the unfused 
toner image on the surface of the paper. 


Remove any foreign material. 
Try a new EP-S Cartridge. 



7-64 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-33. Distorted Print 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


....■■:. WHY ■ ■ ■ 


■AtrnoN' . 


1. Paper Path. 


If any component within the paper 
path is preventing the paper from 
moving at a uniform rate, the print 
image would be affected (e.g., the main 
motor rotating too fast or too slow, the 
transport gears excessively worn, etc.). 
Characters that are either too tall or too 
short (in the direction of paper motion) 
are usually a result of drive mechanism 
problem. 


Closely examine the paper 
transport rollers along the 
paper path for wear. Replace 
if excessive wear is observed. 
Inspect and replace the 
EP-S Cartridge, Feed Drive 
Assembly, 19- and 57-Tooth 
Gears, Main Motor and Drive 
Assembly, or Fusing Assembly 
as necessary. 


2. T.a.ser/Scanning 
Assembly. 


Wavy, irregular-shaped characters, 
or irregular line margins in the scan 
direction of printing are usually a result 
of a defective Laser/Scanning Assembly. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly. 


3. Laser/Scanning 
Cable Assembly. 


See explanation above. 


Replace the Cable Assembly. 


4. High-Voltage 
Corona stays on. 


Improper charges on the EP drum 
surface can cause image distortion. 


See Table 7-45, ''High-Voltage 
System Checks." 



Table 7-34. Repetitive Defects 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


WHY 


ACTION 


1. EP-S Cartridge. 


The circumference of the 
photoconductive drum (EP drum) 
is 3| inches. The circumference of 
the developer roller is 2 inches. If a 
defect appears in the print image at 
these intervals, assume the defect is 
associated with the EP-S Cartridge. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 
Refer to the "Repetitive Image 
Defect Ruler" drawing in 
Section 7-7 for additional hints. 


2. Fusing Assembly. 


The Fusing Roller's circumference is 
approximately 3^ inches. If a defect 
appears at this interval, assume the 
defect is associated with the Fusing 
Assembly. 


Clean the Fusing Assembly 
rollers. Replace the assembly if 
necessary. 


3. Dirty Roller. 


Any dirty roller along the paper path 
may result in a pattern of repetitive 
print image defects. 


Examine and clean rollers 
along the paper path. Refer 
to "Repetitive Image Defect 
Ruler" drawing in Section 7-7. 


4. Bad High-Voltage 
Power Supply 
Assembly or DC 
Controller. 


A "soft" HVPS may leave inadequate 
charges on the EP drum or may not 
properly charge the developer roller. 
If the Primary or Transfer Coronas 
are left on when the printer is idle, 
repetitive image defects will appear. 


Replace the HVPS. If the 
problem persists, replace the 
DC Controller. 



7-65 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-35. Black Pages with Horizontal White Stripes 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


■;VV.:'^:-WH¥- ..■.■■.:■."..■.:■..;-.; 


ACTION 


1. Defective 
(damaged) Fiber 
Optic Cable. 


This unique printout results from a 
defective or damaged Fiber Optic Cable. 
The pattern results from the printer's 
firmware attempting to locate Beam 
Detect (the horizontal synchronization 
signal). The white horizontal lines 
result from retry efforts by the 
firmware (e.g., the turning on/off of the 
laser) in an attempt to locate Beam 
Detect. The black areas show where 
the laser is continuously on, discharging 
the surface of the drum. This printout 
is usually associated with a 51 ERROR. 


Ensure the Fiber Optic Cable 
is properly seated. If the error 
persists, replace the Fiber Optic 
Cable. 


2, Laser/Scanning 
Assembly or DC 
Controller PCA. 


See explanation in step 1 above. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly followed by the DC 
Controller PCA, if necessary. 



Table 7-36. Image Skew 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


■■;.::;■;:, vWHY^^:- ■;;.//■■■ ■;:.-:^-': ■ 


■■':.'.' ^'-MmoN'y-^"-:^ 


1. Paper Tray. 


If paper is carelessly installed in 
the paper tray or the paper tray is 
loosely installed in the printer, paper 
movement will be hindered as the 
paper enters the Registration Assembly. 


Inspect the paper tray. Verify 
that the tray is correctly loaded 
and not overfilled. Verify 
that the tab in the upper left 
corner of the tray is not bent 
out of position. Verify that the 
paper tray is fully seated into 
the printer. Switch trays with 
another printer to verify that 
the problem follows the tray. 


2. Worn Feed Roller 
Assembly. 


If the Paper Pickup Roller or associated 
clutch is sufficiently worn, the leading 
edge of the paper may be skewed before 
it reaches the Registration Rollers. 


Replace the Feed Roller 
Assembly. 


3. Registration 
Assembly torsion 
springs. 


The Registration Assembly torsion 
springs ensure that equal pressure is 
applied to both ends of the upper and 
lower Registration Rollers. If one of 
the springs is missing or defective, 
unequal pressure would be apphed to 
the paper along the length of the roller. 
The paper should advance through the 
assembly in a uniform manner. Since 
one side of the paper advances ahead of 
the other side of the paper, the image 
would appear skewed on the paper. 


Inspect the Registration 
Assembly's torsion springs to 
verify correct installation. If 
the springs are out of position, 
reinstall. If correctly installed 
but the image is still skewing 
beyond its specification, replace 
the Registration Assembly. If 
the fault condition persists, 
refer to the "Registration 
Check" toward the end of this 
section. 



7-66 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-37. Improperly Sized Image 



POSSIBLE GAIJHE 


WHY 


ACTION 


1. Paper Tray 
Microswitches. 


The purpose of the paper tray 
microswitches is to indicate to the DC 
Controller PCA what size paper tray 
is installed. The DC Controller will 
then use this information to format the 
print image to the size of the paper 
installed in the tray. If the paper tray 
microswitches are defective, the DC 
Controller is receiving false information 
and will format the print image to an 
improper size. 


Perform the "Tray Size 
Switches (SW201, SW202, 
SW203) Functional Check" in 
Section 7-4, If envelopes are the 
problem, ensure the envelope 
size setting (displayed following 
insertion of an envelope tray) is 
set properly. 



Table 7-38. Vertical Dark Streaks 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


■■".'.■ WHY .■." 


,- . Acrnm 


1. Dirty Primary 
Corona wire. 


A dirty Primary Corona wire will leave 
areas under the contaminated portion 
with an inadequate charge to repel 
unwanted toner. 


Clean the Primary Corona wire. 


2. BadEP-S 
Cartridge. 


Contaminants lodged within the 
cartridge or improper manufacturing 
(or refilling) can cause non-uniform 
characteristics. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


3. Incompatible 
forms. 


During forms manufacture, inks or 
other finishing processes may interfere 
with the electrophotographic (EP) or 
fusing process. 


Change type of form. 
Hint: Check the Fuser 
Cleaning Pad for contaminant 
buildup. 



Table 7-39. Character Voids 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


■■:.":-:-^"' :■ WHY.v- ■■ 


ACTION 


1. Bad 
transparencies. 


Transparencies will exhibit this 
problem if they are not designed for 
proper toner adhesion. 


Use Hewlett-Packard-approved 
transparencies (refer to Chapter 
2, Section 2-6). 


2. Bad paper lot. 


The surface of the paper may be too 
smooth for proper toner adhesion. 


Try a known paper from a 
known source (see Chapter 2, 
Section 2-4). 


3. Poor fusing. 


Toner may not be properly fused to the 
media. 


Perform the "Fusing Check" at 
the end of this section. 



7-67 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-40. Background 



possible: GM^ 


■X-y ■\:::::^^ 


^:-::;;'\^::::=:;::-;ii0F^ 


1. Dirty Primary 
Corona wire. 


A dirly Primary Corona wire will 
prevent adequate charging of the EP 
drum's surface to repel toner. 


Clean the Primary Corona wire. 


2. Defective EP-S 
Cartridge. 


The EP-S Cartridge may be internally 
damaged. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


3. Bad paper lot. 


The paper moisture content, 
conductivity, or surface finish 
may be incompatible with the 
electrophotographic process. 


Try a different paper lot (see 
Chapter 2, Section 2-4 ("Paper 
Specifications"). 


4. Print Density set 
incorrectly. 


If the Print Density is set incorrectly, 
then background scatter can result, 
particularly with envelopes. 


Adjust the Print Density (see 
Chapter 4, Section 4-9, "Print 
Density Adjustment"). 


5. Inside of printer 
dirty. 


If toner dust has leaked out of the 
EP-S-Cartridge, this problem can occur. 


Clean the inside of the printer 
(see Chapter 4, Section 4-4, 
"Cleaning the Printer"). 



Table 7-41. Smudged Band with Overprint 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


WHY 


ACTION 


1. Worn Feed Roller 
Assembly. 


The plastic idler wheels can grab the 
paper feed D-roUer as the Registration 
Assembly is trying to pull paper 
through the printer. If the D-roller is 
turned sufficiently, it can momentarily 
prevent normal paper movement. 


Replace the Feed Roller 
Assembly and Separation Pad. 



Table 7-42. Black Stripe on Right Side of Page 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


WHY 


ACHON 


1. Dirty Primary 
Corona wire. 


Drum surface cannot be charged where 
corona wire is contaminated. 


Clean Primary Corona wire (see 
Chapter 4, Section 4-4). 



7-68 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-43. White or Blank Pages 



POSSIBLE CAUSE 


v:-. ■-..■ .WHY'./." ■:■■..:: 


ACTION 


1. EP-S Cartridge. 


No toner is available for print. 


Replace the EP-S Cartridge. 


2. Sealing tape not 
removed. 


No toner is available for print. 


Remove tape. 


3. Broken Transfer 
Corona wire or no 
Transfer Corona 
voltage. 


Without Transfer Corona voltage, toner 
cannot be attracted from the surface of the 
drum to the paper. 


Perform the "Image 
Development (Half Self Test) 
Functional Check" which 
follows to check all other EP 
processes. 


4. No Developing 
Bias. 


The Developing Bias applies a charge to the 
developing cylinder which> in turn, passes 
a charge to the toner. The charged toner 
particles are attracted to the neutralized 
surface areas of the drum previously 
discharged by the laser. If the charge on the 
toner is missing, toner will not be attracted 
to the drum and the page will be totally 
white. 


Refer to Table 7-45, 
"High- Voltage System 
Checks." 


5. No drum 
ground path. 


If the drum ground discharge path is 
interrupted, the laser light's discharging 
effect cannot occur and the highly negative 
charge placed on the drum by the Primary 
Corona will repel toner, leaving a white 
page. 


Refer to Table 7-45, 
"High- Voltage System 
Checks." 


6. Dram is not 
rotating. 


If the drum does not rotate, the page will be 
white because the EP process functions will 
not have occurred. 


Perform the "Drum Rotation 
Functional Check" which 
follows. 


7. High-Voltage 

System 

shorted-to-ground. 


When the Transfer Corona is 
shorted-to-ground, the current-limiting 
circuitry within the High-Voltage Power 
Supply Assembly disables aU EP process 
functional voltages. Without these voltages, 
none of the EP process functions will occur. 


Thoroughly clean or replace 
the Transfer Corona 
Assembly. 


8. Bad 

Laser/Scanning 
Cable Assembly. 


Low-level signals exchanged between the 
Laser/Scanning Assembly and the DC 
Controller may be affecting laser output. 


Replace the Laser/Scanning 
Cable Assembly. 


9. Bent Top Cover 
Assembly Hinge 
Brackets. 


With bent Hinge Brackets, the 
Beam-to-Drum Mirror may improperly 
reflect the laser beam or the drum drive 
gear may not engage. 


Replace the Top Cover 
Assembly Hinge Brackets, 


10. Blocked Laser 
Beam. 


If the Beam-to-Drum Mirror or EP-S 
Cartridge shutters do not open when the 
EP-S Cartridge is installed, the beam will 
not reach the drum, resulting in an all-white 
page. 


Verify the laser beam is not 
blocked from striking the 
EP drum (see the following 
"Beam-to-Drum Mirror 
Assembly Functional Check"). 



7-69 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Image Development (Half Self Test) Functional Check 

The EP process can be subdivided into the following stages (see Chapter 5, Section 5-2): 

■ Cleaning (Physical and Electrostatic). 

■ Conditioning (Primary Corona and grid). 

■ Writing (Laser Modulation). 

■ Development (Formation of the Toner Image). 

■ Transfer (Transfer Corona charge to transfer the image to paper). 

The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which of the EP processes are functioning. 
Perform the test as follows: 

1. Press the TEST PRINT button. 

2. After the paper has advanced halfway through the printer (the leading edge of the paper should 
have advanced at least past the Transfer Corona), open the Top Cover Assembly. 

3. Open the EP-S Cartridge's drum shield (see Figure 7-27) to view the drum's surface. 

If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum's surface, assume that the first four 
functions of the EP process are functioning, concentrate troubleshooting efforts to a transfer 
problem, and proceed to Table 7-46. If the drum image is faint, verify proper laser power per 
the "Laser Power Verification" in Section 7-4, followed by the "High-Voltage System Checks," 
(Table 7-45) in this section. If NO image is present on the photoconductive drum, concentrate 
troubleshooting efforts on the earlier stages of the EP process as follows: 

Drum Rotation Functional Check 

The photoconductive drum, located in the EP-S Cartridge, must rotate for the EP process to 
function. The photoconductive drum receives its drive from the Main Motor gear train. To verify 
whether the drum is rotating, proceed as follows: 

1. Open the printer's Top Cover Assembly. Open the EP-S Cartridge's drum shield (cover) to view 
the photoconductive drum. 

2. With a felt-tipped marker, draw a line on the edge of the drum (away from the print image 
area). Note the position of the line. 

3. Close the printer and power it on. The one-second start-up sequence should rotate the drum 
enough to move the mark. Open the printer and inspect the drum. Verify that the mark drawn 
in Step 2 of this procedure has moved. 

If the mark has not moved, inspect the gear train to ensure that it is meshing with the EP-S 
Cartridge gears. If the Main Motor and drive gears appear to be functional and yet the EP 
drum does not move, the Top Cover Assembly Hinge Brackets may have been bent and require 
replacement. 



7-70 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional Check 

In order for the laser beam to reach the surface of the EP drum after it exits the Laser/Scanning 
Assembly, it must reflect off a properly positioned Beam-to-Drum Mirror. The mirror is normally 
blocked by the Mirror Shutter Assembly. When an EP-S Cartridge is installed, it contacts a lever 
on the left side of the Mirror Shutter Assembly, allowing the shutter to fall away from the mirror 
when the Top Cover Assembly is closed. 

With the Top Cover Assembly opened to its 45** position and the EP-S Cartridge removed, gently 
push the bottom of the shutter locking assembly on the left side of the Mirror Shutter Assembly. 
If the shutter does not fall away from the mirror, check for the source of the binding and resolve. 
(See Figure 7-26). 

Ensure that the Mirror Assembly is installed properly between the EP-S Cartridge Guide and the 
Top Cover Assembly and that it is positioned on its guide pins as described in Chapter 6. 




Visually observe from this angle 



Press Locking , 
Assembly Here 



Beam-to-Drum 
Mirror 



Figure 7-26. Beam-to-Drom Mirror Assembly 



EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check 

Whenever an EP-S Cartridge is installed in the EP-S Cartridge Gmde in the Top Cover Assembly, 
protrusions on the right side of the guide are used to open two shutters on the top side of the 
EP-S Cartridge: the Erase Lamp Shutter and the Beam Shutter. As the Top Cover Assembly is 
dosed, a protrusion in the base of the printer opens the drum shutter (or shield) on the bottom of 
the EP-S Cartridge. 

With the Top Cover Assembly open at 45°, slowly sUde an EP-S Cartridge in to the cartridge guide 
and, looking over the top of the EP-S Cartridge, note whether both shutters are opening properly. 
If all is well, the surface of the EP drum should be visible when looking directly over the top of the 
installed EP-S Cartridge (see Figure 7-26). 



7-71 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly 

The High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the necessary voltages for the printer's 
electro-photographic processes. Chapter 5 of this manual provides a summary of functional theoiy 
describing how the EP process works. The +24B Vdc supply is used to power the High-Voltage 
Power Supply Assembly. A summary of the major components of the high-voltage system and 
their functions is given in the table below. 

Table 7-44. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly Summary 



COMPONENT 


FUNCTION 


1. Primary Corona. 


Deposits a negative charge on the drum's surface. 


2. Primary Corona 
Grid. 


The grid ensures that the negative charges provided by the Primary 
Corona are applied evenly to the drum's surface. The grid, which 
consists of a metal screen, is tied to ground potential through a 
varistor in the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. The varistor 
becomes highly conductive at voltages above its breakdown point. This 
characteristic allows the varistor to bleed off excess corona current and 
maintain a uniform, fixed voltage on the drum's surface. 


3. Drum ground. 


Provides a discharge ground path for the drum's surface charge through 
the photoconductor after being struck by the laser or the erase lamps. 


4. Developing bias. 


The developing bias consists of a variable negative DC bias and a 
superimposed AC square wave bias. This bias is applied to the developer 
roll within the EP-S Cartridge. Toner particles, within the developer, 
obtain this negative bias by rubbing against the developer roll. The AC 
bias applied to the developer helps the toner overcome the magnetic 
attraction of the developer roll and assists in the toner projection 
process. 


5. Transfer Corona. 


Deposits a positive charge to the back of the paper to attract the 
negatively charged toner from the drum's surface. 


6. Toner Sensing. 


Provides a variable voltage level to the DC Controller, depending on the 
toner level in the EP-S Cartridge. 


7. Static Teeth. 


A high negative potential is applied to a row of static teeth. These 
negatively charged teeth assist in discharging the positive charge placed 
on the paper at the transfer station. The result of this discharge action 
is to weaken the paper's attraction to the photoconductive drum. 



7-72 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Toner Low Sensor • 

Developing Bias 
Connector 

Drum Ground ' 



Primary Grid 
Connector 

Primary Corona 
Connector 




Laser Shutter Tab 



Ground Defeat Tab 



Ci 




Push on Lever 
to View Drum 



I 



Figure 7-27. EP-S Cartridge (Bottom view) 



Primary 
Corona 



Grid of 

Primary 

Corona 



Drum 
Ground 




Developing Toner 

Bias Sensor 



l^-^Jpir 



Transfer 

Corona 

Spring 



Figure 7-28. High-Voltage Power Supply Connector 



7-73 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-45. High-Voltage System Checks 



■■■■ ■^■■■■■- '.CHECKS'^^ 


;■■■;...;■■./;■.■ -^ ;:::■:;; ACTION- ".■.:■ ■:.■.:"■.,■. 


1. Are any of the following supply 
connectors damaged, corroded, dirty, or 
missing? 

■ Primary Corona connector. 

■ Primary Corona Grid connector. 

■ Drum Ground connector. 

■ Developing Bias connector. 

■ Toner Level Sensor connector (and 
connecting wire). 


Visually inspect each item. (See Figure 7-28). 
If any of the items are damaged, correct as 
necessary. Replace the High-Voltage Power Supply 
if the connection is unable to be corrected. Ensure 
that all wires are connected to their respective 
terminals. 


2. Inspect the EP-S Cartridge and verify that 
the following connectors are not damaged, 
dirty, or missing: 

■ Primary Corona connector. 

■ Primary Corona Grid connector, 

■ Drum Ground connector. 

■ Developer Bias connector. 

■ Toner Sensing connector. 


Visually inspect (see Figure 7-27). Correct, or if 
necessary, replace the EP-S CarUidge. 


3. Is the Primary Corona wire broken, 
resulting in black pages? 


Inspect. (See Figure 7-29.) If broken, replace the 
EP-S Cartridge. 


4. Are the Light-Blocking shutters on the 
EP-S Cartridge opening? (A closed laser 
shutter will result in white pages.) 


Inspect the EP-S Cartridge's top to verify that the 
shutter tabs are not broken or damaged (See Fig 
7-29). Inspect the Top Cover Assembly to verify 
that the plastic protrusions which open the EP-S 
Cartridge shutters are not damaged. 


5. Is the protective shutter concealing the 
Top Cover's reflecting mirror being released 
when the EP-S Cartridge is installed? 


Install the EP-S Cartridge. Visually inspect to see 
if the mirror's protective shield swings open as the 
Top Cover Assembly is closed. 


6. Is the Beam-to-Dnim Mirror dirty? 


Inspect the mirror. If dirty, clean per the 
procedure described in Chapter 4. 


7. Is the High- Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly correctly seated into its connector 
to the DC Controller PCA? 


Visually inspect. If necessary, remove the 
assembly to verify that all pins are in their 
respective connectors. 


8. Is connector J211 on the DC Controller 
PCA properly connected? 


Remove the bottom cover and visually inspect the 
connector. Reseat or replace if necessary. 


9. Do the EP-S Cartridge's sensitivity 
switches function? 


Refer to the "Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 
and SW302) Functional Check" in Section 7-4. 


10. Do the Erase Lamps function? 


Perform the "erase lamp functional Check" which 
follows. 


11. Do the Primary Corona, Developer 
AC Bias, and Developer DC Bias signals 
function? 


Perform the "Primary Corona," "Developer AC 
Bias," and "Developer DC Bias" functional checks 
which follow. 



7-74 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Light Blocking 
Shutter 1 
(Laser Opening) 



Shutter Tabs 




Sensitivity 
Tabs 



Primary Corona 
{Behind Cover) 



Figure 7-29. EP-S Cartridge (End view) 



Primary Corona Functional Check 



Verify that the Primary Corona (HVION) enable signal on the High- Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly is functioning as follows: 

1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J210-8 (Test 
Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while performing a Test Print. The 
voltage level should switch between + 18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) one 
second after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J210-8 does not switch, replace the DC 
Controller PCA, If the signal line is being switched but the Primary Corona does not appear 
to be functioning (i.e., producing black pages), replace the EP-S Cartridge followed by the 
High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 



Developer AC Bias Functional Check 



Verify that the Developer AC Bias (DBAC) enable signal on the High- Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly is functioning as follows: 

1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J210-6 (Test 
Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while performing a Test Print. The 
voltage level should switch between + 18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) three 
seconds after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J210-6 does not switch, replace the DC 
Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the developer AC bias does not appear 
to be functioning (i.e., producing very faint print), replace the EP-S Cartridge followed by the 
High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 

Mote The absence of the Developer AC Bias will also result in a perpetual 16 TONER 

g LOW condition. 



7-75 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Developer DC Bias Functional Check 



Verify that the Developer DC Bias (DBDC) enable signal on the High- Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly is functioning as follows: 

1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J210-4 (Test 
Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while initiating the printer Self Test. 
The voltage level should switch between + 18.0 Vdc (disabled state) and 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) 
one second after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J210-4 does not switch, replace the DC 
Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the developer DC bias does not appear 
to be functioning (i.e., producing extremely faint or white pages), replace the EP-S Cartridge 
followed by the High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly. 







Z 


Z 


u 


o 


o 


o 




< 


> 


^ 


Q 


Q 


X 


X 



D 



crrn 




nnnnn 




Figure 7-30. J210 Test Points 



Note 



Functionality of the DC Controller's high-voltage control circuitry can be 
readily verified using the LaserJet Series II Service Diagnostic Tool Kit, P/N 
33440-67905, and following the instructions therein. 



7-76 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



<• 



Transfer Corona 



The Transfer Corona applies a positive charge to the back of the paper during the transfer 
process to attract the toner image from the surface of the photoconductive drum to the paper. 
The High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the voltage applied to the Transfer Corona 
Assembly. The main microprocessor on the DC Controller PCA enables the Transfer Corona via 
the HIGH- VOLTAGE TRANSFER ON (HVTON) signal, which occurs approximately two seconds 
after the PRNT command is issued by the Interface/Formatter PCA. The Transfer Corona remains 
on until all printing is complete. 

Table 7-46. Transfer Corona Checks 



"" ^^\CmCKS^\y.^:i\,^/n-_.,^:-^,__- 


..■■:.\ ■/■.:■ ; ACTION'^ 


1. Is the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly 
correctly seated into its connectors to the DC 
Controller PCA? 


Visually inspect. If necessary, remove the 
assembly to verify that all pins are in their 
respective connectors. 


2. Is the Transfer Corona wire broken? 


Inspect. If the wire is broken, replace the 
assembly. 


3. Is the drum ground connector (see Figure 
7-28) damaged? 


Inspect. Replace the High-Voltage Power 
Supply Assembly if necessary. 


4. Are the Transfer Corona Assembly spring 
connectors (located on the bottom of the 
High- Voltage Power Supply Assembly 
connector arm) dirty or bent? 


Remove the High- Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly. Inspect the Transfer Corona spring 
connections (see Figure 7-28). Straighten or 
clean the connectors if necessary. 


5. Is the DC Controller PCA defective? 


See the "Transfer Corona Functional Check" 
which follows. 



Transfer Corona Functional Check 



Verify that the Transfer Corona enable signal (HVTON) on the High-Voltage Power Supply 
Assembly is functioning as follows: 

1. Using a voltmeter and frame ground as a reference, measure the voltage level at J210-10 (Test 
Connector, see Figure 7-30) on the DC Controller PCA while initiating the printer Self Test. 
The voltage level should toggle between +18.0 Vdc (disabled state) to 0.0 Vdc (enabled state) 
two seconds after the print cycle begins. If the voltage at J210-10 does not toggle, replace the 
DC Controller PCA. If the signal line is being switched but the Transfer Corona does not 
appear to be functioning (i.e., producing a clear image on the drum but faint or white pages), 
replace the High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly followed, if necessary, by the Transfer Corona 
Assembly. 



7-77 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Erase Lamp Functional Check ^V^ 

The Erase Lamps receive their operating voltage through connectors J333 and J334 on the Exit 
Sensor PCA. 

1. Remove the Main Body Covers or, at a minimum, the left cover panel. 

2. Remove the EP-S Cartridge and close the Top Cover Assembly, 

3. Power on the printer. 

4. Observe the Erase Lamps through the left side opening. If the lamps are functioning, an orange 
glow may be observed for about one second following powerup. If the orange glow is not 
observed, verify that the Erase Lamp contacts are fully contacting the Exit Sensor PCA. If the 
lamps still appear to be malfunctioning, replace the following assemblies in the order listed: 

a. Exit Sensor PCA. 

b. Erase Lamp Assembly. 

c. DC Controller PCA. 

d. Cable assembly between the Exit Sensor PCA and the DC Controller PCA, 

Image Quality Check 

Perform an "Image Quality Check" as follows: 

1. Ensure that a properly stored, reliable copier bond paper (e.g., Xerox 4024, Canon NP, etc.) is 
installed in the printer. 

2. Run several copies of the Service Mode Self Test. (See Chapter 3, Section 3-7, for instructions.) 

3. Inspect the solid and shaded gradient areas in the four corners of the Service Mode Self Test 
printout. The solid areas should be uniform in density with no fading from one side of the 
printout to the other. The four corner gradient patterns should appear uniform. If uniform 
density is not being observed, perform the following: 

a. Remove and rock the EP-S Cartridge about its long axis (see Chapter 2, Section 2-3). 

b. Clean the Transfer and Primary Corona wires (see Chapter 4, Section 4-4). 

c. Ensure that the Beam-to-Drum Mirror is clean. 

If the preceding actions do not correct the density problems, replace the EP-S Cartridge, followed 
by the Transfer Corona Assembly, High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly, and Laser/Scanning 
Assembly as necessary. 



7-78 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Paper Overview 

The major variable in the print quality fornmla is paper. Table 7-47 provides a list of paper checks 
that should be made prior to troubleshooting for printer malfunctions. 



Table 7-47. Paper Checks 



CHECKS 


ACTION 


1. Are the print quality problems related to a 
specific type of paper? 


Both printers are specifiofllly designed to work 
with high quality copier bond papers. Try using 
an alternate brand of paper to determine if 
print quality problems are associated with a 
specific type of paper. 


2, What is the printer's operating environment 
like with respect to: 

■ Temperature. 

■ Humidity. 

■ Sunlight exposure. 

■ Cleanliness. 


Paper assumes the properties of its 
environment (e.g., if the operating environment 
is excessively humid, the paper absorbs this 
humidity). Examine the environment to 
determine whether any of the items listed could 
affect the paper. 


3. Are the correct paper handling practices 
being observed? 


Paper should be stored in a clean, temperature 
controlled, and humidity controlled 
environment Review the user's paper storage 
practices to determine if any specific practice 
may result in a paper problem. 


4. Does the paper meet the paper 
specifications? 


Review the paper specifications listed in 
Chapter 2, Section 2-4. 



7-79 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Paper Curl 

Paper curl is inherent in the laser printing process because paper is subjected to heat on one 
surface causing it to dry and shrink more than the opposite surface. The curl is always towards 
the source of heat (i.e., toward the Fusing Roller). Curl tends to worsen over time as the paper 
cools. 

Although paper curl cannot be completely eliminated, some steps may be taken to lessen its 
impact. If you feel that the curl in your printed output is greater than your expectations, try some 
of the following recommendations: 



Table 7-48. Paper Curl 



CHECKS 


ACTION 


1. Try using the 
printer's Face-Up 
(Rear) Output Tray. 


By using the printer's Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray, the paper is 
transported through a straighter paper path after it has been subjected 
to the heat from the fusing station. This paper path tends to be less 
stressful on the paper, decreasing its tendency to curl. 


2. Try turning the 
paper over. 


The manufacturing process for paper results in two paper surfaces, 
the 'Vire side" and the "felt side." Because the felt side of the paper 
is usually the smoothest, it is the preferred print image surface. 
Depending upon the type of manufacturing process, one side of the 
paper may have a "manufactured curl." If you are experiencing paper 
curl with one surface of the paper, turn the paper over and see if excess 
curl is limited to a particular surface of the paper. 


3. Review paper 
handling and storage 
conditions. 


Over time, paper assumes the characteristics of its storage environment 
(e.g., if it is stored in a humid environment, the paper assumes this 
humidity, etc.). Review paper specification storage requirements. 
Evaluate actual storage conditions to determine if any of the 
environmental conditions could possibly result in paper curl. 

Note: Excessively "wet" paper (greater than 4-6% moisture content) 
vnll exhibit greater curl when heated. 


4. Try using a 
different type of paper. 


All papers are manufactured differently (e.g., different textures, moisture 
content, drying processes, material content, etc.). After changing types 
of paper, note if the tendency to curl is associated with any one specific 
type of paper. 



7-80 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Density Check 



The perception of density (blackness) is subjective. For a service representative to evaluate the 
customer's print quality with respect to density, both the service person and the customer must 
judge the suspect problem from the same point of view. The following variables must be clarified 
or defined before a true evaluation can occur: 



Table 7-49. Density Check Factors 



ITEM 


CONSIDERATION 


1. Paper. 


Paper is one of the largest variables that may affect the perception of a 
density problem. All types of paper react differentiy to the laser imaging 
process. The surface texture, paper color (degree of whiteness), paper 
type, and moisture content all contribute to density perception. 

When addressing suspected density problems, both the service 
representative and the customer must evaluate the problem from 
the same reference point. It is important, therefore, that all density 
evaluations be made using the same type, if not the same lot, of paper. 
It is recommended that all evaluations be made using Xerox 4024 or 
Canon NP copier bond paper. 


2. Density Adjustment 
Dial. 


The printer's Density Adjustment Dial changes the developer DC 
bias and, therefore, the amount of toner attracted to the drum. For 
evaluating suspect density problems, ensure that all print samples are 
printed vrith the Density Dial set to the "5" (mid-range) position. (See 
Chapter 4, Section 4-9.) 


3. Environmental 
Conditions. 


Although difficult to duplicate, factors such as printer location (w^ith 
respect to sunlight, humidity, and temperature) should not be ruled out 
regarding their contribution to print quality. 


4. Perceived Density 
versus Optical Density. 


A difference in perceived density versus optic^al density is often evident 
when someone is asked to judge bold print versus italic print. In most 
cases, bold print is judged to be more dense just because the stoke 
weight is heavier and not because the toner is "blacker." 

To eliminate the perceived density phenomenon, all density comparisons 
should be made using the same print patterns. It is recommended that 
all density evaluations be based on the Service Mode Self Test Printout. 


5. EP-S Cartridge. 


A new EP-S Cartridge wiU appear to print slightiy darker than the last 
pages of a fully used (approximately 4,000 pages) cartridge. This is due 
to the individual dot sizes being slightiy larger on a well used cartridge. 
This condition is the result of a progressive "blooming" effect caused 
by the continued working of the laser on the drum's photoconductive 
material. 


6. Resolution 
Enhancement. 
(HP 33449 only.) 


The Resolution Enhancement feature of the HP 33449 and the density 
adjustment affect each other. See Chapter 3, Section 3-4, for proper 
adjustment procedures. 



7-81 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Registration Check 

Registration is defined as the printer's ability to accurately position the printed image on the 
paper. The border printed on the Control Panel or Service Mode Self Test printout defines the 
print image area. This border also provides a convenient reference to measure print image 
registration. The following registration tolerances are allowed with the HP 33440 and HP 33449 
printers. 



Table 7-50. Registration Specifications 



TQt^tAPJCE 


■■■ ■:-^LOCAlION .X^-^:^ 


5mm ± 2.5mm 


Leading edge of the paper to the horizontal first line of dot row. 


4.7mm ± 2mm (HP 33440) 


Left edge of the paper to the first vertical dot row (for letter size 
paper). 


4.0mm ± 2mm (HP 33440) 


Left edge of the paper to the first vertical dot row (for A4 size 
paper). 


6.4mm ± 2mm (HP 33449) 


Left edge of the paper to the first vertical dot row (for letter size 
paper). 


6.0mm ± 2mm (HP 33449) 


Left edge of the paper to the first vertical dot row (for A4 size 
paper). 







N 



Bottom T 
of Page / 



Figure 7-31. Registration Specifications 



7-82 



# 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Skew Tolerance 

All vertical lines should be parallel to the left edge of the paper. In Figure 7-31, dimension A 
should not vary from dimension B by more than 1.5mm (0.06 in.) over a paper length of 260mm 
(10.25 inches). 

Procedure 

Run the printer Control Panel continuous Self Test (04 SELF TEST). 

If misregistration is suspected, measure the left and top margins and compare the measured values 
with the listed specifications. If, in comparison, misregistration is confirmed, proceed as follows: 

1. Closely examine the paper path gear train. Inspect for worn or excessively dirty gears. Replace 
or clean if necessary. 

2. Inspect the Paper Pickup Roller, If worn, replace the Feed Roller Assembly and Separation Pad. 

3. Verify that the torsion springs are correctly mounted on the Registration Assembly. 

4. If the preceding actions do not correct the misregistration problem, replace the Registration 
Assembly, 

Note There are no adjustments for skew or registration problems. 



Fusing Check 

The Fusing Assembly permanently bonds toner to the paper. To verify that the printer is correctly 
fusing the print image, proceed as follows: 

1. Run ten continuous copies of the Control Panel Self Test. 

2. Place the printout on a firm surface and, using your fingertips, vigorously rub the first and the 
tenth printout. Inspect for any evidence of smearing. The text should be permanently fused on 
both printouts. No smearing should occur. 

If the level of fusing from the first printout varies from that of the tenth printout, clean the Fusing 
Assembly's Thermistor and repeat the fusing check. If the difference in levels of fusing persists, 
replace the Thermistor/Exit Sensor PCA. 

If smearing occurs in all printouts, replace the Fusing Assembly. 

If the problem continues, replace the DC Controller PCA. 

Mote If the Thermistor Bypass Switch is not engaged when the Bottom Cover is in 

I place, the DC Controller believes the fuser is at temperature and, therefore, the 

^p fusing lamp will not be activated. However, the printer will attempt to print 

"normally" in this condition. 



7-83 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



7-6. INTERFACE TROUBLESHOOTING 
Communications Check 



fSiote Except for a potentially bad Interface/Formatter PCA, communication problems 

I are normally the customer's responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these 

§^ problems will not be covered by the product's Hewlett-Packard warranty. 



The Peripheral Products Assist Line (PPAL) is available to the customer at no 
charge to help them through these problems. The PPAL telephone number is: 
(208) 323-2551. 

If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to Table 7-51 (Communications 
Checks). 

Test Message 

After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the computer using 
MS-DOS by entering the following at the computer: 



Type: <Prompt> COPY CON: LJTEST ( enter! 



Type: LASERJET COMMUNICATIONS OK! [enter 1 

Press: CTRL Z (press the (control) key and the letter Z simultaneously) 

Press: (enter) 

Displayed: 1 file(s) copied 



Type: <Prompt> PRINT LJTEST (enter) 

Displayed: name list dev [PRN] 
Press: (enter) 

The printer should print a page with the following text: "LASERJET COMMUNICATIONS OK!" 
If the Communications Check fails, proceed as follows. 

AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configuration Test 

If the previous check did not produce the desired result, ensure that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file 
contains the following statements for serial interface communications: 

MODE COM2 96 , N , 8 , 1 , P 

In sequence, the parameters of this statement means: 

COM2 PC Serial Communications Port 2. 

96 Baud Rate ^ 100 (9600). 

N Parity (none). 

8 Word length (data bits) 

1 Number of stop bits. 

P Continuous retries on time-out errors. 



7-84 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

This statement redirects LPTl output to the COM2 port: 
MODE LPT1:= COM2: 

If COM2 is not available on your computer, substitute COMl for COM2 in the 
above statements. 



Configure the printer for RS-232 at 9600 baud. Hook it to the COM2 (or COMl) port on the PC 
using the appropriate cable and repeat the test message procedure above. See Appendix B or the 
pamphlet, Your Guide to Setting up Your LaserJet III, for the appropriate cable. 

If the problem persists, proceed with the following checks in Table 7-51. 

Table 7-51. Communications Checks 



v' ■:CHEeEs;^/: ;;.;-;■■ ■■■■■::: 


:- V^vACTION. ■ ■.-■ ■ - 


1. Is your computer configured 
to the following parameters 
(assuming a serial interface is 
used)? 

Start Bits = i 
Stop Bits = 1 
Data Bits = g 
Parity = None 


These parameters are required to communicate vnth the 
printer. Verify your computer's communications port 
configuration matches these parameters. 

Note: If these parameters are not set properly, it may also 
yield a 40 , 20 , or 22 ERROR on the printer's Control Panel. 


2. Does the printer's baud rate 
match that of the computer's 
communications port? 


Run the printer's Self Test to verify the baud rate setting. At 
the computer, verify that the baud rate is correctly set in any 
configuration files. 

Note: A baud rate problem may also yield a printer 
40 ERROR. 


3. Are you using the correct cable 
for communications between the 
computer and the printer? 


See the cable wiring diagrams in Appendix D. 

Hint: On an RS'232 cable, pins 2 and 3 may need to be 
reversed at the printer-end of the cable. 


4. Are you using the correct 
RS-232-C protocol? 


During the communications "handshake," the printer 
transmits both the XON/XOFF signal and the DTR signal. 
The DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal may be either 
negative going or positive going. 

DTR polarity is set at the printer's Control Panel. 

The XON may be set to normal (only transmitted when data 

is needed) or Robust XON (transmitted every second). This 

feature is also configurable from the Control Panel. DTR is 

available at pin 20 and XOFF is transmitted from pin 2 of the 

printer. 



7-85 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 7-51. Communications Checks (continued) 



':.;;:r-.CHECKS-' ;:■:.:;;:■ :V:;^ 


■;:V ■:;■;.: ACTION^: :;■.;; 


5. If using a serial interface, is 
the cable longer than 50 feet (15 
meters)? 


The maximum recommended cable length for RS-232 serial 
communications is 50 feet. Use RS-422 or move the printer 
closer to the host 


6. If using a Centronics parallel 
cable, is it over 10 feet (3 meters) 
long? 


Consider using a serial interface connection or move the 
printer closer to the host. 


7. Do all the current Control 
Panel Configuration Menu 
items match the host system's 
parameters? 


Make appropriate changes. If host system changes are made, 
be sure to reboot the system or otherwise ensure the changes 
are in effect 


8. Does the printer have a bad 
interface port? 


If possible, try a different printer interface than the one 
having a problem and reconfigure the printer and host. 


9. Does the host have a bad 
interface port? 


If possible, try a different host system port than the one 
having a problem and reconfigure both the host and printer 
appropriately. 



m 



If the host system and printer are still not communicating and steps 1 through 9 have been 
completed, replace the Interface/Formatter PCA and reconfigure the printer. If the problem 
persists, a protocol analyzer may be required to determine the source of the problem. 

Caution HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch box 

« products without proper surge protection. These devices can generate voltages 

in excess of standard interface specifications, causing permanent damage to the 
Interface/Formatter PCA. This circumstance is not covered by Hewlett-Packard 
warranty. 



7-86 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



7-7. Tl 

Repetitive Defect Ruler, HP 33440 and HP 33449 

Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller within the printer or the EP-S 
Cartridge. The following diagram illustrates the diameters of the main printer rollers in a linear 
format. To use the diagram, align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the "ruler" and 
measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. 



• 



First occurrence of the print defect 



Registration assembly trunsfcr roller ().5 in (13 rnm)- 



Figure 7-32. Repetitive Defect Ruler 



Upper registration roller t.5 in (38 mm)- 



Lowcr rcgistrcition roller 1.75 in (44 mm)- 

EP cartridge developer roller 2.0 in (51 mm)— 



Lower fusing assembly roller 2.56 in (65 mm)- 



Uppcr fusing assembly roller 3.16 in (80 mm)- 



EP cartridge pholocondiictive drum 3.75 in (95 mm)- 



7-87 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Connector Location Diagrams 



AC Power 
Module 



J103 



Main 
Motor 



lip 



.£i-fe 



J331.. 



J J3 



J212 



4- 

J502 



}fp}f^w/ww/»mMmM/pw?m'^w//wjfmwMfw/, 



-J213- 



'W?f/fWW/WMWl. 



^ . 



Erase Lamp Connectors, 
J333 and J334 




g O 



J601 



Fusing Assembly 



, DC Power 
Supply Assembly 

Paper 

Control 

PCA 



High- Voltage 
Power Supply 



Figure 7-33. Printer Base Connectors (Top view) 




Figure 7-34. Printer Base Connectors (Bottom view) 



7-88 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Primary Corona 
Wire Connector 



Primary Corona 
Grid Connector 



Ground for EP-S 
Cartridge Drum J603-1 



Toner Low 
Connector 




Transfer Corona 
Connectors 
(Below Assembly) 
TB603 



Developing 
Bias Connector 
J602 



Green Wire 
(Same as 
Drum Ground) 
(Optional) 



Print Density Dial 



High- Voltage 
Power Supply 
Connector to DC 
Controller PCA 



Figure 7-35. High-Voliage Power Supply Assembly (Top view) 



To Erase 
Lamp Assembly 



To Thermistor 




J333 




Paper Exit 
Sensor 



J334 



PS 331 



\ 



J331 



^ 



To DC 

Controller 

PCA 



Figure 7-36. Exit Sensor PCA (Component side) 



7-89 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Drum Sensitivity 
Microswitches 



Registration. 

Clutch 

Solenoid 



Paper Pickup 
Clutch Solenoid 




Manual Feed ' 
Paper Sensor 



Connector to J21 3 of 
the DC Controller RCA 



Paper Out 
Sensor 



Figure 7-37. Paper Control PCA (Component side) 



7-90 



• 



• 




HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



To High-Voltage 
Power Supply 
Assembly 



Test Print 



Test 



Frame Ground/ 



Beam Detect 



(Fiber Optic Cable) 



Scanner Motor 
Laser PCA _ 



Paper Tray 

Size Microswitch 



I ■'^" I 



Connector Signal Ground Thermistor 

Bypass Switch 



J210 I209| 



3- 



J212 (DC Power Supply) T")^,^ 



^3 



SW205 



/&- 



J21 3 (Paper Control PCA) q 



J203 



J202 



SW201 

SW202 



5^ 



. To AC Power 
Module 



Lower 

Cooling 

Fan 



To the Exit 
Sensor PCA 



TB202 



Interface/Formatter 

PCA Connector TB201 



Figure 7-38. DC Controller PCA 



Optional Memory 
(HP 33449 Only) 



Font 



Cartridge 



■f 



Optional 
Memory 

■dtz 



J5 



J4 



1 



Font _ 
Cartridge 



J3 



J6 



J9 



J7 



I I Expansion 



J2 



D 



_ Parallel 
LJ I/O Port 



Serial 
I/O Port 



J8 



^ 



aa 



DC Controller 1/0 +5 vdc gnd 



Control Panel I/O 



Figure 7-39. Interface/Formatter PCA 



7-91 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Printer Wiring Diagram, HP 33440 and HP 33449 



• 








£ 5 12 _: — - w 
OD CO CD ^ ^ Q ^ 




VVYVVYVV 



____-. So 

AaAAAAAA 



ffi CD tC 01 < < ^ 






AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA. 
FRONT PANEL 



Figure 7-40. HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wiring Diagram (1 of 2) 



7-92 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



EP CARTRIDGE 




PAPER CONTROL PCA , , 

) fREGlS- 1 

+5V +24VO— .' TRATIONL 



I PAPER 
I (OUT) 



I PS302 

MANUAL 

I FEED j 

I SENSOR I CNO 



5V 



iSOLENOIDf 
i_SL302_ j 



PICKUP 
I ROLLER 
iSOL 
ISL30I 

TT 



JZllj 9 8 7 6 5 4 



# 



4/ sU s^ s j/ sL, ^t- '^4- sl^ 



I CARTRIDGES 
'SENSITIVITY 
] SWITCHES 
ISVUiOS SW30I 




STATIC TRANSFER 
TEETH CORONA DEVELOPER 

aiAS(AcaDC) 



HIGH VOLTAGE 
POWER SUPPLY 



J60l[ 8 



PRIMARY CORONA GRID 

I j / f — *tf- — c^K] 



Jgl3| 9 8 7 6 5 4 



TJ 



7 6 5 4 3 2 I 



;4, 4. 

' -- " w ■ 

u 



So § I" ^1" |o ^ 1° s; (s: , If 1 1^ (h k p 

■»-ll— |f- Iq « Io o Ii + Ix + l»- Ik |i- kc i»- l-i lo Iw lo 



2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 II la 13 14 IS 16 17 18 1920 




02O7 I 



HP 33440/HP 33449 Printer Wiring Diagram (2 of 2) 



7-93 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

DC Controller Signal Listing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449 

Table 7-52. LED 201 and SW201, 202, 203, and 205 



N^ 


■■::■.■ ■FUNC'nON ■■. . 


T,ED201 


Scanning motor at correct speed. 


SW201 


"Right" paper tray size switch. 


SW202 


*'Middle" paper tray size switch. 


SW203 


"Left" paper tray size switch. 


SW205 


Bottom cover is installed (Thermistor Bypass Switch). 



Table 7-53. Signal Listing 



Pin No. 


Color 


;:■■■-. Name....;: 


■■.:.■■:■■:■;.■.■:■ Descrqrtion v..- 


■ Conuectbr ' ' J20i ; ■' ■■ ■ 


J201 


Varies 


BD 


Beam Detect indicates the heginning of a raster scan 
line. 


Cotitieetdr J202^ '- ■-. . 


J202-01 


Red 


DSADJ 


Photodiode sensitivity adjustment bias. 


J202-02 


White 


PD 


Photodiode feedback signal to indicate laser beam power. 


J202-03 


Red 


T.DRV 


Laser diode current source, modulated by the video 
signal from the Interface/Formatter PCA. 


J202-04 


White 


+ 5 Vdc 




J202.05 


Green 


FG 


Frame Ground. 


Connector (120$- V 


J203-01 


Red 


FG- 


Scanner motor tachometer feedback. 


J203-02 


Green 


GND(FG) 




J203-03 


White 


FG+ 


Scanner motor tachometer feedback. 


J203-04 


Green 


GND(FG) 




J203-05 


Yellow 


SCNCONT 


Scanner motor speed control; signal level varies to 
maintain proper motor speed. 


J203-06 


Red 


GND 




J203-07 


White 


+24VA 


+24A Vdc 



• 



7-94 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) 



Pin No. 


Color 


Name 


Description 


Connector J205 


J205-A1 


n/a 


SG 


Signal Ground. 


J205-A2 


n/a 


PPRDY 


Printer Power Ready. 


J205-A3 


n/a 


VSREQ 


Vertical Sync Request. 


J205-A4 


n/a 


STATS 


DC Controller status. 


J205-A5 


n/a 


CBSY 


I/F PCA sending command to DC Controller. 


J205-A6 


n/a 


VSYNC 


Vertical sync pulse. 


J205-A7 


n/a 


VDO 


Video data from 1/F PCA. 


J205-A8 


n/a 


CCLK 


Command strobe from I/F PCA. 


J205-A9 


n/a 


-5V 


-5Vdc 


J205-A10 


n/a 




Not used. 


J205-B1 


n/a 


BD 


Beam Detect- Horizontal sync pulse. 


J205-B2 


n/a 


RDY 


Printer ready. 


J205-B3 


n/a 


SBSY 


DC Controller sending status to I/F PCA. 


J205-B4 


n/a 


PCLK 


Status strobe from DC Controller PCA. 


J205-B5 


n/a 


PENT 


Initiates printing operation. 


J205-B6 


n/a 


CPRDY 


I/F PCA Power Ready. 


J205-B7 


n/a 


CMND 


I/F PCA Command. 


J205-B8 


n/a 




Not used. 


J205-B9 


n/a 


+24VA 


+24A Vdc 


J205-10 


n/a 


FG 


Frame Ground 


Interfece/Formatter PCA Voltage Connectors 


TB201 


n/a 


+5V 


+ 5 Vdc 


TB202 


n/a 


GND 





7-95 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) 



Pin No. 


Color 


Name 


Description 


Connector J206 


J206-01 


Red 


+24V 


+24AVdc. 


J206-02 


Blue 


GND 24V 


Return for +24A Vdc. 


J206-03 


Yellow 


PEXP 


Preconditioning Erase T-amps signal enables the Erase 
Lamps. 


J206-04 


Pink 


FSRTH 


Fuser Thermistor resistance provides a representative 
Fuser temperature signal to the DC Controller. 


J206-05 


Blue 


GND 




J206-06 


Lt. Blue 


PDP 


Paper Delivery (Paper Exit) signal indicates that paper is 
present in the Fuser Assembly (PS331). 


J206-07 


Brown 


+ 5V 


+ 5 Vdc. 


:Cotine0tor'-«3^O7-.:. 


J207-01 


Red 


+24VA 


Lower Cooling Fan drive voltage. (+24 Vdc) 


J207-02 


White 


GND 




:Connetjtcw*. . J208-: :'':"'.■,-;:/"'" ^ 


J208-01 


Lt Blue 


FAN 


Enables the Upper Cooling Fan during printing. 


J208-02 


PinV 


FSRD 


Fusing Roller Heater Drive pulse enables the Fuser 
Bulb. Signal may only be observed -mth an oscilloscope. 


J208-03 


Blue 


GND 




J208-04 


Red 


+24VA 


+24A Vdc 


Connector J209 


J209-01 


Varies 


FG 


Frame Ground (Note: Jumper always installed.) 


J209-02 


Varies 


SG 


Signal Ground 



7-96 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) 



Pin No. 


Color 


Name 


■ ■.Description:;;^- ■■■■. 


Connector J2l6 (Test Gonnectdr) 


J210-01 


n/a 


+24VA 


+24VAVdc 


J210-02 


n/a 


TMODEO 


Test Mode Control Line 0. 


J210-03 


n/a 


TMODEl 


Test Mode Control Line 1 


J210-04 


n/a 


DBDC 


DC voltage added to developing bias when Low. 


J210-05 


n/a 


-5V 


-5Vdc 


J210-06 


n/a 


DBAC 


AC voltage added to developing bias when Low. 


J210-07 


n/a 


GND 




J210-08 


n/a 


HVION 


High- Voltage (DC) applied to Primaiy Corona when 
Low. 


J210-09 


n/a 


+ 5V 


+5Vdc 


J210-10 


n/a 


HVTON 


High voltage (DC) applied to Transfer Corona when Low. 


J210-11 


n/a 


+ 3.2V 


+ 3.2Vdc 


J210-12 


n/a 


TPA 


Selects a test pattern to be printed with TPB and 
TSTPTE. 


J210-13 


n/a 


TSTPT 


Low when the TEST PRINT switch is pressed. 


J210-14 


n/a 


TPB 


See TPA. 


J210-15 


n/a 


RDYINH 


Printer forced ready when Low. 


J210-16 


n/a 


TSTPTE 


See TPA. 


J210-17 


n/a 


LPCK 


Laser forced to operate at a power level selected by 
CSNTl & CSNT2 when Low. 


J210-18 


n/a 


CSNTl 


Laser power selected with CSNT2. 


J210-19 


n/a 


SCNON 


Scanner motor starts when L. 


J210-20 


n/a 


CSNT2 


See CSNTl. 



7-97 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) 



Pin No. 


Color 


Name; 


Description: ^": : 


■ Connector' 'J21I' '- 


J2 11-01 


Lt. Blue 


HVTON 


Enables the Transfer Corona circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled, 
Vdc enabled). 


J211-02 


Pink 


HVRST 


High-voltage reset. 


J211-03 


Gray 


HVION 


Enables the Primary Corona circuitry (+18 Vdc disabled, 
Vdc enabled). 


J211-04 


Violet 


DBAC 


Enables the developer ac bias circuitry (+18 Vdc 
disabled, Vdc enabled). 


J211-05 


Yellow 


TSENS 


Toner Sensor level provides a voltage level to the DC 
Controller representative of the amount of toner present 
in the EP-S Cartridge. 


J211-06 


Orange 


DBDC 


Enables the developer dc bias circuitry (+18 Vdc 
disabled, Vdc enabled). 


J211-07 


Blue 


GND 




J211-08 


Red 


+24 Vdc 




■ Connector ■J212'::: ~- ■ . . 


J212-01 


Blue 


GND 




J212-02 


Blue 


GND 




J212-03 


Brown 


+ 5V 


+5 Vdc 


J212-04 


Brown 


+5V 


+ 5 Vdc 


J212-05 


Gray 


-5V 


-5 Vdc 


J212-06 


Violet 


RESET 


Initializes the microprocessors on the DC Controller 
PCA. 


J212-07 


Lt. Blue 


REMOTE 


Enables the +24 Vdc power supplies on the DC Power 
Supply/Main Motor Driver PCA. Signal may only be 
observed with an oscilloscope. 


J212-08 


Pink 


A 


Main Motor Drive signal. 


J212-09 


Orange 


A 


Main Motor Drive signal. 


J212-10 


Yellow 


B 


Main Motor Drive signal. 


J212-11 


White 


B 


Main Motor Drive signal. 


J2 12-12 


Blue 


GND 




J212-13 


Pink 


+24VB 


+ 24B Vdc 


J212-14 


Red 


+24VA 


+24AVdc 



7-98 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
Table 7-53. Signal Listing (continued) 



Pin No, 


Color 


Name 


Description 


Connector J213 


J2 13-01 


Orange 


CSENSl 


EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity switches indicate the 
sensitivity and the presence of the EP-S Cartridge. 


J213-02 


Pink 


CSENS2 


EP-S Cartridge Sensitivity switches indicate the 
sensitivity and the presence of the EP-S Cartridge. 


J213-03 


Violet 


REGD 


Registration Drive signal enables the Registration 
Solenoid (SL302) to advance paper through the 
Registration Rollers. 


J213-04 


Lt. Blue 


CPUD 


Control Pickup enables the Paper Pickup Solenoid 
(SL301). 


J213-05 


Red 


+ 24V 


+24AVdc 


J213-06 


Blue 


GND 




J213-07 


Brown 


+5V 


+ 5Vdc 


J213-08 


White 


PEMP 


Paper Out indicates the absence of paper in the paper 
tray. Signal is low when paper is not detected (PS301). 


J213-09 


Yellow 


MPFS 


Manual Paper Feed Sensor signal indicates the presence 
of paper in the manual area of printer (PS302). 



7-99 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBiNED SERVICE MANUAL 

Signal Timing Chart, HP 33440 and HP 33449 



?i>- 




' 



I 



± 



4 



^ 






+ 



4_ 



+ 



+ 



* + 



+ 



T 



i 



1 



Figure 7-41. HP 33440/HP 33449 Signa! Timing Chart 



7-100 



8 



8-1. HOW TO USE THE PARTS LISTS 8-3 

8-2. PARTS LIST 8-4 

8-3. PARTS INDEX 8-51 



Main Assemblies 8-4 

8-lA. External Covers - HP 33440 8-6 

8-lB. External Covers - HP 33449 8-7 

8-2A. Upper Main Body - HP 33440 8-9 

8-2B. Upper Main Body - HP 33449 8-12 

8-3A. Lower Main Body - HP 33440 8-15 

8-3B. Lower Main Body - HP 33449 8-18 

8-4A. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan - HP 33440 8-21 

8-4B. AC Power Module and Upper Cooling Fan - HP 33449 8-22 

8-5. Pressure Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-24 

8-6. Hinge Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-25 

8-7. Control Panel Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-26 

8-8. Main Motor and Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-27 

8-9. Feed Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-28 

8-10. Mirror Shutter Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-29 

8-1 lA. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover - HP 33440 8-30 

8-llB. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover - HP 33449 8-31 

8-12. Main Body Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-32 

8-13. Feed RoUer Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-34 

8-14. Feed Guide Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-35 

8-15. Re^stration Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-36 

8-16. Delivery Coupler Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-37 

8-17. Delivery Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-38 

8-18. Laser Scanning Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-39 

8-19. Erase Lamp Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-40 

8-20. Transfer Corona Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-41 

8-21. Fusing Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-42 

8-22. Paper Control PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-45 

8-23. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-46 

8-24. DC Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-47 

8-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



8-25. DC Controller PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-48 

8-26. Interface/Formatter PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-49 

8-27. Control Panel Cable Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 8-50 



8-0. COMMON HARDWARE 8-3 

8-lA. External Covers - HP 33440 8-6 

8- IB. External Covers - HP 33449 8-8 

8-2A. UPPER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 8-11 

8-2B. UPPER MAIN BODY - HP 33449 8-14 

8-3A. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 8-17 

8-3B. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33449 8-20 

8-4A. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN - HP 33440 8-23 

8-4B. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN 8-23 

8-5. PRESSURE ASSEMBLY 8-24 

8-6A. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 8-25 

8-6B. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33449 8-25 

8-7A. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 8-26 

8-7B. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY - HP 33449 8-26 

8-8. MAIN MOTOR AND DRIVE ASSEMBLY 8-27 

8-9. FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY 8-28 

8-10. MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 8-29 

3- 11 A. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33440 8-30 

S-llB. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33449 8-31 

8-12. MAIN BODY ASSEMBLY 8-33 

8-13. FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 8-34 

8-14. FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 8-35 

8-15. REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 8-36 

8-16. DELIVERY COUPLER ASSEMBLY 8-37 

8-17. DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 8-38 

8-18. LASER SCANNING ASSEMBLY 8-39 

8-19. ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 8-40 

8-20. TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 8-41 

8-21. FUSING ASSEMBLY 8-44 

8-22. PAPER CONTROL PCA 8-45 

8-23. HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 8-46 

8-24. DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 8-47 

8-25. DC CONTROLLER PCA 8-48 

8-26. INTERFACE/FORMATTER PCA - HP 33440 AND HP 33449 8-49 

8-27. CONTROL PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTOR CABLES .... 8-50 

PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 8-51 



m 



8-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies and their component parts of the HP 
33440 and HP 33449 printers. Each figure is followed by a table which lists the item number for 
each part given in the illustration, the associated part number for the item, the quantity required, 
any special notes, and the description of that part. While looking for a part number, pay special 
attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number is for the 
correct type of machine. 

Part numbers with no indicator in the Notes column are stocked and can be ordered through 
Hewlett-Packard's Support Material Organization (SMO). Parts marked with an "S" in the Notes 
column are special order parts which can be "hotlined" through SMO but have an eight-week lead 
time. Parts that have no reference designator or part number are not field-replaceable and cannot 
be ordered through SMO. 

An alphabetical index referencing all part numbers is included at the end of the chapter 
(Section 8-3), 

The following table identifies common hardware used in the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers: 



EXAMPLE 





@)22> 





Table 8-0. Table 8-0. COMMON HARDWARE 



DESCRIPTION 



Coated (black) pan-head Phillips 
machine screw. 



Plated (silver-colored) pan-head 
Phillips machine screw. 



Coated (black) washer-head Phillips 
machine screw. 



Plated (silver-colored) washer-head 
Phillips machine screw. 



Coated (black) self-tapping Phillips 
screw for plastic. 



Plated (brass-colored) Phillips 
shoulder screw. 



Plated (silver-colored) Phillips screw 
with captive star washer. 



PART NUMBER 



Use plated screws. 
(See below) 



M3x6 - 0515-1896 
M3x8 - 0515-1895 
M4x6 - 0515-1876 
M4x8 - 0515-1912 



M3x6 - XB6-7300-609CN 
M3x8 - XB6-7300-809CN 



M3x6 - XA9-0267-OOOCN 



M3x6 - XB4-7300-609CN 
M4xlO - XB4-7401-009CN 



XA9-0342-000CN 



XA9-0389-000CN 



8-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Delivery Coupler Assembly 
Figure 8-16 



Delivery Assembly 
Figure 8-17 



Erase Lamp Assembly 
Figure 8-19 



Shutter Asserr^biy 
Figure 8-10 



Paper Control PGA 
Figure 8-22 



Control Panel Assembly 
Figure 8-7 



Control Panel Cable 
Assembly Figure 8-27 

DC Pow/er Supply Assembly 
Figure 8-24 




DC Controller PCA 
Figure 8-25 



Upper Cooling Fan 
Figure 8-4 



_ AC Power Module Assembly 
Figure 8-4 



Main Assemblies (1 of 2) 



8-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Fusing Assembly 
Figure 8-21 



Feed Guide Assembly 
Figure 8-14 



Exit Sensor PCA 
Figure 8-21 



High Voltage Connector Assembly 
Figure 8-23 



High Voltage Power Supply 

Assembly 

Figure 8-23 



Pressure Assembly 

Figure 8-5 

Transfer Corona Assembly 
Figure 8-20 




Laser Scanning Assembly 
Figure 8-18 



Main Body Assembly 

Figure e-1 2 



Paper Tray 
Figure 8-11 




Feed Roller Assembly 
Figure 8-13 



Registration Assembly 
Figure 8-15 



lain Assemblies (2 of 2) 



8-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-1 A. External Covers - HP 33440 





Table 8-1A. EXTERNAL COVERS - HP 33440 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


2 


RA1-4231-000CN 






PANEL, FRONT LOWER 


3 


RA1-4232-000CN 






PANEL, FRONT UPPER 


4 


^3t3^:i2%^oega><: 




S 


PANEL, RIGHT flf^l - Zo-jy^ooo c^J 


5 


RA1-4234-000CN 






PANEL, LEFT 


7 


RA1-4235-000CN 






RELEASE BUTTON 


8 


RS1-2149-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


9 


RF1-0975^000CN 






COVER, BOTTOM 



8-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



^ 




■igare S-1B, Exisri^aE Coweirs - HP 3344-S 



8-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 8-1B. EXTERNAL COVERS - HP 33449 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RF1-2572-000CN 






PANEL, FRONT 


2 


RF1-2574-000CN 






PANEL, TOP 


3 


RF1-2575-000CN 






PANEL, RIGHT 


4 


RF1-2576-000CN 






PANEL, LEFT 


5 


RA1-8278-000CN 






RELEASE BUTTON 


7 


RF1-2577-OO0CN 






COVER, BOTTOM 


9 


RA1-8290-000CN 






GUIDE, FONT CARTRIDGE 


56 


RA1-8273-000CN 






PANEL, BOTTOM COVER 


57 


RA1-8284-000CN 






PANEL, MEMORY COVER 


58 


RA1-8285-000CN 






PANEL, TEST COVER 


59 


RA1-8293-00OCN 






GUARD, I/O CONNECTOR 



8-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




14 4 




figure 8-2A. Upper Main Bodj,? - HP 33440 (1 of 2) 



8-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure ^=2A. Opncr Main Body - HP 33440 (2 ol 



8-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Table 8-2A. UPPER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RA1-4019-000CN 






HOLDER, MAGNET 


2 


RA1-4021-000CN 






DEFLECTOR PAWL ASSEMBLY 


3 


RA1-4290-000CN 






TRAY, UPPER REAR OUTPUT 


4 


RA1-4292-000CN 






PANEL, REAR DELIVERY 


5 


IlAl-4025-OOOCN 


2 


S 


SPRING, LEAP 


6 


HA1-4034-0O0CN 






SPRING A, GROUNDING 


7 


RA1-4035-000CN 






SPRING B, GROUNDING 


8 


RA1-4036-0O0CN 






ARM, CONNECTOR 


9 


Rri-0947-OOOCN 






GUIDE, EP-S CARTRIDGE 


10 


RA1-4038-000CN 






COVER, FUSER INSULATING 


11 


RA1-4042-O0OCN 




s 


SHAFT, LOCK 


12 


RA1-4030-000CN 






PLATE, RIGHT HINGE BRACKET 


13 


RA1-4033-000CN 






PLATE, LEFT HINGE BRACKET 


14 


EA1.4045-020CN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


15 


RA1-4046-000CN 






LEVER, INTERLOCK 


16 


RA1-4047-000CN 






ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE 


17 


RA1-4048-000CN 






COVER, CONNECTOR ARM 


19 


RS1-2101-00OCN 






SPRING, TORSION 


22 


IlFl-0926-OOOCN 




s 


SPRING, RIGHT, MIRROR 


23 


RP1-0977-000CN 






PANEL, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 


24 


RF1-0929-000CN 




s 


SPRING, LEFT, MIRROR 


25 


RF1-0985-000CN 






TRAY, LOWER REAR OUTPUT 


26 


RA1-4294-000CN 






COVER, LOWER DELIVERY 


27 


RA1-4079-000CN 




s 


COVER, LAMP ASSEMBLY 


31 


RG0-0052-OO0CN 






MIRROR ASSEMBLY 


32 


RS1-2152-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


33 


RA1-5258-000CN 




s 


SHAFT, SPRING 


34 


RA1-5361-00OCN 






LATCH 


35 


RA1-5362-000CN 






SPRING, LEAF 


36 


RA1-5363-000CN 






SHAFT, LATCH 


37 


RA1-5256-000CN 




s 


PLATE, LEFT LOCK 


38 


RA1-5257-000CN 




s 


PLATE, RIGHT LOCK 



8-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




ir Mmn B 



8-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure S-2B„ Upper Main Body - HP 33449 (2 of 2) 



8-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Table 8-2B. UPPER MAIN BODY - HP 33449 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


2 


RA1-4021-000CN 






DEFLECTOR PAWL ASSEMBLY 


3 


RA1-4290-000CN 






TRAY, UPPER REAR OUTPUT 


4 


RA1-8275-000CN 






PANEL, REAR DELIVERY 


5 


RA1-4025-OOOCN 




S 


SPRING, LEAF 


6 


RA1-4034-000CN 






SPRING A, GROUNDING 


7 


RA1-4035-000CN 






SPRING B, GROUNDING 


8 


RA1-4036-000CN 






ARM, CONNECTOR 


9 


RF1-0947-000CN 






GUIDE, EP-S CARTRIDGE 


10 


RA1-4038-000CN 






COVER, FUSER INSULATING 


11 


RA1-4042-000CN 




s 


SHAFT, LOCK 


12 


RA1-4030-000CN 






PLATE, RIGHT HINGE BRACKET 


13 


RA1-4033-000CN 






PLATE, LEFT HINGE BRACKET 


14 


RA1-4045-020CN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


15 


RA1-4O46-000CN 






LEVER, INTERLOCK 


16 


RA1-4047-000CN 






ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE 


17 


RA1-4048-000CN 






COVER, CONNECTOR ARM 


19 


RS1-2101-000CN 






SPRING, TORSION 


22 


RF1-0926-000CN 




s 


SPRING, RIGHT, MIRROR 


23 


RF1-2579-000CN 






PANEL, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 


24 


RF1-0929-000CN 




s 


SPRING, LEFT, MIRROR 


25 


RF1-2580-000CN 






TRAY, LOWER REAR OUTPUT 


26 


RA1-8287-000CN 






COVER, LOWER DELIVERY 


27 


RA1-4O79-000CN 


2 


s 


COVER, LAMP ASSEMBLY 


31 


RG0-0052-000CN 






MIRROR ASSEMBLY 


32 


RS1-2152-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


33 


RA1-5258-000CN 




s 


SHAFT, SPRING 


37 


RA1-5256-000CN 




s 


PLATE, LEFT LOCK 


38 


RA1-5257-000CN 




s 


PLATE, RIGHT LOCK 


41 


RA1-8276-000CN 






COVER, UPPER DELIVERY 



^p. 



8-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



SEE FIGURE 8-26 




Fagure 8-3A. Lower Mam Body - HP 33440 (1 of 2) 



8-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




8-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



# 





Table 8-3A. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33440 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIFHON 


1 


RA1-4114-000CN 




S 


PLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNTING 


2 


RA1-4115-050CN 




s 


TERMINAL 


3 


RA1-4282-000CN 




s 


PLATE, SERVICE COVER 


4 


RA1-4283-000CN 






KNOB 


5 


RA1-4132-000CN 




s 


GUIDE, FRONT, D-RAM PCA 


6 


RA1-4133-O00CN 




s 


GUIDE, REAR, D-RAM PCA 


7 


RA1-4134-000CN 




s 


GUIDE, RIGHT, EXPANSION PCA 


8 


RA1-4135-O00CN 




s 


GUIDE, LEFT, EXPANSION PCA 


9 


RA1-4285-000CN 






PANEL, FONT CARTRIDGE 


11 


RA1-4138-000CN 






GUIDE, UPPER, CARTRIDGE 


12 


RA1-4139-000CN 






GUIDE, LOWER, CARTRIDGE 


14 


RA1-4296-000CN 






PLATE, D-RAM 


15 


XA9-0342-000CN 


10 




SCREW, STEPPED M3 


17 


WT2-0250-000CN 




s 


CLIP, CABLE 


18 


RH2-5053-000CN 






FIBER OPTIC CABLE 


19 


RF1-0975-000CN 






COVER, BOTTOM 


20 


RA1-4113-000CN 






FOOT 


20A 


0515-0055 






SCREW 


21 


RH7-1056-000CN 






FAN, LOWER COOLING 


22 


RA1-4146-050CN 




s 


PLATE, TERMINAL 


23 


RA1-4147-000CN 




s 


SHIELD, DC PWR SUPPLY CABLE 


24 


RA1-4148-0OOCN 






SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 


25 


RA1-4149-00OCN 






SUPPORT, PANEL A 


26 


RA1-4150-000CN 






SUPPORT, PANEL B 


27 


RA1-4161-000CN 




s 


MOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


28 


RA1-4162-000CN 






LEVER, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


29 


RA1-4637-000CN 






SHAFT, TRAY SIZE LEVER 


30 


VS3-0190-003CN 




s 


CONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE 


31 


WS3-0976-000CN 




s 


CONTACT 


32 


VS3-0190-004CN 




s 


CONNECTOR, 4P FEMALE 


33 


WS3-1204-000CN 




s 


CONTACT 


34 


RH2-5051-000CN 






CONNECTOR 


35 


RA1-4167-000CN 






INSULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASS'Y 


36 


RA1-4168-000CN 






INSULATOR, RIGHT, FUSING ASSY 


37 


RA1-4170-000CN 






PLATE, FRONT SUPPORT 


38 


RA1-4638-00QCN 




s 


COVER, LEVER 


39 


VS9-0013-025CN 




s 


CAP, SERIAL I/O DUST 


40 


WS9-0104-OOOCN 




s 


CAP, CENTRONICS I/O DUST 


41 


SA4-6202-000CN 




s 


PLATE, OPTIONAL I/O DUST 


42 


RA1-4317-00OCN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


43 


RA1-5423-000CN 




s 


INSULATION SHEET 


44 


RA1-5489-000CN 




s 


PLATE 


45 


RA1-5490-000CN 




s 


STAND, FAN MOUNT 



8-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



SEE FIGURE 8-26 




Figure 8-3B. Lower iWain Body - HP 33449 (1 of 2) 



8-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figsure 8-3B. Lower Msia Body - HP 33449 (2 of 2) 



8-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Table 8-3B. LOWER MAIN BODY - HP 33449 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


IlAl-4114-OOOCN 




S 


PLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNTING 


2 


RA1-4115-050CN 




s 


TERMINAL 


3 


RA1-6047-O00CN 




s 


PLATE, SERVICE COVER 


5 


RA1-8292-O00CN 




s 


GUIDE, DRAM REAR 


6 


RA1-8289-O0OCN 




s 


GUIDE, DRAM CENTER, 


7 


RA1-4134-O00CN 




s 


GUIDE, RIGHT, EXPANSION PCA 


8 


RA1-4135-000CN 




s 


GUIDE, LEFT, EXPANSION PGA 


11 


RA1-8302-000CN 






GUIDE, FONT CARTRIDGE 


14 


RA1-8299-O00CN 






PLATE, DRAM ACCESS 


15 


XA9-0342-000CN 


10 




SCREW, STEPPED M3 


17 


WT2-0250-OOOCN 




s 


CLIP, CABLE 


18 


RH2-5108-000CN 






FIBER OPTIC CABLE 


19 


RF1-2577-000CN 






COVER, BOTTOM 


20 


RA1-4113-000CN 






FOOT 


20A 


0515-0055 






SCREW 


21 


RH7-1056-000CN 






FAN, LOWER COOLING 


22 


RA1-4146-050CN 




s 


PLATE, TERMINAL 


23 


RA1-4147-0O0CN 




s 


SHIELD, DC PWR SUPPLY CABLE 


24 


RA1-8295-000CN 






SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 


27 


RA1-4161-0O0CN 




s 


MOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


28 


RA1-4162-000CN 






LEVER, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


29 


RA1-4637-000CN 






SHAFT, TRAY SIZE LEVER 


30 


VS3-0190-003CN 




s 


CONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE 


31 


WS3-1204-0O0CN 




s 


CONTACT 


32 


VS3-0190-004CN 




s 


CONNECTOR, 4P FEMALE 


33 


WS3-1204-000CN 




s 


CONTACT 


34 


RH2-5051-000CN 






CONNECTOR 


35 


RA1-4167-000CN 






INSULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASST 


36 


RA1-4168-000CN 






INSULATOR, RIGHT, FUSING ASS'Y 


37 


RA1-4170-000CN 






PLATE, FRONT SUPPORT 


38 


RA1-4638-00OCN 




s 


COVER, LEVER 


39 


VS9-0013-025CN. 




s 


CAP, SERIAL I/O DUST 


40 


WS9-0104-000CN 




s 


CAP, CENTRONICS I/O DUST 


41 


SA4-6202-000CN 




s 


PLATE, OPTIONAL I/O DUST 


42 


RA1-4317-000CN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


43 


RA1-5423-000CN 




s 


INSULATION SHEET 


44 


RA1-5489-000CN 




s 


PLATE 


45 


RA1-5490-000CN 




s 


STAND, FAN MOUNT 


46 


RA1-8011-O00CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING 


49 


RAl-5403-OXOCN^ 




s 


MOUNT, SWITCH LEVER 


50 


RAl-5404-OOdCN / 




s 


PLATE, LEVER 



ooocrJ 



8-20 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





er Cooling Fan - HP 3344C 



8-21 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-4B. AC Power fyiodule snd Upper Cooling Fan - HP 33440 and HP 3344« 



8-22 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Table 8-4A. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN - HP 33440 



REF 


EART PffifMBE 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG9-0205-000CN 






AC POWER MODULE 100/1 15V 


1 


RG9-0206-000CN 






AC POWER MODULE 220/240V 


2 


RA1-4082-O00CN 






MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 


3 


RG1-1753-000CN 






OZONE FILTER KIT 


8 


RH7-1074-000CN 






FAN, UPPER COOLING 


10 


RA1-4083-000CN 




S 


DUCT, EXHAUST 


11 


RA1-5402-000CN 




s 


HOOD, EXHAUST 


12 


RA1-5424-000CN 


3 


s 


CLIP, HOOD 


13 


See note below 






POWER CORD 


Table 8-4B. AC POWER MODULE AND UPPER COOLING FAN^ 


REF 


:v-pvirriiiM^R . 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG9-0205-000CN 






AC PWR MOD. 100/1 15V (HP 33440) 


1 


RG9-0206-000CN 






AC PWR MOD. 220/240V (HP 33440) 


1 


RG9-0319-000CN 






AC PWR MOD. 100/1 15V (HP 33449) 


1 


RG9-0325-060CN 






AC PWR MOD. 220/240V (HP 33449) 


2 


RF1-2133-000CN 






MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 


3 


RF1-2130-000CN 




. 


OZONE FILTER 


8 


RH7-1074-000GN 






FAN, UPPER COOLING 


10 


RA1-7361-000CN 




S 


DUCT, EXHAUST 


11 


RA1-7362-000CN 




s 


HOOD, EXHAUST 


12 


RA1-5424-000CN 


3 


s 


CLIP, HOOD 


13 


See note below 






POWER CORD 



^Use this table for earlier HP 33440 printers without a -user-replaceable ozone filter. 

'■^Use this table for both the HP 33449 and those HP 33440's equipped with a user-replaceable 
ozone filter. 

Note: Refer to the Computer Users Catalog from DMK for HP power cord ordering information. 
A portion of this catalog is reproduced below. 



Power cords 












J 


Part no. 


8120-134S Black" 
8120-1378 Gray" 


8120-1351* 


8120-1369* 


8120-1689* 


8120-2104* 


Plug 


A 


Q 


© 


© 


€D> 


Voltage rating 


12SV 


250V 


250V 


250V 


250V 


*CWor Irom HP sales olfice. 




"These power cords are 2.4m (7.S (t.) long. 









Power Cord Configurations 



8-23 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Mi'l)Hi-ooocH 



R^i- SSlT-Ooocj^ 



R/^l-SSl^'CHiOC^ 




RAi-'^i^- 



c^cd 



Figure 8-5. Pressure Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 





Table 8-5. 


PRESSURE ASSEMBLY 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


QIY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0935-000CN 


1 




PRESSURE ASSEMBLY 



8-24 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBiNED SERVICE MANUAL 




igyre B-S= Hinge Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-6A. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 



REF 


PAirP NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESeRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0969-000CN 


1 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT 


2 


RG1-1153-000CN 


1 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT 


4 


RS1-2110-000CN 


2 




SPRING, HINGE ASSEMBLY 



Table 8-6B. HINGE ASSEMBLY - HP 33449 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESGRIPTION 


1 


RG1-1435-000CN 


1 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT 


2 


RG1-1436-000CN 


1 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT 


4 


RS1-2110-O0OCN 


2 




SPRING, HINGE ASSEMBLY 



8-25 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-7. Control Panel Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-7 A. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY - HP 33440 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


lA 


RG1-0959-000CN 


1 




CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 


2 


RF1-1383-000CN 


1 




CONTROL PANEL OVERLAY 



Table 8-7B. CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY ■ HP 33449 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


IB 


RG1-1974-000CN 


1 




CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 



8-26 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Ism Motor and Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-8. MAIN MOTOR AND DRFVE ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RF1-0998-OOOCN 


1 




COVER, GEAR 


2 


RH7-1048-000CN 


1 




MOTOR, MAIN DRIVE 


3 


RG1-0943-O0OCN 


1 




MAIN MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY 



8-27 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Figure 8-9, Feed Drive Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-9. FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBBE 


QTY 


NOTES 


■ -. ; -.- DEseRipnoN;; ^ ' : ^ ^ : ' " 


1 


RG1-0934-000CN 


1 




FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY 



8-28 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-10. Mirror Shutter Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 
Table 8-10. MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0929-00QGN 


:.-: 1- '■ 




MIRROR SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 




8-29 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




• 



Figure 8-1 1A, Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover 



Table 8-11 A. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33440 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


92295B 






TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5xllin) 


1 


92295C 






TRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5xl4in) 


1 


92295D 






TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) 


1 


92295E 






TRAY, EXECUTIVE SIZE (182x257mm) 


1 


92295F 






TRAY, ENVELOPE 


2 


92295R 






COVER, INPUT TRAY 


2 


92295S 






COVER, LEGAL TRAY 



• 



8-30 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-11B. Paper Tray Assembly and Top Cover - HP 33449 
Table 8-1 IB. PAPER TRAY ASSEMBLY AND TOP COVER - HP 33449 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


qiY 


NOTES 


DESGRIPPON 




92297B 






TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5x1 lin) 




92297C 






TRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5xl4in) 




92297D 






TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) 




92297E 






TRAY, EXECUTIVE SIZE (182x257mm) 




92297F 






TRAY, ENVELOPE 


2 


92297R 






COVER, INPUT TRAY 


2 


92297S 






COVER, LEGAL TRAY 



8-31 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-12. Main Body Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



8-32 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



^ 





Table 8-12. 


MAIN BODY ASSEMBLY 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


mi 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RA1-3821-000CN 


1 




BLOCK, MAIN BODY (HP 33440) ^3$^ 


.=r~~ 


^^kk^^^m^eQeH—- 


-^-^^^ 


■a— " S5C-— " 


:BLOel^=l^0>HBO^y^(m»-^ISa^S^--~ 


2 


RA1-3822-000CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING A 


3 


RA1-3823-000CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING B (HP 33440) 


3 


RA1-5479-000CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING B (HP 33449) 


4 


RA1-3824-000CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING C 


5 


RA1-3825-000CN 




s 


GUIDE, CASSETTE LEFT 


6 


RA1-3826-000CN 






GUIDE, CASSETTE RIGHT 


7 


RA1-3827-000CN 






ARM, LASER SHUTTER 


8 


RA1-3828-040CN 






ARM, PAPER SENSING 


9 


RA1-3829-000CN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


10 


RA1-3830-000CN 




s 


SHAFT, HOOK 


11 


RA1-3831-000CN 






HOOK, LEFT COVER LATCH 


12 


RA1-3832-000CN 






HOOK, RIGHT COVER LATCH 


13 


RA1-3833-000CN 






GUIDE, LEFT COVER LATCH HOOK 


14 


RA1-3834-00OCN 






GUIDE, RIGHT COVER LATCH HOOK 


15 


RA1-3835-0OOCN 






LIFTER, LEFT 


16 


RA1-3836-000CN 






LIFTER, RIGHT 


17 


RA1-3837-000CN 






GUIDE, AUXILIARY 


18 


RA1-3838-000CN 






NUT, SCANNER, A 


19 


RA1-3839-000CN 






NUT, SCANNER, B 


20 


RA1-3864-000CN 






GUIDE, UPPER TRANSFER 


22 


RA1-4320-000CN 




s 


COVER, LASER SHUTTER 


23 


RA1-4321-000CN 




s 


SPRING, LEAF 


24 


RA1-4319-000CN 




s 


PLATE, BLOCK SUPPORT 


27 


RA1-4318-000CN 




s 


PLATE, GROUNDING 


29 


RS1-0105-OOOCN 






GEAR, 19 TOOTH 


30 


RS1-0106-000CN 






GEAR, 57 TOOTH 


31 


RS1-2095-000CN 






SPRING, TORSION 


32 


RS1-2096-000CN 






SPRING, TORSION 


33 


RS1-2097-OOOCN 






SPRING, TENSION 


34 


RS1-2112-000CN 




s 


SPRING, TENSION 


35 


XG3-6010-303CN 






BEARING, BALL 


36 


RF1-2118-O00CN 






RESISTOR ASS'Y, 15 MOHM 1/4W 


37 


RF1-0841-O00CN 






RESISTOR, 1 KOHM 1/4W 


38 


RF1-0988-0O0CN 






SHAFT, DRUM DRIVE 


40 


XA9-0375-000CN 


4 




SCREW, M3x25 


41 


RA1-5396-000CN 


n/a 


s 


WASHER, SHIM 




8-33 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

f — ' ' _— 





i^ 



Figure 8-13. Feed Roller Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 3344S 
Table 8-13. FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 



I REF 



PART NUMBER 



RG1-0931-060CN 



NOTES 



DESCRIPTION 



FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 




8-34 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-14. Feed Guide Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-14. FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0938-000CN 


1 




FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 


9 


RF1-1177-000CN 


1 




CLEANER 



8-35 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-15. Registration Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-15. REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESGRIFHON 


1 


RG1-0932-120CN 


1 




REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 


2 


RF1-1145-020CN 


1 




PAD, SEPARATION 


5 


RA1-3871-000CN 


2 




SPRING, TENSION 



8-36 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-1S. Delivery Coupler Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-16. DELIVERY COUPLER ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESGRIPnON 


1 


RG1-0967-OO0CN 


1 




DELIVERY COUPLER ASSEMBLY 



8-37 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-17. Deiivery Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-17. DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0945-000CN 


1 


DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 



m^ 



8-38 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBrNED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-1B. Laser Scannssig Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-18. LASER SCANNING ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PAKT NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


. ■„■ BESgjUipipNH;;;,;:-:; .;:■;;' 


1 


RG0-0050-030CN 


1 




LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY 


2 


RH2-5053-O00CN 


1 




FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33440) 


2 


RH2-5108-000CN 


1 




FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33449) 



8-39 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-19. Erase Lamp Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33^ 
Table 8-19. ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


qm 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0946-000CN 


1 




ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 



m 



8-40 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-20= Traosfer Corooa Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-20. TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTIGN 


1 


RG1-0933-060CN 


1 




TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 




8-41 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-21. Fusing Assembly (1 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



8-42 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-21. Fusing Assembly (2 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



8-43 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-21. Fusing Assembly (3 of 3) - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-21. FUSING ASSEMBLY 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPliON 


1 


RG1-0939-230CN 




New 


FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/115V) 


1 


83440-69003 




Rebuilt 


FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/115V) 


1 


RG1-0940-000CN 




New 


FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240V) 


1 


33440-69009 




Rebuilt 


FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240V) 


5 


RA1-3942-000CN 






ARM, EXIT SENSOR 


25 


RS1-2104-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


26 


RS1-2105-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


21 


RS1-2109-000CN 






SPRING, TENSION 


33 


RG1-0719-000CN 






THERMISTOR/EXIT SENSOR PCA 


44 


RF1-0842-000CN 






THERMOPROTECTOR 


49 


RG1-0966-030CN 






PAD, FUSER CLEANING 


50 


RA1-3971-000CN 


4 




PAWL (CLAW), SEPARATION 


51 


RS1-2106-000CN 


4 




SPRING, PAWL TENSION 



8-44 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





Figure 8-22. Paper Control PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 



Table 8-22. PAPER CONTROL PCA 



REF 


pmr ^f^J^vIBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0718-000CN 


1 




PAPER CONTROL PCA 


2 


RA1-4599-000CN 


1 




COVER, PAPER CONTROL PCA 



8-45 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



I 




REDF- 



Figure 8-23. High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 
Table 8-23. HIGH-VOLTAGE PO WER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 



RG1-0936-110CN 



DESemFlTON 



HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 
ASSEMRT.V 



8-46 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




m 




m 



Figure 8-24. DC Power Supply Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 
Table 8-24. DC POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 


REF 


PART NUMBER 


M^ 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-1394-020CN 


1 




DC POWER SUPPLY, 100/115V 
(HP 33440) 


1 


IlGl-1395-OOOCN 


1 




DC POWER SUPPLY, 240V 
(HP 33440) 


1 


RG1-1975-000CN 






DC POWER SUPPLY, 100/115V 
(HP 33449) 


1 


RG1-1977-000CN 






DC POWER SUPPLY, 240V (HP 33449) 


2 


WD1-0222-000CN 


1 




DC POWER FUSE 250V/3.15A 


2 


WD1-0224-0O0CN 


1 




DC POWER FUSE 125V/6.3A 



8-47 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





^ 



m. 



E-igure 8-25. 



Table 8-25. DC CONTROLLER PCA 



^^*REF. 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


BESCRIPTION 


1 


RG1-0710-090CN 


1 


New- 


DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33440) 


1 


33440-69002 


1 


Rebuilt 


DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33440) 


1 


RG1-1969-000CN 


1 


New 


DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33449) 


1 


33449-69002 


1 


Rebuilt 


DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33449) 



8-48 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-26. Interface/Formatter PCA - HP 33440 and HP 33449 
Table 8-26. INTERFACE/FORMATTER PCA - HP 33440 AND HP 33449 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


NOTES 


DESCRIPTION 


1 


SG4-6212-050CN 


1 


New 


INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) 


1 


33440-69001 


1 


Rebuilt 


INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) 


1 


33449-60001 


1 


New 


FORMATTER PCA (HP 33449) 


1 


33449-69001 


1 


Rebuilt 


FORMATTER PCA (HP 33449) 



8-49 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Figure 8-27. Control Panel Cable Assembly - HP 33440 and HP 33449 

Table 8-27. CONTROL PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTOR 

CABLES 



m 



REF 


PART NUMBER 


QTY 


■NOTES ^ 


.■"■■v-^::....BESCRIPTION:.:;:::::"^:: :■..:■; -. ■ 


2 


SG4-6271-000CN 






PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY (HP 33440) 


2 


RG1-2307-000CN 






PANEL CABLE ASSEMBLY (HP 33449) 


4 


RG1-0905-OOOCN 






AC POWER MODUT,E/DC POWER 
SUPPLY CARLE 


5 


RG1-0906-OOOCN 






HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 
CABLE 


5 


RG1-0907-OOOCN 






FUSING ASSEMBLY CABLE 


1 


RG1-0908-000CN 






LASER/SCANNING CABLE 
ASSEMBLY 


5 


RG1-0912-000CN 






AC POWER MODUT.E/ 
DC CONTROLLER CABLE 


3 


VS1-0440-002CN 






JUMPER: SIGNAL GND TO FRAME 
GROUND 



8-50 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



This alphabetical index references all Part Numbers. Part Numbers with initial numerics are 
listed first. HP 33440-specific parts have a single asterisk (*) following the Part Number. HP 
33449-specific parts have two asterisks (**) following the Part Number. If a referenced Part 
Number appears in both the A and B versions of a table or figure, no A or B is given with the 
table or figure number; otherwise, an A or B will follow the table or figure number. 



PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


■■■■:,:;■ DESCRpniGN"^::-- 


REF 


ITEM 


0515-0055 


n/a 


SCREW, M3x6 WITH CAPTIVE STAR 
WASHER 


Fig 8-3 


20A 


0515-1876 


n/a 


SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS 
MACHINE M4x6 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


0515-1895 


n/a 


SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS 
MACHINE M3x8 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


0515-1896 


n/a 


SCREW. PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS 
MACHINE M3x6 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


0515-1912 


n/a 


SCREW, PLATED PAN HEAD PHILLIPS 
MACHINE M4x8 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


33440-69001* 




INTERFACE PCA (HP33440) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-26 


1 


33440-69002* 




DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP33440) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-25 


1 


33440-69003 




FUSING ASST (100/115V) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-21 


1 


33440-69009 




FUSING ASST (220/240V) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-21 


1 


33443B* 




MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE 


n/a 


n/a 


33443-69004* 




MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 


n/a 


n/a 


33444B* 




MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE 


n/a 


n/a 


33444-69002* 




MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 


n/a 


n/a 


33445B* 




MEMORY PCA, 4 MBYTE 


n/a 


n/a 


33445-69008* 




MEMORY PCA, 4 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 


n/a 


n/a 


33449-60001** 




FORMATTER PCA (HP33449) New 


Fig 8-26 


1 


33449-69001** 




FORMATTER PCA (HP33449) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-26 


1 


33449-69002** 




DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP33449) Rebuilt 


Fig 8-25 


1 


33474B** 


n/a 


MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE 


n/a 


n/a 


33474-69004** 


n/a 


MEMORY PCA, 1 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 


n/a 


n/a 


33475B** 


n/a 


MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE 


n/a 


n/a 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-51 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


DESCRIPnON 


REF" 


ITEM 


33475-69011** 


n/a 


MEMORY PCA, 2 MBYTE (Rebuilt) 


n/a 


n/a 


92295A 


n/a 


EP-S CARTRIDGE 


n/a 


1 


92295B* 


n/a 


TRAY, T-ETTER SIZE (8.5x11 in.) 


Fig 8-llA 


1 


92295C* 


n/a 


TRAY, T-EGAL SIZE (8.5x14 in.) 


Fig 8-llA 


1 


92295D* 


n/a 


TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mni) 


Fig 8-1 lA 


1 


92295E* 


n/a 


TRAY, EXECUTIVE (182x257mm) 


Fig 8-llA 


1 


92295F* 


n/a 


TRAY, ENVELOPE 


Fig 8-11 A 


1 


92295R* 


n/a 


COVER, INPUT TRAY 


Fig 8-11 A 


2 


92295S* 


n/a 


COVER, LEGAL TRAY 


Fig 8-1 lA 


2 


92297B** 


n/a 


TRAY, LETTER SIZE (8.5x11 in.) 


Fig 8-llB 


1 


92297C** 


n/a 


TRAY, LEGAL SIZE (8.5x14 in.) 


Fig 8-1 IB 


1 


92297D** 


n/a 


TRAY, A4 SIZE (210x297mm) 


Fig 8-1 IB 


1 


92297E** 


n/a 


TRAY, EXECUTIVE (182x257mm) 


Fig 8-llB 


1 


92297F** 


n/a 


TRAY, ENVELOPE 


Fig 8-1 IB 


1 


92297R** 


n/a 


COVER, INPUT TRAY 


Fig 8-llB 


2 


92297S** 


n/a 


COVER, LEGAL TRAY 


Fig 8-llB 


2 


RA1-3821-OO0CN* 


1 


BLOCK, MAIN BODY 


Fig 8-12 


1 


RA1-3822-000CN 


1 


PLATE, GROUNDING A 


Fig 8-12 


2 


RA1-3823-000CN* 


1 


PLATE, GROUNDING B 


Fig 8-12 


3 


RA1-3824-0OOCN 


1 


PLATE, GROUNDING C 


Fig 8-12 


4 


RA1-3825-000CN 


1 


GUIDE, CASSETTE LEFT 


Fig 8-12 


5 


RA1-3826-000CN 


1 


GUIDE, CASSETTE RIGHT 


Fig 8-12 


6 


RA1-3827-000CN 


1 


ARM, LASER SHUTTER 


Fig 8-12 


7 


RA1-3828-040CN 


1 


ARM, PAPER SENSING 


Fig 8-12 


8 


RA1-3829-000CN 


1 


SPRING, LEAF 


Fig 8-12 


9 


RA1-3830-000CN 


1 


SHAFT, HOOK 


Fig 8-12 


10 


RA1-3831-000CN 


1 


HOOK, LEFT COVER LATCH 


Fig 8-12 


11 


RA1-3832-000CN 


1 


HOOK, RIGHT COVER LATCH 


Fig 8-12 


12 


RA1-3833-000CN 


1 


GUIDE, LEFT COVER LATCH HOOK 


Fig 8-12 


13 


RA1-3834-000CN 


1 


GUIDE, RIGHT COVER LATCH HOOK 


Fig 8-12 


14 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-52 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


DESGRIFnON 


REF 


ITEM 


RA1-3835-000CN 




LIFTER, LEFT 


Fig 8-12 


15 


RA1-3836-000CN 




LIFTER, RIGHT 


Fig 8-12 


16 


RA1-3837-0O0CN 




GUIDE, AUXILIARY 


Fig 8-12 


17 


RA1-3838-0OOCN 




NUT, SCANNER, A 


Fig 8-12 


18 


RA1-3839-0OOCN 




NUT, SCANNER, B 


Fig 8-12 


19 


RA1-3864-000CN 




GUIDE, UPPER TRANSFER 


Fig 8-12 


20 


RA1-3871-000CN 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-15 


5 


RA1-3942-000CN 




ARM, EXIT SENSOR 


Fig 8-21 


5 


RA1-3971-000CN 




PAWL (CLAW), SEPARATION 


Fig 8-21 


50 


RA1-4019-O00CN* 




HOLDER, MAGNET 


Fig 8-2A 


1 


RA1-4021-000CN 




DEFLECTOR PAWL ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-2 


2 


RA1-4025-000CN 




SPRING, LEAF 


Fig 8-2 


5 


RA1-4030-000CN 




PLATE, RHT HINGE BRACKET 


Fig 8-2 


12 


RA1-4033-000CN 




PLATE, LFT HINGE BRACKET 


Fig 8-2 


13 


RA1-4034.000CN 




SPRING A, GROUNDING 


Fig 8-2 


6 


RA1-4035-00OCN 




SPRING B, GROUNDING 


Fig 8-2 


7 


RA1-4036-00OCN 




ARM, CONNECTOR 


Fig 8-2 


8 


RA1-4038-0OOCN 




COVER, FUSER INSULATING 


Fig 8-2 


10 


RA1-4042-000CN 




SHAFT, LOCK 


Fig 8-2 


11 


RA1-4045-020CN 




SPRING, LEAF 


Fig 8-2 


14 


RA1-4046-000CN 




LEVER, INTERLOCK 


Fig 8-2 


15 


RA1.4047-000CN 




ELIMINATOR, STATIC CHARGE 


Fig 8-2 


16 


RA1-4048-O0OCN 




COVER, CONNECTOR ARM 


Fig 8-2 


17 


EA1-4079-000CN 




COVER, LAMP ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-2 


27 


RA1-4082-O00CN* 




MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 


Fig 8-4A 


2 


RA1-4083-000CN* 




DUCT, EXHAUST 


Fig 8-4A 


10 


RA1-4113-00OCN 


4 


FOOT 


Fig 8-3 


20 


RA1-4114-000CN 


1 


PLATE, DC CONTROLLER MOUNTING 


Fig 8-3 


1 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-53 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


....::" DESeRIPHQN- .■■■-:■.■■..■;■- 


;."".;REF- : 


-rTEM::. 


RA1-4115-050CN 




TEMINAL 


Fig 8-3 


2 


RA1-4132-000CN* 




GUIDE, FRONT, D-RAM PCA 


Fig 8-3A 


5 


RA1-4133-000CN* 




GUIDE, REAR, D-RAM PCA 


Fig 8-3A 


6 


RA1-4134-000CN 




GUIDE, RIGHT, EXPANSION PCA 


Fig 8-3 


7 


RA1-4135-000CN 




GUIDE, LEFT, EXPANSION, PCA 


Fig 8-3 


8 


RA1-4138-000CN* 


1 


GUIDE, UPPER, CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8^3A 


11 


RA1-4139-O00CN* 




GUIDE, LOWER, CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-3A 


12 


RA1-4146-050CN 




PLATE, TERMINAL 


Fig 8-3 


22 


RA1-4147-000CN 




SHIELD, DC PWR SUPPLY CABLE 


Fig 8-3 


23 


RA1-4148-000CN* 




SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-3A 


24 


RA1-4149-000CN* 




SUPPORT, PANEL A 


Fig 8-3A 


25 


RA1-4150-000CN* 




SUPPORT, PANEL B 


Fig 8-3A 


26 


RA1.4161-000CN 




MOUNT, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


Fig 8-3 


27 


RA1-4162-000CN 




LEVER, TRAY SIZE SENSING 


Fig 8-3 


28 


RA1-4167-000CN 




INSULATOR, LEFT, FUSING ASS'Y 


Fig 8-3 


35 


RA1-4168-000CN 




INSULATOR, RIGHT, FUSING ASST 


Fig 8-3 


36 


RA1-4170-000CN 




PLATE, FRONT SUPPORT 


Fig 8-3 


37 


RA1-4231-000CN* 




PANEL, FRONT LOWER 


Fig 8-lA 


2 


RA1-4232-000CN* 




PANEL, FRONT UPPER 


Fig 8-lA 


3 


RA1-4233-000CN* 




PANEL, RIGHT 


Fig 8-lA 


4 


RA1-4234-000CN* 




PANEL, LEFT 


Fig 8-lA 


5 


RA1-4235-000CN* 




RELEASE BUTTON 


Fig 8-1 A 


7 


RA1-4282-000CN* 




PLATE, SERVICE COVER 


Fig 8-3A 


3 


RA1-4283-000CN* 




KNOB 


Fig 8-3A 


4 


RA1-4285-000CN* 




PANEL, FONT CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-3A 


9 


RA1-4290-000CN 




TRAY, UPPER REAR OUTPUT 


Fig 8-2 


3 


EA1-4292-000CN* 




PANEL, REAR DELIVERY 


Fig 8-2A 


4 


RA1-4294-000CN* 




COVER, LOWER DELIVERY 


Fig 8-2A 


,26 


RA1-4296-000CN* 




PLATE, D-RAM 


Fig 8-3A 


14 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-54 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


DESCRIPTION 


REF,^'; 


ITEM 


RA1-4317-000CN 




SPRING, LEAF 


Fig 8-3 


42 


RA1-4318-0O0CN 




PLATE, GROUNDING 


Fig 8-12 


27 


RA1-4319-OO0CN 




PLATE, BLOCK SUPPORT 


Fig 8-12 


24 


RA1-432O-000CN 




COVER, LASER SHUTTER 


Fig 8-12 


22 


RA1-4321-000CN 




SPRING, LEAP 


Fig 8-12 


23 


RA1-4599-000CN 




COVER, PAPER CONTROL PCA 


Fig 8-22 


2 


IlAl-4637-OOOCN 




SHAFT, TRAY SIZE LEVER 


Fig 8-3 


29 


RA1-4638-000CN 




COVER, T-EVER 


Fig 8-3 


38 


RA1-4776-000CN** 




BLOCK, MAIN BODY 


Fig 8-12 


1 


RA1-5256-000CN 




PLATE, LEFT LOCK 


Fig 8-2 


37 


RA1-5257-O0OCN 




PLATE, RIGHT LOCK 


Fig 8-2 


38 


RA1-5258-000CN 




SHAFT, SPRING 


Fig 8-2 


33 


RA1-5361-000CN* 




LATCH 


Fig 8-2A 


34 


RA1-5362-000CN* 




SPRING, I.F,/^ 


Fig 8-2A 


35 


RA1-5363-000CN* 




SHAFT, LATCH 


Fig 8-2A 


36 


RA1-5396-000CN 


n/a 


WASHER, SHIM 


Fig 8-12 


41 


RA1-5402-000CN* 




HOOD, EXHAUST 


Fig 8-4A 


11 


RA1-5403-030CN 




MOUNT, SWITCH LEVER 


Fig 8-3B 


49 


RA1-5404-000CN 




PLATE, LEVER 


Fig 8-3B 


50 


RA1-5423-000CN 




INSULATION SHEET 


Fig 8-3 


43 


RA1-5424-000CN 




CLIP, HOOD 


Fig 8-4 


12 


RA1-5479-000CN** 




PLATE, GROUNDING B 


Fig 8-12 


3 


RA1-5489-000CN 




PLATE 


Fig 8-3 


44 


RA1-5490-000CN 




STAND, FAN MOUNT 


Fig 8-3 


4 


RA1-6047-000CN** 




PLATE, SERVICE COVER 


Fig 8-3B 


3 


RA1-7361-000CN 




DUCT, EXHAUST 


Fig 8-4B 


10 


RA1-7362-000CN 




HOOD, EXHAUST 


Fig 8-4B 


11 


RA1-8011^000CN** 




PLATE, GROUNDING 


Fig 8-3B 


46 


RA1-8273-00OCN** 




PANEL, BOTTOM COVER 


Fig 8-lB 


56 


RA1-8275-000CN** 




PANEL, REAR DELIVERY 


Fig 8-2B 


4 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-55 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


^ 


DESCRIPTION 


■■■REF..::■^. 


ITEM 


RA1-8276-OO0CN** 




COVER, UPPER DELIVERY 


Fig 8-2B 


41 


RA1-8278-000CN** 




RELEASE BUTTON 


Fig 8- IB 


5 


RA1-8284-000CN** 




PANEL, MEMORY COVER 


Fig 8-lB 


57 


RA1-8285-000CN** 




PANEL, TEST COVER 


Fig 8-lB 


58 


RA1-8287-000CN** 




COVER, LOWER DELIVERY 


Fig 8-2B 


26 


RA1-8289-000CN** 




GUIDE, DRAM CENTER 


Fig 8-3B 


6 


RA1-8290-000CN** 




GUIDE, FONT CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8- IB 


9 


RA1-8292-000CN** 




GUIDE, DRAM REAR 


Fig 8-3B 


5 


RA1-8293-000CN** 




GUARD, I/O CONNECTOR 


Fig 8- IB 


59 


RA1-8295-000CN** 




SHIELD, FONT CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-3B 


24 


RA1-8299-000CN** 




PLATE, DRAM ACCESS 


Fig 8-3B 


14 


RA1-83O2-0O0CN** 




GUIDE, FONT CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-3B 


11 


RF1-0841-000CN 




RESISTOR, 1 KOHM 1/4W 


Fig 8-12 


37 


RF1-0842-000CN 




THERMOPROTECTOR 


Fig 8-21 


44 


RF1-0926-000CN 




SPRING, RIGHT, MIRROR 


Fig 8-2 


22 


RF1-0929-000CN 




SPRING, LEFT, MIRROR 


Fig 8-2 


24 


RF1-O947-00OCN 




GUIDE, EP CARTRIDGE 


Fig 8-2 


9 


RF1-0975-O0OCN 




COVER, BOTTOM 


Fig 8-3A 


19 


RF1-0977-000CN 




PANEL, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-2A 


23 


RF1-0985-000CN 




TRAY, LOWER REAR OUTPUT 


Fig 8-2A 


25 


RF1-0988-000CN 




SHAFT, DRUM DRIVE 


Fig 8-12 


38 


RF1-0998-000CN 




COVER, GEAR 


Fig 8-8 


1 


RF1-1145-020CN 




PAD, SEPARATION 


Fig 8-15 


2 


RF1-1177-000CN 




CLEANER 


Fig 8-14 


9 


RF1-1383-000CN* 




CONTROL PANEL OVERLAY 


Fig 8-7 


2 


RF1-2118-000CN 




RESISTOR ASST, 15 MOHM 1/4W 


Fig 8-12 


36 


RF1-2130-000CN 




OZONE FILTER 


Fig 8-4B 


3 


RF1-2133-000CN 




MOUNT, OZONE FILTER 


Fig 8-4B 


2 


KF1-2572-000CN** 




PANEL, FRONT 


Fig 8- IB 


1 


RF1-2574-000CN** 




PANEL, TOP 


Fig 8- IB 


2 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-56 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


DESCRIPTION 


REF 


ITEM 


RF1-2575-000CN** 




PANEL, RIGHT 


Fig 8- IB 


3 


RF1-2576-000CN** 




PANEL, LEFT 


Fig 8-lB 


4 


RP1-2577-000CN** 




COVER, BOTTOM 


Fig 8-3B 


19 


RF1-2579-OO0CN** 




PANEL, TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-2B 


23 


RF1-2580-000CN** 




TRAY, LOWER REAR OUTPUT 


Fig 8-2B 


25 


RG0-0050-030CN 




LASER/SCANNING ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-18 


1 


RG0-0052-000CN 




MIRROR ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-2 


31 


RG1-0710-090CN* 




DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-25 


1 


RG1-0718-000CN 




PAPER CONTROL PCA 


Fig 8-22 


1 


RG1-O719-0O0CN 




THERMISTOR/EXIT SENSOR PCA 


Fig 8-21 


33 


RG1-0905-000CN 




AC PWR MOD./DC PWR SUP. CABLE 


Fig. 8-27 


4 


RG1-0906-000CN 




HIGH-VOLTAGE PWR SUP. CABT,E 


Fig. 8-27 


4 


RG1-0907-000CN 




FUSING ASSEMBLY CABTE 


Fig. 8-27 


4 


RG1-0908-000CN 




LASER/SCANNING CABTE ASSEMBLY 


Fig. 8-27 


1 


RG1-0912-000CN 




AC PWR MOD./DC CONTROL. CABLE 


Fig 8-27 


4 


RG1-0929-000CN 




MIRROR, SHUTTER ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-10 




RG1-0931-060CN 




FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-13 




RG1-0932-120CN 




REGISTRATION ASSEMBLY 


Pig 8-15 




RG1-0933-060CN 




TRANSFER CORONA ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-20 




RG1-O934-000CN 




FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-9 




RG1-O935-00OCN 




PRESSURE ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-5 




RG1-0936-110CN 




HIGH-VOLTAGE PWR SUPPLY ASST 


Fig 8-23 




RG1-0938-000CN 




FEED GUIDE ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-14 




RG1-0939-230CN 




FUSING ASSEMBLY (100/115) (New) 


Fig 8-21 




RG1-0940-000CN 




FUSING ASSEMBLY (220/240V) (New) 


Fig 8-21 




RG1-0943-000CN 




MAIN MOTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-8 




RG1-0945-000CN 




DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-17 




RG1-0946-000CN 




ERASE LAMP ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-19 




RG1-0959-000CN* 




CONTROL PANEL 


Fig 8-7 




RG1-0966-030CN 




PAD, FUSER CLEANING 


Fig 8-21 


49 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-57 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PART NUMBER 


QTY 


DESCRIPTION 


REF 


TTEM 


RG1-0967-000CN 




DELIVERY COUPLER ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-16 


1 


RG1-0969-000CN* 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-6 


1 


RG1-1153-000CN* 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-6 


2 


RG1-1394-020CN* 




DC PWR SUP. 100/1 15V (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-24 


1 


RG1-1395-000CN* 




DC POWER SUPPLY 240V (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-24 


1 


RG1-1435-000CN** 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, RIGHT (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-6 


1 


RG1-1436-O00CN** 




HINGE ASSEMBLY, LEFT (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-6 


2 


RG1-1753-000CN* 




OZONE FILTER KIT 


Fig 8-4A 


3 


RG1-1969-000CN** 




DC CONTROLLER PCA (HP 33449) New 


Fig 8-25 


1 


RG1-1974-000CN** 




CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY 


Fig 8-7 


1 


RG1-1975-000CN** 




DC PWR SUP. 100/1 15V (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-24 


1 


RG1-1977-000CN** 




DC POWER SUPPLY 240V (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-24 


1 


RG1-2307-000CN** 




PANEL CABLE ASST (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-27 


2 


RG9-0205-000CN* 




AC PWR MOD. 100/1 15V (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-4 


1 


RG9-0206-000CN* 




AC PWR MOD. 220/240V (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-4 


1 


RG9-0319-000CN** 




AC PWR MOD. 100/1 15V (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-4B 


1 


RG9-0325-060CN** 




AC PWR MOD. 220/240V (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-4B 


1 


RH2-5051-000CN 




CONNECTOR 


Fig 8-3 


34 


RH2-5053-000CN* 




FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-18 


2 


RH2-5108-000CN** 




FIBER OPTIC CABLE (HP 33449) 


Fig 8-18 


2 


RH7-1048-000CN 




MOTOR, MAIN DRIVE 


Fig 8-8 


2 


RH7-1056-000CN 




FAN, LOWER COOLING 


Fig 8-3 


21 


RH7-1O74-O00CN 




FAN, UPPER COOLING 


Fig 8-4 


8 


RS1-0105-000CN 




GEAR, 19 TOOTH 


Fig 8-12 


29 


RS1-0106-000CN 




GEAR, 57 TOOTH 


Fig 8-12 


30 


RS1-2095-000CN 




SPRING, TORSION 


Fig 8-12 


31 


RS1-2096-000CN 




SPRING, TORSION 


Fig 8-12 


32 


RS1-2097-000CN 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-12 


33 


RS1-2101-OOOCN 




SPRING, TORSION 


Fig 8-2 


19 


RS1-2104-0O0CN 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-21 


25 


*HP 33440 only. **HP 33449 only. 



8-58 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 
PARTS INDEX BY PART NUMBER 



PAKF ^JUMBER 


QTY 


■■;.'..■■:..■,;.; .. description',;- ;■: 


■..;IIPF;;:;; 


ITEM 


RS1-2105-OOOCN 


1 


SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-21 


26 


RS1-2106-000CN 


4 


SPRING, PAWL TENSION 


Fig 8-21 


51 


RS1-2109-OOOCN 


2 


SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-21 


27 


RS1-2110-000CN 


2 


SPRING, COMPRESSION 


Fig 8-6 


4 


RS1-2112-000CN 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-12 


34 


RS1-2149-O00CN* 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-lA 


8 


RS1-2152-O00CN 




SPRING, TENSION 


Fig 8-2 


32 


SA4-6202-O00CN 




PLATE, OPT I/O DUST 


Fig 8-3 


41 


SG4-6212-050CN* 




INTERFACE PCA (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-26 


1 


SG4-6271-000CN* 




PANEL CABLE ASS'Y (HP 33440) 


Fig 8-27 


1 


VS1-0440-002CN 




JUMPER: SIG. GND TO FRAME GND 


Fig. 8-27 


3 


VS3-0190-003CN 




CONNECTOR, 3P FEMALE 


Fig 8-3 


30 


VS3-0190-004CN 




CONNECTOR, 4P FEMALE 


Fig 8-3 


32 


VS9-0013-025CN 




CAP, SERIAL I/O DUST 


Fig 8-3 


39 


WD1-0222-000CN 




DC POWER FUSE 250V/3.15A 


Fig 8-24 


2 


WD1-0224-000CN 




DC POWER FUSE 125V/6.3A 


Fig 8-24 


2 


WS3-0976-000CN* 




CONTACT 


Fig 8-3A 


31 


WS3-1204-000CN 




CONTACT 


Fig 8-3 


33 


WS9-0104-000CN 




CAP, CENTRONICS I/O DUST 


Fig 8-3 


40 


WT2-0250-000CN 


3 


CLIP, CABLE 


Fig 8-3 


17 


XA9-0267-000CN 


n/a 


SCREW, PL WASH-HD PHIL. (M3x6) 


Fig 8-0 


n/a 


XA9-0389-000CN 


n/a 


SCREW, PL PHIL. M3x8 W/STAR WASH 


Fig 8-0 


n/a 


XA9-O342-O00CN 


10 


SCREW, STEPPED M3 


Fig 8-3 


15 


XA9-0375-000CN 


4 


SCREW, M3x25 


Fig 8-12 


40 


XB4-7300-609CN 


n/a 


SCREW, BLACK SELF-TAPPING 
PHILLIPS M3x6 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


XB4-7401-009CN 


n/a 


SCREW, BLACK SELF-TAPPING 
PHILLIPS M4xlO 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


XB6-7300-609CN 


n/a 


SCREW, BLACK WASHER HEAD 
PHILLIPS MACHINE M3x6 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


XB6-7300-809CN 


n/a 


SCREW, COATED (BLACK) WASHER 
HEAD PHILLIPS MACHINE M3x8 


Table 8-0 


n/a 


XG3-6010-303CN 


1 


BEARING, BALL 


Fig 8-12 


35 


*HP 33440 only. **HF 33449 only. 



8-59 



A 



This appendix contains the complete text of the pamphlet, Your Road Map to setting up Your 
LaserJet series U Printer (P/N33440-90004), except for the title page. After November 1989, this 
pamphlet was packed with the LaserJet series II (HP 33440) printer. It replaced the LaserJet 
series II Getting Started Manual. 



A-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



A-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





D Get help to lift the printer from the box. 



Locate each item in the checklist below: 

n 1- LaserJet series li printer 

D 2. LaserJet series II Printer User's Manual 

D 3. LaserJet series 11 Printer Software Application Notes 

□ 4. LaserJet series II Printer Technical Quick Reference Guide 

n 5. LaserJet series II Printer User's Quick Reference Guide 

D 6. Power cord 

D 7. Paper tray 

D 8. EP-S cartridge package 

n 9. EP-S cartridge 

n 10. Cieaning pad 




Notify your Hewlett-Packard Dealer immediately if any parts are missing or damaged. 



A-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Check each box as you complete the step. 



^ 




n Remove the front packing tape. 



D Remove the packing foam from 
the paper tray slot. 



D Open the printer to the fully 
open position. 




n Remove the packing foam from 
inside the printer. 



n Remove the fuser assembly 
spacers. 



D Remove the top cover packing 
spacer. 



Your Location Requirements Are: 

• An area with space around the 
printer as shown at the right 

• A well-ventilated room 

• Room temperature of 50*' to 
90.5° F 

• Relative humidity of 20% to 80% 

• A stable environment- no abrupt 
temperature or humidity 
changes 

• No exposure to chemicals or 
direct sunlight 

• A sturdy, level surface 

• Line voltage that does not vary 
more than ±10% from that on 
printer's nameplate 




A-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




CAUTION: Make sure that you have removed all of the packing material. 




D Locate the EP-S cartridge- 



"©^ 


1- 



D Remove the EP-S cartridge from 
its bag. 



D Slowly rock the EP-S cartridge five to six times, in the direction shown, 
to distribLite the toner. 



n Do not stand the EP-S cartridge 
on end. 




n Open the printer to the half-open 
position. 




n Slide the EP-S cartridge into the 
top of the printer. 



D Bend tab on left side of EP-S 
cartridge back and forth until 
it separates from the cartridge. 




D If the tab separates from the 
tape, pull out the tape. 



n Push firmly to be sure the EP-S 
cartridge is seated properly in 
the printer. 



D Pull the tab straight out and 
away from the printer to remove 
the sealing tape. 



You're doing great! 
Now go to section ^|^ 



A-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





D Locate the cleaning pad and 
remove it from its plastic bag. 





n Open the printer to the fully 
open position. 



D Locate the fuser assembly. 




D Open the fuser assembly cover. 



n Use the felt tip on the end of the 
cleaning pad to wipe the fuser 
assembly roller. 



D Remove and discard the felt tip 
from the cleaning pad. 




D Place the cleaning pad on the 
fuser assembly roller. 



n Close the fuser assembly cover. 
The cover is slightly ajar when 
fully closed. 



D Close the printer. 



A-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





n Locate the paper tray. 



OilberC 

neu-tech ^ 




Hewlett-Packard has tested Canon Dry 
Paper™, Xerox 4024®, Gilbert Neu-Tech" 
and Neenah NP™ and found the results 
satisfactory. If in doubt, use one of the 
recommended papers. 



Paper Specifications 



The HP LaserJet series I! works well with most types of paper. To ensure the best 
print quality and most reliable printer performance, use paper and other media that 
meet the specifications below. 



Paper 

Must not scorch, melt, offset, or 
release hazardous emissions 
when heated to 200°C {392°F) 
for 0.1 second. 

Must have 4% to 6% moisture 
content. 

Must be pacl<aged in 
moisture-proof ream wrap. 



Paper, Top Input 

16 to 36 pound (60 to 135 g/M^) 




n Remove the cover and all 
pacl<ing material from inside the 
tray. 



D Load the paper tray up to the 
limit tabs (about 200 sheets). 



n Ensure that the paper is flat in 
the tray at all four corners. 




n Replace the tray cover. 



n Firmly insert the paper tray in the 
printer. 



A-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



-iS Comiect tlie Printer 



\^V ; 






A. '■U^wy^ia^i 



D Locate the power cord. 





Rear view of the printer 



D Locate the power switch on the 
back of the printer. 




D Make sure the power switch is in 
the off position. 




D Plug the power cord into the 
receptacle on the back of the 
printer. 



CAUTION 



Make sure you plug the other 
end of the power cord into a 
120-volt AC power outlet 




D Turn on your printer. 



Printer Control Panel 



o 





















READY 

L.. 1 

MANUAL 

I I 














+ 


















00 READY 
















V J 








~ 


. 1 ^^ 
1 ' 












! I 






ONLINE 




CONTINUE 
RESET 




PRINT ^ 
FONTS 

TEST 




FORM 
FEED 


ENTER 

RESET 
MENU 


MENU 























n Make sure the READY and ON LINE indicators are lit and the display window shows 00 READY. 



A-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




;!i 



1 




D Press the ON LINE key. (The ON 
LINE indicator goes out.) 



D Press and release the PRINT 
FONTS/TEST key. 



D Font samples for the internal 
fonts are printed. 




RESET I TESTI 




D Hold the PRINT FONTS key 
2 seconds until 05 SELF TEST 
appears in the display window. 




D A one-page self-test is printed. 




D Hold down the PRINT FONTS key 
7 seconds until 04 SELF TEST 
appears in the display window. 




n A continuous self-test is printed. 



GOOD JOB! YOU'RE NOW 
READY TO CONNECT YOUR 
PRINTER TO YOUR 
COMPUTER! 



D When printing stops, turn off the 
printer. 





BESET TE 



D Press the ON LINE key to stop 
continuous self-test. Printing stops 
shortly after you press ON LINE. 




D Turn this Road Map over and 
continue with 



o 



A-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




-VI 


"s 


.A 


o 


^\^Serial Interface 
Parallel Interface ^^^ 



NOTE - ENSURE PRINTER AND PC ARE TURNED "OFF" BEFORE CONNECTING CABLES 



Your printer communicates with your computer tlirough an interface. Your LaserJet series II 

provides both parallel and serial interfaces. The interface connections are on the back of your 
printer. 



® 



Use a parallel Interface when: 

• Your printer is less than 1 feet from your computer. 

• You send primarily graphic information or soft fonts to the printer. 

• Your computer does not have an available serial interface. 
Did you decide on a parallel interface? Go to O 




Graphical Information 



( D ] Use a serial Interface when: 

• Your printer must be more than 10 feet from your computer. 

• Your computer does not have an available parallel interface. 
Did you decide on a serial interface? Go toO 




Textual Information 



A-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




The following setup information applies to MS-^DOS-based computers; Hewlett- 
Packard has not tested other operating systems. If you have an operating system 
other than MS-DOS, contact your computer dealer for information. 



^ 


^ 


1 


JL 




1 


O//^ 


' 




\. 




D Use dips to attach parallel cable. 



D Install the interface card for your 
computer, if required.* 



Make sure both your computer 
and printer are turned off, and 
then plug the cable into your 
computer and your printer. Use 
the clips to attach the cable to 
your printer. Note into which 
parallel port on your computer 
(LPT1 or LPT2) you plug the 
cable; you wili need this 
information later. 



*lf you need a parallel interface for your HP Vectra, order HP part number HP24540A. If you have a different type of 
computer, contact your local dealer for information. 



Computers 



Computer End 



Parallel Cable 



Printer End 



O 



HP Vectra 

IBM PC/AT/XT/PS2 

Compaq 

AT&T 



25 Pin Male 



HP Part# 



Length 






HP92284A 



6.6' (2.0 m) 36 Pin Male 



D Choose the right cable for your computer. 



Configure the Control Panel for a Parallel Interface 



Step 


: Press .-.' . 


Printer Displays (If not, press |+ | or |- \ 
until it does, and then press j^TO 


1 


ON LINE 


00 READY (The ON LINE indicator goes out.) 


2 


MENU (Hold down for 
approximately 7 seconds.) 


SYMSET=R0MAN-8* 


3 


MENU 


AUTO CONT=OFF* (or ON*) 


4 


MENU 


1/0= SERIAL* 


5 


+ (Plus) 


1/0= PARALLEL 


6 


ENTER 


1/0= PARALLEL* 


7 


ON LINE 


00 READY (The ON LINE indicator lights.) 



*lndicates the current default. 



Now go to ly 



A-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




The following setup information applies to MS-DOS-based computers; Hewlett- 
Packard has not tested other operating systems. If you have an operating system 
other than MS-DOS, contact your computer dealer for information. 




n Use a screwdriverto attach serial 
cable. 



Q Install the interface card for your 
computer, if required.* 



Make sure both your computer and 
printer are turned off, and then plug the 
cable into your computer and your 
printer. Use a small screwdriver to attach 
the cable to the printer. Note into which 
serial port on your computer (C0M1 or 
COM2) you plug the cable; you will need 
this information later. 



*lf you need a serial interface for your HP Vectra, order HP part numlMr HF>24540A or HP24541 A for the dual 
serial option. If you have a different type of computer, contact your local dealer for information. 



Computers 



Gomputer End 



Serial RS232 Cable 



Printer End 



IBM PC, PC/XT/PS 2 
& IBM Compatibles 
Compaq Portable 
AT&T 






HP Part# 



25 Pin Female HP-1 7255D 
HP-92219J 



Length 



3.9" {1.2 m) 
16.7' {5.0 m) 



25 Pin Male 



HP Vectra 
IBM PC/AT & 
IBM Compatibles 
Compaq Deskpro 
286/386 



9 Pin Female 



HP Part# 



HP24542G 



Length 



9.9' (3.0 m) 25 Pin Male 



HP Vectra 
(Dual Serial Card) 



o 



25 Pin Male 



HP Part* 



HP17255M 
HP1 3242-60010 



Length 



3.9' (1.2 m) 
16.7' (5.0 m) 



25 Pin Male 



n Choose the right cable for your computer. 



Now go to I 

if you are going to use a serial RS-422 cable, see Appendix E, "Interfaces." in the LaserJet series II User's Manual. 



o 



A-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




o 



step 


Press 


Printer Displays (If not, press |+ | or |" | 
until it does, and then press |««f |.) 


1 


ON LINE 


00 READY (The ON LINE indicator goes out.) 


2 


MENU (Hold down for 
approximately 7 seconds.) 


SYMSET=R0MAN-8* 


3 


MENU 


AUTO CONT=OFF* (or ON*) 


4 


MENU 


1/0= SERIAL* 


5 


'menu': 


SERIAL=RS-232* 


6 


ENTER 


BAUD RATE=9600* 


7 


MENU 


ROBUST XON= ON* 


8 


MENU 


DTR POLARITY = HI* 


g 


ON UNE 


00 READY (Tfie ON LINE indicator lights.) 



*lndicates the current default. 



Now go to fly 



iote * This does not apply to the HP 33440, Switches must be set. See 

m Chapter 3, page 3-5. 



OKAY! GOOD WORK! YOU'RE NOW 
READY TO PREPARE YOUR PRINTER 
TO TALK TO YOUR COMPUTER! 



A-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




The following procedure: 

• Puts into a file called AUTOEXEC.BAT the instructions your computer needs to be able to 
talk to the printer. 

• Uses the EOUN editor that comes with DOS. 

• Works with either MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating systems. Most IBM and IBM-compatible 
computers use one of these operating systems. If your computer does not use either 
MS-DOS or PC-DOS, contact your computer dealer for configuration instructions. 



Step 


What to Do 


How to Do It 

(Type the command in this procedure and press the Retum 
key, as indicated by .) 


1 


Turn on your computer 




2 


Turn on your printer. 




3 


Make sure you are in the 
root directory of the disk 
from which you boot your 
computer. 


CD\(B 


4 


Check to see if the 
AUTOEXEC.BAT file appears 
in the listing. 


DIR AUTOEXEC.BAT © 


5 


If the message "File not 
found" appears, go to step 

7. 




6 


Make a backup copy of your 
existing AUTOEXEC.BAT 
file. Name it 
AUTOEXEC.SAV.* 


COPY AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC.SAV© 


7 


Look for the files 
M0DE.COM and 
EDLIN.COM in your root 
directory.** 


DIR *.COM (B 


8 


If M0DE.COM and 
EDLIN.COM appear in the 
directory listing, go to M. 




g 


If M0DE.COM and 
EDL1N.COM do not appear 

in the directory listing, copy 
them from your DOS disks 
to your root directory. 


Place your DOS disk in drive A and type the following 

commands: 

COPY A : MODE . COM E 

COPY A:EDLIN.C0M(3 


10 


Goto© 





*lf you need to recover your original AUTOEXEC.BAT file later, type: COPY AUTOEXEC . SAV AUTOEXEC . BAT 
**MODE.COM and EDUN.COM are on your original DOS disks. If you have a hard disk, these files may be in a subdirectory. 



A-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Type EDLIN AUTOEXEC. BAT and press © 



C> EDLIN AUTOEXEC.BAT 
END OF INPUT FILE 
* 

If your computer screen looks like this, follow the instructions in 
this column. 


Step 


Action 


1 


List the file by typing L at the * prompt. 


2 


Lool< for commands that begin with MODE. If 
there are none, go to the next column. 


3 


Compare the existing MODE commands with the 
ones listed below for your configuration. 
Parallel: M0DELPT1:„P 
Serid: MODE C0M1 :9600,N,8,1 ,P 

M0DELPT1:=C0M1: 
(If you used LPT2 or COM2, substitute it for LPT1 
or C0M1 .) If you have the correct MODE 
commands, go to step 5. 


4 


You must delete any other MODE commands for 
the port to which your printer is connected. 

Delete any other mode commands by typing the 
number of the line on which the command 
appears, and D. Then press (E) . For example, if 
line 3 has another MODE command, type 3D and 
press at the * prompt. Go to the next column. 


5 


Reboot your computer by holding down the CTRL 
and ALT keys while pressing the DEL key to run 
your new AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 



C> EDLIN AUTOEXEC.BAT 
NEW FILE 
* 

If your screen looks like this, follow the instructions in this 
column. If you need help using EDLIN, see your DOS 
documentation. 


Step 


Action 


1 


Insert a new line at the beginning of the 
AUTOEXEC.BAT file by typing li and pressing 
at the * prompt. The prompt 1 : * appears. 


2 


Type the MODE command listed below for your 
configuration. 

Parallel: MODE LPTl: , ,P 
Serial: MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P © 
MODE LPT1:=COM1:0 


3 


Stop inserting lines in the file by holding down the 
CTRL key and pressing C. 


4 


List the file by typing Land pressing . 


5 


Check the lines you just added for typographical 
errors. To fix any errors, type the line number of 
the line containing the error and press © . Retype 
the line correctly and press (HI . List the file again 
and recheck it for errors. Make sure the lines are 
correct before you proceed. 


6 


Exit from EDLIN by holding down the CTRL key 
and pressing E. EDLIN saves your file 
automatically. 



A-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




1. Make sure your computer and printer are on, and your printer is on 
line. 

2. At your IVIS-DOS prompt, type DIR >PRN and press E) . 

3. The LaserJet series II prints a list of tiie files on your disk. 

4. The FORM FEED indicator lights to Indicate that the printer 
received data. Press the ON LINE key and then press the FORM 
FEED key to eject the page. 

5. Remember to press the ON LINE key to prepare your printer for 
more data. 

6. If you are having trouble, goto 




You're Done! 

Now you can set up your software to work 
with your new LaserJet series II printer. 

Refer to the LaserJet series II Printer 
Software Application Notes that came with 
your LaserJet series II. 



A-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




• Was your computer or printer on when you connected your interface cable? 

- Turn off your computer and printer, wait 15 seconds, and turn them on again. Continue with 

o 

• Is the interface port configured correctly? 

- Your cable may not be connected to LPT1 for a parallel interface or C0M1 for a serial 
interface. Try working through© , (JJ, and ^ again substituting LPT2 if you have a parallel 
interface, or COM2 if you have a seri^ interface. 

• Are all of the cables and power cords attached properly? 

- Check all of the connections. 

• Is the ON LINE indicator on the printer control panel lit? 

- If not, press the ON LINE key. 

• Is the printer working properly? Run the self-test described in@. 

- If necessary, call your HP Dealer or HP Sales Representative. 

• Is your computer working properly? 

- Run an application that works. 

- If necessary, call your computer dealer or manufacturer. 

• Have you setup the control panel properly? 

- Hold down the MENU key for about 7 seconds until the Configuration Menu appears in the 
display window. Then step through the configuration settings. 

- If necessary, repeat O^or a parallel interface or O ^^ O for a serial interface, and continue 
through the rest of this Road Map. 

• Have you setup your AUTOEXEC.BAT file properly? 

- Type TYPE AUTOEXEC . BAT on your computer and press E . Check the listing for 
errors in the line or lines you added. 

- If necessary, repeat © , ^ , and (^ . 

• Do you have the correct printer cable? 

- Check Q for a parallel interface or ^ and ^ for a serial interface. 

- If necessary, obtain the correct cable. 



Consult your LaserJet series II User's 
Manual. 



Call the HP Dealer from whom you 
purchased your LaserJet series il. 



Call Hewlett-Packard's Personal 
Peripherals Assist Line for help. 




Enter your Dealer's number here: 



7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Mountain time 
(7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Wednesday) 



A-17 



B 



11 '<^%&i 



This appendix contains the complete text of the pamphlet, Your Guide to Setting up Your LaserJet 
III Printer (P/N 33449-90905), except for the title page. This pamphlet is packed with the 
LaserJet III (HP 33449) printer. 



B-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



B-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 







Locate each item in the checklist below: 



n 1. LaserJet III printer 

D 2. LaserJet til Printer User's Manual 
and Quick Reference Guide 

□ 3. LaserJet III Printer Software 
Application Notes 

D 4. Power cord 



n 5. Paper tray 

n 6. EP-S cartridge package 

a. EP-S cartridge 

b. Cleaning pad 



n Get help to lift the printer from the 
box. (The printer weighs 48 pounds.) 



Notify your Hewlett-Packard Dealer tmmediately if any parts are missing or damaged. 




Mtnlmum Location Requirements Are: 



• An area with space around the printer 
as shown at the right 

• A well-ventilated room 

• Room temperature of 50° to 90.5° F 

• Relative humidity between 20% and 
80% 

• A stable environment-no abrupt 
temperature or humidity changes 

• No exposure to chemicals or direct 
sunlight 

• A sturdy, level surface 

• Line voltage that does not vary more 
than ±^0% from that on printer's 
nameplate 









57 


' (144 cm) 












E 
o 
u> 

TO. 

<* 
CO 










8" (20 cm 
-) 


) 








^ 

d 








1 






22" (55 cm) 


1 


□ 




— ' 




16" (40 


cm) 




. ►• 






==- 

8" (20 cm) 


^ 





B-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Check each box as you complete the step. 



^ 




n Remove protective packing foam. 



D Remove the packing foam from the 
paper tray slot. 



D Open the printer to the fully open 
position. 




D Remove the packing foam from inside 
the printer. 



Q Remove the fuser assembly spacers. 



n (Rear View) Remove the top cover 
packing spacer. 



B-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




CAUTION: Make sure you have removed all of the printer packing material. 









-si/ 


-''^'-_ 

v:----^ 


"N~~"'- 


o 




,^j^ _^ 


^ 




n Locate the EP-S cartridge. It is in a 
separate box that is included with 
your printer. 



D Remove the EP-S cartridge from its 
bag. 



n Do not stand the EP-S cartridge on 
end. 




D Slowly rock the EP-S cartridge five to six times, in the direction shown, to distribute 
the toner. 



D Open the printer to the half-open 
position. 




^^ 


- 


5r^^ 






s^ 


o 




^<i 



n Slide the EP-S cartridge into the top of 
the printer. 



n Bend the tab on the left side of the 
EP-S cartridge back and forth until it 
separates from the cartridge. 




D Pull the tab straight out and away from 
the printer to remove the sealing tape. 




n If the tab separates from the tape, pull 
out the tape. 



n Discard the sealing tape strip, which is D Push firmly to be sure the EP-S 

about 22 inches (55 cm) long. cartridge is seated properly. 



You're doing great! Now go to section Q. 



B-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





D Locate the cleaning pad and remove it 
from its plastic wrap. 





n Open the printer to tiie fully open 
position. 



□ Locate tlie fuser assembly. Identify the fuser assembly by green color and the 
WARNtNG-HlGH TEMPERATURE message.(lt will not be hot until powered up.) 





i^^^2 


1 


^» 




D Open the fuser assembly cover. 



Q Use the felt tip on the end of the 
cleaning pad to wipe the fuser 
assembly roller. 



n Remove and discard the felt tip from 
the cleaning pad. 




D Place the cleaning pad on the fuser 
assembly roller. 



n Close the fuser assembly cover. The 
cover is slightly ajar when fully closed. 



□ Close the printer. 



B-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




Paper Specifications 

Your HP LaserJet III printer works well with many connmon papers, 
particularly xerographic bond papers with basis weights from 16 to 
36 pounds (60 to 135 g/m^). However, we recommend you test a 
particular paper to determine if its performance is acceptable. Refer 
to Appendix D," Paper and Print Media Specifications," in the 
LaserJet III Printer User's Manual. 



NOTE 

Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular paper. Paper 
properties are subject to change by paper manufacturers and Hewlett-Packard has no 
control over such changes. The customer assumes all responsibility as to the quality and 
performance of paper. Although testing helps to characterize performance, long-term 
satisfaction requires process quality control by the manufacturer, and proper handling until 
use. 




n Locate the paper tray. 




D Remove the cover and all packing 
material from inside the tray. 



D Load the paper tray up to the limit 
tabs (about 200 sheets of 20 pound 
paper). 



n Ensure that the paper is flat In the tray 
at all four corners. 




D Replace the tray cover. 



n Firmly insert the paper tray in the 
printer. 



B-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 





r 




1 


^V 


^^ ^= 


1 


WW 


L ■ J 


\ = lta!BO| g 




o 





D Locate the power cord. 



□ (Rear View) Locate the power switch 
on the back of the printer. 




n Make sure the power switch is in the 
OFF (O) position. 




©^ 


^^g 





□ Plug the power cord into the 

receptacle on the back of the printer. 



D CAUTION Make sure you plug the 
other end of the power cord only into 
a 120-volt AC power outlet. 



Printer Control Panel 




n Turn on your printer. 05 SELF TEST 
will appear momentcirily in the display 
window. The self test will last 
approximately 30 seconds. 

























1 1 Ready 
1 1 Manual 


\ 
/ 




/ 
\ 


00 READY 






































On Line 




Continue 
Reset 






Menu 




+ 






























Form Feed 




Print Font! 
Test 


s 




Enter 
Reset Menu 




— 




>_ 























D Make sure the Ready and On Line indicators are lit and the display window shows CX) READY. 



B-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




If you want your control panel messages displayed In English, go on to Section O 
If you want them in French, German, Italian, or Spanish, do the following: 




n Turn the printer off. 



n Hold the Enter keywhile turning the 
printer back on. 




n Wait for LANGUAGE = ENG to appear. 
Press the + key to choose your 
language. 



D Press the Enter key to save your 
choice. An asterisk (*) will appear 
beside your language selection. 







1 


en Ready 
CDManiBl 


\ 




/ 




00 BEREIT 




/ 




\ 




1 












Online 


Continue 
Reset 




Menu 




+ 












FonnFeed 


Prinl Fonts 
Test 




Enter 
Reset Menu 




- 


^^^^ 






o 



□ Your display messages will now be in 
the language you selected. 









1 


IZ3 Ready 

CZj Manual 


K 




/ 




CONFIG UNGUAGE 




/ 




\ 


















OnUne 


Continue 
Reset 




Menu 




+ 












Form Feed Print Fonts 

Test 




rrN 


\, 


- 




tf!^ 


^\^ 


)\ 


V 


\ 


\ 


\ 



Q Wait until CONFIG LANGUAGE appears. 
Release Enter key. 05 SELF TEST 
appears. 









CD Ready 
CD Manual 


\ 


/ 


SPRACHE=DEU * 




/ 


\ 
















On Une i 


Reset 




Menu 




+ 


— I v\ 












^\^ 


Wint Fonts 




Enter 

Reset Menu 






£^ 


\ 










^ 


V 



D Press the On Line key. The On Line 
indicator light will come on. 



B-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




FTl 






If^ (Di ^'■'~ "V /Oi T^ 









CID Ready 

CD Manual 


\ 


/ 




00 READY 


z 


\ 




1 












"•TH 


Continue 

Reset 




Menu 




+ 


\ 












\ 


Vrint Fonts 




Emer 
Reset Menu 




- 


.,^^ 


\ 










O 


r 









CZI ReaSy 
CZI Manual 


\ "" 




/ 




06 FONT PRINTOUT 




/ 




\ 
















OnUne 


Coniinue 
Resel 




Menu 




+ 












Form Feed 


Print Fonts 

Test /'"X 




Enter 
Reset Menu 




- 


^!^ 


__J \ 








o 




I 






\ 



n Press the On Line key once to take 
the printer off-line again. (The On Line 
indicator goes out.) 



n Briefly Press and release the 
Print Fonts/Test key. 



\ 




/ 




05 SELF TEST 




/ 




\ 




D Hold down Print Fonts key 3 seconds 
until 05 SELF TEST appears in display 
window, then release. 



Q After about 30 seconds a one page 
self-test is printed. 



D Hold down the Print Fonts key for 
about 5 seconds until 04 SELF TEST 
appears in the display window. 



n After about 30 seconds a continuous 
self test begins printing. Now go to 
steps. 



n When printing stops, turn off the 
printer. 



n NOTE If above samples did not print, 
make sure you've removed the 
sealing tape (Section C, steps 7-10). 




D Font samples for the printer's internal 
fonts are printed. 









HD Keady 

CZI Manual 


\ 


/ 


^O^-iELF TEST 




/ 


\ 
















Online-.^ Cominue 
( ^eset 




Menu 




+ 


R \\ 










em\y-^^ Vf 


onts 




Enter 
Reset Menu 




- 


-W ^ 


^ 










© 


\ 




n Press the On Line key to stop the 
continuous self test. 04 will flash. A 
few more pages will print before the 
printer returns On Line. 



If problems persist, retry the steps on 
this page. If problems still persist 
contact your internal support 
organization or your HP dealer. 



B-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Ciioose a Lentromc! 

or serial interlace 

Centronics parallel is the factory default. If you know you want to use a Centronics parallel Interface, go to section ^) . 



A- 



C 
















































SEItW. PMMXD. 

_ 


-^« 


0\°i?o'o''o°<?o°/0(5 \SEXBai^^/ 5) 




I J 




(Rear View) 

NOTE: ENSURE PRINTER AND PC ARE TURNED "OFF ' BEFORE CONNECTING THE CABLE. 

Your printer communicates with your computer through an interface (sometimes called a "port") at 
each end. Refer to your PC's user documentation to determine the location and kinds of interfaces 
your PC has, or consult your dealer. Your LaserJet III printer provides both Centronics parallel and 
serial Interfaces. The interface connections are on the back of your printer. 

If your PC doesn't already have a Centronics parallel or serial interface, you may need to order 
and install a special interface card for your PC. 

For the HP Vectra, the part numbers are: 

Centronics parallel interface - HP24540B 
Serial interface - HP24541 B 

If you have a different type of computer, contact your dealer. 



® 



Use a Centronics parallel interface when: 

• Your printer is less than 10 feet (3 meters) from your computer. 

• You send primarily graphic information or soft fonts to the printer. 

• Your computer does not have an available serial interface. 




Graphic Information 



A typical parallel cable looks like this: 



Computers 



Computer End 



Parallel Cable 



Printer End 



HP Vectra 

IBM PC/AT/XT/PS2 

Compaq 

AT&T 



25 Pin Male 
Plug 



HP Part# 



Length 



HP92284A 



6.6' (2.0 m) 



36 Pin Male 
Plug 



D Choose the right cable for your computer. 

Did you decide on a Centronics parallel interface? If so, go toO* 



B-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




(continued 




B 



Use a serial Interface when: 

• Your printer must be more than 10 feet (3 meters) but less then 50 feet 
(15 meters) from your computer. 

• Your computer does not have an available Centronics parallel 
interface. 



A typical serial cable looks like this: 





- 


\if 


'■'''[-■ ■■ 


1 



Textual Information 



Computers 



Computer End 



Serial RS232 Cable 



Printer End 



IBM PC, PC/XT/PS 2 
& IBM Compatibles 
Compaq Portable 
AT&T 



25 Pin Female 

Plug 



HP Part# 



HP-17255D 
HP-92219J 



Length 



3.9' (1 .2 m) 
16.7' (5.0 m) 



25 Pin Male 

Plug 



HP Vectra 
IBM PC/AT & 
IBM Compatibles 
Compaq Deskpro 
286/386 



fooooo) 
\ o o o o J 

9 Pin Female 
Plug 



HP Part# 



HP24542G 



Length 



9.9' {3.0 m) 



25 Pin Male 
Plug 



HP Vectra 

(Dual Serial Card) 



25 Pin Male 
Plug 



HP Part# 



HP1 7255M 
HP1 3242-60010 



Length 



3.9' (1.2 m) 
16.7' (5.0 m) 



25 Pin Male 

Plug 



n Choose the right cable for your computer. 



Did you decide on a serial interface? If so, go to ^. 



B-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



S 





Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and then 
plug the cable into your computer and your printer. Use the wire 
clips to attach the cable to your printer. Note into which parallel port 
on your computer (e.g.,LPT1 or LPT2) you plug the cable; you will 
need this information later. When complete, turn your printer and 
your computer ON again. 



n Uise wire clips to attach Centronics 
parallel cable 



Configyre the control panel for a Centronics parallel interface 

Follow these steps Only to verify the Centronics parallel configuration setting. 



Step 


Press 


Printer Displays: (if not, press + or - until it does, 
and then press the Enter key.) 


1 


On Line 


00 READY (The On Line indicator goes out.) 


2 


Menu (Hold down for 
approximately 5 seconds.) 


AUTO CONT = OFF* "^ 


3 


Menu 


1/0= PARALLEL*^ 


4 


On Line 


00 READY (The On Line indicator lights.) 



Indicates the factory default. 



Now go to ^9 



B-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



'5' V 



^ClX^ 



Tl 




Make sure both your computer and printer are turned off, and then 
plug the cable into your computer and your printer. Use a small 
screwdriver (if necessary) to attach the cable to the printer. Note 
into which serial port on your computer (e.g., C0M1 or COM2) you 
plug the cable; you will need this information later. When complete, 
turn your printer and your computer ON again. 



n Attach the serial cable connector to 
the serial I/O port on the back of the 
printer. (You may need to use a small 
screwdriver). 



Step 


Press 


Printer Displays: (if not, press + or - until it does, 
and then press the Enter key.) 


1 


On Line 


00 READY (The On Line indicator goes out.) 


2 


Menu (Hold down for 
approximately 5 seconds.) 


AUTO CONT = OFF* ^ 


3 


Menu 


I/O = PARALLEL* 1- 


4 


+ (Plus) or- (Minus) 


1/0 = SERIAL 


5 


Enter 


1/0 = SERIAL* 


6 


Menu 


SERIAL =RS-232*^ 


7 


Menu 


BAUD RATE =9600*^ 


8 


Menu 


ROBUSTXON = ON*^ 


9 


Menu 


DTRPOLA,RITY = HI*^ 


10 


On Line 


00 READY (The On Line indicator lights.) 



Indicates the factory default. 



If you are going to use serial RS-422 cable, refer to Appendix F, "Interfaces", in the LaserJet III User's Manual (P/N 33449-90901 ). 



B-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 






W 



iit ¥ 



MTTOEXRO KAT fl 



,N 






The following procedure: 

• Puts the instructions your computer needs to be able to talk to the printer into a file 
called AUTOEXEC.BAT. 

• Uses the EDLIN editor that comes with DOS. 

• Works with either MS-DOS or PC-DOS operating systems. Most IBM and 
IBM-compatible computers use one of these operating systems. If your computer 
does not use either MS-DOS or PC-DOS, contact your computer dealer for 
configuration instructions. 



/I 






im 



step 


What to Do 


How to Do K 

(Type the command in this procedure and press the Return 
key, as indicated by Q.) 


1 


Turn on your printer. 




2 


Turn on your computer. 




3 


Make sure you are in the root 
directory of the disk from which 
you boot your computer. 


CD\(B 


4 


Check to see if the 
AUTOEXEC.BAT file appears in 
the listing. 


DIR AUTOEXEC.BAT (El 


5 


If the message "File not found" 
appears, go to step 7. 





6 


Make a backup copy of your 
existing AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 
NameitAUTOEXEC.SAV.* 


COPY AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC. SAV Q 



7 


Look for the files M0DE.COM 
and EDLIN.COM in your root 
directory.** 


DIR *.COM (El 


8 


If M0DE.COM and EDLIN.COM 
appear in the directory listing, 
goto dJ. 




9 


tfMODE.COM and EDLIN.COM 
do not appear 
in the directory listing, copy 
them from your DOS disks to 
your root directory. 


Place your DOS disk in drive A and type the following 

commands: 

COPY A: MODE. COM (E) 

copy A: EDLIN. CON (El 


10 


Goto 0. 





*tf you need to recover your original AUTOEXEC.BAT fife later, type: COPY AUTOEXEC.SAV AUTOEXEC.BAT 
**MODE.GOM and EDUN.COM are on your original DOS disks. If you have a hard disk, these files may be in a subdirectory. 



B-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 







If you have an ASCII text editor, you may want to use it instead of Ediin to enter the correct MODE 
commands. You must be able to save your AUTOEXEC.BAT file as a standard ASCII text file. 

If your parallel port has a name other than "LPT1" or "LPT2" - or if your serial port has a name other 
than "COM1 or COM2" - substitute that name in the examples below. 

Type EDLIN AUTOEXEC.BAT and press return. Your screen should look like one of the following: 







C> EDLIN AUTOEXEC.BAT 

END OF INPUT FILE 

* 








C> EDLIN AUTOEXECBAT 

NEW FILE 

* 




If your SCI 


een looks like this, follow column A instru 


ctions. 


If your screen look like this, follow column B instructions. 


Column A 


Column B 


A-1 


Type L and press [Enter] to list the contents of the file. Any 
time the * prompt is displayed, you can type L to list the 
contents of your file. 


B-1 


Type 1 i and press [Enter]. This will allow you to insert a new 
line 1.1:* will appear. This prompt allows you to enter data 
on the indicated line. 


A-2 


If there are no existing MODE or PATH commands (lines 
beginning with the word MODE or PATH) in your file, go to 
step B-1 in Column B. 


B-2 


Type either the parallel or serial MODE command(s) 
(whichever is correct for your application), pressing [Enter] 
at the end of each line 

For Parallel configuration, type the MODE command: 
MODE LPT1:„P and press [Enter] 

For Serial configuration, type the MODE commands: 
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P and press [Enter] 
MODE LPT1 :=C0M1 and press [Enter] 


A-3 


If the existing MODE command(s) are correct, no change is 
required. Type E to exit and press [Enter]. Go to section "N". 

For Parallel configuration, the MODE command should be: 
M0DELPT1:„P 

For Serial configuration, the MODE commands should be; 
MODE COM1 :9600,N,8,1 >P 
MODELPT1:=COM1 


B-3 


After the MODE commands have been entered, hold the 
CTRL key down and type C to add the line(s) to the file. 


A-4 


H there are existing MODE commands which improperly 
configure the communications port, they must be deleted. 

To delete one line, type the number of the line to be 
deleted, followed by D to delete the line, then type L to list 
the contents of the file and press [Enter] to initiate the 
command (e.g., type sDLand press [Enter] to delete line 5 
and list the contents of the file.) 


B-4 


Type Land press [Enterjto list the contents of the file, inspect 
the new lines carefully to ensure that no typographical errors 
have been made. 


B-5 


If you have made an error, type the line number of the line 
and press [Enter]. Then re-type the line correctly and press 
[Enter]. Repeat steps B-4 and B-5 until all items are correct. 


A-5 


Once the incorrect mode commands have been removed, if 
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains no PATH command (a line 
beginning withPATH), proceed to step B-1 . 


&e 


Once all of the edits have been made, type E and press 
[Enter] to exit and save. 


If your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains a PATH command, the 
mode commands should be inserted after the PATH line. 
Type the number following the PATH line, type i and press 
[Enter] (e.g., if the PATH command is on line 1 , type 21 and 
press [Enter]), Proceed with step B-2. 


B-7 


Fteboot your computer by holding down the CTRL, ALT and 
DEL keys. This initiates your new AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 



If you need to leave the EDLIN utility before editing or without saving your edits: 
If you are at #:* (e.g.,1 ;*), hold down the CTRL key and type C. 
If you are at an * , then type Q and press [Enter]. 



B-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




1 . Make sure your computer and printer are on. and your printer is on-line. 

2. At your MS-DOS prompt, type DIR > PRN and press ©. 

3. The computer sends a list of the files to your LaserJet III printer. When the Form Feed 
indicator lights, the printer has received data. Press the On Line key to take the printer off-line 
and press the Form Feed key to eject the page. 

4. Press the On Line key to put the printer back on-line and prepare it to receive more data. 

5. If you are having trouble, go to @ . 




Congratulations ! 



You're Done! 

Now you can set up your software to work 
with your new LaserJet III printer. 



B-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 




• Was your computer or printer on when you connected your interface cable? 

- Turn off your computer and printer, wait 1 5 seconds, and turn tliem on again. Continue with ^ . 

• Is the interface port configured correctly? 

- Your cable may not be connected to LPTI for a parallel interface or C0M1 for a serial interface. 
Try working through © , (J> , and again, substituting LPT2 if you have a parallel interface, 
or COM2 if you have a serial interface. 

• Are all of the cables and power cords attached properly? 

- Check all of the connections. 

• Is the On Line indicator on the printer control pane! lit? 

- If not, press the On Line key. 

• Isthe printer working properly? Run the self-test described in ^. 

- If necessary, call your HP Dealer or HP Sedes Representative. 

• Is your computer working properly? 

- Run an application that works. 

- If necessary, call your computer dealer or manufacturer. 

• Have you set up the control panel properly? 

- Hold down the Menu key for about 5 seconds until the AUTO CONT= OFF* appears in the 
display window. Then step through the configuration settings. 

- If necessary, repeat ^ for a parallel interface or Q for a serial interface, and continue through 
the rest of this Guide. 

• Have you set up your AUTOEXEC.BAT file properly? 

- Type TYPE AUTOEXEC . BAT on your computer and press ©. Check the listing for errors 
in the line or lines you added. 

- If necessary, repeat 0, (J> , and U . 

• Do you have tha correct printer cable? 

- Check for a parallel interface or serial interface cables. 

- If necessary, obtain the correct cable. 



If you still need help... 



„ Call the HP Dealer from whom you 

Consult your LaserJet III User's Manual. purchased your LaserJet III. 



Enter your Dealer's number here: 



Call Hewlett-Packard's Personal 
Peripherals Assist Line for help. 





<208) 323-2551 



7:00 am. to 6:00 p.m. Mountain time 
(7:00 am. to 4:00 p.m. Wednesday) 



B-18 



HP 3344S MEiiORY BOARD IPIST^LLMIOM 



.f^^t^^p 



G®ot©riis 



Fiqyn 



c 



Co HP 33449 Pi/IEMOEY BGASD MSTALLATION 

GENERAL C-3 

PROTECT THE BOARD AND YOURSELF C-3 

IDENTIFY THE BOARD C-4 

INSTALL THE BOARD C-5 

TEST INSTALLED BOARD C-7 

IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY C-8 S 

MEMORY BOARD REMOVAL C-8 \ ?, 



C-1. Memory Board Identification ^-^ 

C-2. Removing RAM Expansion Access Cover C-5 

C-3. Metal Cover Plate Removal C-6 

C-4. Installing a Board C-6 

C-5. Seating Board C-7 

C-6. Removing Board C-8 



r? 



1 



C-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



C-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



For installation of expansion RAM memory for the HP 33440 (1 Mbyte, P/N 33443; 2 Mbyte, P/N 
33444; 4 Mbyte, P/N 33445), see the instrustions packaged with the boards. The information 
below appears as Appendix E in the LaserJet III User's Manual 

Installation of the HP 33474B one-megabyte or HP 33475B two-megab3i;e RAM memory 
board allows the HP 33449 printer's standard memory to be expanded up to an additional four 
megabytes. Any combination of one- or two-megabyte boards -up to a maximum of four megabytes 
of expanded memory- can be installed in either of the printer's two memory expansion slots. 
Additional printer memory allows page protection to be implemented, more data to be stored in 
the page buffer, more soft fonts to be downloaded, and more macros to be defined. 

i^lote For the HP 33449 printer, use only revision "B" or later memory boards (that is, 

I HP 33474B and HP33475B). 

^? If the board is to be installed in a device other than the HP 33449 printer, consult 

the manual for that device. 






Since the memory board contains electrical components easily damaged by small amounts of static 
electricity, the following cautions should be observed: 

■ If possible, use an antistatic wrist strap and a grounding mat such as those included in the 
Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit (HP 9300-0933). 

OR 

Before removing the board from its antistatic bag, touch the surface of the bag and any bare 
sheet metal surface on the printer. Maintain contact with bare metal surfaces on the printer 
frame while handling the board. 

■ To prevent static electricity buildup, avoid activities such as moving about the work area, 
especially if it is carpeted. 

■ Handle the board carefully at all times. Avoid touching board components. Never flex or put 
excessive pressure on it. 

Hazardous voltages are present in the printer. Never remove any access cover 
or work near exposed electrical parts while power is connected. 



C-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



3r% 



IDEI^TiFY THE BC 

Before installation, identify the board. 

1. For part numbers, refer to Figure C-1 and the table below (XXXXX indicates that the last five 
digits are manufacturing numbers that may change). 



J'affel*Jtomber 


Size 


33474-XXXXX 


1 Megabyte 


33475-XXXXX 


2 Megabyte 



2. If you have not received the correct board, notify Hewlett-Packard or your authorized dealer 
immediately. 

3. If the board will not be installed immediately, place it in a cool, dry place in its original 
packaging. 





^^^ 


33474-XXXXX 




33475-XXXXX 



Figure C-1. iVIeroory Board idenlificatk 



C-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 






B^\RD 



The following section describes procedures for the removal of two cover plates, insertion of the 
board(s), and the replacement of the cover plates. Unless otherwise noted, replacement is the 
reverse of removal. A screwdriver (flat-blade or Phillips) is needed. 



..J 



First, read all instructions carefully. Make sure all procedures are 
imderstood before beginning installation. 



1. Switch printer OFF and unplug power cord. 

2. In order to remove the plastic RAM Expansion access cover on the printer's left side base, 
position the printer so that its left side overhangs a supporting surface by approximately one 
inch (see Figure C-2). 




r 

r 



I- ', 



Figyrs C-2. Removing VkkM Expansion Access Cover 









The printer weighs over 50 pounds. If necessary, ask for assistance in moving 
it about the work area. 



3. Remove the plastic RAM Expansion access cover by inserting the tip of your finger in the 
slot under the center of the lower q^%^, then pulling the plate outward and downward (see 
Figure C-2). 



C-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

4. Loosen the three captive screws (they cannot be removed) securing the metal cover plate (see 
Figure C-3). Grasp the metal tab and slide the plate to the left (rear), then remove it by pulling 
on the tab. To discharge static electricity which could damage the board or sensitive internal 
printer components, maintain contact with bare sheet metal printer surfaces during installation. 




5. To install the first board, remove it from its antistatic packaging (be sure to follow antistatic 
procedures previously mentioned) and hold it with the surface to which the components are 
attached up. SUde the board into the printer using the slot guide rails (see Figure C-4). Be sure 
the board is within the guide rails. 



Although a single board may be installed in either the forward or rear slot, the 
forward slot is suggested for the first board. 




Figure C-4. Installing a Board 



C-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

6. To fully seat the board, hold the printer with your free hand, then firmly push against the 
board's flat green plastic area (see Figure C-5). 

7. If a second board is to be installed, insert it into the empty slot in the same manner. Be sure 
to jarmly push against the green plastic area to properly seat the board's pin connector as 
described in step 6. 




Figure C-5» Sealing Board 



8. To replace the metal cover plate, first place the left slot behind the left screw, then align the 
center slot over the center screw and push in until the plate is flush with the base. Next, slide 
the plate to the right as far as possible (until the right-most screw is engaged), and tighten the 
three screws. Replace the plastic cover. 



Uit 



With the power switch OFF, plug in the power cord, then switch the printer ON. (Depending 
upon the amount of installed memory, the printer may take up to 55 seconds to reach on-line 

status.) 



Run a 05 SELF TEST by taking the printer off line, then holding down the (print fonts/test] 
key until 05 SELF TEST is displayed (about three seconds). When the printing portion of the test 
begins, 06 PRINTING TEST will be displayed. If the board is operating correctly, the self-test 
printout will show one of the RAM size messages in the Self-Test Message Table below. 

SELF-TEST MESSAGE TABLE 



Forward slot 


Rear slot 


RAM Size Message 


1 M 


None 


RAM size: 2048K bytes 


2 M 


None 


RAM size: 3072K bytes 


1 M 


1 M 


RAM size: 3072K bytes 


2 M 


1 M 


RAM size: 4096K bytes 


1 M 


2 M 


RAM size: 4096K bytes 


2 M 


2 M 


RAM size: 5120K bytes 



C-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



IN CASE OF DIFFSCULTY 

If RAM size is incorrectly reported, repeat steps 1 through 8, checking to be sure the memoiy 
board pin connectors are firmly seated. The foUowing error messages may appear: 

■ 63-1 ERRORUNIT or 53-2 ERRORUNIT: Indicates an error on a RAM expansion board. The 
number following the dash indicates which expansion board failed (1 indicates the board in the 
right (front) slot, 2 the left (rear) slot). If this error appears, notify Hewlett-Pack ard or your 
authorized dealer for assistance. (The user may resume printing by dicking the (continue) key.) 

■ 57-1 ERRORUNIT or 67-2 ERRORUNIT: Indicates that more than four megabytes of expanded 
memoiy have been installed. The extra memory, in one megabyte increments, in the indicated 
slot (1 or 2) will be ignored, but up to four megabytes total wiU be used. To resume printing, 
click the f continue] key. 

■ 63 SERVICE ERROR: If this message appears, a board may be defective or incorrectly installed. 
First, attempt to clear the error by switching the printer off and then on again. If this does not 
clear the error, switch the printer OFF and check to be sure the board is seated properly. If this 
error still appears, notify Hewlett-Packard or your authorized dealer for assistance. 



MEMORY BOARD REMOVAL 

To remove a board, first access it by repeating steps 2 through 4 in the "Install the Board" section. 
Then unseat it (see Figure C-6) by squeezing the green tabs together while pulling toward you. 
Place the board in antistatic packaging. 




Figure C-6. Removing Board 



C-8 



D. 



iC 



D 



OVERVIEW D-3 

PARALLEL INTERFACE D-3 

SERIAL INTERFACE D-4 

CABLING SCHEMATICS D-5 



D-1. Typical PC/XT (and compatible) and PS/2 pin assignments D-5 

D-2. Typical AT (and compatible) pin assignments D-5 

D-3. Typical RS-422A 25-25 pin assignments D-6 



D-1. Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments 

D-2. RS-232-C and RS-422A Pin Assignments and Signal Descriptions. 



D-3 
D-4 



D-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



D-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers support an RS-232-C serial interface, an RS-422A 
differential serial interface, and a Centronics parallel interface. The back of the printer has two 
connectors, parallel and serial, allowing you to connect one of the three interfaces. 

Use the Control Panel Configuration Menu to configure the interface. The printer stores 
configuration information in non-volatile RAM, which means the printer saves the configuration 
even if you turn off the printer. For more detailed information, see the LaserJet series U Printer 
Technical Reference Manual or the LaserJet III Printer Technical Reference Manual 



PARALLEL INTERFACE 

To configure your printer for parallel I/O operation, use the Configuration Menu and the 
instructions in the pamphlets, Your Road Map to setting up Your LaserJet series II Printer (see 
Appendix A) or Your Guide to Setting Up Your LaserJet III Printer (see Appendix B). When you 
configure your printer for parallel operation, you can send data to the printer using the Centronics 
parallel communication protocol. Table D-1 lists the signals and pin designations used for parallel 
communication. 

Table D-1. Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments. 



Signal 


Pin 


Pin 


Signal 


-Strobe (Input) 


1 


19 


Strobe Return (GND) 


Data 1 (Input) 


2 


20 


Data 1 (GND) 


Data 2 (Input) 


3 


21 


Data 2 (GND) 


Data 3 (Input) 


4 


22 


Data 3 (GND) 


Data 4 (Input) 


5 


23 


Data 4 (GND) 


Data 5 (Input) 


6 


24 


Data 5 (GND) 


Data 6 (Input) 


7 


25 


Data 6 (GND) 


Data 7 (Input) 


8 


26 


Data 7 (GND) 


Data 8 (Input) 


9 


27 


Data 8 (GND) 


-Acknlg (Output) 


10 


28 


Acknlg Return (GND) 


Busy (Output) 


11 


29 


Busy Return (GND) 


Paper error (Output) 


12 


30 


Signal GND 


Select (Output) 


13 


31 


-Input Prime (Input) 


NC 


14 


32 


-Nfault (Output) 


NC 


15 


33 


Auxoutl (Output) 


VDC 


16 


34 


NC 


Chassis GND 


17 


35 


Auxout2 (Output) 


+ 5 VDC (output) 


18 


36 


NC 



The dash (-) before some signals indicates that the signal is negative true (active LOW). GND 
means the connection is a ground. NC indicates that the pin has no connection. 



D-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



SERIAL INTERFACE 

Use the Configuration Menu and the instructions in either Appendix A or Appendix B to configure 
your printer for serial I/O operation. When you configure your printer for serial operation, you 
transfer data to the printer using serial communication protocol. You can use either RS-232-C or 
RS-422A cable. 

Table D-2 lists RS-232-C and RS-422A pin assignments and signal descriptions. Those pins not 
appearing in the table are not used. 



Table D-2. RS-232-C and RS-422A Pin Assignments and Signal Descriptions. 



Pin Number 


.■■;■ Description ;:;^; 


RS-232-C 


RS-422 


I/O 


1 


Protective ground (shield). 


I 


I 


- 


2 


Transmitted data (data from the printer). 


* 




Output 


3 


Received data (received by the printer). 


* 




Input 




Received data inverted (RDA) (received by 
printer) 




* 


Input 


4 


Request to send. This signal is HIGH whenever 
the printer is powered ON. 


* 




Output 


5 


Clear to send. This signal is not required for 
the printer to transmit flow control characters, 
(DC1/DC3). 


* 




Input 


6 


Data set ready. This signal is not required for 
the printer to receive data. 


* 




Input 


7 


Signal ground. 


* 


* 




9 


Send data inverted (SDA). 




* 


Output 


10 


Send data noninverted (SDB). 




* 


Output 


18 


Receive data noninverted (RDB). 




* 


Input 


20 


Data terminal ready. (Polarity can be set from 
the printer Control Panel. Normally set to HI. 
Refer to host interface specifications for polarity 
requirements.) 


* 




Output 



The asterisks identify signals that are used. 



D-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



The following serial cabling schematics are typical of IBM (AT/XT) and compatible personal 
computers using the standard (9/25) pin serial RS-232-C interface. 



172SSD 

1.2m (4.0 ft) 

25-25 pin 

RS 232 C 



Printer 
25 pin M 



CPU 

25 pin F 



2 

3 -♦■ 

5 -<" 

6 ^*- 

7 -♦- 
20 



3 
2 

20 

7 
■ 5 
■6 



LaserJet side Is always 25 pin male- 

Typicai 25 pin to 25 pin RS-232C Connection (DTE to Printer) 



Figure D-1. Typical PC/XT (and compatibSe) and PS/2 pin assignments 



24S42G 

3.0 m (9.9ft) 
9-25 pin 
RS232C 



CPU 
SpinF 



Printer 
25 pin M 



1 -*- 
2-*- 

3 — 

4 



8-«- 

7 



4 
2 
3 
5 
6 
7 
20 



Typical 9 pin to 25 pin RS-232C Connection 



Figure D-2. Typical AT (and compatible) pin assignments 



D-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

The following cabling schematic is based on an HP Vectra PC with an HP24541B RS-422A 
interface card installed. Your configuration may vary. 



RS422A 

Printer HOST 

25 pin M 25 pin M 

1 NC 

2 NC 

3 -RDA SDA — 9 

4 NC 

7 SG SG- — 7 

10 SDB ROB —18 

18- — RDB SOB- — 10 

20 NC 

9 SDA RDA— 3 

Typical 25 pin to 25 pin RS-422 Connection (DTE to Printer) 



Figure 0-3= Typical RS-422A 25-25 p'm assignments. 



D-6 



c 



HP 



40/HP 3344S PBIMTER OOHMANOi 



-^^ 



iients 

HP S3440/HF SS44g PRINTEM COMMANDS 

GENEEAL E-3 

PCL PRINTER COMMANDS E-3 

PCL5 HP-GL/2 PRINTER COMMANDS (HP 33449 ONLY) E-11 

CONTROL CODES E-15 

ROMAN-8 CHARACTER CONVERSION TABLE E-16 






E-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



E-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



MEF 



In the printer command summary which follows, the portions which are in color are HP 
33449-specific. The portions in white apply to hoth printers. The HP 33440 uses the PCL4 Printer 
Command Language. The HP 33449 uses the PCL5 Printer Command Language. 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


JOB CONTROL COMMANDS 


RESET 


RESET 


— 


EcE 


027 069 




IB 45 




NUMBER OF COPIES 


#ofCopies(1-99) 


Ec&/#X (x) 


027 038 108 #...# 088 


020) 


1B266C#...#58 


(78) 


LONG-EDGE (LEFT) 


# of Declpolnts (1/720") 


Eo&/#U : (u) 


027 038 108 #...#085 


(117) 


1B266C#...#55 


(75) 


OFFSET REGISTRATION 














SHORT-EDGE (TOP) 


#QfDecipolnts (1/720") 


Ec&/#Z (z) 


027 038 108 #...#090 


022) 


1B266C#...#5A 


(7A) 


OFFSET REGISTRATION 














PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS 


PAGE LENGTH and SIZE 


PAPER SOURCE 


Eject Page 


Ec&ZOH (h) 


027 038 108048072 


O04) 


IB 26 60 3048 


(68) 




Paper Tray Auto Feed 


Ec&/1H (h) 


027 038 108 049 072 


004) 


IB 26 6C 31 48 


(68) 




Manual Feed 


EC&/2H (h) 


027 038 108050072 


004) 


IB 26 60 32 48 


(68) 




Manual Envelope Feed 


EC&/3H (h) 


027 038108051072 


004) 


IB 26 60 33 48 


(68) 


PAGE SIZE 


Executive 


EC&/1A (a) 


027 038108049065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 31 41 


(61) 




Letter 


EC&/2A (a) 


027038 108 060065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 32 41 


(61) 




Legal 


EC&/3A (a) 


027 038 108 051065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 33 41 


(61) 




A4 


EC&/26A (a) 


027 038 108 050 054 065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 32 36 41 


(61) 


(Envelopes) 


Monarch 


EC&/80A (a) 


027 038 108 056048 065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 38 30 41 


(61) 




COMIC 


EC&/81A (a) 


027 038 108056 049 065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 38 31 41 


(61) 




DL 


EC&/90A (a) 


027 038 108057 048 065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 39 30 41 


(61) 




C5 


EC&/91A (a) 


027 038 108057 049 065 


(97) 


IB 26 6C 39 31 41 


(61) 


PAGE LENGTH 


# of Lines 


Ec&/#P (p) 


027 038 108 #...# 080 


Of 2) 


1B266C#...#50 


(70) 


ORIENTATION 


ORIENTATION 


Portrait 


EC&/0O (o) 


027 038 108048 079 


Oil) 


1B26 6C30 4F 


(6F) 




Landscape 


Ec&ZlO (o) 


027 038108049 079 


Oil) 


1B26 6C314F 


(6F) 




Reverse Portrait 


EC&/20 : (0) 


027 038 108050079 


011) 


lB2e6C324F 


(6F) 




Reverse Landscape 


EC&/30 (p) 


027 038 108051079 


Oil) 


lB26603a4F 


(6F) 


: PRINT DIRECTION 


# Degrees of Rotation 
(coiinterclockw/ise,; 
90° increments only) 


Ec&a#P 


027038 097 #.:,.# 080 


012) 


18 26 61 #...#50 


(70) 



Values in the parentheses identify the lovi/er case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUli 


HEXADEdMAL 

:.:■:■>■■ ■■■■ivrWU.UE.-:-: /:■■■:■ 


MARGINS and TEXT LENGTH 


TOP MARGIN 


# of Lines 


Ec&/#E (e) * 


027 038 108 #...# 069 


(101) 


1B26 6C#.,.#45 


(65) 


TEXT LENGTH 


# of Lines 


Ec&/#F (f) 


027 038 108 #...#070 


(102) 


1B26 6C#...#46 


(66) 


LEFT MARGIN 


# of Columns 


Ec&a#L (1) 


027 038 097 #...#076 


(108) 


IB 26 61 #...#4C 


(6C) 


RIGHT MARGIN 


# of Columns 


Ec&a#M (m) 


027 038 097 #...#077 


(109) 


IB 26 61 #...#4D 


(6D) 


CLEAR 


— 


Eo9 


027 057 




IB 39 




HORIZONTAL MARGINS 














PERFORATION SKIP MODE 


PERFORATION SKIP 


Disable 


EC&/0L (1) 1 027 038 108048 076 


(108) 


1B26 6C304C 


(6C) 




Enable 


Ec&ZlL (1) 027 038 108 049 076 


(108) 


1B26 6C314C 


(6C) 




HORIZONTAL COLUMN SPACING 








HORIZONTAL 


#of 1/120" Increments 


Eo&k#H (h) 


027 038 107 #...#0 48072 


(104) 


1B26 6B#...#4B 


(68) 


MOTION INDEX (HMJ) 














VERTICAL LINE SPACING 


VERTICAL MOTION 


# of 1 /48" Increments 


Eca/tfC (c) 


027 038 108 #...# 048 076 


(99) 


1B26 6C#...#43 


(63) 


INDEX (VMI) 














LINE SPACING 


1 line/ inch 


Ec&/1D (d) 


027 038 108 049 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 31 44 


(64) 


(Lines per inch) 


2 lines/ inch 


EC&/2D (d) 


027 038 108050 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 32 44 


(64) 




3 lines/ inch 


EC&/3D (d) 


027 038 108051068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 33 44 


(64) 




4 lines/inch 


EC&/4D (d) 


027038 108 052 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 34 44 


(64) 




6 lines /inch 


EC&/6D (d) 


027 038 108 054 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 36 44 


(64) 




8 lines /inch 


EC&/8D (d) 


027 038 108 056068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 38 44 


(64) 




12 lines/ Inch 


EC&/12D (d) 


027 038 108 049 050 068 


(100) 


1B26 6C31 32 44 


(64) 




16 lines/ inch 


EC&/16D (d) 


027 038 108 049054 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 31 36 44 


(64) 




24 lines/ inch 


EC&/24D (d) 


027 038 108050 052 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 32 34 44 


(64) 




48 lines/ inch 


EC&/48D (d) 


027 038 108 052 056 068 


(100) 


IB 26 6C 34 38 44 


(64) 


CURSOR POSITIONING 


VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL 


VERTICAL POSITION 


# of Rows 


Ec&a#R (r) 


027 038 097 #...#082 


(114) 


IB 26 61 #...#52 


(72) 




# of Dots 


Ec*p#Y (y) 


027 042 112 #...#089 


(121) 


IB 2A 70 #...#-59 


(79) 




# of Oecipoints 


Ec&a#V (v) 


027 038 097 #...# 086 


(118) 


IB 26 61 #...#56 


(76) 


HORIZONTAL POSITION 


# of Columns 


Ec&a#C (c) 


027 038 097 #...#067 


(99) 


IB 26 61 #...#43 


(63) 




# of Dots 


Ec*p#X (X) 


027 042 112 #...#088 


(120) 


IB 2A 70 #...#58 


(78) 




# of Decipoints 


Ec&a#H f/?; 


027 038 097 #...#072 


(104) 


IB 26 61 #...#48 


(68) 


HALF LINE FEED 




Ec = 


027 061 




IB 3D 





Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


END-OF-LINE TERMINATION 


LINE TERMINATION 


CR=CR; LF=LF; 
FF=FF 


Ec&kOG (g) 


027 038 107 048 071 


no3) 


IB 26 6B 30 47 


(67) 




GR=CR+LF; 


Ec&klG (g) 


027 038 107 049 071 


(103) 


IB 26 6B 31 47 


(67) 




LF=LF; FF=FF 














GR=CR; 


Ec&k2G (g) 


027 038 107 050 071 


(103) 


1B26 6B32 47 


(67) 




LF=CR+LF; 














FF=CR+FF 














CR=CR+LF; 


Ec&k3G (g) 


027 038 107 051071 


(103) 


IB 26 6B 33 47 


(67) 




LF=CR+LF; 














FF=CR+FF 












PUSH /POP POSITION 


PUSH/ POP POSITION 


Push 


Ec&fCS (s) 


027 038 102 048 083 


(115) 


IB 26 66 30 53 


(73) 




Pop 


Ec&fIS (s) 


027 038 102 049 083 


(115) 


IB 26 66 31 53 


(73) 


FONT SELECTION 


SYMBOL SET SELECTIONt 


PRIMARY SYMBOL SET 


ISO 60: Norwegian 1 


Ec(0D (d) 


027 040048068 


(100) 


IB 283044 


(64) 




*1S061: Norwegian 2 


Ec(lD (d) 


027 040049068 


(100) 


IB 28 31 44 


(64) 




ISO 4: United Kingdom 


Ec(1E (e) 


027 040049 069 


(101) 


IB 28 31 45 


(65) 




*ISO 25: French (obsolete) 


Ec(OF (0 


027 040048 070 


(102) 


1B2830 46 


(66) 




ISO 69; French 


EcdF (0 


027 040049 070 


(102) 


1B 28 31 46 


(66) 




*HP German (obsolete) 


Ec(OG (g) 


027 040 048 071 


(103) 


IB 28 30 47 


(67) 




ISO 2 1 : German 


Ec(1G (g) 


027 040049 071 


(103) 


1B 28 31 47 


(67) 




ISO 15: Italian 


Ec(OI (i) 


027 040048 073 


(105) 


1B 28 30 49 


(69) 




♦ISO 14: JIS ASCII 


Ec(OK (k) 


027 040048 075 


(107) 


IB 28 30 4B 


(6B) 




*ISO 57: Chinese 


Ec(2K (k) 


027 040 050 075 


(107) 


1B28 32 4B 


(6B) 




ECMA-94 Latin 1 


Ec(ON (n) 


027 040048 78 


(110) 


IB 28 30 4E 


(6E) 




ISO 11: Swedish 


Ec((DS (s) 


027 040048083 


(115) 


IB 28 30 53 


(73) 




*HP Spanish (obsolete) 


Ec(1S (s) 


027 040 049 083 


(115) 


1B 28 31 53 


(73) 




ISO 17: Spanish 


Ec(2S (s) 


027 040 050083 


(115) 


1B 28 32 53 


(73) 




♦ISO 10: Swedish 


Ec(3S (s) 


027 040 051083 


(115) 


IB 28 33 53 


(73) 




♦ISO 16: Portuguese 


Ec(4S (s) 


027 040 052 083 


(115) 


IB 28 34 53 


(73) 




♦ISO 84: Portuguese 


Ec(5S (s) 


027 040 053083 


(115) 


IB 28 35 53 


(73) 




♦ISO 85: Spanish 


Ec(6S (s) 


027 040 054083 


(115) 


IB 28 36 53 


(73) 




ISO 6: ASCII 


Ec(0U (U) 


027 040 048 085 


(117) 


18 28 30 55 


(75) 




♦ISO 2: IRV 


Ec(2U (u) 


027 040 050 085 


(117) 


IB 28 32 55 


(75) 




Roman8 


Ec(8U (u) 


027 040 056 86 


(117) 


IB 28 38 55 


(75) 




PC-8 


EcdOU (u) 


027 040 049 048 085 


(117) 


IB 28 31 30 55 


(75) 




PC-8D/N 


Ec(11U (u) 


027 040 049 049 085 


(117) 


1B28 313155 


(75) 




PC 850 


Ec(12U (u) 


027 040 049 050085 


(117) 


IB 28 31 32 55 


(75) 



Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 

1- Additional symbol sets are supported. Refer to the LaserJet series 11 and the LaserJet III technical manuals. 
*These symbol sets are becoming low usage sets and are not recommended for future use. 
The Primary font printer commands in this table can be specified as secondary by replacing the left parenthesis"(" in 
the command with a right parenthesis")." 



E-5 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


':. 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


SPACING 


PRIMARY SPACING 


Proportional 


Ec{s1P (p) 


027 040 115 049080 


(112) 


IB 28 73 31 50 


(70) 




Fixed 


Ec(S0P (p) 


027 040115 048080 


(112) 


IB 28 7330 50 


(70) 


PITCH 


PRIMARY PITCH 


# Characters/ inch 


Ec{s#H (h) 


027 040 115 #...#072 


(104) 


IB 28 73 #...#48 


(68) 


SET PITCH MODE 


10.0 


Ec&kOS (s) 


027 038 107 048083 


(116) 


IB 26 6B 30 53 


(73) 




Compressed (16.5-16.7) 


Ec&k2S (s) 


027 038 107 050083 


(115) 


IB 26 6B 32 53 


(73) 




Elite (12.0) 


Ec&k4S (s) 


027 038107 052 083 


(115) 


IB 26 6B 34 53 


(73) 


POINT SIZE 


PRIMARY HEIGHT 


# Points 


Ec(s#V (v) 


027 040 115 #...#086 


(118) 


IB 28 73 #...# 56 


(76) 


STYLE 


PRIMARY STYLE 


Upright 


Ec(sOS (s) 


027 040 115048083 


(115) 


IB 28 73 30 53 


(73) 




Italic 


Ec(s1S (s) 


027 040 1 15 049 083 


(115) 


IB 28 73 31 53 


(73) 


The LaserJet III printer allows 


3 you to specify complex struclur 


es (contours, outlines, shading, etc.) and widths as well 


as posture. Refer to the LaserJet III j 


Technical Reference Manual 












STROKE WEIGHT 


PRIMARY FONT 


Ultra Thin 


Ec(s-7B 


027 040 115-055 066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -37 42 


(62) 


STROKE WEIGHT 


Extra Thin 


Ec(s-6B 


027 040 115-054 066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -3642 


(62) 




Thin 


Ec(s-5B 


027 040 115-063066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -35 42 


(62) 




Extra Light 


Ec(s-4B 


027 040 115-052 066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -34 42 


(62) 




Light 


Ec(s-3B 


027 040 115-051066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -33 42 


(62) 




Demi Light 


Ec(s-2B 


027 040 115-050066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -32 42 


(62) 




Semi Light 


Ec(s-1B 


027 040 115-049066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 -31 42 


(62) 




Medium (normal) 


Ec(sOB 


027 040 115 048066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 30 42 


(62) 




Semi Bold 


Ec(s1B 


027 040 115049066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 31 42 


(62) 




Demi Bold 


Ec(s2B 


027 040 115050066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 32 42 


(62) 




Bold 


Ec(s3B 


027 040 115051066 


(98) 


IB 28 733342 


(62) 




Extra Bold 


Ec(s4B 


027040 115 052066 


(98) 


IB 28 733442 


(62) 




Black 


Ec(s5B 


027 040 115053 066 


(98} 


IB 28 7335 42 


(62) 




Extra Blacl< 


Ec(s6B 


027 040 115054 066 


(98) 


IB 28 73 36 42 


(62) 




Ultra Black 


ec(s7B 


027 040 115055 066 


(98) 


IB 28 7337 42 


(62) 


PRIMARY TYPEFACE 


TYPEFACE 


Courier 


Eo(s3T (t) 


027040 115051084 


(116) 


IB 28 73 33 54 


(74) 




Univers 


Ec(s4148T (t) 


027 040 115 052 084 


(116) 


IB 28 73 34 54 


(74) 




LinePrinter 


Ec(s0T (t) 


027 040 1 15 048 084 


(116) 


IB 28 73 30 64 


(74) 




CG Times 


Ec(s4101T (t) 


027 040 1 15 053 084 


(116) 


IB 28 73 35 54 


(74) 


Many more typt 


3faces are supported. Refer 


to the LaserJet series 1! and the LaserJet 111 technical re 


jference manuals. 





Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 

The primary font printer commands in this table can be specified as secondary by replacing the left parenthesis "(" in the command wth a right 
parenthesis ")". 



E-6 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


FONT DEFAULT 


FONT DEFAULT 


Primary Font 


Ec(3@ 


027 040 051064 




IB 28 33 40 






Secondary Font 


Ec)3@ 


027 041051064 




IB 29 33 40 




UNDERLINE 


UNDERLINE 


Enable Fixed 


Ec&dOD (d) 


027 038 100048068 


(100) 


1B 26 64 30 44 


(64) 




Enable Floating 


Ec&d3D (d) 


027 038 100051068 


(100) 


1B 26 64 33 44 


(64) 




Disable 


Ec&d@ 


027 038 100 064 




1B 26 64 40 




TRANSPARENT PRINT 


TRANSPARENT 


# of Bytes 


Ec&p#X[Data] 


027 038 112 #...#088 




1B 26 70 #...#58 




PRINT DATA 














FONT MANAGEMENT 




ASSIGN FONT ID 


Font ID # 


Ec*c#D (d) 


027 042 099 #...# 068 


(100) 


IB 2A 63 #...#44 


(64) 


FONT AND GHARACIbH 


Delete all Fonts 


Ec*C0F (f) 


027 042 099 048 070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 30 46 


(66) 


CONTROL 


Delete all Temporary 

Fonts 


Ec*c1F W 


027 042 099 049 070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 31 46 


(66) 




Delete Last Font ID 


Ec*c2F (f) 


027 042 099 050070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 32 46 


(66) 




Specified 














Delete Last Character 


Eo*c3F (f) 


027 042 099051070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 33 46 


(66) 




Specified 














Mal<e Font Temporary 


Ec*c4F (0 


027 042 099 052 070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 34 46 


(66) 




Make Font Permanent 


Ec*c5F (f) 


027 042 099 053070 


(102) 


IB 2A 63 35 46 


(66) 




Copy/Assign the Currently : 


.:Ec*C6F : (f) 


027 042 099054 070 


(102) 


1B2A63 36 46 


(66) 




Invoked Font as Temporary 


■ . ; 










FONT SELECTION BY ID NUMBER 




SELECT FONT (with ID #) 


ID # Primary Font 


Ec(#X (X) 


027 040 #...#088 


(120) 


IB 28 #...# 58 


(78) 




ID # Secondary Font 


Ec)#X (x) 


027 041 #...#088 


(120) 


IB 29 #...# 58 


(78) 


SOFT FONT CREATION 


FONT DESCRIPTOR 


# of Bytes 


Ec)s#W[Data] 


027041 115 #...#087 




IB 29 73 #...#57 




(FONT HEADER) 














DOWNLOAD CHARACIhH 


# of Bytes 


Ec(s#W[Data] 


027 040 115 #...#087 




IB 28 73 #...#57 




CHARACTER CODE 


Character Code # (decimal) 


Ec*c#E (e) 


027 042 099 #...#069 


(101) 


1B2A63#...#45 


(65) 



Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-7 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


RARAMEtER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


GRAPHICS 


VECTOR GRAPHICS 


ENTER HP-GL/ 2 MODE 


Use Previous HP-GL/ 2 
Pen Position : 


.Ec%OB ■^■ 


027 037048 066 : 


m 


■IB 25 30 42; (62) 




UseCun-eritPCLCAP 


"E6%1B.-:.- 


027037049 066 


(98) 


1625:3142 ::r(m 


HP-GL/2PL0T 


Horizontal Size in Inches 


.Ec*c#K 


027d42099#.::#076 


(107) 


1B2A63#.;.#4B :(6El) 


HORIZONTAL SIZE 


■;;...-.. . . .. 


■ ■■■■.■■.■■■ ■■. ■■ 


.,■■'■ ■:■;.■■■"■■■.. ■^":■■■.■:■ ■" .■■"■:■ 




■"■■:.■":".:;...■■... ■ . ■ ■■■■;■:■■■■;;: 


HP-GL/2PL0T 


Vertical Size in inches 


..■Ec*c#L ■"':■'. 


027 042 099 #.^.#076 ^ 


<m 


1B2A63#...#4C f(5C; 


VERTICALSIZE 


■.■■'■ ■' . ..' " ".■"■.".- 




-.. ■ . :. ' .-...■.■ '.;■ :";■■■'-■■": 


■ . 
• -. ■ ■ 


■ .". ■■"■"■■^^ ■;■■ -.-. ';■■':."■;■ 


SET PICTURE FRAME 


Set AnchorPoint to CAP 


.Ec*cOt " V 


027 042099 048084 : 


(tm 


IB 2A 63 30 54 (74) 


ANCHOR POINT 


. -. .■ ■■ ■ ' ■■■. " 


■-.. ■ ■ ■ 


■■'■..'. ■■■■.■■.■ ■ ■ ■ - ■ 




■ . ■ ■• . ' ...,■:■•'. 


PICTURE FRAME 


becipoints 


Ec*<:#X 


027 042 99#;..#088 


(120) 


IB 2A 63 #...#58 (78) 


HORIZONTAL SIZE 






■■■..' ■.:.-.■■ ■ ' ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■■ 




.■.■■■■.■■■■, ■ ■■". ■■:.. ■ ..:■ 


PICTURE FRAME 


Decipoints 


Ec*c#Y . 


027 042 99 #...#089 


(121) 


1B2A63#..;#59 (79r^ 


VERTICAL SIZE 


■ .'.'.!'..-■ 




■■■.■■:■■■ 


■■-.-. .' ■ 


■■ ■■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■■.■.■■■ ■ '■'■: 


RASTER GRAPHICS 


RASTER RESOLUTION 


75 Dots /Inch 


Ec*t75R (r) 


027 042 116065053 082 


(114) 


1B2A74 37 35 52 (72) 




100 Dots /inch 


Ec*t10OR (r) 


027 042 1 1 6 049 048 048 082 


(114) 


IB 2A 74 31 30 30 52 (72) 




150 Dots/ inch 


Ec*t150R (r) 


027 042 1 1 6 049 053 048 082 


(114) 


IB 2A 74 3 135 30 52 (72) 




300 Dots/ inch 


Ec*t30OR (r) 


027 042 116 051 048 048 082 


(114) 


1B2A74 33 30 30 52 (72) 



Values in the parentheses identify the lowercase of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-8 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


PARAMETER 


COMMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 
VALUE 


RASTER GRAPHICS PRESENTATION 




RASTER GRAPHICS 
PRESENTATION 


Rotate Image 
LaserJet 
Landscape Compatible 


Ec*rOF (f) 
Ec*r3F (0 


027 042 114048070 
027 042 114 051070 


(102) 
(102) 


1B2A723046 
IB 2A 72 33 46 


(66) 
(66) 


START RASTER GRAPHICS 


Left Raster Graphics Margin 


Ec*rOA (a) 


027 042 114 048 065 


(97) 


IB 2A 72 30 41 


(61) 




Current Cursor 


Ec*r1A (a) 


027 042 114049 065 


(97) 


IB 2A 72 31 41 


(61) 


RASTER Y OFFSET 


# of Raster LineS: 
of Vertical Movement 


Ec*b#Y : (y) 


027 042 098 #...#089 


(120) 


IB 2A 62 #...#59 


(79) 


SET RASTER 
COMPRESSION MODE: 


Uncoded 

Run-Length Encoded 
Tagged Image File Format 
Delta Row 


Ec*bdM (m) 
Ec*blM (m) 
Ec*b2M : (m) 
Ec*b3M (m) 


027 042098 048077 
027 042 098 049077 
027 042098 050077 
027 042 098 051077 


(109) 
(109) 
(109) 
(109) 


1B2A62 30 41 
IB 2A 62 31 41 
1B2A62 32 41 
IB 2A 72 3341 


(6D) 
(6D) 
(6D) 
(6D) 


TRANSFER RASIbH DATA 


# of Bytes 


Ec*b#W[Data] 


027 042098 #...#087 




IB 2A 62 #...#57 




END RASTER GRAPHICS 


— 


Ec*rB (b) 


027 042 114 066 


(98) 


IB 2A 72 42 


(62) 


RASTER HEIGHT 


# Raster Rows 


Ec*r#T (t) 


027 042 1 14 #.,.# 084 


(116) 


IB 2A 72 #...#54 


(74) 


RASTER WIDTH 


# Pixels of the : 
Specified Resolution 


Eo*r#S (s) 


027 042 1 14 #...# 083 


(115) 


IB 2A 72 #...#53 


(73) 




THE PRINT MODEL 








IMAGING 




SELECT PATTERN 


Solid Black (default) ! 
Solid White 


. Ec*v0T '- 

■ ec*vit: 


027 042 118048 084 
027042 118049 084 


(116) 
(116) 


IB 2A 76 30 54 
IB 2A 76 31 54 


(74) 
(74) 




HP-defined Shading 


Ec*v2T 


027 042118050084 


(116) 


IB 2A 76 32 54 


(74) 




Pattern : , 
HPrdefined Cross-Hatched 


Ec*v3T 


027 042118051084 


(116) 


IB 2A 76 33 54 


(74) 




■ Pattern : . 












SELECT SOURCE 


Transparent 


Ec*vON 


027 042 118048078 


(110) 


IB 2A 76 31 42 


(6E) 


TRANSPARENCY MODE 


Opaque 


Ec*vlN 


027 042 118 049078 


(110) 


IB 2A 76 31 42 


(6E) 


SELECT PATTERN 


Transparent 


Ec*vOO 


027 042 118048079 


(111) 


IB 2A 76 30 43 


(6F) 


TRANSPARENCY MODE 


Opaque; 


Ec*vlO 


027 042 1 18 049 079 


(111) 


IB 2A 76 31 43 


(6F) 




RECTANGLE DIMENSIONS 




RECTANGLE WIDTH 
(Horizontal Size) 


# of Dots 

# of Decipoints 


Ec*c#A (a) 
Ec*c#H (h) 


027 042 099 #...#065 
027 042 099 #...# 072 


(97) 
(104) 


IB 2A 63 #...#41 
IB 2A 63 #...#48 


(61) 
(68) 


RECTANGLE HEIGHT 
(Vertical Size) 


# of Dots 

# of Decipoints 


Ec*c#B (b) 
Ec*C#V (v) 


027 042 099 #...#066 
027 042 099 #...#086 


(98) 
(118) 


IB 2A 63 #...#42 
IB 2A 63 #...#56 


(62) 
(76) 









Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the tennination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-9 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



FUNCTION 


pIarameter 


CdMRMAND 


DECIMAL VALUE 


HEXADECIMAL 

■ ■; .:^ ::VALUE . ; 


RECTANGULAR AREA FILL 


FILL RECTANGULAR AREA 


Solid Black 


Ec*COP 


027 042 099 048080 


(112) 


IB 2A 63 30 50 


(70) 




Erase (Solid White 


'.Ec*1P.... ■...-■ 


027 042 099049080 


(112) 


IB 2A 63 31 50 


(70) 




AreaFilD 








■■■■.■■■-.■. ■■ .:■■ ■ 






Shaded Fill 


Ec*c2P 


027 042 099 050080 


(112) 


IB 2A 63 32 50 


(70) 




Cross-hatched Fill 


Ec*c3P 


027 042 099 051080 


(112) 


1B2A 3333 50 


(70) 




User Defined 


Ec*c4P 


027042 099052080 


(112) 


1B2A63 34 50 


m 




Current Pattern 


Ec*c5P 


027042 099053080 


0^2) 


1B:2A63 35 50(70) 




PATTERN ID 


% of Shading or 
Type of Pattern 


Ec*C#G 


027 042 099 #...#071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 #...#47 


(67) 


SHADING 


2% Gray 


Ec*c2G (g) 


027 042 099 050071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 32 47 


(67) 




10% Gray 


Ec*c10G (g) 


027 042 099 049048 071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 31 30 47 


(67) 




15% Gray 


Ec*c15G (g) 


027 042 099 049053 071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 31 3547 


(67) 




30% Gray 


Ec*c30G (g) 


027 042 099 051048 071 


(103) 


1B2A63 33 3047 


(67) 




45% Gray 


Ec*c45G (g) 


027 042 099 052053 071 


(103) 


1B2A63 34 35 47 


(67) 




70% Gray 


Ec*c70G (g) 


027 042 099 055048 071 


(103) 


1B2A63 37 30 47 


(67) 




90% Gray 


Ec*c90G (g) 


027 042 099 057048 071 


(103) 


1B2A63 39 30 47 


(67) 




100% Gray 


Ec*c100G (g) 


027 042 099 049 048 048 07 1 


(103) 


1B2A 63 31 3030 47 


(67) 


PATTERN 


1 Horiz. Line 


Ec*clG (g) 


027 042 099049071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 31 47 


(67) 




2 Verl. Lines 


Ec*c2G (g) 


027 042 099050071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 32 47 


(67) 




3 Diagonal Lines 


Ec*c3G (g) 


027 042 099 051071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 33 47 


(67) 




4 Diagonal Lines 


Ec*c4G (g) 


027 042 099052 071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 34 47 


(67) 




5 Square Grid 


Ec*c5G (g) 


027 042 099053071 


(103) 


IB 2A 63 35 47 


(67) 




6 Diagonal Grid 


Ec*c6G (g) 


027 042 099054 071 


(103) 


1B2A63 36 47 


(67) 


MACROS 


MACRO ID 


Macro ID # 


Ec&f#Y (y) 


027 038 102 #...#089 


(121) 


IB 26 66 #...#59 


(79) 


MACRO CONTROL 


Start Macro Def. 


Ec&fOX (x) 


027038 102048 088 


(120) 


IB 26 66 30 58 


(78) 




Stop Macro Def. 


Ec&fiX (x) 


027 038 102 049 088 


(120) 


IB 26 66 31 58 


(78) 




Excecute Macro 


Ec&f2X (x) 


027 038 102 050 088 


(120) 


IB 26 66 32 58 


(78) 




Call Macro 


Ec&f3X (x) 


027 038 102051088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 33 58 


(78) 




Enable Overlay 


Ec&f4X (x) 


027 038 102052 088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 34 58 


(78) 




Disable Overlay 


Ec&f5X (x) 


027 038 102053 088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 35 58 


(78) 




Delete Macros 


Ec&f6X (x) 


027 038 102 054 088 


(120) 


IB 26 66 36 58 


(78) 




Delete All Temp. Macros 


Ec&f7X (x) 


027 038 102 055 088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 37 58 


(78) 




Delete Macro ID 


Ec&f8X (x) 


027 038 102 056 088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 38 58 


(78) 




Make Temporary 


Ec&f9X (x) 


027 038 102 057 088 


(120) 


1B 26 66 39 58 


(78) 




Make Permanent 


Ec&flOX (x) 


027 038 102 049 048088 


(120) 


16 26 66 3130 58 


(78) 


PROGRAMMING SWITCHES 


DISPLAY FUNCTIONS 


ON 


EcY 


027 089 




IB 59 






OFF 


EcZ 


027 090 




1B5A 




END-OF-LINE WRAP 


Enabled 


Ec&sOC (c) 


027 038 115 048067 


(99) 


IB 26 73 30 43 


(63) 




Disabled 


Ec&siC (c) 


027 038 115 049067 


(99) 


IB 26 73 31 43 


(63) 



Values in the parentheses identify the lower case of the termination character. This value 
is used if the printer command is combined. 



E-10 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



PCL5 HP-GL/2 PRIMTER CO^MA^DS IW 33449 ONLY) 



COMMAND 


MNEMONIC 


PARAMETERS* 


DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS 


ENTER PCL MODE 


Esc%#A 


- Retain previous PCL cursor position and pallette 

1 - Use current HPGL pen position and pallette 


RESET 


EscE 


None 


PRIMARY FONT 


F! 


Font_ID 


SECONDARY FONT 


FN 


Font_ID 


SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED 


SB 


- Scalable fonts only 


FONTS 




1 - Bitmapped fonts allowed 


PALETTE EXTENSIONS 


TRANSPARENCY MODE 


TR 


- Off (opaque) 

1 - On (transparent) - 


NUMBER OF PENS 


NP 


2,4,8 


SCREENED VECTORS 


SV ' 


[scre6n_fype[,shading[,index]]] 



HP-GL/2 Kernel 






VECTOR GROUP 






*Parameters in brackets are optional. 


ARC ABSOLUTE 


AA 




x_center,y_center,sweep_angle 
[.chord_angle]; . 


ARC RELATIVE 


AR 




x_increment,y_increnient,sweep_angle 
I,chord_angle]; 


ABSOLUTE ARC 


AT 




x_inter,y_jnter,x_end,y_end 


THREE POINT 






{.chord—angle]; 


PLOT ABSOLUTE 


PA 




[x.y ... [,x,y]j; 


PLOT RELATIVE 


PR 




[x,y ... [.x,y]l; 


PEN DOWN 


PD 




[x.y ... [,x,y]); 


PEN UP 


PU 




[x,y ... [.x,yj]; 


RELATIVE ARC 


RT 




x_jncr_inter,y_incr_inter,x_incr_end,y_incr-end ... 


THREE POINT 






[,chord_angle]; 


POLYLINE ENCODED 


■ 

PE ; 




[flag[val]tcoord_pair :.. [ftag[val]lcoprd_pair)]; 



E-11 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued) 


COMMAND 


MNEMONIC PARAMETERS* 


POLYGON GROUP 

*Parameters in brackets are optional. 


CIRCLE 


CI 




radius [.chord anglej; 


FILL RECTANGLE 
ABSOLUTE 


RA 




x_coordinate,y_coordinate; 


FILL RECTANGLE RELATIVE 


RR 




x_lncrement,y_increment; 


EDGE RECTANGLE 
ABSOLUTE 


EA 




x_coordinate,y_coordinate; 


EDGE RECTANGLE 
RELATIVE 


ER 




x_increment,y_jncrement; 


FILL WEDGE 


WG 




radius,start_angle,sweep_angte[,chord_angle]; 


EDGE WEDGE 


EW 




radlus,start._angle,sweep_angle[,chord_angfe]; 


POLYGON MODE 


PM 




polygon—definition; 


FILL POLYGON 


FP 




■ . ■ ■ . ■ . . . ...■■■■: :^ ■■■ ^.\ .. '■: 


EDGE POLYGON 


EP 




■ ■ ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■■ ■■■■■ ■■ ■ ■ .■■■■ ": :■: ■■ .-.■ .::■.■ 



E-12 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued) 


COMMAND 


MNEMONIC 


PARAMETERS* 


CHARACTER GROUP 

*Parameters in brackets are optional. 


SELECT STANDARD FONT 


SS 






SELECT ALTERNATE FONT 


SA 






ABSOLUTE DIRECTION 


Dl 




[run,rtse]; 


RELATIVE DIRECTION 


DR 




[run.rise]; 


ABSOLUTE CHAR AC IbH 
SIZE 


si 




twidth.height]; 


RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE 


SR 




[width.height]; 


CHARACTER SLANT 


SL 




[tangent_of_angle]; 


EXTRA SPACE 


ES 




[width [.height]] 


STANDARD FONT 
DEFINITION 


SD 




[kind.value ... [,kind,value]]; 


ALTERNATE FONT 
DEFINITION 


AD 




[kind.value ... [,kind,value]]; 


CHARACTER FILL MODE 


CF 




[fill_mode[,edge_pen]]; 


LABEL ORIGIN 


LO 




[position]; 


LABEL 


LB 




[char... [char]]lbterm 


DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR 


DT 




[1bterm[,mode]]; 


CHARACTER PLOT 


CP 




[spaces.Jines]; 


TRANSPARENT DATA 


ID 




[mode]; 


DEFINE VARIABLE TEXT 
PATH 


DV 




[path[,line]]: 



E-13 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



HP-GL/2 Kernel (continued) 


COMMAND 


MNEMONIC 


PARAMETERS* 


LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP 

^Parameters in brackets are optional. 


LINE TYPE 


LT 


||J|1||I1|||.|| 


[!ine_type[,paftern_length[,mode]]]; 


LINEATTRIBLITES 


LA 


51, 'J'S :f'|" ^-~;|j,>?;i :h|| |; 


[kind,value ... [.kind.vaiue]]; 


PENVWDTH 


PW 


■^i:P- ■£.:" ■ 2M "3?! ?:* S jlr " 


[width[,pen]]; 


PEN VWDTH UNIT 
SELECTION 


WU 


i\S.ls,.l|,-|#"l| 


ttypej: 


SELECT PEN 


SP 


■-'V. 'Ic'S''' 'R^^^C' '7'$='^ ;^'7- ■'.'Jr- . 


[penl; 


SYMBOL I^ODE 


SM 


i Ss/3iPiM-%.":& 


[char]; 


HLLTYPE 


R 


llll3.|r|v|iS 


[filLty pe[,optlon 1 [,option2]]]; 


>y*JCHOR CORNER 


AC 




[x_coordinate,y-„coordinate]; 


RASTER FILL DEFINITION 


RF 


?.."|i. "Ig: "-^ft '-gl;.. '? •|-':''-| 


[index[.width,height,pen_nbr ... pen_nbrl]; 


USER DEFINED LINE TYPE 


UL 


3l-:-^ll 5S. ll '11 tl 1 


[IndexLgapl ... gapn]]; 


CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP 

'"Parameters in brackets are optional. 


SCALE 


IM^ 


■■lI'llS ft llll 


[X 1 ,x2,y 1 ,y 2[.type[,left,bottom]]]; 

or 

[x 1 .xfactor.y 1 ,yfactor,2]; 


INPUT WINDOW 


X' 


S- *?$/?::%. "'0| .'tS,- P%' "^* 


[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR]; 


INPUT PI AND P2 


wm 


lllifcill- 


[p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]]; 


INPUT RELATIVE P1 AND P2 


ft'l 


iltllil-|. 


[p1x,p1y[.p2x,p2y]]; 


DEFAULT VALUES 


; DF \ 


■■;,■,,-''■;:.. ':":.!, ■■'■(. zi ■'-; ' '''\ 




INITIALIZE 


Wk: 


"S4'-s:??i-'^'S &: rMrif:-- 


[nl; 


ROTATE COORDINATE 
SYSTEM 


X'* 


w!%MM,%jmfi^ 


tangle]; 


ADVANCE FULL PAGE 


ipi 


iSlllS'i 


[n]; 


REPLOT 

- 


Iml 


1:*S''I ''1.11.1 


[n]; 



E-14 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Backspace 



Line Feed 



Form 
Feed 



Carriage 
Return 

Shift Out 



Shift In 



Escape 



Horizontal 
Tab 



Space 



Move one column left unless at left 
margin in which case no action is taken. 

Move to next print line while 
maintaining current column position. 

Move to first line at top of the next 
page while maintaining current column 
position. 

Move to the left margin on current 
print line. 

Select characters that follow from the 
current secondary font until receipt of a 
Shift In. 

Select characters that follow from the 
current primary font until receipt of a 
Shift Out. 

Indicates the beginning of a special 
control sequence (escape sequence). 

Move to next horizontal tab stop. The 
tab stops are at the left margin and at 
every eight columns to the right of the 
left margin. 

Move one column to the right unless at 
right margin in which case no action is 
taken. 



E-15 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



ROMAN-8 CHARACTER COWVERSiON TABLi 



Graphic 


Hex 


Dec 


Oct 


Description 




00 





000 


NUL (null) 




01 


1 


001 


SOH (start of heading) 




02 


2 


002 


STX (start of text) 




03 


3 


003 


ETX (end of text) 




04 


4 


004 


EOT (end of transmission) 




05 


5 


005 


ENQ (enquiry) 




06 


6 


006 


ACK (acknowledge) 




07 


7 


007 


BEL (bell) 




08 


8 


010 


BS (backspace) 




09 


9 


011 


HT (horizontal tabulation) 




OA 


10 


012 


LF (line feed) 




OB 


11 


013 


VT (vertical tabulation) 




OC 


12 


014 


FF (form feed) 




OD 


13 


015 


CR (carriage return) 




OE 


14 


016 


SO (shift out) 




OF 


15 


017 


SI (shift in) 




10 


16 


020 


DLE (data link escape) 




11 


17 


021 


DC1 (device control 1 or X-ON) 




12 


18 


022 


DC2 (device control 2) 




13 


19 


023 


DC3 (device control 3 or X-OFF) 




14 


20 


024 


DC4 (device control 4) 




15 


21 


025 


NAK (negative acknowledge) 




16 


22 


026 


SYN (synchronous idle) 




17 


23 


027 


b 1 B (end of transmission block) 




18 


24 


030 


CAN (cancel) 




19 


25 


031 


EM (end of medium) 




1A 


26 


032 


SUB (substitute) 




1B 


27 


033 


ESC (escape) 




1C 


28 


034 


FS (file separator) 




1D 


29 


035 


GS (group separator) 




1E 


30 


036 


RS (record separator) 




IF 


31 


037 


US (unit separator) 




20 


32 


040 


SP (space) 


! 


21 


33 


041 


Exclamation point 


H 


22 


34 


042 


Quotation mark 


# 


23 


35 


043 


Number sign 


$ 


24 


36 


044 


Dollar sign 


% 


25 


37 


045 


Percent sign 


& 


26 


38 


046 


Ampersand 




27 


39 


047 


Closing single quote (apostrophe) 



E-16 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Graphic 


Hex 


Dec 


Oct 


Description 


( 


28 


40 


050 


Opening parenthesis 


) 


29 


41 


051 


Closing parenthesis 


* 


2A 


42 


052 


Asterisk 


+ 


2B 


43 


053 


Plus 


1 


2C 


44 


054 


Comma 


- 


2D 


45 


055 


Hyphen 


. 


2E 


46 


056 


Period (point) 


/ 


2F 


47 


057 


Slant (solidus) 





30 


48 


060 


Zero 


1 


31 


49 


061 


One 


2 


32 


50 


062 


Two 


3 


33 


51 


063 


Three 


4 


34 


52 


064 


Four 


5 


35 


53 


065 


Five 


6 


36 


54 


066 


Six 


7 


37 


55 


067 


Seven 


8 


38 


56 


070 


Eight 


9 


39 


57 


071 


Nine 


; 


3A 


58 


072 


Colon 


J 


3B 


59 


073 


Semicolon 


< 


3C 


60 


074 


Less than sign 


= 


3D 


61 


075 


Equals sign 


> 


3E 


62 


076 


Greater than sign 


? 


3F 


63 


077 


Question mark 


@ 


40 


64 


100 


Commercial At 


A 


41 


65 


101 


Uppercase A 


B 


42 


66 


102 


Uppercase B 


C 


43 


67 


103 


Uppercase C 


D 


44 


68 


104 


Uppercase D 


E 


45 


69 


105 


Uppercase E 


F 


46 


70 


106 


Uppercase F 


G 


47 


71 


107 


Uppercase G 


H 


48 


72 


110 


Uppercase H 


1 


49 


73 


111 


Uppercase 1 


J 


4A 


74 


112 


Uppercase J 


K 


4B 


75 


113 


Uppercase K 


L 


4C 


76 


114 


Uppercase L 


M 


4D 


77 


115 


Uppercase M 


N 


4E 


78 


116 


Uppercase N 





4F 


79 


117 


Uppercase 



E-17 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Graphic 


Hex 


■■"■ -l^eC- ■:-^- 


Oct 


' ■■ -■ OescriptiOif ' ' : " 


P 


50 


80 


120 


Uppercase P 


Q 


51 


81 


121 


Uppercase Q 


R 


52 


82 


122 


Uppercase R 


S 


53 


83 


123 


Uppercase S 


T 


54 


84 


124 


Uppercase T 


U 


55 


85 


125 


Uppercase U 


V 


56 


86 


126 


Uppercase V 


w 


57 


87 


127 


Uppercase W 


X 


58 


88 


130 


Uppercase X 


Y 


59 


89 


131 


Uppercase Y 


z 


5A 


90 


132 


Uppercase Z 


I 


5B 


91 


133 


Opening square bracket 


\ 


5C 


92 


134 


Reverse slant 


] 


5D 


93 


135 


Closing bracket 


A 


5E 


94 


136 


Caret (circumflex) 


— 


5F 


95 


137 


Underscore (low line) 


1 


60 


96 


140 


Opening Single Quote 


a 


61 


97 


141 


Lowercase a 


b 


62 


98 


142 


Lowercase b 


c 


63 


99 


143 


Lowercase c 


d 


64 


100 


144 


Lowercase d 


e 


65 


101 


145 


Lowercase e 


f 


66 


102 


146 


Lowercase f 


g 


67 


103 


147 


Lowercase g 


h 


68 


104 


150 


Lowercase h 


i 


69 


105 


151 


Lowercase i 


j 


6A 


106 


152 


Lowercase j 


k 


6B 


107 


153 


Lowercase k 


1 


6C 


108 


154 


Lowercase 1 


m 


6D 


109 


155 


Lowercase m 


n 


6E 


110 


156 


Lowercase n 





6F 


111 


157 


Lowercase o 


P 


70 


112 


160 


Lowercase p 


q 


71 


113 


161 


Lowercase q 


r 


72 


114 


162 


Lowercase r 


s 


73 


115 


163 


Lowercase s 


t 


74 


116 


164 


Lowercase t 


u 


75 


117 


165 


Lowercase u 


V 


76 


118 


166 


Lowercase v 


w 


77 


119 


167 


Lowercase w 



E-18 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Graphic 


Hex 


Dec 


Oct 


Descriptiofi 


X 


78 


120 


170 


Lowercase x 


y 


79 


121 


171 


Lowercase y 


z 


7A 


122 


172 


Lowercase z 


{ 


7B 


123 


173 


Opening brace (curly bracket) 


1 


7C 


124 


174 


Vertical line 


} 


7D 


125 


175 


Closing brace (curly bracket) 




7E 


126 


176 


Approximate (tilde) 


i 


7F 


127 


177 


DEL (delete, rubout) 




80 


128 


200 


-undefined control code- 




81 


129 


201 


-undefined control code- 




82 


130 


202 


-undefined control code- 




83 


131 


203 


-undefined control code- 




84 


132 


204 


-undefined control code- 




85 


133 


205 


-undefined control code- 




86 


134 


206 


-undefined control code- 




87 


135 


207 


-undefined control code- 




88 


136 


210 


-undefined control code- 




89 


137 


211 


-undefined control code- 




8A 


138 


212 


-undefined control code- 




8B 


139 


213 


-undefined control code- 




8C 


140 


214 


-undefined control code- 




8D 


141 


215 


-undefined control code- 




8E 


142 


216 


-undefined control code- 




8F 


143 


217 


-undefined control code- 




90 


144 


220 


-undefined control code- 




91 


145 


221 


-undefined control code- 




92 


146 


222 


-undefined control code- 




93 


147 


223 


-undefined control code- 




94 


148 


224 


-undefined control code- 




95 


149 


225 


-undefined control code- 




96 


150 


226 


-undefined control code- 




97 


151 


227 


-undefined control code- 




98 


152 


230 


-undefined control code- 




99 


153 


231 


-undefined control code- 




9A 


154 


232 


-undefined control code- 




9B 


155 


233 


-undefined control code- 




9C 


156 


234 


-undefined control code- 




9D 


157 


235 


-undefined control code- 




9E 


158 


236 


-undefined control code- 




9F 


159 


237 


-undefined control code- 



E-19 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Graphic 


Hex 


Dec 


Oct 


;-.. ■■■■..; ■D6scr|ption>■^■':.■■■■""^;■ 




AO 


160 


240 


-undefined- 


A 


A1 


161 


241 


Uppercase A grave 


A 


A2 


162 


242 


Uppercase A circumflex 


^ 


A3 


163 


243 


Uppercase E grave 


£ 


A4 


164 


244 


Uppercase E circumflex 


E 


A5 


165 


245 


Uppercase E dieresis 


1 


A6 


166 


246 


Uppercase 1 circumflex 


T 


A7 


167 


247 


Uppercase 1 dieresis 


' 


A8 


168 


250 


Lowercase acute accent 


* 


A9 


169 


251 


Lowercase grave accent 


A 


AA 


170 


252 


Lowercase circumflex accent 


*• 


AB 


171 


253 


Lowercase dieresis accent 


•• 


AC 


172 


254 


Lowercase tilde accent 





AD 


173 


255 


Uppercase U grave 


D 


AE 


174 


256 


Uppercase U circumflex 


£ 


AF 


175 


257 


Italian lira (pound sterling) 


- 


BO 


176 


260 


Overscore (high line) 


y 


B1 


177 


261 


Uppercase Y acute 


y 


B2 


178 


262 


Lowercase y acute 


o 


B3 


179 


263 


Degree 


Q 


B4 


180 


264 


Uppercase C cedilla 


5 


B5 


181 


265 


Lowercase c cedilla 


1^ 


B6 


182 


266 


Uppercase N tilde 


ft 


B7 


183 


267 


Lowercase n tilde 


i 


B8 


184 


270 


Inverted exlamation mark 


6 


B9 


185 


271 


Inverted question mark 


D 


BA 


186 


272 


General currency symbol 


£ 


BB 


187 


273 


Pound sterling sign 


y 


BC 


188 


274 


Yen sign 


§ 


BD 


189 


275 


Section mark 


/ 


BE 


190 


276 


Dutch guilder symbol 


<p 


BF 


191 


277 


Cent sign 


s 


CO 


192 


300 


Lowercase a circumflex 


§ 


C1 


193 


301 


Lowercase e circumflex 


6 


02 


194 


302 


Lowercase o circumflex 





03 


195 


303 


Lowercase u circumflex 


A 


04 


196 


304 


Lowercase a acute 


§ 


05 


197 


305 


Lowercase e acute 


6 


C6 


198 


306 


Lowercase o acute 


u 


07 


199 


307 


Lowercase u acute 



• 



E-20 



# 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Graphic 


Hex 


Dec 


Oct 


Description 


k 


C8 


200 


310 


Lowercase a grave 


6 


C9 


201 


311 


Lowercase e grave 


6 


CA 


202 


312 


Lowercase o grave 


u 


CB 


203 


313 


Lowercase u grave 


a 


CC 


204 


314 


Lowercase a dieresis 


g 


CD 


205 


315 


Lowercase e dieresis 


6 


CE 


206 


316 


Lowercase o dieresis 


u 


OF 


207 


317 


Lowercase u dieresis 


A 


DO 


208 


320 


Uppercase A bolle 


1 


Di 


209 


321 


Lowercase i circumflex 





D2 


210 


322 


Uppercase oblique 


/E 


D3 


211 


323 


Uppercase AE diphthong 


k 


D4 


212 


324 


Lowercase a bolle 


1 


D5 


213 


325 


Lowercase 1 acute 





D6 


214 


326 


Lowercase o oblique 


36 


D7 


215 


327 


Lowercase ae diphthong 


A 


D8 


216 


330 


Uppercase A dieresis 


J 


D9 


217 


331 


Lowercase i grave 





DA 


218 


332 


Uppercase dieresis 


u 


DB 


219 


333 


Uppercase U dieresis 


^ 


DC 


220 


334 


Uppercase E acute 


T 


DD 


221 


335 


Lowercase i dieresis 


6 


DE 


222 


336 


Lowercase es-zet ligature 





DF 


223 


337 


Uppercase circumflex 


A 


EO 


224 


340 


Uppercase A acute 


A 


El 


225 


341 


Uppercase A tilde 


a 


E2 


226 


342 


Lowercase a tilde 


D 


E3 


227 


343 


Uppercase Eth 


d 


E4 


228 


344 


Lowercase eth Icelandic 


1 


E5 


229 


345 


Uppercase 1 acute 


1 


E6 


230 


346 


Uppercase 1 grave 


(!) 


E7 


231 


347 


Uppercase acute 





E8 


232 


350 


Uppercase grave 





E9 


233 


351 


Uppercase tilde 


6 


EA 


234 


352 


Lowercase o tilde 


§ 


EB 


235 


353 


Uppercase S hacek 


s 


EC 


236 


354 


Lowercase s hacek 


U 


ED 


237 


355 


Uppercase U acute 


Y 


EE 


238 


356 


Uppercase Y dieresis 


y 


EF 


239 


357 


Lowercase y dieresis 



E-21 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



• 



Graphic 



Hex 



Dec 



Oct 



Description 



P 
P 

t 

3/4 

1/4 

V2 
a 



FO 
F1 
F2 
F3 
F4 
F5 
F6 
F7 

F8 
F9 
FA 
FB 
FC 
FD 
FE 
FF 



240 
241 
242 
243 
244 
245 
246 
247 

248 
249 
250 
251 
252 
253 
254 
255 



360 
361 
362 
363 
364 
365 
355 
367 

370 
371 
372 
373 
374 
375 
376 
377 



Uppercase Thorn 
Lowercase thorn 
Lowercase Catalan middle dot 
Lowercase mu (micro) 
Pilcrow (paragraph sign) 
Vulgar fraction: three fourths 
Minus sign 
Vulgar fraction: one fourth 

Vulgar fraction: one half 

Female ordinal 

Male ordinal 

Left pointing guillemets (quotes) 

Medium solid box 

Right pointing guillemets (quotes) 

Plus over minus 

--undefined" 



E-22 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



E-23 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



E-24 



F 



F. HP 33449 DISPLAY LANGUAGE MESSAGE TRANSLATIONS 

Localized Display Message Tables F-3 

Display Language Messages F-3 

Printing Menu Messages F-3 

Configuration Menu Messages F-4 

Status Messages F-4 

Attendance Messages F-5 

Error and Service Messages F-5 



F-1 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



F-2 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Localized Display Message Tables 

The following tables contain localized text translations for HP 33449 printer Control Panel display 
messages. HP 33440 display messages are not localized. 



Display Language Messages 



^aglish 


Fieack 


German 


Italian 


Spanieh 


language:=bno 


LANOUE=PR 


SPRAOHBsDBU 


LINGUA=ITA 


LBNGUAJB=BSP 



Printing Menu Messages 



English 


ErencK 


German 


Italian 


Spanish 


OOPIBSs 


COPIBS= 


BXBMPLARB= 


NUM. COPIES 


OOPIASs 


PONT SOURCE= 
[I,L,R,S] 


TYPE POL= 
[I,G,D,TBL} 


SCHRIPTQUBLLBs 
IB,L,R,SJ 


SBRIB GARATTs 
tI,S,D,SPl 


PONT PUENTEs 
|I,Z,D,S1 


PONT NDMBBR= 


N** POMCB= 


S.NUMMER= 


N.CARATTBRB- 


NUM.DB FONTS 


PITOH= 


BSPACBMNT= 


Z.-DICHTBS 


PASSOs 


PITOHs 


PT. SIZES 


OORPSs 


GROBSSB= 


OORPOs 


Tiun£oPtos 


PAPBR= 

{LBTTBR,LBGAI., 
BXBC,A4] 


FORMATS 
jLETTBR,LEGAL, 
BXBC,A4] 


FORMATS 
[LETTBR,LBGAL, 
BXEK3,A4| 


FORMATOs 
[LBTTBRA,LBGALB, 
BXBa,A4] 


PAPBLs 

[LBTTBR,LBGAL, 
EXBO,A4] 


BNVBLOPBs 
[COMIOJMONARC, 
DL,C&] 


BNVBLOP= 
[COMIO^ONARO, 
DL,C$] 


UMSCHLAGs 
[COM10,MONARC, 
DL,C6] 


BUSTAs 

[COMIO^MONARC, 
DL,08l 


SOBRBs 

ICOM10,MONARC, 
DL,06] 


ORIBNTATION=lP,L] 


ORIENTATION=[P,II 


AUSR!OHTUNG={H,Q) 


ORIBNTAMBNTOsIV.O) 


ORIBNTACION=(V,H] 


PORM=imii LINBS 


NB I.IGNBS= 


S.LABNGBS 


RIGHB PAG.S 


FORMATOs 


MANUAL FBBD= 
|ON,OPP] 


ALIM MANUBLLB= 
IO,N] 


MAN. ZUPUHRs 
|EIN,AUS] 


ALIMENT MANs 
fON.OPP) 


ALIM.MANUALS 

[ON,OFFl 


SYMSBTrr 
...,GBRMAN,SPANISH,... 


SYMBOLS 
...,GBRMAN,SP ANISH,... 


Z.SATZS 
...,GBRMAN,SP ANISH,... 


SIMBOLIs 
„.,GBRMAN,SP ANISH,... 


JGO.CARS 

...,ALEMAN,Birpafiol,... 



F-3 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 

Configuration Menu Messages 



English 


French 


German 


Italian 


Spanish 


AUTO CONT= 
[ON.OPFI 


RBPRISB AUTOr: 
IO,N] 


AUTO WEITER= 
[BIN,AUS] 


CONT AUTOM= 
|ON,OPP] 


AUTO CONT= 
[ON.OPP] 


1/0= 

[NONB,SBRIAL, 
PARALLEL.OPTIONALl 


INTP= 

[RIBN.SBRIB, 

PARALLELE,OPTION] 


B/A= 

[KEINB,SBRIELL, 

PARALLEL.OPTIONALl 


1/0= 

(NBSSUNA,SBRIALE, 

PARALLBLA.OPZIONALB 


E/S= 

[NlNGUNO,SBRIB, 

PARALBLO,OPCIONALl 


SBRIAL= 
[RS-333,RS-422] 


SBRIBs 


SERIELL= 


SBRIALB= 


SERIE= 


BAUD RATE= 
(300,600,1300,3400,4SOO, 
t>600,l«300] 


VITESSB= 


BAUDRATE= 


VBL TRASM= 


VELOCIDAD= 


ROBUST XON= 
[ON.OPPI 


ROBUST XON= 
[0,N] 


ROBUST XON= 
[BIN.AUS] 


ROBUST XON= 
ION,OPP] 


ROBUST XON= 
[ON,OPP] 


DTR POLABITY= 
[HI,LO] 


POLARITB DTR= 
[H,B1 


DTR-POLARITY= 
IH.N1 


POLAR DTR= 
[ALTA.BASSA] 


POLARID DTR= 
|ALT,BAJ] 


RBT= 

[DARK,MBDIUM, 
LIGHT,OPP] 


RBT= 

[SOMBRB^OYBN, 
CLAIR,NON] 


RBT= 

lDUNKBL,NORMAL, 
HBLL,AUS] 


RBT= 

[SOURO,NORMALE, 
CHIARO,OPP] 


RET= 

[OSOUROjMEDIO, 
0LAR0,DESAGTIVAD01 


PAGEPROTBOT= 
1 lOPP,LTR,LGL,A4] 


RBSBRV MBM= 
[NON,LTR,LGL,A4] 


KOMPLEX= 
[AUS,LTR,LGL,A4l 


PROTBZ PAG= 
(OPP,LTR,LGL,A4] 


PROTBO.PAG.= 
[OPP,LTR,LGL,A4] 



Status Messages 



English 


EVench 


German 


Italiaii 


Sjpaniah ■ 


00 READY 


00 PRET 


00 BBRBIT 


00 PRONTA 


00 PREPARADO 


03 WARMING UP 


03 PRECHAUPPE 


03 BITTE WARTEN 


02 ATTENDERE 


02 BSPBRAR 


04 SBLP TEST 


04 AUTO-TEST 


04 SELBSTTBST 


04 AUTO TEST 


04 AUTO TEST 


06 SBLP TEST 


06 AUTO-TEST 


06 SELBSTTBST 


06 AUTO TEST 


05 AUTO TEST 


06 PRINTING TEST 


06 IMPR TEST 


06 DRUGKTEST 


06 STAMPA TEST 


06 TEST IMPRES. 


06 PONT PRINTOUT 


06 IMPRIMB POL 


06 SCHRIFTLISTB 


06 STAMPA CARATT 


06 LISTADO FONTS 


or RESET 


OT REINIT 


07 ZURUBOKSBTZBN 


07 RESET 


07 INICIALIZAR 


00 MENU RBSBT 


00 REINIT MENU 


09 AUSGANGSWERTE 


09 RESET MENU 


00 MENU INICIAL 


16 ENGINE TEST 


16 TEST MOTBUR 


15 MOTORTEST 


16 TEST MACOHINA 


16 TEST MAQUINA 


17 MEMORY OONPIG 


17 OONPIG MEM 


17 SPEICHBRKONFG 


17 CONPIG.MEMOR. 


17 CONPIG.MEMOR. 



F-4 



HP 33440/HP 33449 COMBINED SERVICE MANUAL 



Attendance Messages 



English 


IVench 


German 


Italian 


Spanish. 


10 RESET TO SAVE 


10 REINIT CONFIG 


10 ZUR.Z.SICHERN 


10 RESET=SALVA 


10 RESET, GUARDA 


12 PRINTER OPEN 


12 OAPOT OUVERT 


13 OERAET OFFEN 


12 STAMP. APERTA 


12 IMPR. ABIERTA 


13 PAPER JAM 


13 BOURRAQE 


IS PAPIERSTAU 


IS CARTA INCBPP. 


13 ATASCO PAPEL 


14 NO EP CART 


14 CART ENCRE 1 


14 KBINE TONER-K 


14 MANCA CART BP 


14 CART.NO INST. 


16 TONER LOW 


16 MANQUE ENCRB 


16 TONER PEHLT 


16 MANCA TONER 


16 TONER BAJO 


PB CARTRIDGE 


PB ATTN POL CART 


SK ENTPBRNT 


BR CARTUGOIA 


BP OARTUCHO 


PC LEFT 


PC GAUCHE 


SK LINKS SNTP. 


CO SINISTRA^ 


OP IZqUIERDO 


PC RIGHT 


PC DROITE 


SK RECHTS BNTF. 


CO DBSTRA 


CP OERECHO 


PC BOTH 


PCG/D 


SK BBIDB BNTF. 


OCS+D 


CP AMBOS 


PC LEFT NO PONT 


PC GAUCHE ERR 


SK LINK FEHLER 


CC SIN. NO PONT 


CP IZQDO NO PONT 


PC RIGHT NO PONT 


PC DROITE ERR 


SK RECHTS PEHLER 


CC DESTR NO PONT 


CP DRCHO NO PONT 


PC BOTH NO PONT 


PC G/D ERR 


SK BEIDB FBHLER 


CC S+D NO PONT 


CP AMBOS NO FONT 


PP FEED [paper] 


PM ALIM [paper] 


PK M.ZUP. [paper] 


AC MAN. [paper] 


AM PAPEL [paper] 


PB FEED lenvetope] 


EM ALIM [envelope] 


BK M.ZUP. [envelope] 


AB MAN. [envelope] 


AM SOBRB [envelope] 


PC LOAD [paper] 


CP CHRG [paper] 


PK LADEN [paper] 


CA CARIO [paper] 


CP CARGA [paper] 


EG LOAD [envelope] 


CB CHRG [envelope] 


BK LADEN [envelope] 


VB CARICA [envelope] 


AS CARGA [envelope] 


PB TRAY=Ieiivelope] 


AB BAC=[cnve]ope] 


BU KASS=[envelope] 


VB PRONTO=[«nvelopel . 


SP BAHDJ=[envelope] 



Error and Service Messages 



English 


French 


German 


Italiaja 


Spanish 


30 MEM OVERFLOW 


20 MEM SATUREE 


20 SPEICHBR VOLL 


20 SUPBRAM. MEM. 


20 DBSBORD MEM. 


21 PRINT OVERRUN 


21 PAGE TP DENSE 


21 ZUVIELE DATEN 


31 TROPPI DATI 


21 DBSBORD PAG. 


22 I/O CNPIG ERR 


22 ERR CONP INTP 


22 E/A.KONPG-P. 


22 ERR CONP I/O 


22 ERR CONP E/S 


42 OPT INTERFACE 


42 INTERFACE OPT 


42 OPT INTERFACE 


42 INTERPAO. OPZ 


42 INTERPASB OPG 


43 OPT INTERFACE 


43 INTERFACE OPT 


43 OPT INTERFACE 


43 INTBRFAC. OPZ 


43 INTERPASB OPC 


ERROR 


ERRBUR 


PEHLER 


BRRORE 


ERROR 


SERVICE 


MATERIEL 


WARTUNG 


INTBRVENIRB 


SBRVICIO 


68 RBADY/SBRVIGB 


68 PRBT/MATERIBL 


68 BEREIT/WARTNG 


68 PRONTA/INTBRV 


68 PREPDO/SERVIC 



F-5 



A software program or group of programs, for example, Wordstar and Lotus 1-2-3, for solving 
common business tasks. 

Assembly 

A collection of printer components assembled into a single replaceable unit. 

Attendance Message 

A Control Panel display message asking that the user perform a requested task, such as loading 
paper, before printing continues. 

Baud Rate 

The data transfer rate between the computer and the printer. The computer and the printer 
must be configured at the same baud rate. It can be set between 300 and 19,200 baud, 
depending upon the type of computer used. 



A particular collection of symbols with fixed character size and shape. 

Beam Detect Mirror 

Reflects the beginning of each laser beam print line into the Fiber Optics Cable. The DC 
Controller PCA receives the reflected laser beam and translates it into a Beam Detect signal. 

Cold Reset 

Used to return the user default settings for both the Printing and I/O Configuration Menus 
back to the initial factory settings. 



A single part of the printer that does not have any attached parts. 

Configuration 

The process of specifying certain settings to allow the computer and printer to communicate 
properly. For example, interface selection (serial or parallel) is part of printer configuration. 
The printer is configured through the Control Panel. An "MS-DOS" computer is configured 
through MODE commands in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 

Configuration Menu 



One of two Control Panel menus accessed using the [menu] key. The Configuration Menu 
contains printer configuration settings such as communication parameters, Resolution 
Enhancement levels, and memory configuration. 



Glossary-1 



Control Panel 

The main printer access and display panel used to modify the printer's printing and 
configuration information as well as to display printer status. Usually, the computer's software 
application can send signals to modify the printer's printing information (lines-per-page, 
font type used, page orientation, etc.). Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3-2, "Unpacking and 
Installation," for more information. 

Cotton Bond 

A type of paper which includes a percentage of cotton fibers. It is usually used when a 
"high-quality" paper is desired. 

DC Controller PCA 

Synchronizes all printer operations by monitoring and supplying voltages to all 
electro-mechanical assemblies inside the printer. 

Default 

A printer setting used in the absence of a software application selection. 

Dots-per-inch (DPI) 

The number of horizontal and vertical dots produced by a printer inside the area of a square 
inch. The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers are capable of producing a vertical dot every 
l/300th of an inch and a horizontal dot every 1/300 of an inch. 

Downloading 

Refers to the process of transferring fonts or macros stored on disks to the printer's memory. 
These transferred fonts and macros are stored in the printer until it is turned off or they are 
removed by a software printer command. 

Dual I/O Interface 

The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers come with two interface ports, serial and parallel. 
The serial port can be configured as either RS-232 or RS-422. (See Chapter 3, Section 3-2, 
"Unpacking and Installation.") 

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 

Electrical charges generated by friction that are displaced to another object. Electronic 
components can be permanently damaged by Electrostatic Discharge. 

Embedded Printer Commands 

Printer commands written by the user directly into a software file. 

Escape Sequences 

Software commands to the printer. The printer distinguishes these commands from regular 
text by the presence of an ^c> ^ special control code which precedes the character string. 

EF-S Cartridge 

Contains items such as the cleaning blade, primary corona, photosensitive drum, and a supply 
of toner. Because the drum is photosensitive, it must be protected from exposure to light. The 
replaceable cartridge prints an average of 4,000 pages. 

Error Message 

A Control Panel display message that informs the user when the printer stops due to a data or 
print error. 



Glossary-2 



• 



A tray, which can be opened at the rear of the printer, which supports printed pages stacked in 
face-up, reverse order. 

Factoiy Default Settings 

The Control Panel menu settings that are programmed into the printer at the factory. These 
settings are used as defaults unless they are changed by user Control Panel selections or 
overridden by print commands sent through a software application. 



A diagram used to provide detailed sequential direction through a linear process. In Chapter 
7, troubleshooting flowcharts are used to direct the service representative through a series of 
detailed problem solving processes. 



Fonts are collections of characters and symbols derived from a specific typeface. A font is 
described by its symbol set, spacing, pitch, point size, style, stroke weight, and typeface. Fonts 
can refer to the printer's internal fonts or to fonts stored in optional font cartridges or on 
floppy disks. 



A plug-in device containing additional fonts. Font cartridges contain fonts which can 
supplement the printer's internal resident fonts to increase the variety of available typefaces. 



A Font Printout is used to verify all fonts available in the printer (see Chapter 3, Section 3-5). 



Referred to in previous documents as the printer's "front," "display," or "pushbutton" panel, it 
is now referred to as the Control Panel. (The "front cover panel" or simply "front panel" is the 
front portion of the Main Body Covers.) 



The fonts resident in the printer when shipped from the factory. 

Keys 

The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers have eight Control Panel keys used to access specific 
functions of the printer (see Chapter 3). 

Laser Beasn 

Amplified light waves that are concentrated by the Laser PCA to produce an intense beam of 
light which writes on the EP drum to produce an image. 

Laser Printing Process 

The stages of the Laser Printing Process which must each function independently and be 
coordinated with all other printer processes to form an image (see Chapter 5, Section 5-2, 
"Image Formation System"). 

ill 

Menus list items that can be selected from the printer's Control Panel. The printer has 
two menus: the Printing Menu and the Configuration Menu. The Printing Menu lets the 
user select printing defaults such as the number of copies to print and the default font. The 



Glossary-3 



Configuration Menu lets the user select configuration items, such as parallel or serial I/O 
configuration. 

Off Line 

When the printer is off line, it will not accept data from the computer. The printer is taken off 
line by pressing the (on line) key. When the ON LINE indicator is off, the printer is off line. 

On Line 

When the printer is on line, it will accept data from the computer. The printer is on line when 
the ON LINE indicator is on. 

Orientation 

Orientation refers to the direction of print on the page. Printing across the narrower 
dimension of a page is called portrait orientation printing. The word portrait is derived from 
portraits of people which are usually vertical in format. Printing across the wider dimension of 
a page is called landscape orientation printing. The term landscape is derived from pictures of 
the landscape which are usually horizontal in format. 

Output Tray 

Two output trays are available with the HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers: the Face-Up (Rear) 
Output Tray and the Face-Down (Top) Output Tray. 

Page Count 

The HP 33440 and HP 33449 printers keep a record of the number of pages they print. This 
record is called the Page Count. Each time the printer is turned off, the Page Count is rounded 
down to the closest increment of ten. To alter the Page Count, the technician must be in the 
Service Mode. Page Count is displayed as part of the Self-Test Printout. 

Page Protection 

Reserving a block of printer memory to prevent 21 PRINT OVERRUN errors when composing 
very dense or complex graphics and text (see Chapter 3, Section 3-4, "Using the Printing and 
Configuration Menus"). 



A paper jam describes what happens when paper gets stuck somewhere inside the printer's 
paper path. Paper jams can be caused by toner buildup in the Fusing Assembly, faulty 
photosensors, worn printer parts, or poor or improperly handled media (see Chapter 4, Section 
4-5, "Clearing Paper Jams"). 

Paper Path 

The route the paper takes during the printing process. It begins at the paper pick-up area and 
ends when the paper exits the printer at the paper output tray. 

Permanent Soft Fonts 

Soft fonts downloaded into the printer's memory that remain resident there, even if the printer 
is reset, until the printer is powered off or the fonts are deleted by software printer commands. 
(Resetting the printer does not clear a permanent font from memory.) (See downloading.) 

Photosensitive Drum 

The Photosensitive Drum in the EPS Cartridge is sensitive to both light and electrical 
voltages. It is used in the creation and transfer of im^es to the printed page. 



Glossary-4 



A sensor that is activated when its field of vision is blocked. These sensors are used to detect 
the presence of paper inside the printer. 

Pitch 

The number of characters printed per horizontal inch. Pitch applies only to fonts with fixed 
spacing. 

Point Size 

The height of a font. Point size is measured from slightly above the top of uppercase letters to 
slightly below the bottom of lowercase descenders, such as the tail of the letter "y." There are 
72 points per inch. 

Primary Corona 

The Primary Corona, located inside the EP-S Cartridge, is used to neutralize the photosensitive 
drum's surface charge and place a uniform charge back onto the drum. Refer to Chapter 5, 
Section 5-2, "Image Formation System." 



Print density refers to the relative darkness of print on the page. Very dense print appears 
totally black. Less dense print looks lighter and may have solid filled areas that are not totally 
covered. The print density can be adjusted in LaserJet printers (see Chapter 4, Section 4-9, 
"Print Density Adjustment"). 



The print period begins when the DC Controller PCA receives a VDO signal from the 
Interface/Formatter PCA and ends when the last line of print data is transmitted. 

Print Quality 

Print quality refers to the sharpness and clarity of the type or graphic on the printed page. 



One of two menus accessed from the printer Control Panel by pressing the [menu] key. Several 
printing items like the number of copies to print and the number of lines per page are selected 
from this menu. 

Proportional Spacing 

The horizontal spacing between characters based upon the character's relative width, rather 
than a fixed cell size. The v^dth of each character cell varies. 

Kesolution Enhancement (RET) (HP 33449 only) 

An HP 33449-only feature that improves the 300 dpi print quality standard (see Chapter 3, 
Section 3-4, "Using the Printing and Configuration Menus"). 



Robust-Xon is a transmission protocol used in serial communications. When Robust-Xon is 
ON, the printer sends continuous ready messages to the computer, one per second. When 
Robust-Xon is OFF, the printer sends only one ready message. Robust-Xon is recommended. 

Rotating Scanner Mirror 

This mirror, part of the Laser/Scanning Assembly, is used to scribe and reflect the laser beam 
onto the photosensitive drum. 



Glossary-5 



Scalable Type 

Scalable type refers to characters (generated from a specific typeface) that can be scaled to 
virtually any desirable size or pitch. This provides significantly expanded font capabilities with 
only a few typefaces (from which the font shapes are generated). This feature is built into the 
HP 33449. 

Self Test 

Used to verify proper printer operation (see Chapter 3, Section 3-6, "Self Tests"). 

Service Message 

This is a Control Panel display message that informs the user when a printer part fails to 
perform correctly. 

Service Mode 

While in Service Mode, the user can print a Chart A printout, Service Mode Self Test printout, 
and change the Page Count (see Chapter 3, Section 3-7, "Service Mode"). 

Set-Up Strings 

Embedded commands, usually for initializing the printer, that precede any other print data. 

Soft Font 

Soft fonts are fonts created or stored on disks. They can be transferred to the printer's memory 
where they remain available to be used until the printer is turned off. 

Solenoid 

An electrically directed mechanism used to control the movement of gears inside the printer. 

Spacing 

The distance between individual printed characters. All fonts have either fixed or proportional 
spacing. 

Standby Period 

This is the period of time just after power up, after the self test has executed and the Fusing 
Assembly has reached its operating temperature. The printer is READY but has not received 
the first print command (PRNT) from the Interface/Formatter PCA, Note that this is 
characteristic of a READY printer with no Main or Scanner Motor operating. 

Status Message 

Control Panel display messages that keep the user informed of the printer's current operating 
status. 

Stroke Weight 

The thickness of a printed font: for example, light, medium,and bold. 

Style 

The slant of a font: for example, upright (normal text) or italic (slanted text). 

Symbol Set 

A unique grouping of all the available characters in a font. Each symbol set is defined with 
a specific set of applications in mind. For example, the LEGAL symbol set includes special 
characters used in the law profession. 



Glossary-6 



Temporary Font 

A font that resides in printer's memory until the user prints a font list, resets the printer, 
powers the printer off, or clears or replaces it using a software command. Temporary fonts are 
not listed on the font printout hecause they are erased when the font list is generated. 

Test Print 

Used to verify proper operation of the print engine controlled by the DC Controller PCA (see 
Chapter 3, Section 3-6). 

Toner 

Toner is a dry mixture of powdered "ink" capable of being electrically charged and attracted to 
discharged areas on the revolving photosensitive drum in the EP-S Cartridge (see Chapter 5, 
Section 5-2, "Image Formation System"). 

Treatment 

Treatment is the emphasis placed on a font, such as italic or bold. Treatment describes both 
style and stroke weights. 

Typeface 

The design aspect of fonts from which symbol sets are created (see scalable type). 

User Default Settings 

User Default Settings are Printing Menu choices the user has selected through the Control 
Panel. They are set using the Printing Menu (see Chapter 3, Section 3-3. "Using the Control 
Panel"). 

Warm-up Period 

The warm-up period covers the time from switching the printer's power ON until the fusing 
temperature reaches 165" C. 



Glossary-7 



Index 



02 WAEMNG UP (continuous) Message, 7-23 



11 PAPER OUT Message, 7-23 

13 PAPER JAM Message, 4-11, 7-29 

14 NO EP CART Message, 7-44 

16 TONER LOW Message, 4-15, 7-46 



41 ERROR Message, 7-48 

5 

51 ERROR Message, 7-52 

52 ERROR Scanner Malfunction, 7-56 
57- and 19-Tooth Gears, 6-22 



AC Power Functional Check, 7-22 
AC Power Module, 6-20 
Adhesive Labels, 2-11 

Air quality testing, 2-11 
Adjustments 

Print density, 3-19, 4-16 

Resolution Enhancement, 3-17 
Ammonia exposure, 2-3 
Antistatic procedures, 6-5, C-3 
Attendance message troubleshooting, 7-13 
AUTOEXEC.BAT 

Standard Configuration Test, 7-84 

HP 33440, A-14 

HP 33449, B-15 



Background scatter, 7-68 

Beam Detect pulse, 5-8 

Beam-to-Drum Mirror Assembly Functional 

Check, 7-71 
Black pages, 7-60 

Black pages with horizontal white stripes, 7-66 
Blank Display, 7-20 
Bottom Covers removal, 6-53 



Cabling diagrams 

I/O, D-1 

Printer, 7-88 
Capabilities of the HP 33440 and HP 33449 

compared, 1-3 
Cartridges 

EP-S Cartridge, 4-15, 2-4 

Emulation, 1-4, 5-20 

Font, 5-19, 5-20 

Macro, 1-3 
CDRH, see Center for Devices and Radiological 

Health 
Center for Devices and Radiological Health 

(CDRH) regulations, 1-8 
Character voids, 7-67 
Checkpoints, maintenance, 4-4 
Circuit Breaker, 6-20 
Claws, see Deflector Pawls, 6-51 
Cleaning, 4-5, 5-6 

Areas to be cleaned, 4-5 

Beam-To-Drum Mirror, 4-9 

Feed Guide Assembly, 4-7 

Fuser separation pawls, 4-8 

Fusing Assembly, 4-8 

Primary Corona, 4-10 

Registration Assembly, 4-7 

Theory, 5-6 

Toner safety, 4-5 

Transfer Corona Assembly, 4-6 

Transfer Guide, 4-5 
Cleaning brush, 4-10 
Cleaning Pad replacement, 4-14 
Cold Reset Routine, 3-13 
Command language 

HP 33440, 1-3 

HP 33449, 1-4 
Communications Check, 7-84 
Component location and identification, 6-7 
Conditioning, 5-7 
Configuration 

AUTOEXECBAT, 7-84 

Communications Check, 7-84 

HP 33440, A-10-16 

HP 33449, B-11-17 

I/O, 3-4-6 



lndex-1 



Menu, 3-16 

Page Protection, 3-17, 3-20 

Resolution Enhancement, 3-17, 3-19 

Test message, 7-84 
Connector Location Diagrams, 7-88 
Consumables, 4-3, 1-18 

Cleaning Pad, 4-3 

EP-S Cartridge, 4-3 

Feed Roller Assembly, 4-3 

Fusing Assembly, 4-3 

Life expectancy, 4-3 

Service life, 4-3 
Consumables and accessories, 1-18 

Direct Marketing Division (DMK), 1-18 

Ordering, 1-18 
Control Panel 

Blank Display, 7-20 

Indicator lights overview, 1-16 

Overviev^^, 1-15 

Removal, 6-15 
Functional description, 3-8 
Corona effect, 5-7 
Cooling Fan 

Lower, 6-53 

Upper, 6-20 
Cover Latch Assembly, 6-28 
Cover Latch Hooks, 6-28 
Cover Release Button, 6-18 
Covers, miscellaneous, 6-17 

D 

DC Controller PCA, 5-16, 6-55 

DC Controller Signal Listing Table, 7-94 

DC Power Supply Assembly, 6-24 

DC Power Supply Fuse, 6-24 

Date Codes, 3-26-27 

Defect ruler, 7-87 

Deflector Pawls (Claws), 6-51 

Delivery area, 6-49 

Delivery Assembly, 6-50 

Delivery Coupler Assembly, 6-50 

Density adjustment, 3-19 

Density Check, 7-81 

Developer AC Bias Functional Check (DBAC), 

7-75 
Developer DC Bias Functional Check (DBDC), 

7-76 
Developing stage, 5-10 
DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 1-8 
Distorted print, 7-65 
Drum 

Ammonia-based cleaning products to be 
avoided, 4-4 

Cleaning, 4-4 

Light exposure caution, 2-5 



Drum Drive Shaft, 6-22 

Drum Rotation Functional Check, 7-70 

Drum Sensitivity, 5-5 

Drum Sensitivity Switches (SW301 and 

SW302) Functional Check, 7-45 
Dust exposure, 2-3 
Duty cycle, 1-19 



Electrical specifications, 1-6 
Emulation cartridge, 1-4, 5-20 
Envelopes, 2-8 

Background, 4-16 

Cassette size setting, 3-12 

Construction, 2-9 

Face-Up Tray required, 2-8 

Non-standard, 2-9 

Recommendations, 2-8 

Size, 2-9 

Specifications, 2-8 

Types to avoid, 2-9 

Warranty, 2-10 
Environmental specifications, 1-6, 1-18, A-4, 

B-3 
EP-S Cartridge, 4-15 

16 TONER LOW message, 4-15 

Cartridge Guide Functional Check, 7-71 

Cleaning drum, 4-4, 5-6 

Conditioning drum, 5-7 

Density adjustment, 5-10 

Developing stage, 5-10 

Disassembly, caution against, 2-5 

Distributing toner, 4-15 

Expiration date, 2-4 

Handling suggestions, 2-5 

Image formation system, 5-4 

Installation, HP 33440, A-5 

Installation, HP 33449, B-5 

Life and use, 4-15 

RefilUng, caution against, 2-5, 4-15 

Storage after opening packaging, 2-4 

Storage conditions, 2-4 

Storage with packaging intact, 2-4 

Storing and handling, 2-4 

Storing Conditions, 2-4 

Temperature Conditions, 2-4 

Toner, 5-10 

Transfer stage, 5-11 

Vibration or mechanical shock, caution 
against, 2-5 

Writing to drum, 5-8 
EP-S Cartridge Guide Functional Check, 7-71 
Erase Lamp Assembly, 6-48 

Functional Check, 7-78 
Erase Lamp Connector Arm, 6-49 



lndex-2 



Erase Lamps, 5-6 
ERROR 50 condition, 5-12 
Error Messages 
02 Warming Up (continuous), 7-23 

11 Paper Out, 7-23 

12 Printer Open, 7-27 

13 Paper Jam, 7-29 

14 NO EP CART, 7-44 
16 Toner Low, 7-46 

41 Error, 7-48 

50 Service, 7-48 

51 Error, 7-52 

52 Error, 7-56 
Memory board, C-8 
PC/EC Load, 7-23 

Error message troubleshooting, 7-13 
Exit Area Checks, 7-40 
Exit Sensor 

Arm (Flag), 6-42 

Flag, 6-42 

PCA, 6-40 

PCA cover, 6-17 



Faint print, 7-60 

Fan Guide (Serial Number Plate), HP 33449, 

6-14 
Fasteners, types of, 6-6 
Faulty registration, 7-62 
FCC RFI regulations, 1-10 
FCC RFI statement, 1-8 
Features 

Common to Both Printers, 1-3 

HP 33440 only, 1-3 

HP 33449 only, 1-4 
Feed Drive Assembly, 6-23 
Feed Guide Assembly, 6-38 

Grounding spring plate, 6-33, 6-39 
Feed Roller Assembly, 6-31 
Feed Roller Assembly Functional Check, 7-37 
Fiber Optic Cable 

Removal, 6-27 

Replacement, 6-27 
Finnish laser statement, 1-9 
Font Cartridge Interface, 5-19 
Font handling capabilities 

HP 33440, 1-3 

HP 33449, 1-4 
Formatter PCA Block Diagram, 5-19 
Front cover panel replacement 

HP 33449, 6-12 
Front Support Plate, 6-16 
Fuse, DC Power Supply, 6-24 
Fuser Bulb, 7-51 
Fuser Cleaning Pad replacement, 4-14 



Fuser Insulating Cover, 6-49 

Fuser separation pawls, 4-8 

Fusing Assembly, 6-40 

Fusing Assembly area paper jams, 4-12, 7-40 

Fusing Check, 7-83 

Fusing roller, 5-12 

Fusing stage, 5-12 



Gears, 57- and 19-Tooth, 6-22 
German ZZF Declaration, 1-10 
Grounding Block (Transfer Corona), 6-35 
Grounding spring plate (Feed Guide Assem- 
bly), 6-33, 6-39 

H 

Half Self Test, 7-70 

Hardware list, 6-6 

Hardware installation, 3-4 

High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly, 6-26, 
7-72 

Hinge Assemblies, 6-52 

Hinge Bracket Plates, 6-52 

Hook Guides, 6-28 

Humidity, 1-6 

HVPS, see High- Voltage Power Supply Assem- 
bly 

S 

Identification number, 1-5 
Image Development (Half Self Test) Func- 
tional Check, 7-70 
Image Distortion Every 3| Inches (95 mm), 

7-68 
Image formation system 

Cleaning, 5-6 

Conditioning, 5-7 

Density adjustment, 5-10 

Developing stage, 5-10 

Drum Sensitivity, 5-5 

EP-S Cartridge, 5-4 

ERROR 50 condition, 5-12 

Fusing stage, 5-12 

Overview, 5-4 

Paper curl, 5-11 

Photosensitive Drum, 5-5 

Stages, 5-4 

Thermistor, 5-12 

Thermoprotector, 5-12 

Transfer stage, 5-11 

Writing to drum, 5-8 
Image Formation Troubleshooting, 7-57 
Image Quality Check, 7-78 
Image skew, 7-66 



lndex-3 



Improperly sized image, 7-67 
Indicator lights overview, 1-16 
Installation 

Memory, C-1 

Printer, A-1, B-1, 3-3-6 
Interface 

Cabling, 3-4 

Diagrams, D-1 

Optional I/O, 1-3, 3-16 

Parallel, D-3 

Serial, D-4 
Interface/Formatter PCA, 6-54 
Interface PCA Block Diagram, 5-17 
Interface system, 5-17 

Optional cartridges, 5-17 

Proper communication, 5-17 

Resolution Enhancement"^^, 5-17 
Interface troubleshooting overview, 7-84 



K 



Key descriptions, 3-8 



Labels, 2-11 
Laser 

Beam Detect pulse, 5-8 

Beam scanning, 5-8 

Electrostatic image formation, 5-8 

Electrostatic latent image, 5-8 

Operation, 5-8 

Scanner Motor, 5-8 

Writing to drum, 5-8 
Laser Power Checker, 7-54 
Laser power output check, 7-54 
Laser safety, 1-8 
Laser/Scanning Assembly, 6-27 
Laser Shutter Arm, 6-30 
Life expectancy, 4-3 

Cleaning Pad, 4-3 

EP-S Cartridge, 4-3 

Fusing Assembly, 4-3 

Ozone Filter, 4-3 

Paper Feed Roller Assembly, 4-3 

Separation Pad, 4-3 

Transfer Corona Assembly, 4-3 
Limitations to warranty, 1-19 
Lower Cooling Fan, 6-53 



Machine control system, 5-16 

DC Controller PCA, 5-16 
Macro cartridges, 1-3 
Main body covers, 6-11 
HP 33440, 6-11 



HP 33449, 6-12 
Main Drive, 5-15 

Main Motor and Drive Assembly, 6-21 
Main Motor Drive Gears cover, 6-17 
Main Motor (Ml) Functional Check, 7-33 
Maintenance checkpoints, 4-4 

Cleaning, 4-5 

Rubber rollers, 4-4 
Manual feed, 5-14 
Manual Feed Guide, 6-32 
Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) Functional 

Check, 7-25 
Media, see Paper, Labels, or Transpariencies 
Memory board 

Identification, C-4 

Installation, C-3-7 

Installation problems, C-8 

Removal, C-8 

Safety, C-3 

Testing, 3-25, C-7 
Memory capacity 

HP 33440, 1-3 

HP 33449, 1-4 
Menus 

Configuration, 3-16 

Printing, 3-14 
Microswitches 

SW201, 7-26 

SW202, 7-26 

SW203, 7-26 

SW205 (Thermistor bypass), 7-83 

SW301, 7-45 

SW302, 7-45 
Mirror Assembly, 6-47 

Cleaning caution, 6-46 
Mirror Shutter Assembly, 6-46 
Miscellaneous covers, 6-17 
MS-DOS 

Configuration protocol, 3-5 

System configuration, 3-6 



Overhead transparencies, 2-12 

Warranty, 2-11 
Owner's manual, 1-7 
Ozone emission, 1-11 
Ozone Filter 

Complaint conditions, 4-13 

Environmental factors, 4-13 

HP 33440 older models, 4-13 

Service Note 33440-07, 4-13 

Location requirements, 4-13 

Removal, 6-19 

Replacement, 4-13 
Ozone Filter Mount removal, 6-19 



lnclex-4 



p 

Packing material, 1-20, 3-3 
Page count 

Obtaining, 3-32 

Setting, 3-32 
Page Protection (HP 33449 only), 3-20 
Pages per month, limits, 1-19 
Paper, 2-6 

Curl, 5-11 

Letterheads, 2-6 

Multipart forms or carbonless paper, 2-6 

Preprinted, 2-6 

Recommended, 2-6 

Sensor (PS301), 7-24 

Sensor (PS302), 7-24 

Sensor (PS331), 7-31, 7-42 

Specifications, 1-7, 2-6 

Types to avoid, 2-6 

Types to Use, 2-6 
Paper Control PCA, 6-25 
Paper curl troubleshooting, 7-80 
Paper Exit Sensor (PS331) Functional Check, 

7-42 
Paper Feed Area Checks, 7-32 
Paper Feed Mechanical Checks, 7-35 
Paper jams, 4-11 

13 PAPER JAM, 4-11 

Clearing, 4-11 

Detection, 7-31 

Exit area, 4-12 

Paper pickup area, 4-11 

Sensing, 5-14 

Transfer Guide area, 4-12 
Paper jam sensing, 5-14 
Paper Jam Sensor (PS331) Functional Check, 

7-42 
Paper Out Sensor (PS301) Functional Check, 

7-25 
Paper path, 5-13 
Paper pickup and feed system, 5-13 

Main Drive, 5-15 

Manual feed, 5-14 

Paper jam sensing, 5-14 

Paper path, 5-13 

Registration and Feed Rollers, 5-14 
Paper pickup/input tray area, 6-29 
Paper Pickup Roller, 5-13 
Paper Pickup Solenoid, 5-13 
Paper Sensing Arm, 6-29 
Paper Specification Guide, LaserJet series 11 

Printer, 1-7 
Paper Tray Checks, 7-34 
Paper troubleshooting overview, 7-79 
Parallel interface, D-3 



HP 33440, A-11 

HP 33449, B-13 
Parts, 1-17 

Index, 8-51 

List, 8-4 

Support Materials Organization, 1-17 
Parts overview, 1-12 
PC/EC LOAD Message, 7-23 
Photosensitive Drum, 5-5 

Light exposure caution, 2-5 
Physical dimensions, 1-6 
PostScript^ Printer Language, 1-4 
Power distribution overview, 5-21 
Power supply, 1-6 
Pozidrive screwdriver, 6-6 
Pressure Assembly, 6-33 
Preventive maintenance, 4-3 
Primary Corona 

Cleaning, 4-10 
Primary Corona Functional Check, 7-75 
Primary Corona grid, 5-7 
Print 

Density adjustment, 3-19 

Density Check, 7-81 

Resolution Enhancement, 3-19 
Print density dial, 7-54 
Print quality checks, 7-78 
Printer 

CDRH regulations, 1-8 

Command language, HP 33440, 1-3 

Command language, HP 33449, 1-4 

Consumables and accessories, 1-18 

Descriptions, 1-3 

DHHS Radiation Performance Standard, 1-8 

Electrical specifications, 1-6 

Environmental specifications, 1-6 

Features, 1-3 

Features common to both printers, 1-3 

Font handling capabilities, HP 33440, 1-3 

Font handling capabilities, HP 33449, 1-4 

HP 33440, features, 1-3 

HP 33449, features, 1-4 

Identification number, 1-5 

Laser safety, 1-8 

Limited warranty, 1-18 

Memory capacity, HP 33440, 1-3 

Memory capacity, HP 33449, 1-4 

Memory installation (HP 33449), C-3 

Memory installation safety, C-3 

Packing material, 1-20 

Parts, 1-17 

Parts overview, 1-12 

Physical dimensions, 1-6 

Power supply, 1-6 

Regulatory label, 1-5 



index-5 



Related documentation, 1-7 

Repair parts, 1-17 

Resolution, HP 33440, 1-3 

Resolution, HP 33449, 1-4 

Safety information, 1-8 

Serial number, 1-5 

Service, 1-19 

Service approach, 1-17 

Setup, HP 33440, A-1 

Setup, HP 33449, B-1 

U.S. Department of Health and Human 
Services, 1-8 

Warranty, 1-18 
Printer memory 

Board removal, C-8 

Identification, C-4 

Installation, C-5-7 

Installation problems, C-8 

Test, C-7 
Printer Wiring Diagram, 7-92 
Print Quality Check, 7-78 

R 

RAM memory 

Formatter PCA, 5-20 

Installation, C-3, C-5-7 

Installation safety, C-3 

Interface PCA, 5-18 

RAM Size Message, C-7 

Testing, 3-25 
Random horizontal black lines, 7-63 
Registration and Feed Rollers, 5-14 
Registration Assembly, 6-34 
Registration Assembly Functional Check, 7-39 
Registration Check, 7-82 
Registration/Transfer Area Checks, 7-38 
Regulatory label, 1-5 
Related documentation, 1-7 
Related manuals, 1-7 
Removing memory board, C-8 
Repacking the printer, 1-20 
Repair parts, 1-17, 8-3 
Repetitive Defect Ruler, 7-87 
Repetitive defects, 7-65 
Replacement service philosophy, 6-5 
Reset Menu Routine, 3-13 
Resistors 

15-Mohm, 6-37 

1-Kohm, 6-37 

Replacement, 6-37 
Resolution Enhancement and print density, 3- 

19 
Resolution Enhancement'^'^, 5-17 
Resolution, HP 33440, 1-3 
Resolution, HP 33449, 1-4 



Returning printer for service, 1-20 
RFI statement, 1-8 
Right-Hand text missing, 7-62 
RS-422 configuration, 3-5 
Rubber rollers, cleaning, 4-4 



Safety 

Information, 1-8 

Laser, 1-8-10 
Scanner Motor, 5-8 

Scanner Motor Functional Check, 7-56 
Screws required, 6-6 
Self Tests, see also Testing 
Self Tests 

General, 3-25 

Messages, C-7 

Service Mode, 3-30-32 
Sensors 

PS301, 7-24 

PS302, 7-24 

PS331, 7-31, 7-42 
Separation Pad 

Removal, 6-36 

Replacement when worn, 6-36 
Serial interface, D-4-6 
Serial interface setup, 3-4 

HP 33440, A-12 

HP 33449, B-14 
Serial number location, 1-5 
Serial Number Plate, HP 33449, 6-14 
Service 

After warranty, 1-20 

Approach, 1-17 

During warranty, 1-19 

Information, 1-19 

Philosophy, 6-5 
Setup, see Installation and Configuration 
Shielded interface cable, 1-10 
Shipping damage, 3-3 
Signal Listing Table, 7-94 
Signal Timing Chart, 7-100 
Site environmental specifications, 1-18 
Site requirements, 2-3 
Skew Tolerance, 7-83 
SL301 Functional Check, 7-36 
SL302 Functional Check, 7-39 
Slightly faint print, 7-63 
Smeared print/improper fusing, 7-64 
Smudged band with overprint, 7-68 
Software installation, 3-5 
Solenoid (SL301), 7-35 
Solenoid (SL302), 7-38 
Space requirements, 2-3 



lndex-6 



Specifications 

Envelopes, 2-8-10 

Environment, 1-7, 2-4 

EP-S Cartridge, 4-15 

Labels, 2-11-12 

Paper, 2-6-7 

Printer, 1-6-7 

Transpariencies, 2-12 
Speckled print, 7-61 
Static Charge Eliminator, 5-11 
Static Eliminator, 6-51 
Status message troubleshooting, 7-13 
Suede print, 7-64 
Sunlight exposure, 2-3 
Switchboxes, 1-19 

T 

Technical reference manual, 1-7 

Test message for communications check, 7-84 

Testing 

Communication, 7-84 

Continuous, 3-29 

I/O, 7-84 

Interface/Formatter PCA, 3-25 

Memory, 3-25-27, C-7 

Paper movement, 7-11, 12- 

Power-Up, 7-10 
Print engine, 3-29 
Print quality, 7-78 
Service Mode, 3-30, 32- 

Thermistor, 5-12, 6-40 
Thermistor (THl) Functional Check, 7-50 
Thermoprotector, 5-12, 6-40 
Thermoprotector/Fuser Bulb Functional Check, 

7-51 
Timing Diagram, 7-100 
Toner Low Functional Check, 7-46 
Toner safety and care, 1-11 
Tools required, 6-5 
Top Cover Assembly, 6-43 
Removal methods, 6-44 
Transfer area check, 7-38 
Transfer Corona Assembly, 6-37 



Transfer Corona Functional Check, 7-77 
Transfer Corona Grounding Block, 6-35 
Transfer Corona Troubleshooting, 7-77 
Transfer Guide area paper jams,. 4-12 
Transfer Guide Lock, see Registration Assem- 
bly cover, 4-12 
Transfer stage, 5-11 
Tray Size Switches (SW201, SW202, SW203) 

Functional Check, 7-26 
Troubleshooting 
Aids to troubleshooting, 7-87 
Introduction, 7-5 
Message Summary Table, 7-13 
Pre-Troubleshooting Check List, 7-6 
Pre-troubleshooting procedures, 7-6 
Procedure, 7-5 



Unpacking, 3-3 
HP 33440, A-4 
HP 33449, B-4 
Upper and Lower Face-Up (Rear) Output Tray 

Doors, 6-18 
U.S. Department of Health and Human 
Services, 1-8 



Ventilation requirements, 2-3 
Verification procedure, 7-8-12 
Vertical dark streaks, 7-67 
Vertical white streaks, 7-61 
Very faint print, 7-60 



Warranty, 1-18 

Environmental specifications, 1-18 

Exclusions, 1-18, 2-6, 2-9, 2-11, 4-15 

Limitations, 1-19 

Service after, 1-20 

Switchboxes, 1-19 
White or blank pages, 7-69 
White streaks, vertical, 7-61 
Wiring Diagram, 7-92 
Writing to drum, 5-8 



lndex-7